Professional Documents
Culture Documents
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 ELE PDF
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 ELE PDF
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 ELE PDF
Connection Manual
(Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE)
BUS CONNECTION
DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
ETHERNET CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION
CC-Link IE CONNECTION
CC-Link CONNECTION
INVERTER CONNECTION
SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION
CNC CONNECTION
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.
An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a
serious accident.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
● If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT,
communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For bus connection : The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For other than bus connection : The GOT becomes inoperative.
A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the
system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT
communication fault will occur.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
● Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.
An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device
that displays and outputs serious warning.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
A-1
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone
out.
When the GOT backlight goes out, the display section dims, while the input of the touch switch(s)
remains active.
This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to
release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section, which may cause a touch switch to
operate.
Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out.
<When using the GT1655-V, Handy GOT, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, or GT105 >
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, or GT1662>
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears dimmed.
<When using the GT104 >
The monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT103 or GT102 >
The monitor screen appears dimmed.
● The display section of the GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12 or GT1020 are an analog-resistive type
touch panel.
If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around
the center of the touched point, if any, may operate.
Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously.
Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
● When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are
changed, be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
CAUTION
● Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.
Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart.
Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.
● Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver.
Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.
● When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according
to the system configuration.
• When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.
• When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.
Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the
communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18).
The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
● Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
communicate with the GOT.
Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.
A-2
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the GOT to/from the panel.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the communication unit, option function board or multi-color display board onto/from the
GOT.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
● Before mounting an optional function board or Multi-color display board, wear a static discharge wrist
strap to prevent the board from being damaged by static electricity.
CAUTION
● Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in the User's
Manual.
Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.
● When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque
range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the
GOT.
● When loading the communication unit or option unit to the GOT (GT16, GT15), fit it to the extension
interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
● When mounting the multi-color display board onto the GOT (GT15), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
Loose tightening may cause the unit and/or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact.
Overtightening may damage the screws, unit and/or GOT; they might malfunction.
● When mounting the option function board onto the GOT (GT16), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT15), fully connect it to the connector
until you hear a click.
● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT11), fully connect it to the connector.
● When inserting a CF card into the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), push it into the CF card interface of
GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
● When inserting/removing a SD card into/from the GOT(GT14), turn the SD card access switch off in
advance.
Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card.
A-3
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When inserting/removing a CF card into/from the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), turn the CF card access
switch off in advance.
Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card.
● When removing a SD card from the GOT(GT14), make sure to support the SD card by hand, as it
may pop out.
Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT and break.
● When removing a CF card from the GOT, make sure to support the CF card by hand, as it may pop
out.
Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break.
● When installing a USB memory to the GOT(GT16, GT14), make sure to install the USB memory to
the USB interface firmly.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
● Before removing the USB memory from the GOT(GT16, GT14), operate the utility screen for removal.
After the successful completion dialog box is displayed, remove the memory by hand carefully.
Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop, resulting in a damage or failure of the memory.
● For closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover by pushing the mark on the latch
firmly to comply with the protective structure.
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.
CAUTION
● Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT
power supply section by applying Class D Grounding (Class 3 Grounding Method) or higher which is
used exclusively for the GOT.
Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.
● Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.8N•m.
Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal.
● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque.
If any solderless spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes
loose, resulting in failure.
A-4
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal
arrangement of the product.
Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.
● Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.
● Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
● The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.
Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.
● Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
● Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and
terminal screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
● Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the
connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
A-5
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● When power is on, do not touch the terminals.
Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.
● Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all
phases.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
CAUTION
● Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.
● Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.
Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.
● The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental
pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
● When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull the cable portion.
Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable
connection fault.
● Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body, etc.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
A-6
[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. However,
the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use
elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute
the touch panel calibration.
● When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be
activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.
CAUTION
● Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the
user.
Not doing so can cause an injury.
● Before replacing a backlight, allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT
with the backlight replaceable by the user.
Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight.
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate
them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the User's Manual of the GOT to be
used.)
A-7
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
(For details on models subject to restrictions, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.)
● Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be
exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the
User's Manual, as they are precision devices.
Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.
Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.
A-8
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
in advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
A-9
MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS
2.DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700........................................................................... 2 - 8
2.2 MELSEC-L ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 9
2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * ............................................................................................. 2 - 10
2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion ......................................................................................................... 2 - 11
2.5 MELSEC-A .................................................................................................................................... 2 - 12
2.6 MELSEC-FX .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 13
2.7 MELSEC-WS ................................................................................................................................. 2 - 14
A - 10
4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4)
(Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) ..... 4 - 28
4.9 Q Redundant Setting ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 29
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function ................................. 4 - 31
4.10.1 Method for using the station number switching function..................................................... 4 - 31
4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function .................................................................. 4 - 38
5.BUS CONNECTION
5.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 5 - 2
5.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 5
5.2.1 Connecting to QCPU ............................................................................................................ 5 - 5
5.2.2 Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU ...................................................................................... 5 - 9
5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU................................................................................ 5 - 12
5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU .................................................................................................. 5 - 18
5.2.5 Connection to motion controller CPU
(A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3)) ........................................................... 5 - 19
5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU
(A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1))................... 5 - 24
5.3 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 5 - 30
5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 5 - 30
5.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 5 - 30
5.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 34
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS .................................................................................. 5 - 34
5.4.2 Turning the GOT ON .......................................................................................................... 5 - 34
5.4.3 Powering OFF the GOT, reapplying the power (OFF to ON) ............................................. 5 - 35
5.4.4 Reset switch on GOT ......................................................................................................... 5 - 35
5.4.5 Powering OFF or resetting the PLC ................................................................................... 5 - 35
5.4.6 Position of the GOT ............................................................................................................ 5 - 35
5.4.7 When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the communication driver
written ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 35
5.4.8 When designing the system ............................................................................................... 5 - 36
5.4.9 When assigning GOT I/O signals ....................................................................................... 5 - 36
5.4.10 When connecting to a QCPU (Q mode) ............................................................................. 5 - 36
5.4.11 When connecting to a QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type ...................................................... 5 - 37
5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs ........................................................................................ 5 - 38
5.4.13 When using a PLC CPU in the direct mode ....................................................................... 5 - 38
5.4.14 When connecting to a Q4ARCPU redundant system ......................................................... 5 - 39
5.4.15 When monitoring the Q170MCPU ...................................................................................... 5 - 39
5.4.16 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 5 - 39
A - 11
6.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 23
6.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 25
6.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 6 - 25
6.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 6 - 25
6.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 6 - 28
8.ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.1.2 Ethernet module ................................................................................................................... 8 - 6
8.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 7
8.2.1 Connection to Ethernet module ............................................................................................ 8 - 7
8.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module ...................................... 8 - 11
8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F.................................................................................................... 8 - 12
8.2.4 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module ................................... 8 - 13
8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) ............... 8 - 14
8.3 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 8 - 15
8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 8 - 15
8.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 8 - 15
8.3.3 Ethernet setting................................................................................................................... 8 - 17
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting .................................................................................................. 8 - 18
8.4 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 8 - 20
8.4.1 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to-one connection) .................................... 8 - 20
A - 12
8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) ......................................... 8 - 22
8.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet module (Q/L Series)...................................................................... 8 - 24
8.4.4 Connecting to C Controller module .................................................................................... 8 - 27
8.4.5 Connecting to Ethernet module (QnA Series) .................................................................... 8 - 30
8.4.6 Connecting to Ethernet module (A Series) ......................................................................... 8 - 33
8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet module (FX Series) ....................................................................... 8 - 38
8.4.8 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC C70)................................................................................. 8 - 42
8.4.9 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module ................................... 8 - 44
8.4.10 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) ............... 8 - 46
8.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 8 - 49
A - 13
11.CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
11.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 11 - 2
11.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................. 11 - 2
11.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit............................................................ 11 - 6
11.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 11 - 7
11.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ...................................................................................... 11 - 7
11.3 GOT side settings .......................................................................................................................... 11 - 8
11.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 11 - 8
11.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 11 - 8
11.3.3 Routing parameter setting .................................................................................................. 11 - 9
11.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 11 - 10
11.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 11 - 16
A - 14
14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
14.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 14 - 2
14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU ................................................................................................ 14 - 2
14.1.2 CC-Link module/peripheral module .................................................................................... 14 - 5
14.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 14 - 6
14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) .......................................................................................... 14 - 6
14.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ........................................................................................................... 14 - 7
14.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 8
14.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 8
14.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 8
14.4 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 14 - 9
14.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 14 - 9
14.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 14 - 9
14.5 PLC Side Settings........................................................................................................................ 14 - 11
14.5.1 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3 .............................................................................................. 14 - 11
14.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-R2N ................................................................................................. 14 - 12
14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) .................................................................... 14 - 14
14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer ............................................................................. 14 - 14
14.5.5 Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) .......................................... 14 - 15
14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ................................................................................ 14 - 16
14.6 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 14 - 17
A - 15
15.5.12 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 15 - 43
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 15 - 44
15.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 15 - 47
18.CNC CONNECTION
18.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 18 - 2
18.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 18 - 3
18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU ................................................................................................... 18 - 3
18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) .......................................................... 18 - 4
18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)................................................................... 18 - 5
18.2.4 Ethernet connection............................................................................................................ 18 - 6
18.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 18 - 7
18.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 18 - 7
A - 16
18.4 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 18 - 8
18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 18 - 8
18.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 18 - 8
18.4.3 Ethernet setting ................................................................................................................ 18 - 13
18.4.4 Switch setting ................................................................................................................... 18 - 13
18.5 CNC Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 18 - 16
18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection ............................................................................................ 18 - 16
18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection ................................................................................................... 18 - 19
18.5.3 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 18 - 21
18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set.................................................................................................... 18 - 23
18.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 18 - 23
18.7.1 Direct connection to CPU ................................................................................................. 18 - 23
18.7.2 MELSECNET/10 connection ............................................................................................ 18 - 23
18.7.3 CC-Link (ID) connection ................................................................................................... 18 - 23
18.7.4 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 18 - 24
A - 17
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
21.MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
21.1 What is Multi-channel Function?.................................................................................................... 21 - 2
21.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 21 - 4
21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection ................................................................................ 21 - 4
21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection .............................................................................................. 21 - 6
21.3 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 21 - 7
21.3.1 Basics of interface selection ............................................................................................... 21 - 7
21.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing ................................................................ 21 - 12
21.3.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) ............................ 21 - 13
21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)................................................. 21 - 23
21.3.5 Setting for communication settings................................................................................... 21 - 35
21.3.6 Items to be checked before starting drawing .................................................................... 21 - 39
21.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 21 - 41
21.4.1 Precautions for hardware.................................................................................................. 21 - 41
21.4.2 Precautions for use........................................................................................................... 21 - 41
21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet ........................................................................................... 21 - 42
FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
22.FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
22.1 FA Transparent Function ............................................................................................................... 22 - 2
22.2 Compatible Software ..................................................................................................................... 22 - 2
22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored.......................................................................................... 22 - 11
22.4 System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 22 - 26
22.4.1 GX Developer, GX Works2, GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging
Configuration Tool, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module ................................ 22 - 26
22.4.2 PX Developer, GX Configurator........................................................................................ 22 - 29
22.4.3 MT Developer, MT Works2............................................................................................... 22 - 30
22.4.4 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 ................................................................................. 22 - 32
22.4.5 FR Configurator ................................................................................................................ 22 - 34
22.4.6 FX Configurator-FP, FX Configurator-EN ......................................................................... 22 - 34
22.4.7 RT ToolBox2..................................................................................................................... 22 - 35
22.4.8 NC Configurator................................................................................................................ 22 - 35
22.5 GOT Side Settings ....................................................................................................................... 22 - 36
22.5.1 Setting communication interface....................................................................................... 22 - 36
22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting ................................................................................................. 22 - 39
22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer, PX Developer, GX Configurator..................... 22 - 39
22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 ................................................................................................. 22 - 43
22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer ............................................................................................ 22 - 52
22.6.4 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP ........................................................................... 22 - 53
22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer ....................................................................................... 22 - 54
22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2 ........................................................................................... 22 - 55
22.6.7 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator..................................................... 22 - 58
22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2................................................... 22 - 58
22.6.9 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator ................................................................. 22 - 58
22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP ............................................................................ 22 - 59
22.6.11 Accessing by FX Configurator-EN .................................................................................... 22 - 60
A - 18
22.6.12 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 .............................................................................................. 22 - 61
22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator ......................................................................................... 22 - 63
22.6.14 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator .................................................................................. 22 - 63
22.6.15 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration Tool.............................................................. 22 - 64
22.6.16 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module ........................................ 22 - 64
22.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 22 - 67
22.7.1 Precautions common to each software ............................................................................ 22 - 67
22.7.2 When using GX Developer, GX Woks2 ............................................................................ 22 - 69
22.7.3 When using MT Developer, MT Works2........................................................................... 22 - 71
22.7.4 When using MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 ............................................................. 22 - 72
22.7.5 When using FR Configurator ............................................................................................ 22 - 72
INDEX
REVISIONS
A - 19
MANUALS
SH-080866ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB9)
SH-080867ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC1)
SH-080861ENG
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB1)
SH-080862ENG
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB2)
Connection manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
SH-080898ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC9)
SH-080869ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC3)
SH-080870ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC4)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT SH-080871ENG
Stored in CD-ROM
Works3 (1D7MC5)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (α2 Connection) for GT Works3 (ELE) Stored in CD-ROM JY997D39201
SH-080858ENG
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA7)
SH-080859ENG
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA8)
SH-080863ENG
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB3)
GT SoftGOT1000 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
SH-080966ENG
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 (ELE) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD7)
A - 20
GT16 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
SH-080928ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD3)
SH-080929ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD4)
JY997D41201
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D41202
(09R821)
GT15 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
SH-080528ENG
GT15 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7M23)
GT14 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
JY997D44801
GT14 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(09R823)
GT12 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
SH-080977ENG
GT12 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7ME1)
GT11 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
JY997D17501
GT11 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(09R815)
JY997D20101
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D20102
(09R817)
GT10 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
JY997D24701
GT10 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(09R819)
A - 21
QUICK REFERENCE
Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT • GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Products 1) for GT Works3
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT
Products 2) for GT Works3
A - 22
Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
options) of each GOT • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT15 User's Manual
• GT14 User's Manual
• GT12 User's Manual
Installing the GOT • GT11 User's Manual
• GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT10 User's Manual
Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
A - 23
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT1675M-S Abbrevuation GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
GT1675 GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD
GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD
GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD
GT1665
GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD
GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD
GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT
GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD
GT1585
GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
A - 24
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT16
Handy GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD
Handy GOT
GOT1000
GOT GT11 GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
Series
Handy
GOT GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
Communication unit
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL,
Bus connection unit
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 Conversion Unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication
GT15-J71GP23-SX
unit
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23+GT15-75IF900 set
*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13+GT15-75IF900 set
*3 A8GT-J61BT13+GT15-75IF900 set
Option unit
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB unit
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD
*1 GT15-CFEX+GT15-CFEXIF+GT15-C08CF set
A - 25
Option
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
CF card GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC,
Memory card GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC
SD card L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,
Option function board
GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,
GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB, GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW,
GT16-70PSCB, GT16-70PSGB, GT16-70PSCW, GT16-70PSGW,
For GT16 GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW,
GT16-50PSCB, GT16-50PSGB, GT16-50PSCW, GT16-50PSGW,
GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012,
GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC
GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW,
GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW,
For GT15 GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,
Protective Sheet
GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,
GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW
For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW
For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB
For GT11 GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW, GT11H-50PSC
GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW, GT10-50PSGW,
GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB, GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW,
For GT10
GT10-30PSCB, GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW,
GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW
GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO,
Protective cover for oil
GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN,
Backlight GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
A - 26
Software
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ
MELSOFT Navigator
Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
GX Simulator
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW DNC-MTW2-E)
MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type general start-up support software for motion controller Q series
A - 27
Others
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation
AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)
OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation
SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI FA Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation
FUJI SYS Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.
YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE FANUC Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation
LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA
SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG
SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG
RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation
MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.
α2 Abbreviation of α2 Simple Application Controller
PLC Generic term for programmable logic controllers of each manufacturer
Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controllers of each manufacturer
Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controllers of each manufacturer
Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation
Controller Generic term for controllers of each manufacturer
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Abbreviation of TrueType font (Other than the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3) and
Windows® font
OpenType font available for Windows®
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
Intelligent function module
to the base unit
MODBUS®/RTU Generic term for protocols designed to use MODBUS® protocol messages on a serial communication
MODBUS®/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS® protocol messages on a TCP/IP network
A - 28
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
Symbols
Following symbols are used in this manual.
Shows GT16.
Shows GT15.
Shows GT14.
Shows GT12.
Shows GT11.
Shows GT10.
1. 2. 3. …
Indicates the operation steps.
2.
[ ]: Indicates the setting items displayed on
the software and GOT screen.
3.
4.
Refers to the information required.
Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.
A - 29
About system configuration
The following describes the system configuration of each connection included in this manual.
RS-422 connector
QCPU GOT
conversion Cable
A representative example
Connection cable of the system configuration
is described with an
illustration.
(When connecting the PLC [MELSEC-Q] and GT16, with RS-422 cable)
1) Connect the RS-422 conversion cable [FA-CNV2402CBL] to the [MELSEC-Q].
Indicates the commercially available 2) Connect the option [GT16-C02R4-9S] to [GT16].
cable models that can be used. 3) Connect [MELSEQ-Q] and [GT16] with the connection cable [GT01-C30R4-25P].
Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.
A - 30
1
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
DEVICE RANGE
1.
FOR MONITORING 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17 4
HOW TO MONITOR
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . 1 - 26
REDUNTANT
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment . . . . . . 1 - 34
SYSTEM
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 39
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
1-1
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR
MONITORING
The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections.
Attaching the communication unit and 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
connecting the cable 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
Each chapter System Configuration
Mount the optional equipment and prepare/connect the
Each chapter Connection Diagram
connection cable according to the connection type.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment.
When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication
driver before writing to GOT.
Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3.
2
POINT
FOR MONITORING
green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When changing in GT
ACCESS RANGE
Designer3, refer to the following (3).
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
(2) When setting the communication interface for the connection with the iQ Works untargeted equipment, set
[Set with GT Designer3] to the channel connected at [Input Detailed Configuration Information] in MELSOFT
Navigator and make the settings at [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3.
(3) To make the items reflected from MELSOFT Navigator editable on GT Designer3, select the [Option] menu
and put a check mark at [Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator] in the [iQ Works 6
Interaction] tab.
CONNECTION TO
However, when the items set in MELSOFT Navigator are edited in GT Designer3, the interaction function with
MELSOFT Navigator is unavailable due to a mismatch with the system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator.
Eliminate mismatches using the parameter verification function etc. before using the interaction function of
DIRECT
MELSOFT Navigator.
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Setting
2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.
POINT
Channel No.2 to No.4
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function.
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
Mitsubishi Products 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
PROCEDURES FOR
This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F.
PREPARATORY
When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*].
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Item Description
Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4.
5
BUS CONNECTION
Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following.
Type
(2)Setting [Controller Type]
Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected.For the settings, refer to the following.
I/F
(3)Setting [I/F]
Driver
Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. 6
(1)Setting [Driver]
CONNECTION TO
Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver.
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
DIRECT
CPU
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Q172CPU CRnD-700
Q173CPU Q00JCPU
Q172CPUN Q00CPU
Q173CPUN Q01CPU
Q172HCPU Q02CPU
Q173HCPU Q02HCPU
Q00UJCPU Q06HCPU
Q00UCPU Q12HCPU
Q01UCPU Q25HCPU
Q02UCPU Q02PHCPU
Q03UDCPU Q06PHCPU
For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2 Q12PHCPU
Q04UDHCPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Q06UDHCPU Q25PHCPU
Q10UDHCPU *1
For GT14, GT11 Q12PRHCPU
Q20UDHCPU QS001CPU*3
For GT10*1
For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2 Q26UDHCPU Q2ACPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 Q03UDECPU Q2ACPU-S1
Q04UDEHCPU Q3ACPU
For GT14, GT11*1
Q06UDEHCPU Q4ACPU
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
Q10UDEHCPU Q4ARCPU
PROCEDURES FOR
A2UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
PREPARATORY
A2UCPU-S1
A171SCPU
MONITORING
A3UCPU
A171SCPU-S3
A4UCPU
A171SCPU-S3N
A2ACPU
MELSEC-A A171SHCPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
2
A2ACPU-S1
DEVICE RANGE
A2ACPUP21-S1
A173UHCPU
A2ACPUR21-S1
A173UHCPU-S1
A3ACPU
FX0
A3ACPUP21
FX0S
A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
FX0N
FX1
3
A1NCPUP21
FOR MONITORING
FX2
ACCESS RANGE
A1NCPUR21
FX2C
A2NCPU
FX1S
A2NCPUP21
MELSEC-FX FX1N
A2NCPUR21
FX2N
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
FX1NC
FX2NC
4
A2NCPUR21-S1
FX3G
HOW TO MONITOR
A3NCPU
FX3GC
REDUNTANT
A3NCPUP21
FX3U
A3NCPUR21
SYSTEM
FX3UC
A2USCPU
MELSEC-A FX3U
A2USCPU-S1 MELSEC-FX(Ethernet)
FX3UC
A2USHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0 5
A1SCPU MELSEC-WS
WS0-CPU1
BUS CONNECTION
A1SCPUC24-R2
MELSERVO-J2M-P8A MELSERVO-J2M-P8A
A1SHCPU
MELSERVO-J2M-*DU MELSERVO-J2M-*DU
A2SCPU
MELSERVO-J2S-*A MELSERVO-J2S-*A
A2SCPU-S1
MELSERVO-J2S-*CP MELSERVO-J2S-*CP
A2SHCPU
MELSERVO-J2S-*CL MELSERVO-J2S-*CL
A2SHCPU-S1
MELSERVO-J3-*A MELSERVO-J3-*A 6
A1SJCPU
MELSERVO-J3-*T MELSERVO-J3-*T
CONNECTION TO
A1SJCPU-S3
MELSERVO-J4-*A MELSERVO-J4-*A
A1SJHCPU
FREQROL-S500
A0J2HCPU
FREQROL-S500E
DIRECT
A0J2HCPUP21
FREQROL-E500
CPU
A0J2HCPUR21
FREQROL-F500
A0J2HCPU-DC24
FREQROL-F500L 7
A2CCPU
FREQROL-F500J
A2CCPUP21
COMPUTER LINK
FREQROL-A500
CONNECTION
A2CCPUR21
FREQROL 500/700 Series FREQROL-A500L
A2CCPUC24
FREQROL-V500
A2CCPUC24-PRF
FREQROL-V500L
A2CJCPU-S3
FREQROL-E700
A1FXCPU
A273UCPU
FREQROL-F700 8
FREQROL-F700P
A273UHCPU
FREQROL-F700PJ
A273UHCPU-S3
CONNECTION
FREQROL-A700
ETHERNET
(a) GT16
Extension interface 1
Standard interface 3
2nd stage (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)
Standard interface 4
(Ethernet interface built in the GOT)
1st stage
Standard interface 1
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)
(b) GT15
Extension interface 1
Extension interface 2
3rd stage
2nd stage
1st stage
Standard interface 1
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Standard interface 2
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Standard interface 4
(GOT built-in Ethernet interface)
[Under view]
(d) GT12
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Standard interface 2
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)
• GT11 Bus
Standard interface 1
(GOT built-in Bus interface)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)
ACCESS RANGE
Standard interface 2
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)
(g) GT104
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
Standard interface 1 Standard interface 3
(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)
Standard interface 2
6
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)
CONNECTION TO
(h) GT1020, GT1030
DIRECT
CPU
Standard interface 1
(GOT built-in RS-422 interface)
7
Standard interface 2
or (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) (GOT built-in RS-232 interface)
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Setting
2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
POINT
When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator.
When setting [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator, all of I/F
Communication Setting are grayout and cannot be edited.Set these items at [Controller Setting] or [Peripheral Unit
Setting].
PROCEDURES FOR
The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Description
REDUNTANT
Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces.
SYSTEM
GT16, GT14, GT12: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3, Standard I/F-4
Standard I/F setting
GT15, GT1030, GT1020: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2
GT11, GT105 , GT104 : Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3
BUS CONNECTION
0: Not used
1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel
setting)
8: Used for fingerprint authentication, barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation
CH No.
(serial), report function (when using the serial printer), hard copy function (when using the serial printer) or GOT
(extended computer)
9: Used for connecting Host (PC) or Host (modem)
*: Used for remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, gateway function or MES
6
interface function
CONNECTION TO
Multi: Used for Ethernet multiple connection
Driver
None Host (Personal computer) Each communication driver for connected devices
CPU
Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver.
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. 7
To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232, mark the [Enable the 5V power supply] checkbox.
COMPUTER LINK
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Extension I/F setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT.
Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver.
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
POINT
Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting]
(1) Channel No.2 to No.4
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function.
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
Mitsubishi Products 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
(2) Drivers
The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F].
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
[Setting the communication] section in each chapter
(3) [RS232 Setting] of GT14
Do not use [RS232 Setting] of GT14 for other than the 5V power feeding to the RS-232/485 signal conversion
adaptor.
For details, refer to the following manual.
GT14 User's Manual 7.11 RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adaptor
1.1.3 Precautions
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT.
For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
1. Select [Communication] [Write to GOT…] from the menu.
3. The [GOT Write] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box. 6
Select the [Project data, OS] radio button of the Write Data.
CONNECTION TO
4. Check-mark a desired standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, extended function OS, and
Communication Settings and click the [GOT Write] button. DIRECT
POINT
CPU
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Confirm if the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings are
properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3.
For reading from the GOT, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
3. The [GOT Read] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box.
Select the [Drive information] radio button of the Read Data.
5. Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type.
For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual.
DEVICE RANGE
GT15-QBUS
Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model
FOR MONITORING
Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model
ACCESS RANGE
Bus connection unit
For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series)
GT15-75QBUSL
Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model
GT15-75ABUSL
For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)
Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model
4
HOW TO MONITOR
For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)
GT15-75ABUS2L
Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model
REDUNTANT
GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male))
SYSTEM
Serial communication module GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female))
BUS CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit
Communication module GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit
CONNECTION TO
CC-Link IE Field Network
GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network (1000BASE-T) unit
communication unit
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
(A8GT-61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set)
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 1 ch, playing movie
GT16M-V4
Video input unit For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch
GT15V-75V4
GT16M-R2
RGB input unit For analog RGB input signal 2 ch
GT15V-75R1
GT16M-V4R1
Video/RGB input unit For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch, for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch
GT15V-75V4R1
GT16M-ROUT
RGB output unit For analog RGB output signal 1 ch
GT15V-75ROUT
CF card unit GT15-CFCD For CF card installation (B drive) For GOT back face CF card eject
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET For CF card installation (B drive) For control panel front face CF card eject
For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Negative Common
GT15-DIOR
Input/Source Type Output)
External I/O unit
For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Positive Common
GT15-DIO
Input/Sink Type Output)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05
RS-485 terminal block RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-485 (Terminal block)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10
conversion modules Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20
Connector conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S RS-422/485 (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-422/485 (Terminal block)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit.
MONITORING
For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are
using.
For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used.
2
Calculating consumed current
DEVICE RANGE
bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply.
For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller,
refer to the following tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GOT.
(1) Current supply capacity of the GOT
3
Current supply Current supply
GOT type capacity GOT type capacity
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(A) (A)
HOW TO MONITOR
GT1665M-S 2.4 GT1575-V, GT1572-VN 2.2
REDUNTANT
GT1665M-V 2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 2.2
SYSTEM
GT1662-VN 2.4 GT1555-V 1.3
BUS CONNECTION
Consumed Consumed
Module type current Module type current
(A) (A)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS,
0.275*1 GT16M-R2 0*1
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
0.12 GT15V-75R1 0.2*1
6
GT15-RS2-9P 0.29 GT16M-V4R1 0.12*1
CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS4-9S 0.33 GT15V-75V4R1 0.2*1
For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.
ETHERNET
*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current.
(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A)
2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104
Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT.
(b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function)
and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S
1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774
Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Cautions for using GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-ABUS2
The stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of GT15-QBUS2 or GT15-ABUS2 are
recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. 2
DEVICE RANGE
3rd stage of extend Recognized as the 2nd stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2
Recognized as the
2nd stage of extend Recognized as the 1st stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2
3
Recognized as the 1st stage
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
of extend interface 1
GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2
Relay connector
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(2) Standard size bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS and GT15-ABUS)
A bus connection unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface. 5
BUS CONNECTION
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Example: When installing a MELSECNET/H communication unit and a serial communication unit
POINT
Precautions for using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit,
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)
The installed stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of MELSECNET/H communication
unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link
communication unit are recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
Relay connector
PROCEDURES FOR
Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Install a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link communication
unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) at the 1st stage of the extension interface.
These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
For GT16 and the GT155 , the MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z)
and the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) are not applicable. 2
Example: When installing a MELSECNET/10 communication unit and a serial communication unit
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
When using an Ethernet communication unit 4
An Ethernet communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
HOW TO MONITOR
For GT16, the Ethernet communication unit is not applicable.
Use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Example: When installing an Ethernet communication unit and a serial communication unit
BUS CONNECTION
communication unit
CONNECTION TO
When using a serial communication unit
A serial communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
DIRECT
CPU
Serial Serial
communication communication
unit unit 7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
When using the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or
multimedia unit
Install the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit at the 1st stage
of the extension interface.These units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
When any of these units is used, the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the
extension interface.
Communication unit Model
Example: When installing a video input unit and a MELSECNET/H communication unit
MELSECNET/H Video/RGB
communication unit
input unit
Video/RGB MELSECNET/H
communication unit
input unit
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Precautions for video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, and multimedia unit
When a communication unit is installed on any of the units above, the stage number of the communication unit
recognized by the GOT varies according to the extension interface.
For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. 2
DEVICE RANGE
extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage
of extension interface 2
FOR MONITORING
Recognized as the 1st stage of
ACCESS RANGE
extension interface 1
Video/RGB input unit
Relay connector
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
When using CF card unit or CF card extension unit
Install the CF card unit or CF card extension unit on the extension interface at the last. 5
The following figures show how to install the CF card unit.
BUS CONNECTION
CF card unit
Serial communication
unit
Serial communication
unit
CF card unit
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
RS-232 interface
Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side
connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
(1) Connector specifications
Hardware
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
version*1
GT16 ― 17LE-23090-27(D4C )
GT1595-X ― DDK Ltd.
17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1585V-S ―
B or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1585-STBA
C
GT1585-STBD ― 17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.
GT1575V-S ―
B or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-STBA
C
17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.
GT1575-STBD ―
D or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-VTBA 9-pin D-sub (male)
E
inch screw fixed type
GT1575-VTBD ―
GT1575-VN ―
GT1572-VN ―
GT1565-V ― 17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1562-VN ―
DDK Ltd.
GT155 ―
GT14 ―
GT12 ―
GT115 -Q ―
GT105 -Q ― 17LE-23090-27(D3CC)
GT104 -Q ―
*1 For the procedure to check the GT15 hardware version, refer to the GT15 User's Manual.
*2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020.
6 9
9-pin D-sub (male) 9-pin terminal block
PROCEDURES FOR
Use the following as the RS-422 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT.
PREPARATORY
For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
MONITORING
(1) Connector model
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
GT14
GT12
9-pin D-sub (female)
GT115 -Q M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
GT105 -Q
fixed type 3
FOR MONITORING
GT104 -Q
ACCESS RANGE
GT1030, GT1020 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.
HOW TO MONITOR
*2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020.
REDUNTANT
(2) Connector pin arrangement
SYSTEM
GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 ,
GT16 GT1030, GT1020
GT104 , GT01-RS4-M
BUS CONNECTION
8 14 5 1
1 7
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
9 6
SG
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
GT14 ―
GT12 ―
GT1155-QTBD C or later
9-pin D-sub (female)
GT1155-QSBD M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
F or later
fixed type
GT1150-QLBD
GT105 -Q C or later
GT104 -Q A or later
GT1030 B or later
9-pin terminal block*3 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc
GT1020 E or later
*1 For the checking procedure of the hardware version, refer to the User's Manual.
*2 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector.
To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required.
For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd..
*3 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020.
GOT main part connector GOT main part connector See from the back of a
see from the front see from the front GOT main part
8 14 5 1
1 7
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
9 6
SG
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable.
MONITORING
CAUTION
Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly. 2
Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions.
External conductor
Outer sheath Insulating material
Nut Washer Gasket
3
FOR MONITORING
Plug shell
ACCESS RANGE
Internal conductor
Clamp Contact
HOW TO MONITOR
Cut this portion of the outer sheath 3C-2V 15mm
REDUNTANT
2.
SYSTEM
Pass the nut, washer, gasket, and clamp through the coaxial
Clamp
cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor.
5
Nut
BUS CONNECTION
Washer
Gasket
Insulating material 3. Cut the external conductor, insulting material, and internal
Internal conductor conductor with the dimensions as shown below.
Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same
dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed
C down to the clamp. 6
B Clamp and external
B C
CONNECTION TO
Cable in use
conductor
3C-2V 6mm 3mm
CPU
8
Precautions for soldering
Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact.
CONNECTION
• Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section.
ETHERNET
• Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other.
• Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed.
The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side.
When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following.
ON
ON
1 2 SW1 1 2 SW1
1
1
100 OHM ON ON Enable ON ON
2
2
Disable OFF OFF Disable OFF OFF
SW1
1
2
ON
GT14
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
PREPARATORY
resistor setting switch. resistor setting switch.
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Terminating resistor selector switch
HOW TO MONITOR
resistor setting switch.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
Terminating resistor selector switch
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
GT1020
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type.
MONITORING
POINT
Enable the 5V power supply
Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal
2
conversion adaptor.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch
5
O
N
BUS CONNECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
Switch No.
Setting item Set value
1 2 3 4 5 6
CONNECTION TO
110 - - ON OFF OFF OFF
POINT
7
COMPUTER LINK
For details on the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter, refer to the following manual.
GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adapter User's Manual
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
2.
PROCEDURES FOR
3. The [Communication Settings] appears.
PREPARATORY
3. 4.
MONITORING
4. Verify that the communication driver name to
be used is displayed in the communication
interface box to be used.
2
5. When the communication driver name is not
DEVICE RANGE
procedure again.
1.1Setting the Communication Interface
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
2.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
1. 1.
MONITORING
After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu]
[Comm. Setting] from the Utility.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
3. The [Standard I/F] appears.
HOW TO MONITOR
3. 4.
REDUNTANT
4. Verify that the communication driver name to
SYSTEM
be used is displayed in the box for the
communication interface to be used.
BUS CONNECTION
procedure again.
1.1Setting the Communication Interface
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
1.6.1 Check on the GOT
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(When using GT15)
Error code Communication Channel No.
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
Error message Time of occurrence
(Displayed only for errors)
CONNECTION TO
HINT DIRECT
With the advanced alarm popup display function, alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether
an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not (regardless of the display screen).
Since comments can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all.
7
For details of the advanced popup display, refer to the following manual.
COMPUTER LINK
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function.
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection.
Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu.
• For GT16, GT12
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Self check] [I/O check].
• For GT15, GT14, GT11
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Debug & self check] [Self check] [I/O check].
For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual:
GT User's Manual
1.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT.
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. 2
Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor].
DEVICE RANGE
GT10 User's Manual
(Operation of communication monitoring function screen)
Main Menu
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Touch [Comm. Setting] Touch [ ]
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
Communication settings
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
Touch [Comm. Monitor]
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
POINT
Communication unit for displaying network module status
Use the GT15-J71LP23-25 or GT15-J71BR13 for displaying the network module status on the GOT.
The GOT cannot display the network module status with GT15-75J71LP23-Z or GT15-75J71BR13-Z.
PROCEDURES FOR
The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Controller Network can be confirmed by the utility
screen of the GOT.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
GT15 User's Manual
2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
(3) For CC-Link IE Field Network system
REDUNTANT
The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Field Network can be confirmed by the utility
SYSTEM
screen of the GOT.
For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
5
GT15 User's Manual
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
POINT
CC-Link communication unit when network module status display is made
When displaying the network module status, use the CC-Link communication unit of MODEL GT15-J61BT13.
For the MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z, the network module status cannot be displayed.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
Confirming the communication state on Windows®, GT Designer3
FOR MONITORING
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18
ACCESS RANGE
Request timed out.
(2) When using the [PING Test] of GT Designer3
Select [Communication] [Communication configuration] [Ethernet] and [Connection Test] to display
[PING Test].
4
1. Specify the [GOT IP Address] of the [PING
HOW TO MONITOR
Test] and click the [PING Test] button.
REDUNTANT
2.
SYSTEM
The [Test Result] is displayed after the [PING
Test] is finished.
BUS CONNECTION
2.
Click! CONNECTION TO
1.
DIRECT
CPU
POINT
8
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC.
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT.
DEVICE RANGE
(1) No. of faulty stations
(a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection)
Total No. of the faulty CPU is stored.
Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
3
GS230 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
FOR MONITORING
(b) Ethernet multiple connection
ACCESS RANGE
Total No. of the faulty connected equipment is stored.
Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
Ch2 GS300 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
Ch3 GS320 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations 4
Ch4 GS340 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
POINT
SYSTEM
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display, check [mask processing] with data operation tab as the following.
For the data operation, refer to the following manual.
5
BUS CONNECTION
GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
Set [mask processing] to the upper eight bits (b8
COMPUTER LINK
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
GS231 bit 0
GS231 bit 1
GS231 bit 2
GS231 bit 3
PLC No.
Device
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113
PROCEDURES FOR
The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup.
If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Device
Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239)
GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No. (1 to 64)
2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mode) only)
Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer, check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not.
For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
(1) Check the Module Name, I/O Address and Implementation Position. (The display example is based on GX
Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Check if the optical fiber cable is connected correctly in [Loop test] of GX Developer. 2
For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
Use [CC IE Control diagnostics…] of GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link.
For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
(a) Check the [Select station network device status display] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
2
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC IE Control diagnostics…] [CC IE Control Network Diagnostics]
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
(3) For CC-Link system
Use [Monitoring other station] of the GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link.
BUS CONNECTION
For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N
(a) Check the [Status] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
6
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC-Link / CC-Link LT diagnostics] Monitoring other station
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
Checking the wiring state of the optical fiber cable (For CC-Link IE Controller Network only)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
Checking the wiring state of the CC-Link dedicated cable (For CC-Link system only)
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Check if the CC-Link dedicated cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link system.
REDUNTANT
Perform the line test from the master station of the CC-Link System to check the wiring state of the CC-Link
dedicated cable.
SYSTEM
For the line testing method, refer to the following manuals.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61QBT11, A1SJ61QBT11
5
BUS CONNECTION
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
DEVICE RANGE
2.
3
2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 . . . . . . . 2 - 8
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
2.2 MELSEC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 11
4
2.5 MELSEC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
HOW TO MONITOR
2.6 MELSEC-FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
REDUNTANT
2.7 MELSEC-WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
2-1
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
The device ranges that can be set for the Mitsubishi PLCs are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may
not be monitored.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
(For MELSEC-FX)
SYSTEM
Item Description
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of word device.
When setting buffer memory (BM) and (G), set the buffer memory address in the space for the device number.
5
Reading the device comment data created by GX Developer and confirming the device
BUS CONNECTION
comment/device name are available during device setting.
For details on the procedure to refer to the device comment, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
CONNECTION TO
function
Set when the buffer memory (G) is selected.
module
Unit No. Set the head I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.
Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit head I/O number.
DIRECT
Set the mask type for monitoring or writing only specified bits of the buffer memory.
Mask type
MELSEC-
FX buffer
(4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX)
7
Set for using the buffer memory of MELSEC-FX series.
memory
Set the module No. of the special function unit or special function block to monitor or write.
Unit No.
COMPUTER LINK
Information Displays the device type and its setting range selected in [Device].
Set the station number of the controller to be monitored.
Set the CPU No. of the controller.
CPU No.
(1) Setting of the CPU No.
8
Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller.
Network
Select this for monitoring other controllers.
After selecting the item, set the station number and network number of the controller to be
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Other monitored.
NW No.: Set the network No.
Station No.: Set the station No.
• Bus connection
• Computer link connection
• MELSECNET connection Control CPU
• Ethernet connection
• CC-Link connection Device number
Head I/O number of buffer memory
(2) When monitoring link relay (B) and link register (W) Device name
assigned in link parameter and network parameter. CPU No. 1 to 4
Set the device link relay (B) and link register (W)
running cyclic communication as [Host]. (For device G and CPU No. 0)
If it is set as [Other] in the network setting, the cyclic
transmission is changed to the transient transmission
regardless of the network type, resulting in delay of the
object display.
(3) Setting the device by inputting directly from the
keyboard
When setting the device by inputting directly from the
keyboard, set the items as follows. Device number
(For devices except BM and G) Device name
Unit No.
Bit condition
Device number
Device name
CPU No.
PLC station number
N/W No.
Device number
Channel No.
Device name
Unit No.
CPU No. 1 to 4
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the item for monitoring or writing only the specified
Monitor and write only b4 to b7 of the buffer
bits of the buffer memory.
PREPARATORY
memory.
MONITORING
Example:
The monitor value is 0002H when monitoring
HINT BM0=4321H as mask type 2.
Mask type
The mask type is effective when using for the buffer
BM0 4 3 2 1 H
2
memories divided per 4 bits, such as an analog input
DEVICE RANGE
(a) Mask type 0 BM0=0010H when writing input value 4321H to
Monitor and write the buffer memory value directly. BM0=0000H as mask type 2.
Input value 4 3 2 1 H
(b) Mask type 1
• (For 16 bits)
3
BM0 0 0 0 0 H
Monitor and write only b0 to b3 of the buffer (Before writing)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
memory.
Example: BM0
(After writing) 0 0 1 0 H
The monitor value is 0001H when monitoring
BM=4321H as mask type 1. • (For 32 bits)
BM0 4 3 2 1 H Monitor and write only b4 to b7 and b20 to 23 of
the buffer memory.
Example:
4
Monitor value 0 0 0 1 H The monitor value is 00060002H when monitoring
HOW TO MONITOR
BM0=87654321H as mask type 2.
BM0=0001H when writing input value 4321H to
REDUNTANT
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
BM0=0000H as mask type 1.
SYSTEM
Input value 4 3 2 1 H
Monitor value 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 2 H
BM0
(Before writing)
0 0 0 0 H 5
BM0=00500010H when writing input value
BUS CONNECTION
BM0
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 2.
(After writing) 0 0 0 1 H
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
• (For 32 bits)
BM0
Monitor and write only b0 to b3 and b16 to 19 of (Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
the buffer memory.
Example:
The monitor value is 00050001H when monitoring
BM0
(After writing) 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 H 6
BM0=87654321H as mask type 1.
CONNECTION TO
(d) Mask type 3
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H • (For 16 bits)
Monitor and write only b8 to b11 of the buffer
DIRECT
Example:
The monitor value is 0003H when monitoring
BM0=00050001H when writing input value BM0=4321H as mask type 3. 7
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 1. BM0 4 3 2 1 H
COMPUTER LINK
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
CONNECTION
Monitor value 0 0 0 3 H
BM0
(Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
BM0=0100H when writing input value 4321H to
BM0
BM0=0000H as mask type 3.
(After writing) 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 H
8
Input value 4 3 2 1 H
BM0
CONNECTION
(Before writing)
0 0 0 0 H
ETHERNET
BM0 0 1 0 0 H
(After writing)
BM0=1000H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=00650021H when writing input value
BM0=0000H as mask type 4. 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 5.
Input value 4 3 2 1 H Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
BM0 0 0 0 0 H BM0
(Before writing) (Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
BM0 1 0 0 0 H BM0
(After writing) (After writing) 0 0 6 5 0 0 2 1 H
PROCEDURES FOR
the buffer memory.
PREPARATORY
Example:
MONITORING
The monitor value is 00870043H when monitoring
BM0=87654321H as mask type 6.
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
2
Monitor value 0 0 8 7 0 0 4 3 H
BM0
(Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H 3
FOR MONITORING
BM0
ACCESS RANGE
(After writing) 6 5 0 0 2 1 0 0 H
HOW TO MONITOR
of the module No., refer to the following.
User's Manual (Hardware) of MELSEC-FX
REDUNTANT
(a) Direct specification
SYSTEM
Specify the module No. (No.0 to No.7) of the
special function unit or special function block
directly, to monitor or write when setting the
devices. 5
(b) Indirect specification*1
BUS CONNECTION
Specify the module No. of the special function unit
or special function block indirectly, to monitor or
write when setting the devices, by using the 16-bit
GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on
GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25
corresponding to the module No. will be the 6
module No. of the special function unit or special
CONNECTION TO
function block.
Compatible
Module No. Setting range
DIRECT
device
CPU
100 GD10 0 to 7
7
101 GD11 For the setting other than the above,
error (dedicated device is out of range)
: :
will occur.
114 GD24 If a non-existent module No. is set, a
COMPUTER LINK
115 GD25
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal (Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767
Specified bit of the (BM)*5
following word devices Buffer memory
(Except Timer, Counter, (Intelligent function module)
Word device bit ― G0 to G65535
Retentive timer, Index
(G)*4*5
register and Buffer
memory) Ww*8*9 Ww0 to Ww1FFF
Wr*8*9 Wr0 to Wr1FFF
Multiple CPU high speed
U3E010000 to U3E024335
transmission memory (U3E0)
Multiple CPU high speed Hexadecimal
U3E110000 to U3E124335
transmission memory (U3E1)
Multiple CPU high speed
U3E210000 to U3E224335
transmission memory (U3E2)
Multiple CPU high speed
U3E310000 to U3E324335
transmission memory (U3E3)
Motion device (#) #0 to #12287 Decimal
Converting the above bit
devices into words
Bit device word*8*12 ―
(Except Timer, Counter
and Retentive timer)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The device ranges that can be set when selecting
*1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing
[MELSEC-L] as the controller type are as follows. multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use
the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of
Device No.
Device name Setting range GX Developer.
representation Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
Input (X)
Output (Y)
X0
Y0
to
to
X3FFF
Y3FFF
Hexadecimal
*2 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET
instruction. 2
*3 Available for file register of block No. of file name switched
with the QDRSET instruction.
DEVICE RANGE
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal *5 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 to GOT can be specified.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in
Link relay (B)*4 B0 to BEFFF Hexadecimal the target intelligent function module.
*6 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-L system.
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed. (The data
Timer*6
register (D) can be used for D32768 or later.)
Coil (TC)
Contact (CT)
TC0
CT0
to
to
TC32767
CT32767
*7
*8
This is not supported by GT10.
This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop
3
Counter*6
Bit device
FOR MONITORING
Decimal *9 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
ACCESS RANGE
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
timer*6 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S8191
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal
Specified bit of the 4
following word devices
HOW TO MONITOR
(Except Timer, Counter,
Word device bit ―
Retentive timer, Index
register and Buffer
REDUNTANT
memory)
SYSTEM
Data register (D)*4*6 D0 to D421887
Decimal
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047
Link register (W)*4 W0 to W66FFF Hexadecimal
5
Timer (current value) (TN)*6 TN0 to TN32767
BUS CONNECTION
Counter (current value)
CN0 to CN32767
(CN)*6 Decimal
Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767
(current value) (SN)*6
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FFF Hexadecimal
File register (R)*1*2
Extension file register
R0 to R32767
6
Word device
ZR0 to ZR393215
(ZR)*1*3*4
CONNECTION TO
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z19
Buffer memory Decimal
(Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767
DIRECT
(BM)*5
CPU
Buffer memory
(Intelligent function module)
(G)*4*5
G0 to G65535
7
Ww*7*8 Ww0 to Ww1FFF
COMPUTER LINK
Hexadecimal
*7*8 Wr0 to Wr1FFF
CONNECTION
Wr
Converting the above bit
*7*9
devices into words
Bit device word ―
(Except Timer contact
and Counter contact)
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(ER)*1*10*11
Extension file register
ZR0 to ZR1042431
(ZR)*1*3*4*10*11
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15 Decimal
Buffer memory
(Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767
(BM)*5*10*11
Buffer memory
(Intelligent function module) G0 to G65535
(G)*4*5*10*11
Ww*10*11 Ww0 to Ww1FFF
Hexadecimal
*10*11 Wr0 to Wr1FFF
Wr
Converting the above bit
devices into words
Bit device word*6*10 ―
(Except Timer, Counter
and Retentive timer)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The device ranges that can be set when selecting
(When using the QCPU)
[MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion]*13 as the controller type are * For details of *1 to *6, refer to 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS,
as follows. MELDAS C6 *.
*7 This is not supported by GT10.
Device No. *8 This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop
Device name Setting range
representation connection.
2
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF (When using the Q Motion)
Hexadecimal *9 When setting special internal relay M9000 to M9255, use SM
DEVICE RANGE
Internal relay (M)*12 M0 to M32767 the device number (0 to 255).
*10 The setting range is D9000 to D9255 when setting the
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal
special data register.
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 *11 D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are out of the valid
setting range.
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal
(When using the QCPU/Q Motion)
Timer*12
Contact (TT)
Coil (TC)
TT0
TC0
to
to
TT32767
TC32767
*12 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q
Motion system.
3
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed.
FOR MONITORING
Counter*12 *13 For GT10, the controller type is [MELSEC-Q(Multi)].
Bit device
ACCESS RANGE
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767
Decimal
Special relay (SM)*9 SM0 to SM2047
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
timer*12 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal 4
Specified bit of the
HOW TO MONITOR
following word devices
(Except Timer, Counter,
Word device bit ―
REDUNTANT
Retentive timer, Index
register and Buffer
SYSTEM
memory)
Data register (D)*10*11*12 D0 to D32767
Decimal
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047 5
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal
BUS CONNECTION
Timer (current value) (TN)*12 TN0 to TN32767
Counter (current value)
CN0 to CN32767
(CN)*12 Decimal
Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767
(current value) (SN)*12
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal
File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767
6
Extension Block 0 to 255
CONNECTION TO
file register
Device R0 to R32767
(ER)*1*7*8
Word device
ZR0 to ZR1042431
(ZR)*1*3*4*7*8
CPU
Buffer memory
(Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767
7
*5*7*8
(BM)
COMPUTER LINK
Buffer memory
CONNECTION
Bit device
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF Hexadecimal
Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN32767 File register (R) R0 to R8191 Decimal
Counter (current value) Decimal Index (Z) Z0 to Z6
CN0 to CN32767
(CN) register*1 (V) V0 to V6
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal *2 A0 to A1
Accumulator (A)
File register (R) R0 to R32767 Converting the above bit
Extension Block 1 to 255 devices into words
Bit device word*3*4*5 ―
file register (Except Timer and
Device ER0 to ER32767
Word device
(ER) *1 Counter)
Decimal
Index (Z) Z0 to Z15 *1 In the computer link connection, writing to the index register
(e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input function) is
register*2 (V) V0 to V6 not available.
Accumulator (A) A0 to A1 *2 With the computer link connection, the GOT cannot read/
write data from/to the accumulator.
Buffer memory *3 This is not supported by GT10.
(Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767 Decimal *4 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
(BM)*3 *5 If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word
device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in multiples
Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF of 16.
Hexadecimal Example: M9000, M9016, M9240
Wr Wr0 to Wr7FF
Converting the above bit
devices into words
Bit device word*4*5 ―
(Except Timer and
Counter)
*1 In the computer link connection, the bit specification writing
of the word device to the ER29-0 (block 29 of the extension
file register) or later of A3ACPU, A3UCPU, or A4UCPU is
not available.
When the bit specification writing of the word device is
required, use the range of block No. 0 to 28.
*2 In the computer link connection, writing to the index register
(e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input function) is
not available.
*3 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected
to GOT can be specified.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in
the target intelligent function module.
*4 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
*5 If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word
device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in multiples
of 16.
Example: M9000, M9016, M9240
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The device ranges that can be set when selecting If using the 16 bit specification for a buffer
[MELSEC-FX] as the controller type are as follows. memory of 32 bit data, monitoring and writing
may not be executed normally.
Device No. For the data size of each buffer memory, refer to
Device name Setting range
representation
the following.
Input relay (X) X0 to X377
Octal User's Manual of the special block or special 2
Output relay (Y) Y0 to Y377
module
DEVICE RANGE
Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8511 special module by interrupt processing of the
Bit device
FOR MONITORING
and Counter (set value)) When monitoring or changing settings by any
ACCESS RANGE
Data register (D) D0 to D0999 online equipment is required, set a keyword
File register (D) D1000 to D7999 referring to the following.
Special data register (D) D8000 to D8511 (a) When setting the keyword only
Timer (current value) (T) T0 to T511 Select a protection level by the initial letter of
Counter (current value) the keyword.
C0 to C255
(C) All operation protect: Set a keyword with the
initial letter "A", "D" to "F", or "0" to "9".
4
Timer (set value) (TS)*3*5 TS0 to TS511
Incorrect write/read protect: Set a keyword
Word device
HOW TO MONITOR
Counter (set value)
CS0 to CS255 with the initial letter "B".
(CS)*4*5 Decimal
Incorrect write protect: Set a keyword with the
REDUNTANT
Extension register (R) R0 to R32767
initial letter "C".
SYSTEM
Index register (V) V0 to V7
(b) When setting the keyword and 2nd keyword
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z7
Select a protection level by [Registration
Buffer memory (BM)*7 BM0 to BM32767
condition].
Converting the above bit
(3) Monitoring availability at each keyword protection
5
devices into words
Bit device word*2*6 level
BUS CONNECTION
(Except Timer contact
and Counter contact) The following shows the device monitoring
availability at each keyword protection level.
*1 When executing the touch switch function set during the bit
specification of the word device, do not write any data to the When registering the
When registering the Keyword
word device through the sequence program. keyword and 2nd
keyword only not
*2 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16. keyword
registered
*3 Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed. Item Incorrect
All Incorrect All online Read/ or
*4 For CS0 to CS199, only 16-bit (1-word) designation is
allowed. operation
protect
write/
read
write
protect
operation write
protect protect
Write protection
protect cancelled 6
For CS200 to CS255, only 32-bit (2-word) designation is protect
allowed. Monitoring
CONNECTION TO
*5 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device devices
designation mode.
T, C set
In addition, setting values of the timer and counter, which are
value
not used for the program, cannot be monitored. If monitoring
DIRECT
and file
is executed, a reading error occurs. *1 *1 *1
register
*6 This is not supported by GT10.
CPU
*7 Can be used only for special blocks or special units Changing (D1000
devices and the
compatible with FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC.
(Except FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD, and FX2N-2DA)
following)
Other
7
than
above
COMPUTER LINK
POINT
CONNECTION
(1) Precautions when using the buffer memory (4) Difference between all online operations
• When the power supply of the special block or prohibition and all operations prohibition
special module is turned off, the contents of the When specifying all online operations prohibition,
buffer memory are initialized, except for some displaying devices and inputting data with 8
keeping areas. programming tools or GOT are all prohibited.
• When the buffer memory is monitored by the When all operations are prohibited, displaying
GOT, the PLC scan time may increase instantly. devices and inputting data with the GOT are
CONNECTION
• Use the 16 bit specification for the buffer enabled while all operations using programming
ETHERNET
Decimal [ ].Q
Word device
W
(0-49(Dec)): Word number
Device Bit position(0 to 7) Word virtualization of D GOT independent device
name W
Byte number(0 to 3) device (Not available)
W0= (D1(Upper bits),
• EFI input(EI) D0(Lower bits))
LD RS232 data
LD
(0-3): Byte number (Safety controller to RS232)
LW
Device Byte number(0 to 3) (0-1): Word number
name Word virtualization of LD GOT independent device
Device number(1 to 3) LW
device (Not available)
EFI number(1 to 2) LW0= (LD1(Upper bits),
LD0(Lower bits))
• EFI output(EQ)
*1 When the mapping position is changed by the MELSEC-WS
engineering software, a mismatch occurs between virtual
devices on GOT and MELSEC-WS mapping devices.
When mapping is changed, use D devices or LD devices.
PROCEDURES FOR
+0 EQ10 EQ11 EQ12
device values are as follows.
PREPARATORY
+16 Fixed to 0
(a) Input(I)
MONITORING
: Fixed to 0
+240
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15
+256 EQ20 EQ21 EQ22 Device range error
+0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I1.8
+272 Device range error
+16 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I2.8
+32
+48
I3.1
I4.1
I3.2
I4.2
I3.3
I4.3
I3.4
I4.4
I3.5
I4.5
I3.6
I4.6
I3.7
I4.7
I3.8
I4.8
2
+64 I5.1 I5.2 I5.3 I5.4 I5.5 I5.6 I5.7 I5.8
DEVICE RANGE
+96 I7.1 I7.2 I7.3 I7.4 I7.5 I7.6 I7.7 I7.8 (OFF)
FOR MONITORING
(b) Output(Q)
ACCESS RANGE
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15
+0 Q1.1 Q1.2 Q1.3 Q1.4 Q1.5 Q1.6 Q1.7 Q1.8
+16 Q2.1 Q2.2 Q2.3 Q2.4 Q2.5 Q2.6 Q2.7 Q2.8
+32 Q3.1 Q3.2 Q3.3 Q3.4 Q3.5 Q3.6 Q3.7 Q3.8
+48
+64
Q4.1
Q5.1
Q4.2
Q5.2
Q4.3
Q5.3
Q4.4
Q5.4
Q4.5
Q5.5
Q4.6
Q5.6
Q4.7
Q5.7
Q4.8
Q5.8
4
+80 Q6.1 Q6.2 Q6.3 Q6.4 Q6.5 Q6.6 Q6.7 Q6.8
HOW TO MONITOR
Fixed to 0
+96 Q7.1 Q7.2 Q7.3 Q7.4 Q7.5 Q7.6 Q7.7 Q7.8 (OFF)
REDUNTANT
+112 Q8.1 Q8.2 Q8.3 Q8.4 Q8.5 Q8.6 Q8.7 Q8.8
+128 Q9.1 Q9.2 Q9.3 Q9.4 Q9.5 Q9.6 Q9.7 Q9.8
SYSTEM
+144 Q10.1 Q10.2 Q10.3 Q10.4 Q10.5 Q10.6 Q10.7 Q10.8
+160 Q11.1 Q11.2 Q11.3 Q11.4 Q11.5 Q11.6 Q11.7 Q11.8
+176 Q12.1 Q12.2 Q12.3 Q12.4 Q12.5 Q12.6 Q12.7 Q12.8
+192 Device range error 5
(c) Logic result(LQ)
BUS CONNECTION
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
+0 LQ0.0 LQ0.1 LQ0.2 LQ0.3 LQ0.4 LQ0.5 LQ0.6 LQ0.7
+8 LQ1.0 LQ1.1 LQ1.2 LQ1.3 LQ1.4 LQ1.5 LQ1.6 LQ1.7
+16 LQ2.0 LQ2.1 LQ2.2 LQ2.3 LQ2.4 LQ2.5 LQ2.6 LQ2.7
+24 LQ3.0 LQ3.1 LQ3.2 LQ3.3 LQ3.4 LQ3.5 LQ3.6 LQ3.7
+32 Device range error
6
(d) Logic input(LI)
CONNECTION TO
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
+0 LI0.0 LI0.1 LI0.2 LI0.3 LI0.4 LI0.5 LI0.6 LI0.7
+8 LI1.0 LI1.1 LI1.2 LI1.3 LI1.4 LI1.5 LI1.6 LI1.7
DIRECT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
DEVICE RANGE
3.
3
3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems
FOR MONITORING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
ACCESS RANGE
3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13
3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14 4
3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for
HOW TO MONITOR
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 17
REDUNTANT
3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU . . .3 - 18
SYSTEM
3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 19 5
3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network
BUS CONNECTION
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
3-1
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING
Bus connection
(1) When connecting to multiple CPU system
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the Control station
network.
GOT
*1
Normal Normal
station station
Normal
station
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal Control station
stations on other networks. *1
(For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the GOT Control
station
routing parameter)
Normal Normal Normal
When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the station station station
GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-
Normal Normal
Link IE controller network. station station
• When connecting to the multiple CPU system, the GOT can Control station
monitor CPU No.1 to No.4.
GOT Control
station
Normal
station
Normal station
• Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not
allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1
to 2)
• The motion controller CPU (Q Series) at other stations cannot be monitored.
*1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network
respectively.
PROCEDURES FOR
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the *1
Control
network.
PREPARATORY
GOT station
MONITORING
*1
Normal Normal
station station
Normal
station
2
DEVICE RANGE
Control Control
stations on other networks. GOT
station station
(For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the Normal Normal Normal
routing parameter) station station station
When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the Normal Normal
GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-
Link IE controller network.
station station
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• When connected to a relay station and the data link system is included,
the master station and local stations can be monitored. GOT
• When connected to a relay station, it is not necessary to designate the Control Control
station
data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] station
for the PLC CPU of the connected station. (Even if designated, the Normal
4
Normal station
parameter is ignored) station M station Normal
station
HOW TO MONITOR
L station L station
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
• Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not
allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.
5
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1
BUS CONNECTION
to 2)
*1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network
respectively.
CONNECTION TO
When the PLC CPU on the control station is the QCPU (Q mode) or station
QnACPU, the GOT cannot monitor devices other than B and W assigned
Normal Normal
for the network parameter. GOT station station
DIRECT
Normal
• The GOT cannot monitor any stations on the other networks. station
7
Control Control
station station
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Normal
Normal station Normal
station M station
station
L station L station
*1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network
respectively.
PROCEDURES FOR
connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
Precautions for cyclic transmission
When transmitting cyclic transmission with a GOT, even if link device X and/or Y are assigned to a GOT when 2
setting the network parameter for the control station, the GOT cannot access the host station.
DEVICE RANGE
• The GOT is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the
network.
When the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No. 1 to
CPU No. 4 by specifying CPU No.
3
• When monitoring other networks, a CPU on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Controller Network, or CC-Link field network is accessible via the PLC CPU.
However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks.
On the Ethernet network, only QCPU (Q mode) and QnACPU can be accessed.
• When monitoring other networks in MELSECNET/10 connection, install the MELSECNET/H communication
unit on the GOT.
• To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. 4
For routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals.
HOW TO MONITOR
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
REDUNTANT
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
SYSTEM
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
5
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
BUS CONNECTION
Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (MELSECNET/H network system, MELSECNET/10 network
system)
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (When connecting to the CC-Link IE Controller Network) 6
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
CONNECTION TO
Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (When connecting to the CC-Link IE Field Network)
DIRECT
• If devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) are
monitored, monitoring may not be available depending on the PLC CPU of the network system to be monitored. 7
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 5:
COMPUTER LINK
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Monitoring devices of other networks (Bus connection, CPU direct connection, computer link
connection)
• Be sure to designate the routing parameter to the PLC CPU of the connected station.
• If another network is monitored, the display speed of object etc. will be significantly reduced.
PROCEDURES FOR
Example 1: When using bus connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Control station Control station
AnU QnA
(1-1) (2-1)
2
AnU
DEVICE RANGE
(1-2) (2-4)
(2-2)
AnA AnN
(1-3) (2-3)
3
• Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks
FOR MONITORING
Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.
ACCESS RANGE
(1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host
station.
(2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station
No.).
Station to be accessed Network No.1 Network No.2
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Station AnU (1-1) QnA (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4)
connected to GOT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
AnU (1-1)
Host ── Other (1-3) Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4)
QnA (1-2)
Other (1-1) Host ── Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4) 5
BUS CONNECTION
AnA (1-3)
Other (0-0) ── Host ── ── ── ── ──
(1-4)
AnU
(2-2) Other (1-1) ── ── Host ── Host ── Other (2-4)
QnA (2-1)
Other (1-1) Other (1-2) ── Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
6
AnN (2-3)
── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
CONNECTION TO
AnU (2-4)
Other (1-1) ── ── Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── Host
DIRECT
CPU
Host
Other (Network No. - Station number)
POINT
8
Monitoring link device B or W
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when
CONNECTION
QnA AnU
(1-1) (2-1)
AnU
Network No.1 QnA Network No.2
(2-4)
(1-3)
(2-2)
(M) AnU
AnA
(2-3)
(1-2)
Data link
system
QnA AnA
(L1) (L2)
• Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks
Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.
(1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host
station.
(2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station
No.).
Station to be Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system
accessed
QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2)
Station
connected to GOT
Other (1-3)
QnA (1-1)
Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) or ── ──
Other (2-2)
AnA (1-2)
── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ──
(1-3)
QnA (2-2)
Other
Other (1-1) ── Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host ──
(M) (0-2)*1
AnU (2-1)
── ── ── Host ── Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-3)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Host Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-4)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Other (2-3) Host ── ── ──
QnA (L1)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
AnA (L2)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host
*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.
POINT
Monitoring link device B or W
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when
designating devices allocated to another station.
Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
PROCEDURES FOR
Control station Control station
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
AnU QnA
(1-1) (2-1)
2
AnU
Q(Q mode) AnU
Network No.1 (1-4) Network No.2
(1-2) (2-4)
(2-2)
• Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks
Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. 3
FOR MONITORING
(1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host
ACCESS RANGE
station.
(2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station
No.).
Station to be accessed Network No.1 Network No.2
HOW TO MONITOR
AnU (1-1)
REDUNTANT
Host ── Other (1-3) Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── ──
SYSTEM
Q (Q mode) (1-2)
Other (1-1) Host ── Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4)
AnA (1-3)
Other (0-0) ── Host ── ── ── ── ──
5
(1-4)
BUS CONNECTION
AnU
(2-2) Other (1-1) ── ── Host ── Host ── ──
QnA (2-1)
Other (1-1) Other (1-2) ── Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
AnN (2-3)
── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
6
AnU (2-4)
── ── ── ── ── Other (2-2) ── Host
CPU
Lower line:
: Not accessible
Network settings
7
Host
COMPUTER LINK
POINT
Monitoring link device B or W
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when
8
designating devices allocated to another station.
Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
AnU
Network No.1 QnA Network No.2
(2-4)
(1-3)
(2-2)
(M) AnU
AnA
(2-3)
(1-2)
Data link
system
QnA AnA
(L1) (L2)
• Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks
Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.
(1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host
station.
(2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station
No.).
Station to be Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system
accessed
Station QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2)
connected to GOT
Other (1-3)
Q (Q mode) (1-1)
Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) or ── ──
Other (2-2)
AnA (1-2)
── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ──
(1-3)
QnA (2-2)
*1
Other (1-1) ── Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host ──
(M) Other (0-2)
AnU (2-1)
── ── ── Host ── Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-3)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Host Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-4)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Other (2-3) Host ── ── ──
QnA (L1)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
AnA (L2)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host
*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.
POINT
Monitoring link device B or W
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when
designating devices allocated to another station.
Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
QnA Q (Q mode)
MONITORING
(1-1) (2-1)
AnU
Q (Q mode) Network No. 1 Network No. 2 QnA
2
(1-4)
(1-2) (2-2)
(2-4)
• Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W)
Station to be accessed Network No.1 Network No.2
3
QnA Q (Q mode) GOT AnU Q (Q mode) QnA AnN AnU
Station
FOR MONITORING
connected to GOT (1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (1-4) (2-1) (2-2) (2-3) (2-4)
ACCESS RANGE
GOT (1-3) ――
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the local device number if designating
devices allocated to another station.
Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
5
BUS CONNECTION
(b) Monitoring other stations (other than B and W)
Station to be accessed
QnA Q (Q mode) GOT AnU
Station How to read the table 1, Other (2)
(1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (1-4)
connected to GOT ↑ ↑
GOT (1-3) 1, Other (1) 1, Other (2) ―― 1, Other (4) NW No. Station number
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
CC-Link System
QnA AnA
GOT
(1-1) (1-3)
Network
System
AnN
GOT (1-4) GOT
Station to be accessed
QnA Q (Q mode) AnA AnN
Station
(1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (1-4)
connected to GOT
QnA (1-1)
AnA (1-3)
AnN (1-4)
PROCEDURES FOR
Connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Access range 2
(1) MITSUBISHI PLC
DEVICE RANGE
The GOT can access CPUs on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller
Network, or CC-Link field network via the QCPU or QnACPU.
However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks.
(The GOT cannot monitor the AnNCPU on the CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/H, and
MELSECNET/10 networks)
For monitoring CPUs on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link 3
field network, set the routing parameter.
FOR MONITORING
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals.
ACCESS RANGE
• Routing parameter setting of the GOT
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
• Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the MELSECNET/H network system, or MELSECNET/10
network system
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 4
• Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Controller Network
HOW TO MONITOR
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
• Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Field Network
REDUNTANT
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
SYSTEM
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual
Monitoring via the MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B network cannot be performed.
GOT 5
BUS CONNECTION
Hub etc.
Gateway
(Router etc.)
6
MELSECNET/H etc.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
POINT
7
(1) Host in the Ethernet connection
While the GOT is handled as the host in MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 or CC-Link connection, the station
COMPUTER LINK
(Ethernet module) set as the host in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 is handled as the host in Ethernet
CONNECTION
connection.
(2) Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system
When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station.
If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GOT cannot switch the monitoring target
automatically when the system is switched.
(A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)
8
Various settings
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
*1 Monitoring is available only when the CC-Link communication module is the GT15-J61BT13.
All devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by the CC-Link parameter setting can
be monitored.
When the monitor target is the multi-PLC system, CPU No. 1 to No. 4 can be monitored.
The device range of RX, RY, RWw, RWr to be allocated to the GOT differs according to the setting of the number
of CC-Link communication units (one station/four station) occupied.
For details on the number of CC-Link stations occupied, refer to the following manual .
User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected
• In the case of CC-Link Ver.2 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)
Remote register
Register (write area) D ← RWw ← Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF
(write area)
Remote register
Register (read area) D → RWr → Wr Wr0 to Wr7FF
(read area)
• In the case of CC-Link Ver.1 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)
Remote register
Register (write area) D ← RWw ← Ww Ww0 to WwFF
(write area)
Remote register
Register (read area) D → RWr → Wr Wr0 to WrFF
(read area)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
MONITORING
(3) Setting NW No. and station number
(a) When monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link
parameter setting 2
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Local
DEVICE RANGE
NW No. 0, PLC station number: Other (Station number: n)
(n: Station number of another station to be monitored (0: Master station, 1-64: Local station))
POINT 3
For monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated by CC-Link parameter, use the local device even
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
if designating devices allocated to another station.
Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
HOW TO MONITOR
GT16, GT15 and GT14 can monitor the master station and local stations.
GT10 and GT11 can monitor the master station only.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(2) Setting NW No. and station number
(a) When monitoring master station
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Host/other (station number: 0)
(b) When monitoring local station
5
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Other (station number: 1 to 64)
BUS CONNECTION
(3) Setting device name and device number
Set the device name and device No.
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
*1 This program is not required if the CC-Link parameter setting sequence program and GOT communication sequence program
satisfy the following conditions.
• Use a QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU whose number given in the DATE field of the rating plate is "9707B" or later as the PLC
CPU of the master station.
• Use GX Developer or SW2 -GPPW and make CC-Link parameter setting and batch refresh device setting in the CC-Link
setting on the package.
For details of the connection method, refer to the following manual .
User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected
*2 For whether the data can be sent to/received from the CC-Link Ver. 2 compatible station by transient transmission and cyclic
transmission, refer to the following.
POINT
In transient transmission, connection of several (five or more as a guideline) intelligent device stations (GOTs and
intelligent device units) reduces the data communication speed.
To raise the data communication speed, increase the CC-Link system, for example, and do not connect five or
more intelligent device stations to a single CC-Link system.
PROCEDURES FOR
Range for Monitoring
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
Bus connection, CPU direct connection, Computer link connection
DEVICE RANGE
• Local stations can be monitored. M GOT
When the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B
L1 L3
and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
L2
FOR MONITORING
However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other
ACCESS RANGE
L1 L3
than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
L2
• Other local stations cannot be monitored. GOT
HOW TO MONITOR
However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other
L2
than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. m GOT
REDUNTANT
• Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored.
SYSTEM
1 3
5
Monitoring devices of other stations
BUS CONNECTION
If devices of other stations on the data link system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced.
Therefore monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the link parameter.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
L1 L3
L2
m
1 3 GOT
(1) Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter
Specify the host station.
(2) Monitoring devices of other stations
Network No.: 0, Station number: Refer to the following table.
L1 Other 0 Host ― ― ― ― ―
L2
Other 0 ― Host ― Other 1 Other 2 Other 3
m
L3 Other 0 ― ― Host ― ― ―
1 ― ― Other 0 ― Host ― ―
2 ― ― Other 0 ― ― Host ―
3 ― ― Other 0 ― ― ― Host
POINT
Monitoring link device B or W
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when
designating devices allocated to another station.
Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
The access range that can be monitored for the direct CPU connection is only the connected CPU. (The GOT cannot
monitor other stations.)
The access range that can be monitored for the Ethernet connection is the host and others.
The access range that can be monitored for the multi-drop communication is only the CPU to which the serial multi-drop
connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly.
PROCEDURES FOR
H Network System
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPU of 2
the master station.
DEVICE RANGE
POINT
(1) Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10
The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system and 3
MELSECNET/10 network system.
FOR MONITORING
Connect the GOT to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system.
ACCESS RANGE
Network No.1
Monitor Station No.0
target (master station)
QJ71LP21-25
Q33B
module
Power supply
PLC CPU
Empty
Empty
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
MELSECNET/H remote I/O Network
SYSTEM
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
QJ71E71-100
Q33B
module
Power supply
Empty
Network No.1
Station No.1
(remote I/O station) 5
BUS CONNECTION
Hub
CONNECTION TO
(2) Connection to GT11 and remote I/O station on MELSECNET/H
GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system.
DIRECT
GT11 can access only the connected host station (remote I/O station).
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT
Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.]
(Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16,
GT15 only)
The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.
Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU.
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link
devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter
settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT
Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.]
(Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16,
GT15 only)
The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.
Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU.
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link
devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter
settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
(1) Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on
MONITORING
the remote I/O station.
For details of cables and others required for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module, refer to the following.
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT 2
Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.]
(Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16,
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the GOT and PLC CPU as necessary. For routing
parameter settings of the GOT, refer to the following manual.
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
Restrictions on connection to remote I/O station
The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function.
REDUNTANT
The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made.
SYSTEM
Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master
station and local stations. When connecting the GOT to the head module, use the following connection methods.
CLP CPU
QJ71GF11-T2
Empty
Empty
Q33B
LJ71C24
LX40C6
LY10R2
module
Power supply
Network No. 1,
Station No. 1
GOT
(1) Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2) mounted on the head module.
For cables required for connection with the serial communication module and other details, refer to the following.
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
(2) Specify a GOT type which includes MELSEC-QnU in the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify
[Network No. 1 (Network No. of CC-Link IE Field Network), Station No. 0 (Master station)] as the monitoring
target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15, GT14 only)
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link IE Field Network.
Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU.
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link
devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link field network.
For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing
parameter setting of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Connection between GT11, GT10 and head module of CC-Link IE Field Network
GT11, GT10 can not access the master station on CC-Link IE Field Network.
GT11, GT10 can access only the connected host station (head module).
2
Restrictions on connection to head module
DEVICE RANGE
The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made.
Use GX Works or similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
DEVICE RANGE
4.
SYSTEM 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 8
4.2 Direct CPU Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 4
4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) . . . . . . . . .4 - 18
HOW TO MONITOR
4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 20
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network
Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 22
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 23
BUS CONNECTION
4.7 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 24
4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit . .4 - 25
4.9 Q Redundant Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 29
6
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
4-1
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM
This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU
redundant system is monitored by the GOT.
Monitor
target
Station No. 0 Station No. 1
(Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
module
Power supply
Empty
Control Standby
system system
(System A) (System B)
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
Station No. 2
(remote I/O station)
When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.
Monitor target
Station No. 0 Station No. 1
(Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
module
Power supply
Empty
Standby Control
system system
(System A) (System B)
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
Station No. 2
(remote I/O station)
PROCEDURES FOR
• Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Direct CPU connection (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system)
4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station)
(2) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H
network system)
2
4.1.2 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote
DEVICE RANGE
(3) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network
system)
4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station)
HOW TO MONITOR
• MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (Network system)
4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems)
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system)
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System)
• Ethernet connection
5
BUS CONNECTION
4.7 Ethernet Connection
CONNECTION TO
4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type
extension base unit)
DIRECT
(3) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base
CPU
unit)
4.8.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module 7
mounted on redundant type extension base unit)
COMPUTER LINK
(4) CC-Link connection (Via G4) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
CONNECTION
4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant
type extension base unit)
For details of PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection method of GOT, refer to the following.
8
Monitorable controllers of each chapter
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Remote I/O
Remote I/O
station
station
Control Control
system Standby system Standby system system
Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote
master station sub-master station master station sub-master station
Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT1. Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT2.
PROCEDURES FOR
• CC-Link connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(intelligent device station) Intelligent device station
GOT1
DEVICE RANGE
system system
Control Standby
system system
The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control
system PLC CPU.
• MELSECNET/H
connection, MELSECNET/
10 connection
GOT Station No.3
(normal station)
GOT Station No.3
(normal station)
3
(Network system)
FOR MONITORING
MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network
ACCESS RANGE
(MELSECNET/H mode or (MELSECNET/H mode or
MELSECNET/10 mode) MELSECNET/10 mode)
HOW TO MONITOR
By the Q redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes
REDUNTANT
the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*2
SYSTEM
• CC-Link IE Controller
Network connection GOT Station No.3 GOT Station No.3
(Network system) (normal station) (normal station)
BUS CONNECTION
Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.1 Station No.2
(control station) (normal station) (normal station) (sub control station)
CONNECTION TO
• Ethernet connection
GOT
Station No. 3 GOT
Station No. 3
Ethernet Ethernet
DIRECT
CPU
Station Station
Station No. 1 Station No. 2
No. 1 No. 2
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
*1 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundant setting, change the cable connection from the
PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.
*2 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundancy setting, refer to the following.
4.10Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system
(1) A system alarm may be detected when the system is switched in a redundant system.
When Q redundant setting is made : "450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system."
When Q redundant setting is not made : "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or
modules."
2
However, even if the error occurs, the GOT automatically resumes monitoring and there are no problems in
(2) The system alarm is displayed when the system is switched due to cable disconnection etc. (when the path is
changed).
The system alarm is not displayed when the system is switched by the user.
(3) When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT can monitor only the following GOT functions. 3
Monitoring function System monitoring function
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(4) When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT does not allow the PLC CPU clock of the master station
to be set in the clock setting of the utility.
The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made.
Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
(5) When the Q redundant setting is not made, the GOT does not automatically change the monitoring target
even if system switching occurs in the redundant system. When the GOT is connected to the standby system, 4
data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system, failing to be reflected.
HOW TO MONITOR
In this case, when data are written to a device in the standby system normally, the system alarm "315 Device
writing error. Correct device." is not detected.
REDUNTANT
(6) For monitoring the QCPU redundant system when connecting to MELSECNET/H, use QCPU of function
SYSTEM
version D or later, with the upper five digits later than "07102".
Also, use GX Developer of Version 8.29F or later.
(7) A message "Unable to communicate with CPU." is displayed when the system switching occurs while an 5
option function such as the ladder monitor is used.
BUS CONNECTION
(8) In the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, when the control station of the
MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network fails and is taken over by a station outside the QCPU
redundant system, the timeout is detected as the system alarm.
If this occurs, the monitor display speed may slow down.
(9) In the direct CPU connection, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target in the following
cases. 6
• When the power supply to the CPU where the GOT is connected is OFF
CONNECTION TO
• When the cable connecting the GOT with the CPU is broken
• When the tracking is disabled
DIRECT
(10) If the Q redundant setting is made for a system that is not a QCPU redundant system, no error occurs at the
CPU
(11) If the QCPU redundant system is in the debug mode, do not make the Q redundant system setting for the
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
This section explains the direct CPU connection that connects the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H
network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Network No. 1, Station No. 0 Network No. 1, Station No. 1
Monitor target (Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
Standby system
Control system (System B)
(System A)
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
GOT
Controller Type
Host Host
Device setting
Remote master Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),
(Network setting)
station Station No. 0 (master station))
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network
system.Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC
CPU.
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link
devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system
takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that
is operating as the master.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section explains the computer link connection that connects the GOT to the serial communication module mounted
on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O 2
station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
DEVICE RANGE
Monitor target (Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
supply module
Power
supply module
Power
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Empty
Standby system
Control system
(System B)
(System A)
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
supply module
Power
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
Network No. 1, Station No. 2
(Remote I/O station)
HOW TO MONITOR
GOT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(1) Connection method
Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CM0) mounted on the remote I/ O station of the
MELSECNET/H network system. 5
For details, refer to the following.
BUS CONNECTION
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
(2) GT Designer3 setting
Set GT Designer3 as follows.
Setting item Settings Model
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*
DIRECT
Host Host
CPU
Device setting
(Network setting)
Remote master
station
Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),
Station No. 0 (master station))
7
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU.
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link
devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
For details, refer to the following manual.
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)
8
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system
CONNECTION
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that
is operating as the master.
This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/
O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the I/O station of the
MELESCNET/H network system.
Network No. 1, Station No. 0 Network No. 1, Station No. 1
Monitor target (Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Control system Standby system
(System A) (System B)
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Network No. 1, Station No. 2
(remote I/O station) Network No. 2, Station No. 2
Ethernet
Controller Type
Device setting Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),
Other station
(Network setting) Station No. 0 (master station))
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system
takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that
is operating as the master.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section describes the direct CPU connection by which a GOT is connected to a PLC CPU in the redundant system.
Two methods for the CPU direct connection, using one or two GOTs, are available.
2
4.2.1 When using one GOT
DEVICE RANGE
GOT
Monitor target
Network No. 1, Station No. 0
(Multiplexed remote master station)
Network No. 1, Station No. 1
(Multiplexed remote sub master station)
3
FOR MONITORING
supply module
Power
supply module
Power
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
ACCESS RANGE
Control system Standby system
(System A) (System B)
HOW TO MONITOR
supply module
Power
Empty
Empty
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
REDUNTANT
(remote I/O station)
SYSTEM
(1) Connection method
Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the control system CPU module (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of 5
the redundant system.
BUS CONNECTION
For details, refer to the following.
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
(2) GT Designer3 setting
Set GT Designer3 as follows.
Setting item Settings Model
CONNECTION TO
Controller Type
Device setting
Host Host
CPU
(Network setting)
Q Redundant Setting 4.9 Q Redundant Setting
7
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the PLC CPU (other station) of the control system after system switching
COMPUTER LINK
Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to other station.
POINT
To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting
8
If the system switching occurs when the Q redundant setting is not made, the GOT cannot change the monitoring
target at the occurrence of system switching since it monitors the connected PLC CPU (host station).
CONNECTION
As a countermeasure, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control
ETHERNET
GOT1 GOT2
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Control system Standby system
(System A) (System B)
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
Network No. 1, Station No. 2
(remote I/O station)
Controller Type
Device setting
Host Host
(Network setting)
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the GOT cannot change the monitor target automatically in response to the
system switching.
The GOT that is connected to the control system CPU module after system switching continues the monitoring.
Different from the case using one GOT, no cable reconnection is required.
POINT
To automatically change the monitoring target after system switching using one GOT, make the Q redundant
settings.
4.9 Q Redundant Setting
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) As the GOT monitors exclusively the PLC CPU that is directly connected to, the monitor target cannot be
changed in response to the system switching of the redundant system.
To change the target monitor in response to the system switching, change the target of the connection cable
between the GOT and PLC CPU to the other PLC CPU, or configure the system using GOTs connected to each
PLC CPU. 2
(2) In CPU direct connection, when monitoring a PLC CPU in the redundant system, only the PLC CPU that is
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
CPU direct connection CPU direct connection
GOT1 GOT2
HOW TO MONITOR
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
REDUNTANT
Control system Standby system
SYSTEM
(System A) (System B)
BUS CONNECTION
2) D100=5
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
CONNECTION TO
• To display the specified monitor screen when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU, use the
special relay SM1515 (Control status identification flag) of the PLC CPU.
(When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system)
DIRECT
• Control the operation of each object by the SM1515, which is set for the operation condition.
CPU
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
GOT
Control Standby
Q25PRH QJ71 Station system Q25PRH QJ71 Station
system
CPU BR11 No. 0 CPU BR11 No. 1
(System A) (System B)
QJ72 Station
BR15 No. 2
Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that performs the following operations for when connecting a
GOT to control system and standby system.
1) When connecting to the control system, the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch switch
operation, by which the screen switches to the next screen.
2) When connecting to the standby system, the monitor screen displays a message calling the reconnection of
the connection cable.
1) When connecting to the control system 2) When connecting to the standby system
PROCEDURES FOR
Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device
PREPARATORY
GD100 as the base screen switching device.
MONITORING
(Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Status Observation operation of the GOT
may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the
redundant system tracking function)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Make the setting so that the base screen 1 is displayed when the connected PLC CPU is the standby system
(SM1515 is OFF) in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation].
Condition 1 : SM1515 (while OFF) When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system.
Operation : GD100=1 The screen switches to the base screen 1.
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Device/Style tab
Device : SM1515
Shape : None
Comment tab : Basic Comment
Comment Display Type Text (ON) : The operation status is control system.
Touch the screen to display the next screen.
Comment Display Type Text (OFF) : The operation status is standby system.
Reconnect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU.
PROCEDURES FOR
By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen
PREPARATORY
touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON).
MONITORING
Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function.
Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the
switch operation.
DEVICE RANGE
Style tab
Display Style : None (Shape)
Trigger tab
Trigger Type : ON
Trigger Device : SM1515
3
FOR MONITORING
1) Next Screen tab 2) Style tab screen 3) Trigger tab screen
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
The following shows the created base screen 1.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
This section describes the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent
device station to the CC-Link network.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network.
CC-Link connection
Network No. 0, Station No. 0 Network No. 0, Station No. 1
(Master station) (Standby master station) GOT
CC-Link
Monitor target
Network No. 0,
supply module
Power
supply module
Power
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Station No. 2
Control (Intelligent device station)
system Standby system
(System A)
(System B)
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
As the monitoring method, "monitoring by transient transmission" and "monitoring by cyclic transmission" are
available. Each monitor method has advantages and disadvantages.
For details, refer to the following.
3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring
PROCEDURES FOR
(a) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system
PREPARATORY
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station
MONITORING
No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master
station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new
control system after system switching. 2
(b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control
DEVICE RANGE
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the
station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the
standby master station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new 3
control system after system switching.
FOR MONITORING
To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching,
ACCESS RANGE
switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program
of the new control system.
For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
(Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
CC-Link network setting
SYSTEM
To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection,
set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B.
For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. 5
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
BUS CONNECTION
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
This section explains the CC-Link connection (via G4) that connects the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link
network.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.
Network No. 0, Station No. 2
(AJ65BT-G4-S3)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Control
Standby system
system
(System B)
(System A)
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
MELSEC-QnA/Q
*1 Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10.The setting of GT Designer3 is not necessary.
PROCEDURES FOR
(a) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system
PREPARATORY
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station
MONITORING
No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master
station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new
control system after system switching. 2
(b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control
DEVICE RANGE
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the
station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the
standby master station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new 3
control system after system switching.
FOR MONITORING
To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching,
ACCESS RANGE
switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program
of the new control system.
For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
(Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
CC-Link network setting
SYSTEM
To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection,
set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B.
For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. 5
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
BUS CONNECTION
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
This section explains the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GOT to
the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system.
The following provides an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/ H network
system.
Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)
GOT
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network
(Control station) (MELSECNET/H mode or Network No. 1, Station No. 2
MELSECNET/10 mode) (Normal station)
Monitor target
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub
control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network
module station No. 2.
POINT
To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting
When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub
control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the
station No. 2 in response to the system switching.
As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station
numbers between System A and System B using the script function.
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function
PROCEDURES FOR
System)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section explains the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) that connects the GOT to the CC- 2
Link IE controller network.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
QJ71GP21-SX
QJ61BT11N
FOR MONITORING
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71E71-100
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
ACCESS RANGE
Control Standby
system system
(System A) (System B)
HOW TO MONITOR
QJ71C24N
Empty
QJ72LP25-25
module
Power supply
Empty
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(1) Connection method
Connect the GOT to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
For details, refer to the following.
5
BUS CONNECTION
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
(2) GT Designer3 setting
Set GT Designer3 as described below.
Setting item Settings Model
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
Other (NW No.1 (Network No. of CC-Link IE Controller Network), 6
Other station Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1
(Network)
in the above example))
CONNECTION TO
Q Redundant Setting 4.9 Q Redundant Setting DIRECT
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
CPU
When system switching occurs, the network module station No.2 changes from a normal station to the sub
control station, and the system with the module takes over the control of the CC-Link IE Controller Network as 7
the control system.
Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network
COMPUTER LINK
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet network.
Network No. 1, Station No. 3
GOT
Network No. 1,
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 Station No. 2
Ethernet
Monitor target
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empt y
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empt y
Control
Standby
system
(System A) system
(System B)
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empt y
Empt y
Controller Type
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network
system as the control system.
Since the GOT monitors the control system, he monitoring target is automatically changed to the Ethernet
module station No. 2.
POINT
When monitoring control system without Q redundant setting (Only GT16, GT15 and GT14)
When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network
system as the control system.
Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the
station No. 2 in response to the system switching.
As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station
numbers between System A and System B using the script function.
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function
PROCEDURES FOR
Unit
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
4.8.1 Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module
mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
2
FOR MONITORING
Control system Standby system
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
ACCESS RANGE
(System A) (System B)
4
QJ71C24N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
HOW TO MONITOR
Computer link
REDUNTANT
connection
SYSTEM
Redundant type extension base unit
GOT
5
(1) Connection method
BUS CONNECTION
Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24N) mounted on the redundant type extension
base unit.
For details, refer to the following.
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
(2) GT Designer3 setting
Set GT Designer3 as follows. 6
Setting item Settings Model
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Controller Type
DIRECT
CPU
Device setting 7
Host Host
(Network setting)
COMPUTER LINK
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
switched to the control system.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant
type extension base unit.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type
extension base unit.
Monitor target
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
(System A) (System B)
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
Ethernet connection
Network No. 2, Station No. 2
GOT
Redundant type extension base unit
Controller Type
Device setting
Host Host
(Network setting)
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
switched to the control system.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section explains the CC-Link connection for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant
type extension base unit.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type
2
extension base unit.
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
(System A) (System B)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
CC-Link connection
Redundant type extension base unit
GOT
Network No. 0, Station No. 1 4
Network No. 0, Station No. 0
HOW TO MONITOR
(Master station)
REDUNTANT
Connect the GOT to the CC-Link module (QJ61BT11N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
SYSTEM
For details, refer to the following.
13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)
(2) GT Designer3 setting
5
Set GT Designer3 as follows.
BUS CONNECTION
Setting item Settings Model
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
Master station Other (NW No. 0, Station No. 0 (master station))
(Network setting)
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
6
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
CONNECTION TO
When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
switched to the control system. DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
This section explains the CC-Link connection (Via G4) for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the
redundant type extension base unit via the AJ65BT-G4-S3.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.
Monitor target
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
(System A) (System B)
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
CC-Link
connection
Redundant type extension base unit
GOT
Controller Type
Device setting
Master station Other (NW No.0, Station No.0 or FF (master station))
(Network setting)
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
switched to the control system.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following explains the setting for automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT when monitoring a QCPU
redundant system.
2
POINT
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
3. Make the settings for the Q redundant setting.
In the Q Redundant Setting dialog box, settings can be made for each channel of the controller.
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
(Example: Ethernet connection (Station No. 5), redundant CPU pair No. 1 and No. 2, redundant CPU station No. 1 to 4)
CONNECTION TO
NW No.
Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU.
(The same value as the value set for the first redundant CPU is displayed)
Pair No.*1
Set the station No. (1 to 63) of the redundant CPU for each of pair numbers (1 to 64).
DIRECT
New
(The value of "Setting for the first redundant CPU" + 1 is displayed)
Create a new pair No.
*2 7
Duplicate Copies one setting of the selected pair number to append it at the last line.
COMPUTER LINK
Delete
After deletion, the succeeding pair numbers are renumbered to fill the deleted pair number.
Delete All Deletes the setting of all pair numbers.
Copy All Copies the Q redundant setting on the selected CH No. tab.
Paste All Pastes the copied Q redundant setting in the selected CH No. tab.
For details of *1, refer to the explanation below.
8
*2 GT14, GT12, GT11 are applicable to built-in serial interface only.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration.
Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair.
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
GOT
Station
No.5
Ethernet (Network No.1)
Redundant CPU
pair (No.2)
Station Station
<System A> <System B>
No.3 No.4
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
POINT
Precautions for making Q redundant setting
Pay attention to the following items when making the Q redundant setting.
• In the setting, station Nos. of the System A CPU and System B CPU must be adjacent numbers to be set as a
pair.
As long as adjacent numbers are used, allocation of them to the System A CPU and System B CPU may be
determined as desired.
• Pairing of the last station No. and station No. 1 (Example: Station No. 64 and station No. 1) is not allowed.
• Make sure that the QCPU in the station for which Q redundant setting is made is a redundant CPU.
If any of the QCPUs to which the Q redundant setting is made is not a redundant CPU, the GOT fails to
automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched.
• When making the Q redundant setting for MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or Ethernet connections, check
the station Nos. of network modules before the setting. If the settings of the Q redundant setting and the actual
network module station Nos. are not matched, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target to
the control system when the system is switched.
• The redundant pair number setting is necessary in the Q redundant setting when the monitoring target changes
automatically at the system switching with the host station specified in Ethernet connection. (The "Target at its
own Station (0-FF)" function of the Q redundant setting is not valid in Ethernet connection.)
• GOT supports the backup mode (separate mode), which is the operation mode of the QCPU redundant system,
and does not support the debug mode.
PROCEDURES FOR
Using the Script Function
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following explains how to create a script screen, to be used for the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 2
connection (network system), or Ethernet connection, that automatically changes the monitoring target (Station No.)
DEVICE RANGE
The script executes the station number switching function or screen switching function.
The following shows the advantages and disadvantages of the station number switching function and screen
switching function.
Function Advantage Disadvantage
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Monitor screens must be created separately for Station
All objects can be used since monitor screens are created
Screen switching function No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby
for each station number.
system).
4
4.10.1 Method for using the station number switching function
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
• As a feature of this function, monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system)
can be created on one screen.
SYSTEM
• If the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the
same monitor screen.
• To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the
PLC CPU and stores the station number of the latest control system into the station number switching device.
5
• Restrictions: Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched.
BUS CONNECTION
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
CONNECTION TO
Station Network No. 1
GOT
No. 3
Control system Q25PRH QJ71 Q25PRH QJ71 Standby system
DIRECT
1
GOT connected to MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10
3
network
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Set here.
POINT
Setting for the status observation function
For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used.
To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN].
(For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device])
Example:
When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H)
Set "257".
When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH)
Set "2570".
PROCEDURES FOR
For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common)
PREPARATORY
In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system.
MONITORING
4. Validate the station number switching function.
On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Screen Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to
validate the station number changing function.
Make this setting for each monitor screen. 2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Check here.
HOW TO MONITOR
5. Change the station number switching device value in the script.
REDUNTANT
By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515
SYSTEM
status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device
value.
Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)].
5
• Screen script for MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection:
BUS CONNECTION
// If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station.
if([b:SM1515]==OFF){
if([w:GD100]==1){
[w:GD100]=2;
}else{ 6
[w:GD100]=1;
}
CONNECTION TO
} DIRECT
Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab.
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Set here.
PROCEDURES FOR
Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station
PREPARATORY
monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation] turns ON.
MONITORING
(For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, set "258"(0102H))
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
POINT
Setting for the status observation function 5
For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used.
BUS CONNECTION
To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN].
(For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device])
Example:
When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H)
Set "257".
When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH) 6
Set "2570".
CONNECTION TO
3.
DIRECT
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
The following shows an example of setting GD100=257 (0101H: Network No. 1, Station No. 1) and base screen=2
to one switch.(Base screen 2 is the actually monitoring screen)
Check here.
PROCEDURES FOR
By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515
PREPARATORY
status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device
MONITORING
value.
Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)].
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
For the Ethernet connection, create a script so that the network No. and station number are set to the station
switching device.
For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, create "[w:GD100]=0x0102".
Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab. 4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
• As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number.
When the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the
other monitor screen.
• To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the
PLC CPU and stores the screen number corresponding to the latest station number of the control system into the
screen switching devices.
• Precautions:
There are the following 8 different screen switching devices.Set the screen switching devices for all screens to be
used.
(1) Base screen switching device
(2) Overlap window 1 switching device
(3) Overlap window 2 switching device
(4) Overlap window 3 switching device
(5) Overlap window 4 switching device
(6) Overlap window 5 switching device
(7) Superimpose window 1 switching device
(8) Superimpose window 2 switching device
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the status observation so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of
PREPARATORY
MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by choosing [Common] [Status Observation].
MONITORING
Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.
Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station
HOW TO MONITOR
monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation] turns ON.
REDUNTANT
Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.
SYSTEM
Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
HINT
When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can
be set as the screen switching device.
In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the
control station.
PROCEDURES FOR
System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Ethernet
Network No. 1
Station No. 3 GOT
FOR MONITORING
GD100 as the base screen switching device.
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
2. Set the status observation.
REDUNTANT
Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station
SYSTEM
monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation] turns ON.
BUS CONNECTION
Condition 1 : GS231.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal.
Operation : GD100=1 Screen No. is changed to 1.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
DEVICE RANGE
5.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
4
5.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
HOW TO MONITOR
5.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30
REDUNTANT
5.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5-1
5. BUS CONNECTION
PROCEDURES FOR
Series Model name Clock Refer to
type
PREPARATORY
L02CPU
MONITORING
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
MELSEC-L - -
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
Q02CPU-A
2
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
DEVICE RANGE
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA Bus
Q3ACPU *1
5.2.2
(QnACPU) connection
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU*2
Q2ASCPU 3
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 Bus *1
FOR MONITORING
(QnASCPU) connection 5.2.3
Q2ASHCPU
ACCESS RANGE
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU 4
A2ACPUP21
HOW TO MONITOR
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
REDUNTANT
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
SYSTEM
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A Bus
5
A3ACPUR21 *1
(AnCPU) connection 5.2.2
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
BUS CONNECTION
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1 6
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
CONNECTION TO
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
DIRECT
A2USHCPU-S1
CPU
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
7
MELSEC-A A2SCPU Bus *1
(AnSCPU) connection 5.2.3
COMPUTER LINK
A2SCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU*3
A1SJCPU-S3*3
A1SJHCPU*3
A0J2HCPU Bus
8
MELSEC-A *1
connection 5.2.4
A0J2HCPUP21
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
When "CONTROL BUS ERR" or "UNIT VERIFY ERR" occurs
It can be considered that noise due to a long bus connection cable causes a malfunction. 2
Check whether a signal line such as bus cable is placed near the equipment to operate. If the line is close to the
DEVICE RANGE
5.2.1 Connecting to QCPU
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Bus extension Extension base
Main base unit connector box unit GOT
Communication driver
Bus(Q)
HOW TO MONITOR
Extension cable Connection cable
PLC GOT
REDUNTANT
Main base Extension base
SYSTEM
Bus Bus
Extension Extens Connection cable Max. distance
Main extension *1
extension Option device*4 Model
cable ion
base connector
box*2
base
connector
box*2
5
GT15-75QBUSL
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75QBUS2L
- - - - GT15-QC06B(0.6m)
GT15-QBUS Between main base and
GT15-QC12B(1.2m)
GT15-QBUS2 GOT: 13.2m
GT15-QC30B(3m)
Extension (Including the extension
Extens GT15-QC50B(5m)
cable cable length)
- ion - GT15-QC100B(10m) - (Built into GOT)
(13.2m or
Main
less)
base
6
GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-75QBUSL
base A9GT GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-75QBUS2L
CONNECTION TO
- - -
-QCNB*3 GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QBUS
GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QBUS2 Between main base and
GT15-QC100B(10m) GOT: 37m
DIRECT
*2 When installing the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension
CONNECTION
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
ETHERNET
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
GOT
Bus extension Extension base Intermediary
Main base unit 1st GOT (Terminating
connector box unit GOT station)
GT15-75QBUS2L
- - - -
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QC06B(0.6m)
GT15-QC12B(1.2m)
GT15-QC30B(3m)
GT15-QC50B(5m)
GT15-QC100B(10m)
Extension
Extension GT15-75QBUS2L
- cable -
base GT15-QBUS2
(13.2m or less)
Main base
GT15-QC06B(0.6m)
GT15-75QBUS2L
A9GT-QCNB*3 - - - GT15-QC12B(1.2m)
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QC30B(3m)
GT15-QC50B(5m)
GT15-QC100B(10m)
GT15-QC150BS(15m)
GT15-QC200BS(20m)
Extension GT15-QC250BS(25m)
Extension GT15-75QBUS2L
- cable A9GT-QCNB GT15-QC300BS(30m)
base GT15-QBUS2
(13.2m or less) GT15-QC350BS(35m)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver
Bus(Q) 2
Connection cable 2)
Option device
*6*7
Model
Connection cable 3)
Option device
*6*7
Model
Max. distance
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75QBUSL,
Between main base and GOT
GT15-75QBUS2L,
(1st): 13.2m
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS,
GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QBUS2
Between main base and GOT
(terminal): 37m
- (Built into GOT)
4
GT15-75QBUSL, Between main base and GOT
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75QBUS2L, (1st): 13.2m (Including the
GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QBUS, extension cable length)
GT15-75QBUS2L,
REDUNTANT
GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QBUS2
SYSTEM
GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC30B(3m) Between main base and GOT
GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC50B(5m) - (Built into GOT) (terminal): 37m (Including the
GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC100B(10m) extension cable length)
GT15-QC150BS(15m)
GT15-QC200BS(20m)
GT15-QC150BS(15m)
GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-75QBUSL, 5
GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-75QBUS2L,
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QBUS, Between main base and GOT
GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-QBUS2 (terminal): 37m
GT15-75QBUSL,
GT15-75QBUS2L, Between main base and GOT
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, (terminal): 6
GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QBUS2 37m (Including the extension
cable length)
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)
*7 When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used.
CONNECTION
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
When one GOT is connected
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Extension base Bus extension
Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
Communication driver 2
DEVICE RANGE
Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
PLC GOT
Bus
3
Extension Extens Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main connector
FOR MONITORING
cable ion Connection cable 1) Option device Model
ACCESS RANGE
base conversion
*1 base
box*2
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base and
- - - - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-C50NB(5m)
GT15-ABUS2 GOT: 6.6m
4
- (Built into GOT)
HOW TO MONITOR
Main GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and
REDUNTANT
base GT15-75ABUS2L GOT: 36.6m
GT15-ABUS (Including between main
SYSTEM
GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-ABUS2 base and bus connector
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
- - conversion box)
GT15-AC30B(3m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
GT15-AC50B(5m) *3
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and
bus connector conversion
5
BUS CONNECTION
box: 6.6m
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS GOT: 6.6m
- - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-ABUS2 (Including the extension
GT15-C50NB(5m)
cable length)
- (Built into GOT)
Main Extension
Extens
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and
6
ion
base cable GT15-75ABUS2L GOT: 36.6m
base
CONNECTION TO
GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-AC30B(3m) -CNB bus connector conversion
GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
DIRECT
Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - - -
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-C50NB(5m)
Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Extension cable - -
base GT15-ABUS2
Main base
GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-AC06B(0.6m)
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-AC12B(1.2m)
A7GT-CNB GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-AC30B(3m)
*4
Extension GT15-AC50B(5m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Extension cable
base GT15-ABUS2
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - - -
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
Main base GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-C50NB(5m)
Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Extension cable - -
base GT15-ABUS2
5 - 10 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver
Bus(A/QnA) 2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
- -
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and GOT (2nd):
GT15-C300BS(30m) GT15-ABUS 36.6m
*4 GT15-ABUS2 (Including the extension cable length) 4
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and bus connector
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75ABUS2L conversion box: 6.6m
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-ABUS (Including the extension cable length)
REDUNTANT
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C30BS(3m)
SYSTEM
Between bus connector conversion box
GT15-C50BS(5m) - -
GT15-75ABUSL and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L
*4 GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
Between main base and GOT (2nd):
36.6m
5
(Including the extension cable length)
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) - (Built into GOT)
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-75ABUSL
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m 6
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m
CONNECTION TO
*4 GT15-75ABUS2L *4 GT15-ABUS (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-ABUS2 GT15-ABUS2
CPU
*7
GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)
When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
7
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
COMPUTER LINK
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 11
5.2 System Configuration
5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC GOT
Bus
Extens Extension connector Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main
ion cable Connection cable 1) conversion Option device*4 Model
base
base *1 box
*2
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and
- -
GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2 GOT: 5m
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and
- -
GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 GOT: 30m
Main
- - *3
base - (Built into GOT)
5 - 12 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
PLC GOT 1
Bus
PROCEDURES FOR
Extens Extension connector Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main
PREPARATORY
ion cable Connection cable 1) conversion Option device*4 Model
MONITORING
base
base *1 box
*2
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between extension base
- -
GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
and GOT: 6m
(Including the extension
2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m) cable length)
DEVICE RANGE
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between extension base
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS and GOT: 36m
Extens - -
Extension Main GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 (Including the extension
ion
cable base cable length)
3
*3
base - (Built into GOT)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 36m
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS2 Between extension base
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) and bus connector
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m) *3 conversion box: 6m
- (Built into GOT) (Including the extension
cable length)
4
*1 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024).
HOW TO MONITOR
*2 When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
*3 When using GT15-C EXSS-1, connect as the following precautions.
REDUNTANT
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
SYSTEM
*4 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function 5
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 13
5.2 System Configuration
When two GOTs are connected
Bus(A/QnA)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - Main base - - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m)
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L
A7GT-CNB*2 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
Extension Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
base cable GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m)
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L
A7GT-CNB*2 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)
5 - 14 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 35m
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-75ABUS2L 4
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS
Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C200BS(20m)
REDUNTANT
GT15-C300BS(30m) - (Built into GOT)
*4
SYSTEM
GT15-75ABUSL
Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 5m
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
5
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 35m
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75ABUSL
Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
- (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL
6
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m
CONNECTION TO
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-ABUS2
Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
DIRECT
GT15-C300BS(30m)
CPU
*4
GT15-75ABUSL
Extension base and bus connector conversion box: 6m (Including extension cable length)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
7
GT15-ABUS2
COMPUTER LINK
- (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)
CONNECTION
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 15
5.2 System Configuration
When three GOTs are connected
Extension base
Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT 3rd GOT
unit
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
- - Main base - -
GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
Extension Extension GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - -
base cable GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
5 - 16 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver
Bus(A/QnA) 2
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 35m
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
*4 *4
4
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-75ABUS2L
REDUNTANT
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m)
SYSTEM
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Between extension base and GOT (3rd): 36m
- (Built into GOT)
*4 *4 (Including the extension cable length)
BUS CONNECTION
*5 The bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT)
GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)
*6 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 17
5.2 System Configuration
5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU
Power supply
PLC GOT
module
Communication driver
Bus(A/QnA)
GT15-75ABUSL
A0J2C03(0.3m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between PLC and GOT: 6.6m
A0J2C06(0.55m) GT15-ABUS
A0J2HCPU A0J2-PW GT15-J2C10B(1m) Between power supply module and
A0J2C10(1m) GT15-ABUS2
GOT: 1m
A0J2C20(2m)
- (Built into GOT)
*1 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted depending on the number of intelligent function modules mounted to the
A0J2HCPU.
5 - 18 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
5.2.5 Connection to motion controller CPU 1
(A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3))
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When one GOT is connected
2
Extension base Bus extension
Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
Communication driver
FOR MONITORING
Bus
ACCESS RANGE
Extens Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main connector Option device
Extension cable ion Connection cable 1) Model
base conversion *3
base
box*1
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-ABUS Between main base 4
GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 2.5m
HOW TO MONITOR
-
(Built into GOT)
REDUNTANT
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base
SYSTEM
Main
- - GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 32.5m
base
GT15-ABUS (Including between
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-ABUS2 main base and bus
GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) connector conversion 5
GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) box)
BUS CONNECTION
*2 -
(Built into GOT) Between main base
and bus connector
conversion box: 2.5m
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base
GT15-C12NB(1.2m) and GOT: 6.6m
- - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2 (Including the 6
GT15-C50NB(5m) extension cable
- length)
CONNECTION TO
(Built into GOT)
Extens
Main GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base
ion
base GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 36.6m
DIRECT
base
GT15-ABUS
CPU
GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-ABUS2 Between main base
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
and bus connector
GT15-AC30B(3m)
GT15-AC50B(5m)
-CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
*2
conversion box: 6.6m 7
- (Including the
(Built into GOT) extension cable
COMPUTER LINK
length)
CONNECTION
*1 When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
*2 When using GT15-C EXSS-1, connect as the following precautions.
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 19
5.2 System Configuration
When two GOTs are connected
Bus(A/QnA)
GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
Main
- -
base
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
A7GT-CNB*1 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
*3
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50NB(5m)
GT15-AC06B(0.6m)
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
A7GT-CNB*1 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
*3
GT15-AC50B(5m)
*1 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
*2 When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal.
*3 When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions.
5 - 20 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m)
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m
GT15-C300BS(30m)
*3 4
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 2.5m
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS
REDUNTANT
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2 Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C50BS(5m)
SYSTEM
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m
*3
5
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT (1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m)
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C300BS(30m)
*3
6
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including extension cable
CONNECTION TO
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS length)
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m)
Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
DIRECT
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
CPU
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)
*3
*6 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
CONNECTION
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 21
5.2 System Configuration
When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*2
Extension base
Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT 3rd GOT
unit
GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
- - Main base - -
GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
Extension GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - GT15-C30NB(3m)
base GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50NB(5m)
5 - 22 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver
Bus(A/QnA) 2
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 32.5m
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
*3 *3
4
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
REDUNTANT
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
SYSTEM
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m
- (Built into GOT)
*3 *3 (Including the extension cable length)
BUS CONNECTION
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
*4 The bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT)
GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)
*5 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function 6
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 23
5.2 System Configuration
5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N),
A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1))
Bus(A/QnA)
Bus
Extension Extens Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main connector
cable ion Connection cable 1) Option device*5 Model
base conversion
*1 base*2
box
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 3m
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS Between main base
- -
GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 30m
Main *4
- - - (Built into GOT)
base
5 - 24 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
PLC GOT1000 Series 1
Bus
PROCEDURES FOR
Extension Extens
Main connector Connection cable 2) Max. distance
cable ion Connection cable 1) Option device*5 Model
PREPARATORY
base conversion
MONITORING
*2
*1 base
box
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L Between extension
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-ABUS base and GOT: 3m
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-ABUS2 (Including the
extension cable length)
2
- (Built into GOT)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-ABUS
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-ABUS2 Between extension
A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) base and bus
-CNB*3 GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) connector conversion
*4
- (Built into GOT) box: 3m
(Including the
extension cable length) 4
*1 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024).
HOW TO MONITOR
*2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit.
*3 When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
REDUNTANT
*4 When using GT15-C EXSS-1, connect as the following precautions.
SYSTEM
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
*5 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
5
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function
BUS CONNECTION
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 25
5.2 System Configuration
When two GOTs are connected
Bus(A/QnA)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) *5
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
Extension Extension
Main base GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
cable base GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
*5
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) *5
5 - 26 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m
GT15-C300BS(30m)
*5
GT15-75ABUSL
4
GT15-75ABUS2L
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-ABUS
Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2
REDUNTANT
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
SYSTEM
GT15-C30BS(3m) - (Built into GOT)
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-75ABUSL
Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C200BS(20m)
*5 GT15-ABUS
Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
5
GT15-ABUS2
BUS CONNECTION
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between main base and GOT (1st): 3m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
6
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C300BS(30m)
CONNECTION TO
*5
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
DIRECT
GT15-ABUS
Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m
CPU
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-C30BS(3m) - (Built into GOT) 7
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m (Including extension
COMPUTER LINK
*5 GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2 Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length)
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
ETHERNET
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 27
5.2 System Configuration
When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*4
Extension base
Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT 3rd GOT
unit
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - - - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
Extension Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
cable base GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
5 - 28 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2 System Configuration
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver
Bus(A/QnA) 2
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 33m
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
*5 *5
4
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
REDUNTANT
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
SYSTEM
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 33m
- (Built into GOT)
*5 *5 (Including the extension cable length)
BUS CONNECTION
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
*6 The bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT)
GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)
*7 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function
6
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 29
5.2 System Configuration
5.3 GOT Side Settings
5.3.1 Setting communication
5.3.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) (1) Bus(Q)
2.
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 7
Make the settings according to the usage Set the time period for a
Timeout Time
environment. (Sec.)
communication to time out. 3 to 90
(Default: 3)
5.3.2 Communication detail settings
POINT
The settings of connecting equipment can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
For details, refer to the following.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
5 - 30 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.3 GOT Side Settings
1
Setting Stage No. and Slot No.
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Communication interface setting by Utility POINT
The communication interface setting can be changed
on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing Before setting Stage No. and Slot No.
[Communication Settings] of project data. The PLC CPU recognizes the GOT as follows.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. • QCPU (Q mode) 2
GT User's Manual : Intelligent function module of 16 I/O points
(2) Precedence in communication settings • Other than QCPU (Q mode)
FOR MONITORING
(The GOT cannot be assigned to empty slots of the
ACCESS RANGE
main base unit or extension base unit.)
Empty
Empty
By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the
HOW TO MONITOR
portion of multiple connection of the controller. For
example, faulty station that has communication
REDUNTANT
timeout can be cut from the system.
SYSTEM
Disconnect the
Extension base unit
faulty station
Q68B
Extension
stage 1
5
BUS CONNECTION
Empty
Empty
CONNECTION TO
Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2
(Fundamentals) Slot No. :0 Slot No. :1 Slot No. :2
DIRECT
CPU
POINT 7
COMPUTER LINK
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 31
5.3 GOT Side Settings
POINT HINT
When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) Setting unused I/O slots to empty (0 points) (only when
In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer, set "10" to the connecting to QCPU (Q mode))
number of slots for the extension base used for GOT Setting unused I/O slots as empty slots (0 points) from
connection. "PC parameters" "I/O assignments" of GX Developer
Example: When setting "2" to Stage No. and "0" to Slot allows you to use I/O numbers of "16 points number
No. in the communication interface settings, of empty slots" for other purposes.
For details on I/O assignment settings, refer to the
set "10" to [2nd Stage].
following manual:
QnU User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals)
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Example: I/O assignment (when 16 points are assigned
to each of all modules installed with the PLC
CPU)
Main base unit
Q35B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 · · · · Slot No.
X00 to X0F
X10 to X1F
X20 to X2F
X30 to X3F
X40 to X4F
Extension base unit
Q68B
Extension
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 stage 1
XC0 to XCF
XA0 to XAF
XB0 to XBF
X50 to X5F
X60 to X6F
X70 to X7F
X80 to X8F
X90 to X9F
Q65B
Extension
13 14 15 16 17 stage 2
X100 to X10F
X110 to X11F
XD0 to XDF
XE0 to XEF
XF0 to XFF
1 2 3 4 5
Extension
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 stage 3
X1A0 to X1AF
X1B0 to X1BF
X120 to X12F
X130 to X13F
X140 to X14F
X150 to X15F
X160 to X16F
X170 to X17F
X180 to X18F
X190 to X19F
1 2 3 4 5
Set Empty (0 points)
to unused I/O slots.
5 - 32 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.3 GOT Side Settings
(2) Other than QCPU (Q mode)
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the extension
base unit.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When there is no extension base unit or no empty I/O
slots are left on an extension base unit, set an
additional stage, and assign the GOT to one of the I/O
slots.
(Assigning the GOT to an empty slot on the main base
unit is not allowed.)
(a) When there is an empty I/O slot on the extension
2
base unit
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Extension base unit
A1S65B
0 1 · · · · Slot No.
Empty
Empty
Empty
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Stage No. :1 Stage No. :1 Stage No. :1
Slot No. :2 Slot No. :3 Slot No. :4
5
BUS CONNECTION
(b) When there are no empty I/O slots on the
extension base unit
Main base unit
A1S35B
6
Empty
Empty
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
A1S65B 7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2
Slot No. :0 Slot No. :1 Slot No. :2
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 33
5.3 GOT Side Settings
5.4 Precautions
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, (b) When using GT15-C BS
Follow the GOT side grounding steps in (a) above
GT15-C [ ] BS for both GOTs.
5 - 34 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.4 Precautions
5.4.3 Powering OFF the GOT, 5.4.5 Powering OFF or resetting the 1
reapplying the power (OFF to PLC
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
ON)
MONITORING
(1) When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during
(1) Precautions for reapplying the power to the GOT monitoring
When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during
(OFF to ON)
monitoring, the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is
Do not power-cycle the GOT (OFF to ON) while the
PLC is ON.
generated. 2
When the PLC CPU is restored, the GOT automatically
Before doing so, be sure to turn off the PLC first.
DEVICE RANGE
Use System Information to reset the alarm.
For the System Information, refer to the following
HINT manual:
Operations causing automatic reboot of the GOT1000 GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Series Manual
Since the GOT1000 Series is automatically rebooted
3
(2) When turning OFF or resetting the PLC CPU before
in the following cases, the power does not need to be display of the user creation screen
FOR MONITORING
reapplied to the GOT (OFF to ON).
ACCESS RANGE
When the PLC CPU is turned OFF or reset before the
• When an OS is written from GT Designer3 or a CF user creation screen is displayed on the GOT,
card subsequent communications may be no longer
• When utility settings have been changed possible.
In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and
(2) When turning OFF the GOT before display of the
user creation screen
GOT.
4
(3) Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when
When the GOT is turned OFF before the user creation
HOW TO MONITOR
connecting QCPU (Q mode))
screen is displayed on the GOT, subsequent
5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to
REDUNTANT
communications may be no longer possible.
In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and No. of GOTs
SYSTEM
GOT.
(3) Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when 5.4.6 Position of the GOT
connecting QCPU (Q mode)) 5
5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to Always connect the GOT to the last base unit.
BUS CONNECTION
No. of GOTs Connecting a GOT between base units is not allowed.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
5.4.7 When the GOT is bus-
connected to a PLC CPU
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
the GOT will cancel the reset status of the PLC CPU.
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 35
5.4 Precautions
5.4.8 When designing the system (3) When using a Q00J/Q00UJ/Q00/Q00U/Q01/Q01U/
Q02UCPU
When the GOT is OFF, the following currents are supplied When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00JCPU or
to the GOT from the PLC CPU side (the power supply Q00UJCPU, number of extension stages including the
module on the main base unit).(The GOT does not operate GOT must be 2 or less.
when it is OFF.) When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00CPU,
Design the system so that the 5V DC current consumption Q00UCPU, Q01CPU, Q01UCPU or Q02UCPU,
of the modules on the main base unit and the total current number of extension stages including the GOT must be
consumption of the GOTs will not exceed the rated output 4 or less.
current of 5V DC of the power supply module in use.
Main base unit
Total current Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU
When connecting to No. of GOTs
consumption
5 2200mA
4 1760mA
When connecting to
3 1320mA
QCPU (Q mode) Extension base unit Extension
2 880mA stage 1
1 440mA
3 360mA
Other than QCPU (Q mode) 2 240mA
1 120mA
Stage No. setting
connector
GOT
5.4.9 When assigning GOT I/O Stage No. :2
signals
Q00JCPU,
Q00UJCPU
5 - 36 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.4 Precautions
(4) In the case of CPUs other than (2) (3) above
1
(4) When using the QA1S6 B extension base unit
PROCEDURES FOR
A GOT is physically connected to the last of all Even if the max. number of stages are used with no
extension base units. In the Stage No. setting, however, empty I/O slots, when there is a free space of 32 I/O
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
assign the GOT as a stage next to the last Q B type points or more, a GOT can be connected under the
extension base unit. following communication interface setting.
Assign the QA1S6 B type extension base unit as a For the communication interface setting, refer to the
stage next to the GOT. following.
DEVICE RANGE
Max.
When connecting to stage setting
No. Stage No. Slot No.
A1 CPU/A2USCPU(-S1)
Q68B 1 2 0
/QnAS(H)CPU(-S1)
Extension base unit
A2 CPU/Q2ACPU 3
7
4 0
3
A3 CPU/A4 CPU
FOR MONITORING
Q3ACPU/Q4ACPU 7 Cannot be used
ACCESS RANGE
QA1S68B A0J2HCPU 1
Extension base unit
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
5.4.11 When connecting to a
SYSTEM
QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type
BUS CONNECTION
A GOT can be connected to an extension connector on
only one side of the main base unit.
(Concurrently connecting GOTs to extension
connectors on both sides is not allowed)
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
extension stages.
CONNECTION
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 37
5.4 Precautions
5.4.12 When connecting multiple 5.4.13 When using a PLC CPU in the
GOTs direct mode
(1) System including different GOT series Note that when the I/O control mode of the PLC CPU is the
The GOT1000 series can be connected with GOT-A900 direct mode, and if the 1st GOT is connected to the main or
series in a system. extension base unit with a 5m extension cable (GT15-
When using them together, refer to the following AC50B, GT15-A1SC50NB), the input X of the empty I/O
Technical News. slot cannot be used.
Precautions when Replacing GOT-A900 Series No restrictions apply when the I/O control mode is the
with GOT1000 Series (GOT-A-0009) refresh mode.
The GOT1000 series cannot be used with GOTs other On PLC CPUs whose I/O control mode can be selected by
than GOT-A900 series in a system. a switch, set the I/O control mode to the refresh mode
before use.
GOT1000 GOT-A900 GOT800
POINT
In the cases where input X of an empty I/O slot is used
(1) When input X is assigned on the MELSECNET/10
network
(2) Restrictions on No. of GOTs
The number of connectable GOTs is restricted (2) When input X of an empty I/O slot is turned ON/
according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent OFF by the computer link module
function modules. (3) When input X of the I/O slot is turned ON/OFF by
the touch switch function (Bit SET/RST/Alternate/
Total number of Momentary) of GOT
Number of
connectable GOTs
When connecting to connectable
and intelligent
GOTs
function modules*1
5 GOTs
QCPU(Q mode),
Up to 5 + 6 intelligent
motion controller CPU (Q Series)
function modules*2
Not
QCPU (A mode) ―――――
connectable
QnACPU Up to 3 6 in total
AnUCPU,
AnACPU, Up to 3 6 in total
A2US(H)CPU
AnNCPU,
ACPU AnS(H)CPU, Up to 2 2 in total
A1SJ(H)CPU
A0J2HCPU Up to 1 2 in total
Not
A1FXCPU ―――――
connectable
A273UCPU,
Motion A273UHCPU(-S3),
Up to 3 6 in total
controller A373UCPU(-S3),
CPU A173UHCPU(-S1)
(A Series) A171SHCPUN,
Up to 2 2 in total
A172SHCPUN
*1 Indicates the following models:
AD51(S3), AD51H(S3), AD51FD(S3), AD57G(S3),
AJ71C21(S1), AJ71C22(S1), AJ71C23, AJ71C24(S3/S6/
S8), AJ71UC24, AJ71E71(-S3), AJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T,
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only),
A1SJ71C24(-R2/PRF/R4),
A1SJ71UC24(-R2/PRF/R4),
A1SJ71E71-B2/B5(-S3),
A1SJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SD51S,
A1SJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only)
*2 Only the A1SD51S can be connected to the QCPU (Q
Mode).
5 - 38 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.4 Precautions
5.4.14 When connecting to a 5.4.15 When monitoring the 1
Q4ARCPU redundant system Q170MCPU
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When the GOT is bus-connected to a Q4ARCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
redundant system device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
Connect the GOT to the last redundant extension base
When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
unit (A68RB) of the Q4ARCPU redundant system.
PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
For the redundant extension base units, use version B
When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to
2
or later.
The version can be confirmed in the DATE field of the "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
DEVICE RANGE
rating plate.
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Manual
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Caution
BUS CONNECTION
POINT For the troubleshooting, refer to the User's Manual for the
GOT you are using.
Precautions for Q4ARCPU redundant system
configurations
The GOT does not operate normally in the following 6
system configurations.
CONNECTION TO
(1) When the GOT is bus connected to the bus
switching module (A6RAF) on a redundant main
base unit (A32RB/A33RB)
DIRECT
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 39
5.4 Precautions
5 - 40 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.4 Precautions
6
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
DEVICE RANGE
6.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
6.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
6.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 4
HOW TO MONITOR
6.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 22
REDUNTANT
6.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25
SYSTEM
6.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
6-1
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
6.1 Connectable Model List
The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Series Model name Clock Refer to
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
Q02HCPU*1 RS-422
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1 6.2.1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU RS-232 *3 *3
Q25PHCPU RS-422
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
Q25PRHCPU (Main base)
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
- *3 *3 -
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q01UCPU
(Q mode) Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
RS-232
Q04UDHCPU 6.2.1
RS-422
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
6.2.1
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*4 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
RS-232 6.2.1
module Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - -
PROCEDURES FOR
L02CPU*1
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
L26CPU*1
L26CPU-BT*1 RS-232
MELSEC-L 6.2.2
L02CPU-P *1 RS-422
L26CPU-PBT*1
L02SCPU 2
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
DEVICE RANGE
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA RS-422
Q3ACPU 6.2.3
(QnACPU)*3
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
RS-422
3
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
FOR MONITORING
RS-422
ACCESS RANGE
6.2.3
(QnASCPU)*3 Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
4
A2ACPUP21
HOW TO MONITOR
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
REDUNTANT
A2ACPUP21-S1
SYSTEM
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21 5
MELSEC-A
A1NCPU *2 RS-422 6.2.4
BUS CONNECTION
(AnCPU)
A1NCPUP21*2
A1NCPUR21*2
A2NCPU*2
A2NCPUP21*2
A2NCPUR21*2
A2NCPU-S1*2 6
A2NCPUP21-S1*2
CONNECTION TO
A2NCPUP21-S1*2
A3NCPU*2
A3NCPUP21*2
DIRECT
A3NCPUP21*2
CPU
MELSEC-A
A2USCPU RS-422
(AnSCPU) 6.2.4
7
(Continued to next page)
COMPUTER LINK
• AnNCPU(S1) with link: Version L or later, AnNCPU(S1) without link: Version H or later
• A2SCPU: Version H or later
*3 GT10 can be connected to CPUs of the following HW versions or later.
Q2ACPU DA Q2ASCPU AL 8
Q2ACPU-S1 DA Q2ASCPU-S1 AL
Q3ACPU DA Q2ASHCPU BL
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Q4ACPU EA Q2ASHCPU-S1 BL
Q4ARCPU AL - -
MELSEC-A A2SCPU*1
RS-422 6.2.4
(AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1*1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU*1
A0J2HCPUP21*1
RS-422 6.2.4
A0J2HCPUR21*1
A0J2HCPU-DC24*1
A2CCPU*1
MELSEC-A
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-422 6.2.4
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*2*3
Q173CPU*2*3 RS-232
RS-422 6.2.1
Q172CPUN*2
Q173CPUN*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
Q172DCPU
controller
CPU (Q Series) Q173DCPU
RS-232 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4
6.2.1
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
PROCEDURES FOR
A273UCPU RS-422
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A273UHCPU
RS-422
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU RS-422 2
Motion
A171SCPU-S3
DEVICE RANGE
CPU (A Series) A171SCPU-S3N
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
RS-422
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU 3
A173UHCPU-S1
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS RS-232 6.2.6
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/ QJ72LP25-25
H QJ72LP25G *1
RS-232 6.2.1
Remote I/O
station
CC-Link IE
QJ72BR15
4
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - -
HOW TO MONITOR
head module
REDUNTANT
CC-Link IE
Field Network
SYSTEM
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
BUS CONNECTION
controller (Q172DRCPU)
FX0 RS-422 *4
FX0S
RS-422
FX0N
FX1 RS-422 *4
FX2
*3 RS-422 *4 6
FX2C
CONNECTION TO
FX1S
FX1NC
CPU
*3
RS-232
FX2NC
FX3G
RS-422
7
FX3GC RS-232
COMPUTER LINK
FX3U RS-422
CONNECTION
FX3UC
*1 GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system. GT11 can access only the connected host station
(remote I/O station).
*2 Access via QCPU (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.
*3 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function. 8
*4 Cannot be connected to products with input voltage 5V.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
RS-422 connector
QCPU GOT
conversion cable
Connection cable
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
- RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *7
3m - (Built into GOT)
*2
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *8
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*3
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT155 .
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS232 connection diagram 3))
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2))
*4 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
*5 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver Communication driver
DEVICE RANGE
LCPU Adapter GOT
conversion cable
Connection cable
3
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Communi connectable
Model RS-422 connector Max.
Adapter cation Cable model Option device Model
name conversion cable distance equipment*5
type
HOW TO MONITOR
L6ADP-R2 - RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P
REDUNTANT
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
SYSTEM
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *6
3m - (Built into GOT)
*2
GT16-C02R4-9S 5
MELSEC-L *1 1 GOT for 1 PLC
GT15-RS2T4-9P
BUS CONNECTION
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT)
FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m)
L6ADP-R2 RS-422
FA-CNV2405CBL(0.5m)
GT01-RS4-M*4 - 6
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
CONNECTION TO
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *7
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*3
DIRECT
CPU
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS232 connection diagram 3))
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2))
7
*4 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
COMPUTER LINK
*5 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
QnACPU GOT
Connection cable
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-QnA RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC
*3 -
GT01-RS4-M
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *5
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*2
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2))
*3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
*4 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
*5 Use the RS-422 connection model.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver Communication driver
DEVICE RANGE
Connection cable
FOR MONITORING
Model name Cable model Option device Model
equipment*4
ACCESS RANGE
type distance
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT)
4
MELSEC-A RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC
HOW TO MONITOR
*3 -
GT01-RS4-M
REDUNTANT
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
SYSTEM
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *5
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
5
*2
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
BUS CONNECTION
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2))
*3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
*4 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
*5 Use the RS-422 connection model.
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Function
Function
FXCPU expansion GOT
adapter
board Communication driver
Connection cable
MELSEC-FX
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) - (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
FX0 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
FX0S - - RS-422 GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX0N GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *6
30m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL
1 GOT for 1
*2
PLC
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX0S GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *6
- - RS-422 3m - (Built into GOT)
FX0N GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL
*2
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
FX1 GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT)
FX2 - - RS-422
FX2C GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *6
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*7
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1))
*3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
*4 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs.
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
*5 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings.
6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special
adapter
*6 Use the RS-422 connection model.
*7 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2))
PROCEDURES FOR
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of
Function Communi connectable
PREPARATORY
Model Function Max.
MONITORING
expansion cation Cable model Option device Model equipment
name *4*7 adapter*7 distance
board type *6
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S 2
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*5 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX1S GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
FX1N 1 GOT for 1
FX2N - - RS-422
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) PLC built-in 3
FX1NC GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *8 port
30m - (Built into GOT)
FOR MONITORING
FX2NC GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *8
4
3m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
HOW TO MONITOR
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
REDUNTANT
GT16-C02R4-9S
SYSTEM
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
5
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
BUS CONNECTION
GT01-RS4-M*5 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1
FX1S
FX1N-422-BD GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) function
FX1N - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
FX2N-422-BD expansion
FX2N GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *8 board 6
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
CONNECTION TO
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)
*3
DIRECT
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
CPU
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *8
3m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)
7
*3
COMPUTER LINK
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
CONNECTION
PROCEDURES FOR
PLC Connection cable GOT
PREPARATORY
Number of
MONITORING
Function Communi Cable model
Model Function Max. connectable
expansion cation Connection diagram Option device Model
name *1*4 adapter*4 distance equipment*3
board type number
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
2
15m 1 GOT for 1
FX1N-232-BD RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-RS4-M*2 - expansion board
RS232 connection *5
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)
3
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) - (Built into GOT)
or
FX1S 15m
FX2NC RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
FOR MONITORING
FX1N RS-232
ACCESS RANGE
-232ADP diagram 1)
FX2N GT01-RS4-M*2 -
RS232 connection *5
15m - (Built into GOT)
FX1N-CNV-BD diagram 4)
FX2N-CNV-BD
GT01-C30R2-25P(3m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
4
15m
RS232 connection
HOW TO MONITOR
FX0N GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232
-232ADP diagram 2)
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
REDUNTANT
RS232 connection
SYSTEM
15m - (Built into GOT) *5
diagram 5) 1 GOT for 1
function adapter
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
5
15m
RS232 connection
BUS CONNECTION
FX2NC GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232
-232ADP diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
RS232 connection *5
15m - (Built into GOT)
FX1NC diagram 4)
-
FX2NC
GT01-C30R2-25P(3m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
6
15m
FX0N RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION TO
RS-232
-232ADP diagram 2)
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
RS232 connection
DIRECT
*1 The function expansion board to be used differs according to the type of the FXCPU. Select the function expansion board from
the following table. 7
Function expansion board to be used
Item
COMPUTER LINK
6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special
adapter
*5 Use the RS-232 connection model.
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) - (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1
- - RS-422 GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) PLC built-in
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) port
30m - (Built into GOT) *7
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
*4*7
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) 3m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2
FX3G
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) - (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) function
FX3G-422-BD - RS-422
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) expansion
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) 30m - (Built into GOT) *7 board
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
*4
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) 3m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1))
*3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
*4 When connecting FX3G series to GT10 (input power supply: 5V), they cannot be connected to standard built-in port (RS-422) and
function expansion board (FX3G-422-BD) simultaneously.
*5 When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral
such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually.
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
*6 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings.
6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special
adapter
*7 Use the RS-422 connection model.
PROCEDURES FOR
PLC Connection cable GOT
PREPARATORY
Number of
MONITORING
Function Communi Cable model connectable
Model Function Max.
expansion cation Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
name *3 adapter*3 distance *2
board type number
DEVICE RANGE
FX3G-232-BD - RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
diagram 1) expansion
board
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
RS232 connection *4
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)
FX3G
3
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
FOR MONITORING
- (Built into GOT)
ACCESS RANGE
or
15m
FX3G-CNV-ADP RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1
- + RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P function
diagram 1)
FX3U-232ADP adapter
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
RS232 connection
diagram 4)
15m - (Built into GOT) *4
4
HOW TO MONITOR
*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
REDUNTANT
*2 When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral
SYSTEM
such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually.
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
*3
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings.
5
BUS CONNECTION
6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special
adapter
*4 Use the RS-232 connection model.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX3GC- /D GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-
RS-422 GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
FX3GC- /DSS in port
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *5
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
3m - (Built into GOT) *5
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1))
*3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
*4 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
*5 Use the RS-422 connection model.
RS232 connection *4
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)
PROCEDURES FOR
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of
Function
PREPARATORY
Function Commu connectable
Max.
MONITORING
Model name expansion adapter nication Cable model Option device Model equipment
distance
board*6 *6 type *5
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT15-RS4-9S 2
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) - (Built into GOT)
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) 1 GOT for 1
- - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
PLC built-in 3
30m - (Built into GOT) *7 port
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
FOR MONITORING
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
3m - (Built into GOT) *7 4
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
HOW TO MONITOR
FX3U
*3
FX3UC
REDUNTANT
(FX3UC- -LT(-2)) GT16-C02R4-9S
SYSTEM
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
- (Built into GOT)
5
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
BUS CONNECTION
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
1 GOT for 1
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
function
FX3U-422-BD - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) expansion
30m - (Built into GOT) *7
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) board
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) 6
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
CONNECTION TO
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
DIRECT
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
CPU
7
*2
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)
*3
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
COMPUTER LINK
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1))
*4 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
*5 When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral
such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually.
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two 8
GOTs.
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
*6 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special
adapter
*7 Use the RS-422 connection model.
RS232 connection *4
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)
PROCEDURES FOR
connection)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
PLC Connection cable GOT
Commun Number of connectable
Max.
Model name ication Cable model Option device Model equipment*4
distance
type
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
2
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m)
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
FX3UC- /D
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
3
1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in
FX3UC- /DS RS-422 GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
FOR MONITORING
port
ACCESS RANGE
FX3UC- /DSS GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *5
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
4
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
HOW TO MONITOR
3m - (Built into GOT) *5
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
REDUNTANT
*2
SYSTEM
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1))
*3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
BUS CONNECTION
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
*5 Use the RS-422 connection model.
When connecting to FX3UC (FX3UC- /D, FX3UC- /DS, FX3UC- /DSS) (RS-232
connection)
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
6
Commun Cable model connectable
Function Max.
Model name ication Connection diagram Option device Model
CONNECTION TO
adapter*3 distance equipment*2
type number
DIRECT
or
FX3UC- /D 15m
RS232 connection
FX3UC- /DS FX3U-232ADP RS-232
diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
1 GOT for 1 function
adapter 7
FX3UC- /DSS
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
COMPUTER LINK
RS232 connection
CONNECTION
6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special
adapter
*4 Use the RS-232 connection model.
WSCPU GOT
MELSEC-WS
Connection cable
Motion controller
GOT
CPU
A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24
Connection cable ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11)
Communication driver
QnA/L/Q CPU
( For GT10)
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *5
3m - (Built into GOT)
*1
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
+
30m GT15-RS4-9S
RS422 connection
diagram 3) - (Built into GOT)
1 GOT for 1 motion
MR-MQ100 RS-422
controller CPU
Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m)
+
30m - (Built into GOT) *6
RS422 connection
diagram 4)
*6
Q170MIOCBL1M-A(1m)*3 1m - (Built into GOT)
*1 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS232 connection diagram 3))
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).It cannot be mounted on GT155 .
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 5))
*4 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
*5 Use the RS-232 connection model.
*6 Use the RS-422 connection model.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When connecting to the motion controller CPU (Q Series) other than Q170MCPU, MR-MQ100
A motion controller CPU (Q Series) mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored.
The system configuration, connection conditions, and system equipment for connecting a GOT to a motion
controller CPU (Q Series) are the same as those for connecting to the QCPU.
6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU
2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
SD 2
Connection diagram RD 3
RS232 connection diagram 1) ER 6
FX PLC side
GOT side (D-sub 9-pin) DR 8
SG 5
1 1
RS 4
2 3
CS 7
3 2
NC 1
4 6
NC 9
5 5
6 8
RS232 connection diagram 5)
7 4 GOT side FX PLC side
(terminal block) (D-sub 25-pin)
8 7
9 9 SD 3
RD 2
RS232 connection diagram 2)
ER 5
FX PLC side
GOT side (D-sub 25-pin) DR 20
2 2 SG 7
3 3 RS 6
8 5 CS
4 6 NC
5 7 NC
6 20
RS232 connection diagram 6)
GOT side WS0-C20R2(male)side
(terminal block) (D-Sub 9-pin)
SD 3
RD 2
RS232 connection diagram 3)
ER
GOT side Untied wire color
(terminal block) of GT10-C30R2-6P DR
SD Brown SG 5
RD Red RS
ER Blue CS
DR Yellow NC
SG Green NC
RS Purple
CS
NC
NC
PROCEDURES FOR
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-25P
(1) Cable length
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The length of the RS-232 cable must be within the SDA Brown
maximum distance specifications. SDB Red
CSA Black
Connection diagram CSB White
FOR MONITORING
GOT side Untied wire color of
ACCESS RANGE
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-8P GOT side Q170MIOCBL1M-B side
4
RDA Orange RSA 3 3 RSA
HOW TO MONITOR
SG Green SG 5 5 SG
REDUNTANT
RSA Black SDB 6 6 SDB
SYSTEM
RSB White RDB 7 7 RDB
BUS CONNECTION
RS422 connection diagram 4)
GOT side Untied wire color of GOT side
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-8P (terminal block) Q170MIOCBL1M-B side
CONNECTION TO
SG Green SG 5 SG
- CSA 4 CSA
INPUT
DC5V + CSB 9 CSB
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
SG White(Dot mark:Black)
RSB
CSA
CSB
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
6.4.1 Setting communication
interface (Communication 4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set.
settings)
Make the settings according to the usage
environment. 2
6.4.2Communication detail settings
DEVICE RANGE
GOT Multi- Drop Connection Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
When using the serial multi-drop connection unit, refer
to the following.
POINT
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
The settings of connecting equipment can be
3
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Set the channel of the connected equipment. For details, refer to the following:
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
2.
6.4.2 Communication detail settings
4
3. Make the settings according to the usage environment.
HOW TO MONITOR
(1) A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24
REDUNTANT
4.
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
Click!
equipment.
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi 19200bps,
Transmission (Default: 115200bps)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller 38400bps,
Type to be connected.
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of
the connected equipment,
57600bps, 7
115200bps
• I/F: Interface to be used communication is performed at the
fastest transmission speed supported
COMPUTER LINK
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following 2
manual.
GT User's Manual
FOR MONITORING
Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the
ACCESS RANGE
connected equipment.
(Default: 9600bps) controller
Transmission
Speed
When the setting exceeds the limit of the 9600bps By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the
connected equipment, communication is portion of multiple connection of the controller. For
performed at the fastest transmission
speed supported by the connected
example, faulty station that has communication
equipment. timeout can be cut from the system.
Disconnect the 4
(5) MELSEC-WS faulty station
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
For details of the setting contents of GOT internal
device, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals)
CONNECTION TO
connected equipment. 9600bps,
(Default: 115200bps) 19200bps,
Transmission
When the setting exceeds the limit of the 38400bps,
Speed
DIRECT
(Default: 3times)
Set the time period for a communication to
Timeout Time time out. 1 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
Set this item to adjust the transmission
timing of the communication request from
8
Delay Time 0 to 300 (ms)
the GOT.
(Default: 5ms)
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
DEVICE RANGE
7.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 4
7.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
HOW TO MONITOR
7.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
7.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19
7.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 22
5
7.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
7-1
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
RS-422 7.2.1
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU RS-232 *2 *2
RS-422 7.2.1
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
- *2 *2 -
Q25PRHCPU (Main base)
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base) RS-232 *2 *2
RS-422 7.2.1
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q01UCPU
(Q mode) Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
RS-232
Q04UDEHCPU 7.2.1
RS-422
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
(Continued to next page)
*1 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later.
*2 For GT10, do not include in the multiple CPU system configuration.
PROCEDURES FOR
Series Model name Clock Communication Refer to
PREPARATORY
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*1*2 RS-232
MONITORING
module RS-422 7.2.1
Q24DHCCPU-V*2
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - -
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
2
RS-232
MELSEC-L 7.2.2
L02CPU-P RS-422
FOR MONITORING
MELSEC-QnA
ACCESS RANGE
Q3ACPU RS-422
(QnACPU) 7.2.4
*3 Q4ACPU
RS-232
Q4ARCPU
RS-422
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA
(QnASCPU)
Q2ASCPU-S1
Q2ASHCPU
RS-232
RS-422 7.2.5 4
*3
HOW TO MONITOR
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
REDUNTANT
A2UCPU-S1
SYSTEM
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21 5
A2ACPUR21
BUS CONNECTION
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
(AnCPU)
A3ACPUR21
RS-232
RS-422 7.2.6 6
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
CONNECTION TO
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
DIRECT
A2NCPUP21
CPU
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
7
A2NCPUR21-S1
COMPUTER LINK
A3NCPU
CONNECTION
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
(In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified,
an access is made to the internal relay.)
• File register (R)
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU*1
MELSEC-A A2SCPU*1 RS-232
(AnSCPU) RS-422 7.2.7
A2SCPU-S1*1
A2SHCPU*1
A2SHCPU-S1*1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU*1
A0J2HCPU*1
A0J2HCPUP21*1 RS-232
RS-422 7.2.7
*1
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24*1
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A
A2CCPUP21 - -
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-232
RS-422 7.2.7
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
- -
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*2*3
Q173CPU*2*3
Q172CPUN*2
Q173CPUN*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion RS-232
Q172DCPU RS-422 7.2.1
controller CPU
(Q Series) Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*4
MR-MQ100 - -
PROCEDURES FOR
A273UCPU
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A273UHCPU
RS-232
A273UHCPU-S3 7.2.6
RS-422
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU 2
Motion A171SCPU-S3
DEVICE RANGE
(A Series)
A171SHCPU*2
RS-232
A171SHCPUN*2 7.2.7
RS-422
A172SHCPU*2
A172SHCPUN*2
A173UHCPU
3
FOR MONITORING
A173UHCPU-S1
ACCESS RANGE
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25-25
RS-232 *1
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G 7.2.1
RS-422
4
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
RS-232 *3 *3 *3
HOW TO MONITOR
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 7.2.2
RS-422
head module
REDUNTANT
CC-Link IE
Field Network
SYSTEM
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
BUS CONNECTION
controller (Q172DRCPU) RS-422 7.2.1
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
6
FX2C
CONNECTION TO
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
DIRECT
FX1NC
CPU
FX2NC -
FX3G 7
FX3GC
-
COMPUTER LINK
FX3U
CONNECTION
FX3UC
*1 GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system. GT11 can access only the connected host station
(remote I/O station).
*2 For computer link connection of A171SHCPU(N) and A172SHCPU(N), use the computer link module whose software version is
*3
version U or later.
GT11,GT10 can not access the master station on CC-Link IE field network system. GT11,GT10 can access only the connected
8
host station (head module station).
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
A1SJ71QC24*4, A1SJ71QC24-R2*4
AJ71UC24*4*6
AJ71UC24*4*5
A2CCPUC24*4, A2CCPUC24-PRF*4
*1 Communication cannot be performed with RS-485.
A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used.
*2 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used for the function version A. Both CH1 and CH2 can be used together for the function version B or
later.
*3 Only CH2 can be connected.
*4 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used.
*5 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU.
*6 The module operates in the device range on AnACPU.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
7.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
2
A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU
DEVICE RANGE
Serial
QCPU GOT
communication
(Q mode)
module
Connection cable
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
Serial Communi connectable
Max.
Model name communication cation Cable model Option device Model
distance equipment*5
*1 type
module
4
HOW TO MONITOR
GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) - (Built into GOT)
QJ71C24 or
QJ71C24N 15m
REDUNTANT
QJ71C24-R2 RS232 connection
RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
SYSTEM
QJ71C24N-R2 diagram 1)
QJ71CMO
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
QJ71CMON
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT) *6 5
diagram 3)
2 GOTs for 1 serial
BUS CONNECTION
RS422 connection communication
1200m - (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-Q diagram 2) module*3
(Q mode)
GT16-C02R4-9S 1 GOT for 1 modem
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) interface module
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
QJ71C24
QJ71C24N RS-422
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
1200m GT15-RS4-9S 6
QJ71C24N-R4 or
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*4 -
DIRECT
CPU
RS422 connection *7
1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. 7
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic)
COMPUTER LINK
For details on the system configuration on the modem interface module side, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
*5
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to four 8
GOTs.
However, when using modem interface modules or serial communication modules (function version A), up to two GOTs can be
connected.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Serial
LCPU communication GOT
module
Connection cable
RS232 connection *4
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
RS422 connection
1200m - (Built into GOT) 2 GOTs for 1 serial
MELSEC-L diagram 2) communication
module
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
1200m GT15-RS4-9S
LJ71C24 RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver Communication driver
2
QCPU Computer
GOT
DEVICE RANGE
Connection cable
FOR MONITORING
Commun connectable
Computer link Max.
ACCESS RANGE
Model name *1
ication Cable model Option device Model equipment
module distance
type
GT09-C30R2-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
A1SJ71UC24-R2 15m
A1SJ71C24-R2
RS-232
RS232 connection
diagram 1)
4
A1SJ71UC24-PRF GT15-RS2-9P
HOW TO MONITOR
A1SJ71C24-PRF
RS232 connection *3
15m - (Built into GOT)
REDUNTANT
diagram 3)
SYSTEM
RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-Q diagram 2) 1 GOT for 1 computer
(A mode) link module
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S 5
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
BUS CONNECTION
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
A1SJ71UC24-R4 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
RS-422 500m GT15-RS4-9S
A1SJ71C24-R4 or
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
RS422 connection
diagram 3)
500m - (Built into GOT) *4
6
*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION TO
Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 Use the RS-232 connection model.
DIRECT
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Serial communication
QnACPU module GOT
(QnACPU type) /Computer link module
Connection cable
RS232 connection *4
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT)
AJ71QC24-R4
RS-422 GT01-RS4-M*3 -
AJ71QC24N-R4
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) 1 GOT for 1 serial
MELSEC-QnA GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) communication
(QnACPU) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) module
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) 30m - (Built into GOT) *5
or
RS422 connection
diagram 4)
RS422 connection
1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
AJ71QC24 GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
AJ71QC24N 1200m GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
AJ71QC24-R4 or
AJ71QC24N-R4 - (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual.
PROCEDURES FOR
Computer link Max. connectable
Model name ication Cable model Option device Model
module*1 distance equipment
PREPARATORY
type
MONITORING
GT09-C30R2-25P(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
or
15m
RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
AJ71UC24 RS-232
diagram 2)
GT01-RS4-M*3 - 2
RS232 connection *4
15m - (Built into GOT)
DEVICE RANGE
RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2) 1 GOT for 1
MELSEC-QnA
computer link
(QnACPU) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) module
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) 9P*2
AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) 500m GT15-RS4-9S 3
or
FOR MONITORING
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
ACCESS RANGE
diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual.
HOW TO MONITOR
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
REDUNTANT
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
SYSTEM
*4 Use the RS-232 connection model.
*5 Use the RS-422 connection model.
BUS CONNECTION
Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver
QnACPU
(QnACPU type)
Serial communication
module GOT 6
/Computer link module
CONNECTION TO
Connection cable
DIRECT
CPU
Model name
Serial communication
Commun
ication Cable model
Max.
Option device Model
connectable 7
module*1 distance equipment
type
COMPUTER LINK
GT09-C30R2-9P(3m)
A1SJ71QC24 - (Built into GOT)
CONNECTION
or
A1SJ71QC24N 15m 1 GOT for 1
MELSEC-QnA A1SJ71QC24N1 RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P serial
RS-232
(QnACPU) A1SJ71QC24-R2 diagram 1) communication
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
A1SJ71QC24N-R2 module
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2 RS232 connection
diagram 3)
15m - (Built into GOT) *3
8
*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual.
RS422 connection
1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) 1 GOT for 1
A1SJ71QC24 1200m GT15-RS4-9S
MELSEC-QnA GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) serial
A1SJ71QC24N RS-422
(QnACPU) or communication
A1SJ71QC24N1
- (Built into GOT) module
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2) 1 GOT for 1
MELSEC-QnA
computer link
(QnACPU) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) module
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
A1SJ71UC24-R4 GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) 500m
A1SJ71C24-R4 or
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual.
For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual.
Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual
When connecting to a computer link module, set the communication driver to [AJ71C24/UC24].
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
ACPU Computer
link module GOT
(AnCPU type) Communication driver
Connection cable 2
AJ71C24/UC24
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT09-C30R2-25P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection
AJ71UC24 RS-232 diagram 2)
GT15-RS2-9P
RS232 connection
diagram 4)
15m - (Built into GOT) *3 4
HOW TO MONITOR
RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-A diagram 2) 1 GOT for 1 computer link
REDUNTANT
(AnCPU) module
SYSTEM
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m)
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
or
500m GT15-RS4-9S
5
RS422 connection
BUS CONNECTION
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
RS422 connection *4
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual.
*2
Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
6
*3 Use the RS-232 connection model.
CONNECTION TO
*4 Use the RS-422 connection model.
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
ACPU
Computer link
(AnSPU type) GOT
module Communication driver
(A0J2HCPU,A2CCPUC)
Connection cable
AJ71C24/UC24
A1SJ71UC24-R2 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
A1SJ71C24-R2
15m
A1SJ71UC24-PRF RS232 connection
A1SJ71C24-PRF RS-232 diagram 1)
A1SCPUC24-R2 GT15-RS2-9P
A2CCPUC24
A2CCPUC24-PRF RS232 connection *3
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
RS422 connection *4
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)
*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 2)
GOT and the PLC.
PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin
7.3.1 RS-232 cable For GT16, GT15
GOT side
SG 5 7 SG
3
CD 1 7 RS(RTS)
FOR MONITORING
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
ACCESS RANGE
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS)
SG 5 5 SG - 9 1 FG
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , Serial Multi-Drop Unit
(When connecting to the Q/QnA Serial Communication Module)
RS(RTS) 7 1 CD
GOT side 4
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side
HOW TO MONITOR
- 9 9 -
NC 1 4 RS(RTS)
REDUNTANT
For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , Serial Multi-Drop Unit RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD)
SYSTEM
(When connecting to the Q/QnA/L Serial Communication Module)
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD)
GOT side
(D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
RS(RTS)
SG 5 7 SG 5
NC 1 7
BUS CONNECTION
DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD)
RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS)
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
- 9 1 FG
SG 5 5 SG
CONNECTION TO
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side
- 9 9 -
NC 1 4 RS(RTS)
DIRECT
NC 1 1 CD
CONNECTION
DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD)
RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS)
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
- 9 1 FG
SG 5 5 SG
8
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
RS(RTS) 7 7 RS(RTS)
CONNECTION
CS(CTS) CS(CTS)
ETHERNET
8 8
- 9 9 -
SD 2 RD(RXD) SD 3 RD(RXD)
RD 3 SD(TXD) RD 2 SD(TXD)
ER 6 DR(DSR) ER 6 DR(DSR)
DR 4 ER(DTR) DR 20 ER(DTR)
SG 5 SG SG 7 SG
RS 1 CD RS 8 CD
CS 7 RS(RTS) CS 4 RS(RTS)
NC 8 CS(CTS) NC 5 CS(CTS)
NC 9 - NC 1 FG
SD 2 RD(RXD) SD 3 RD(RXD)
RD 3 SD(TXD) RD 2 SD(TXD)
ER 6 DR(DSR) ER 6 DR(DSR)
DR 4 ER(DTR) DR 20 ER(DTR)
SG 5 SG SG 7 SG
RS 1 CD RS 8 CD
CS 7 RS(RTS) CS 4 RS(RTS)
NC 8 CS(CTS) NC 5 CS(CTS)
NC 9 - NC 1 FG
PROCEDURES FOR
Connection diagram
PREPARATORY
GOT side
MONITORING
(terminal block) PLC side
RS422 connection diagram 1)
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ), Serial Multi-Drop Unit SDA RDA
RDA SDA
GOT side PLC side
RSA - 2
R
SDA 1 RDA CSA -
FOR MONITORING
FG
ACCESS RANGE
RSB 8 -
CSB 9 -
RS422 connection diagram 4)
FG - FG (For GT1030, GT1020)
GOT side
(terminal block)
Untied wire color of
GT10-C□□□R4-25P 4
RS422 connection diagram 2)
HOW TO MONITOR
(For GT16)
SDA Brown
GOT side PLC side
REDUNTANT
SDB Red
SYSTEM
R RDA Orange
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RDA
RDB Yellow
SDB1(TXD1-) RDB
5
2
SG Green
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SDA
RSA Blue
BUS CONNECTION
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDB
RSB Purple
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 SG
CSA Black
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 FG
CSB White
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
6
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RSA(RTS+) 9
Precautions when preparing a cable
CONNECTION TO
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-422 cable must be 1200m or less.
CSB(CTS-)
DIRECT
12
(2) GOT side connector
CPU
SG 13
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
NC 14
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 7
Shell
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
7.4.1 Setting communication
interface (Communication
POINT
settings)
The settings of connecting equipment can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
2
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
For details, refer to the following.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(1) A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24
4.
HOW TO MONITOR
Click!
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
menu.
5
BUS CONNECTION
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
Item Description Range
channel to be used from the list menu.
Set this item when change the
3. Set the following items. transmission speed used for
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi communication with the connected
9600bps,
equipment.
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller 19200bps,
Type to be connected.
Transmission
Speed
(Default: 115200bps)
When the setting exceeds the limit of
38400bps, 6
57600bps,
• I/F: Interface to be used the connected equipment,
115200bps
CONNECTION TO
• Driver: Set either of the following according to the communication is performed at the
Controller Type to be connected. fastest transmission speed supported
by the connected equipment.
For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11
DIRECT
QnA/L/Q CPU
CONNECTION
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set this item to adjust the transmission
Make the settings according to the usage timing of the communication request
environment.
Delay Time
from the GOT.
0 to 300 (ms)
8
(Default: 0ms)
7.4.2 Communication detail settings
Select the communication format.
Format*3 1, 2
CONNECTION
(Default: 1)
ETHERNET
(a) [Intelligent function module switch setting] of Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
PLC
(Default: 1bit)
Switch No. CH1 side CH2 side Specify whether or not to perform a
parity check, and how it is performed
Switch 1 0000H - Parity Odd (fixed)
during communication.
Switch 2 0000H -
(Default: Odd)
Switch 3 - 0000H Set the number of retries to be
Switch 4 - 0000H performed when a communication
Switch 5 0000H 0000H timeout occurs. When receiving no
Retry 0 to 5times
response after retries, the
7.5 PLC Side Setting communication times out.
(b) GOT communication settings (Default: 0time)
Set the time period for a communication
Format Timeout Time 3 to 30sec
to time out. (Default: 3sec)
1 Set this item to adjust the transmission
(2) To maintain the communication settings of the Delay Time timing of the communication request 0 to 300 (ms)
from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)
serial communication module which is connected
to F900, set the communication setting of the GOT
as follows.
The value of Transmission Speed remains
38400bps.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
Transmission
Set this item when change the
transmission speed used for
4800bps,
Set this item when change the
transmission speed used for
3
9600bps,
Speed communication with the connected communication with the connected
FOR MONITORING
19200bps 9600bps,
ACCESS RANGE
equipment. (Default: 19200bps) equipment.
19200bps,
Set this item when change the data Transmission (Default: 115200bps)
38400bps,
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of
length used for communication with the 57600bps,
Data Bit 8bit (fixed) the connected equipment,
connected equipment. 115200bps
communication is performed at the
(Default: 8bit)
fastest transmission speed supported
Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
by the connected equipment.
4
(Default: 1bit)
HOW TO MONITOR
Specify whether or not to perform a
parity check, and how it is performed POINT
Parity Odd (fixed)
REDUNTANT
during communication.
(Default: Odd) (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
SYSTEM
Set the number of retries to be The communication interface setting can be
performed when a communication changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
timeout occurs. When receiving no after writing [Communication Settings] of project
Retry
response after retries, the
0 to 5times
data. 5
communication times out. For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
BUS CONNECTION
(Default: 0time)
Timeout Time
Set the time period for a communication
3 to 30sec
GT User's Manual
to time out. (Default: 3sec) (2) Precedence in communication settings
Set this item to adjust the transmission When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Delay Time timing of the communication request 0 to 300 (ms) Utility, the latest setting is effective.
from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)
6
HINT
CONNECTION TO
Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the
controller
By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the
DIRECT
8
For details of the setting contents of GOT internal
device, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
AJ71QC24N-R4,
Serial communication module AJ71QC24-R4
7.5.2
(QnA Series)
A1SJ71QC24N1,
Bit
A1SJ71QC24N, Set
Switch Specifi
A1SJ71QC24 Positi Description
No. ed value*3
on
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2, value
A1SJ71QC24N-R2, Operation
b0 OFF
A1SJ71QC24-R2 setting
b1 OFF Data Bit
AJ71UC24 7.5.3 b2 OFF Parity Bit
A1SJ71UC24-R2, Even/Odd
b3 OFF
A1SJ71UC24-PRF, parity
7.5.3 b4 OFF CH1 Stop bit
A1SJ71C24-R2, (Operates
transmiss Sum according
A1SJ71C24-PRF
b5 OFF ion check to the GOT
Computer link module Switch 1 0000H
A1SJ71UC24-R4, settings*1 code side
7.5.3
A1SJ71C24-R4 Write specificatio
b6 OFF during ns.)
A1SCPUC24-R2 7.5.3
RUN
A2CCPUC24, Setting
7.5.3
A2CCPUC24-PRF b7 OFF modifica-
tions
b8 to CH1 transmission
―
b15 speed setting*2
GX
CH1 Communication
Switch 2 ― Developer 0000H
protocol setting
connection
Switch 5 ― Station number setting 0th station 0000H
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When the [intelligent function module switch
setting] has been set
After writing PLC parameters to the PLC CPU,
turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or
Switch
Bit
Set
reset the PLC CPU.
(2) Connection of multiple GOTs
2
Specifi Description
Positi To some serial communication module models,
No. value*3
DEVICE RANGE
value
CH2.
Operation
b0 OFF
setting
Connection of 2 GOTs
b1 OFF Data bit Model
Function version A Function version B
b2 OFF
Parity
bit
QJ71C24(-R2) 3
QJ71C24N(-R2/R4) -
FOR MONITORING
Even/odd
b3 OFF
ACCESS RANGE
parity
CH2 LJ71C24(-R2) -
(Operates
b4 OFF transmiss Stop bit
according : 2 GOTs connectable, : 1 GOT connectable, -: Not applicable
ion Sum to the GOT
Switch 3
b5 OFF settings*1 check 0000H (3) When connecting to the modem interface module
side
code specificatio
When the modem interface module is connected,
Write
ns.) only CH2 can be used. 4
b6 OFF during
HOW TO MONITOR
RUN
REDUNTANT
Setting
b7 OFF modifica-
SYSTEM
tions
b8 to CH2 transmission
―
b15 speed setting*2
5
GX
CH2 Communication
BUS CONNECTION
Switch 4 ― Developer 0000H
protocol setting
connection
CONNECTION TO
Data bit 8bits
*3 When the value of switch setting is other than "0", the setting
of [Format] and [Transmission Speed] on the GOT side are
CONNECTION
required to be changed.
7.4.2 Communication detail settings
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Transmission
Setting Set
Switch setting on serial communication specifications setting
switch
Description
value
switch
module
Operation Independent
Set the Station number switches, the Mode setting SW01
setting operation
OFF
switch for the channel used for GOT connection, and Data bit
AJ71QC24(N)
SW02 8bits ON
the Transmission specifications switches. (-R2/R4) setting
ON SW ON Parity bit
AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24N1, A1SJ71QC24N1-R2 01 SW03 enable/disable Enable ON
02
AJ71QC24N-R4,AJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2, setting
03
AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4 A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2 04
Even/odd parity
AJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N 05 SW04 Odd OFF
RUN
CPUR/W
CH1.ERR.
CH2.ERR.
ERR.
RUN
C.R/W
ERROR
SW.E ERR. 06
setting
C/N NEU NEU C/N
P/S ACK ACK P/S 07
SW05 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF
NEU NEU
ACK ACK PRO NAK NAK PRO
NAK
C/N
NAK
C/N
SID SD.W.
SD
SD.W.
SD
SIO
08
P/S P/S
CH.1 CH.2 RD RD
PRO PRO
Sum check
SIO SIO CH1 CH2
SD.WAIT SD.WAIT
SD SD DISPLAY AB
RD RD STS ERR.
10 1
09 SW06 enable/disable Enable ON
10 1
5 5
(3) 10 setting
5
0
5
0
STATION
No. (3) STATION NO.
0 0
11
CH1 CH2
Write during
CH1 CH2
8 8 8 8
12
MODE
(1) (1)
C
MODE
4
C
4
SW
01 1
02
disable setting
03
2
04 3
A1SJ71QC24(N)
05
4
(2)
06
07 5
08 6
SW 7
(2)
(N1)(-R2)*1 Setting change Disable
09
8
10
9
SW08 OFF
11
12
10
11
12
enable/disable (prohibit)
ON CH2 RS-422/RS-485
1
2 (Consistent
SDA
SW09
CH1 SG 3 Transmission with the GOT
RS-232C
4 to See (a)
SDB
speed setting side
(FG) 5 SW12
RDA 6 specifications)
(NC)
SW 7
CH2
RS422
RS485
RDB 8 The switch is
SDA
RDA
9 located on
CH1 RS-232-C A1SJ71QC24N
10
the left side
SDB
RDB
NC 11 SW13
SG
12 of the
FG
to ― All OFF
ON module.
SW15
(only on
AJ71QC24 (-
(1) Mode setting switch R2/R4))
1 9
Dedicated protocol (Format 5)
5 2 10
MODE (Binary mode)
3 11
4 12
SW
5
*1 The mode switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 (N) (-R2/
R4). 6
7
8
ON
PROCEDURES FOR
follows.
PREPARATORY
The transmission speed setting must be consistent
MONITORING
with that of the GOT side.
POINT
Transmission speed*1*2*3
Setting Computer link module
Switch 4800
bps
9600
bps
19200
bps
38400
bps*4
57600
bps*4
115200
bps*4
For details of the computer link module, refer to the 2
following manual.
DEVICE RANGE
SW10 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON func.) User’s Manual
SW11 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
SW12 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON Switch setting on the computer link module
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are Set the Mode setting switch, the Transmission
*2
shown.
When the software version of AJ71QC24 (-R2/R4) and
specifications switches and the Station number setting 3
A1SJ71QC24 (-R2) is "L" or earlier, and when 2 devices are switches.
FOR MONITORING
connected to the two interfaces individually, make the setting
ACCESS RANGE
so that the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4,
within 19200bps. AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R4
When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is A1SJ71C24-R2,
RUN 2-C/N
2 - SD 2-P/S
2 - RD 2 - PRO A1SJ71UC24 - R4
2 - SIO
A1SJ71C24-PRF
SD ACK SET E.
2 - ACK 4-P/S L5
RD NAK SCAN E.
2 - NAK 4 - PRO L6
CPU C/N SIO E.
L1 4 - NEU 4 - SIO
4
C/N C/N SW
be set to the one where the device is connected.In this MODE (1) PRO
SIO
P/S 01
02
03
STATION NO.
7 8
(2)
instance, set SW09 to SW12 to "OFF" on the other side. SIO 04
0
10
(3)
STATION NO. 2 3
10 05
0
08
HOW TO MONITOR
1 23
(1) 11
B CD
(1)
F0
89
12
MODE
(2)
REDUNTANT
21 05 MODE
of A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)).
4.FORM4 SG
11
SYSTEM
12 5.MOFORM SDB
RDA
RS-232-C
within 115200bps (within 230400bps in the case of
NC
RS-232-C RDB
A1SJ71UC24 - R4
BUS CONNECTION
SG
SDB
A1SCPUC24-R2
(3) Station number switch (for both CH1 and CH2) MELSEC A1S CPU24-R2
STOP
MELSEC A1S CPU24-R2
STOP
RUN L CLR RUN RUN L CLR RUN
Set
6
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI
*5 Contents
Station number switch
value
(1)
CONNECTION TO
10 1 Set the station number of the
(2)
serial communication module
0
STATION to which an access is made
No.
from the GOT.
DIRECT
CPU
*5 The station number switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 PULL
(N) (-R2/R4).
When the cover is open
7
POINT A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
(1)
When the switch setting has been changed
(3)
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
PLC CPU.
8
(2)
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
012
RS-422
5
345
connection SW ON Write during RUN
SW04 Enabled ON
03 enabled/disabled setting
04 SW05 (Consistent See
(2) Transmission specifications switch Transmission speed with the GOT descripti
ON SW06
(a) AJ71UC24 setting side ons
05 SW07 specifications) below.
06
Transmission 07 SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON
Setting Set
specifications Description 08 SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON
switch value
switch 09
10 SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF
RS-232 11
OFF SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF
connection 12
SW11 Main channel setting SW12 Sum check setting Set ON
RS-422
ON
connection • Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07)
SW12 Data bit setting 8bits ON Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as
ON
SW11 SW13
follows.
(Consistent See
SW12 Transmission speed with the GOT descripti The transmission speed setting must be consistent
SW14
SW13 setting side ons with that of the GOT side.
SW14 SW15 specifications) below.
SW15
SW16 SW16 Parity bit setting Set ON Transmission speed*1
Setting switch
SW17 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps
SW17 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF
SW18
ON SW18 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW05 OFF ON OFF
SW21 SW06 OFF OFF ON
SW21 Sum check setting Set ON
SW22
SW23 Write during RUN SW07 ON ON ON
SW24 SW22 Enabled ON
enabled/disabled setting
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
Computer link/multi-drop Computer shown.
SW23 ON
selection link
(c) A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4
Master station/Local (Setting
SW24 OFF
station setting ignored)
Transmission
Setting Set
• Transmission speed setting (SW13 to SW15) specifications Description
switch value
Set the transmission speed (SW13 to SW15) as switch
follows. Master station/Local (Setting
SW01 OFF
The transmission speed setting must be consistent station setting ignored)
with that of the GOT side. Computer link/multi-drop Computer
SW02 ON
selection link
*1
SW ON
Transmission speed 01 SW03 Unused ― OFF
Setting switch
4800bps 9600bps 19200bps
02
03 Write during RUN
SW04 Enabled ON
enabled/disabled setting
SW13 OFF ON OFF 04
ON SW05 (Consistent See
SW14 OFF OFF ON 05 Transmission speed with the GOT descripti
06 SW06
SW15 ON ON ON setting side ons
07 SW07 specifications) below.
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side 08
09 SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON
are shown.
10
SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON
11
12 SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF
PROCEDURES FOR
follows. Transmission
Setting Set
PREPARATORY
The transmission speed setting must be consistent specifications Description
MONITORING
switch value
with that of the GOT side. switch
SW11 (Consistent
See
Transmission speed*1 Transmission speed with the GOT
Setting switch SW12 descriptio
setting side
ns below.
SW05
4800bps
OFF
9600bps
ON
19200bps
OFF
ON OFF
SW13 specifications)
2
SW SW14 Data bit setting 8bits ON
DEVICE RANGE
12
13
SW07 ON ON ON Even/odd parity
14 SW16 Odd OFF
15 setting
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are 16
shown. 17 SW17 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF
18
SW18 Sum check setting Set ON
(d) A1SCPUC24-R2 19
ON
20
SW19 Main channel setting RS-232 OFF
Transmission Write during RUN
Setting
specifications Description Set value
FOR MONITORING
SW20 enabled/ Enabled ON
switch
ACCESS RANGE
switch disabled setting
HOW TO MONITOR
5 Data bit setting 8bits ON Setting switch
4800bps 9600bps 19200bps
REDUNTANT
6 Parity bit setting Set ON
SW11 OFF ON OFF
SYSTEM
Even/odd parity
7 Odd OFF
setting SW12 OFF OFF ON
8 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW13 ON ON ON
9 Sum check setting Set ON *1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are 5
shown.
• Transmission speed setting (2 to 4)
BUS CONNECTION
Set the transmission speed (2 to 4) as follows. (3) Station number setting switch
The transmission speed setting must be consistent
with that of the GOT side. Station number switch*2 Description Set value
CONNECTION TO
7 8
3 OFF OFF ON from the GOT.
9 01
4 5 6
1
4 ON ON ON 2 3 DIRECT
A1SJ71UC24-R4.
POINT
7
COMPUTER LINK
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Time taken until the PLC runs when
MONITORING
connected in the multiple CPU system
The following time is taken until the PLC runs.
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10
seconds or more 2
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
FOR MONITORING
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering
ACCESS RANGE
process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the
power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until
the SD memory card becomes available. When the
GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a
system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in
the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
4
HOW TO MONITOR
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Manual
REDUNTANT
When monitoring the Q170MCPU
SYSTEM
Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
5
PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
BUS CONNECTION
When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
cannot be executed.
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version
Manual
Screen Design 6
CONNECTION TO
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
DEVICE RANGE
8.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
8.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2
4
8.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
HOW TO MONITOR
8.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
REDUNTANT
8.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20
SYSTEM
8.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8-1
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
PROCEDURES FOR
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Ethernet
PREPARATORY
8.2.1
MONITORING
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT 8.2.2
MELSEC-L Ethernet
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
8.2.1
2
L02SCPU
Q2ACPU*3
MELSEC-QnA
Q2ACPU-S1*3 3
Q3ACPU*3 Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1
8.2.1
(QnACPU)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Q4ACPU*3
Q4ARCPU*3
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1
(QnASCPU) 8.2.1
Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1 4
A2UCPU
HOW TO MONITOR
A2UCPU-S1
REDUNTANT
A3UCPU
SYSTEM
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21 5
A2ACPU-S1
BUS CONNECTION
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 Ethernet 8.2.1
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU 6
A1NCPUP21
CONNECTION TO
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
DIRECT
A2NCPUR21
CPU
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1 7
A2NCPUR21-S1
COMPUTER LINK
A3NCPU
CONNECTION
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
*2 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
*3 Combination with the Ethernet module is restricted. 8.1.2 Ethernet module
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Motion Q173HCPU
controller Q172DCPU
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU 8.2.1
Ethernet
Q173DSCPU 8.2.5
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100
PROCEDURES FOR
A273UCPU
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
Motion
A171SCPU 2
controller A171SCPU-S3
DEVICE RANGE
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU 3
A173UHCPU-S1
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25-25
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G Ethernet 8.2.1
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE 4
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - -
HOW TO MONITOR
head module
CC-Link IE CC-Link IE
REDUNTANT
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB 8.2.4
SYSTEM
Ethernet Ethernet
adapter module
BUS CONNECTION
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
FX2C
-
- 6
FX1S
CONNECTION TO
FX1N
MELSEC-FX -
FX2N
FX1NC
DIRECT
CPU
FX2NC -
FX3G*1
FX3GC*1
Ethernet 7
8.2.1
FX3U*1
COMPUTER LINK
Ethernet
CONNECTION
FX3UC*1
*1 The supported version of the main units varies depending on the Ethernet module to be used as shown below.
*3 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
ETHERNET
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
MELSEC-QS
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71
CNC C70
Robot controller (CRnQ-700)
MELSEC-L LJ71E71-100
*1 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices as the same as the case of AnACPU.
However, the following devices cannot be monitored.
• Devices added to QnACPU
• Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)
(In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified,
an access is made to the internal relay.)
• File register (R)
*2 Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module and PLC CPU.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
8.2.1 Connection to Ethernet module
MONITORING
When connecting to MELSEC-Q, QS, QnA, A or motion controller
PLC
Communication
Connection cable*1 Maximum
segment
GOT Number of
connectable
3
Ethernet module
Model name Cable model Option device Model
*4*5 type length*3 equipment
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
*2
MELSEC-Q
(Q mode) *8*9
QJ71E71-100 - (Built into GOT)
QJ71E71-B5
MELSEC-QS Ethernet 100m
QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71
Motion controller
CPU (Q Series)*6
GT15-J71E71-100
4
AJ71QE71N3-T
HOW TO MONITOR
AJ71QE71N-B5 *2
AJ71QE71N-B2
REDUNTANT
*8
AJ71QE71N-T - (Built into GOT)
SYSTEM
AJ71QE71N-B5T
AJ71QE71
AJ71QE71-B5
MELSEC-QnA Ethernet 100m
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5 Twisted pair cable 5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2 • 10BASE-T
BUS CONNECTION
A1SJ71QE71N-T Shielded twisted pair
GT15-J71E71-100
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T cable (STP) or unshielded
128 GOTs*7
A1SJ71QE71-B5 twisted pair cable (UTP):
(recommended to
A1SJ71QE71-B2 Category 3, 4, and 5
16 units or less)
• 100BASE-TX
AJ71E71N3-T Shielded twisted pair
AJ71E71N-B5 cable (STP): *2
MELSEC-A
AJ71E71N-B2
AJ71E71N-T
Category 5 and 5e
- (Built into GOT) *8
6
AJ71E71N-B5T
MELSEC-Q AJ71E71-S3
CONNECTION TO
(A mode) A1SJ71E71N3-T Ethernet 100m
A1SJ71E71N-B5
Motion controller A1SJ71E71N-B2
DIRECT
A1SJ71E71N-B5T
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 7
*2
COMPUTER LINK
*8
- (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-L LJ71E71-100 Ethernet 100m
CONNECTION
GT15-J71E71-100
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
8
A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module.
*2 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
CONNECTION
8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU)
*7 The number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units (at most).
*8 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
*9 GT14 cannot be connected with MELSEC-QS.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Ethernet Communication driver
PLC CPU GOT
module
Connection cable Ethernet (FX), Gateway
*2
3
*7
MELSEC-FX - (Built into GOT)
FX3U-ENET Ethernet 100m
(FX3U, FX3G)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-J71E71-100
2 GOTs
*2
FX3UC-1PS-5V,
*7
MELSEC-FX FX2NC-CNV-IF - (Built into GOT)
Ethernet 100m
(FX3UC, FX3GC) +
FX3U-ENET*6
Twisted pair cable
• 10BASE-T
GT15-J71E71-100 4
*2
HOW TO MONITOR
FX3U-CNV-BD, Shielded twisted pair
FX3U-422-BD, cable (STP) or unshielded *7
MELSEC-FX - (Built into GOT)
twisted pair cable (UTP):
REDUNTANT
FX3U-232-BD, Ethernet 100m
(FX3U) Category 3, 4, and 5
+
SYSTEM
FX3U-ENET-ADP*8*9 • 100BASE-TX
GT15-J71E71-100
Shielded twisted pair
cable (STP): *2
Category 5 and 5e
- (Built into GOT) *7 5
MELSEC-FX
FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet 100m 4 GOTs
BUS CONNECTION
(FX3UC)
GT15-J71E71-100
*2
FX3G-CNV-ADP,
MELSEC-FX *7
+ Ethernet - (Built into GOT)
(FX3G)
FX3U-ENET-ADP*9 100m
6
MELSEC-FX
FX3U-ENET-ADP*9 Ethernet GT15-J71E71-100
(FX3GC)
CONNECTION TO
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
DIRECT
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
CPU
A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module.
*2 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
7
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
COMPUTER LINK
8 - 10 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.2 System Configuration
8.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Connecting to
Communication driver
Built-in
GOT
Ethernet port
CPU
Connection cable
Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 2
Model name
Communication
type
Connection cable*1*2 segment
length*4
Option device Model
connectable
equipment
3
FOR MONITORING
*3
ACCESS RANGE
*9
- (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-QnUDE(H)
Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs
*5*6
GT15-J71E71-100
Twisted pair cable
• 10BASE-T
*3 4
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or *9
HOW TO MONITOR
- (Built into GOT)
unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP):
C Controller module Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs
Category 3, 4, and 5
REDUNTANT
• 100BASE-TX
SYSTEM
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): GT15-J71E71-100
Category 5 and 5e
*3
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-J71E71-100
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*2 A straight cable is available. 6
When connecting QnUDE(H) and GOT directly with Ethernet cable, connection by cross cable is available.
*3 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
CONNECTION TO
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
DIRECT
cascades.
CONNECTION
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 11
8.2 System Configuration
8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F
CNC
PLC CPU GOT
C70 Communication driver
Connection cable
Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
8 - 12 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.2 System Configuration
8.2.4 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver
Ethernet(MELSEC),
Q17nNC, CRnD-700
DEVICE RANGE
module
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
CC-Link IE
3
PLC *4 Field Network *1 GOT
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Ethernet adapter module Number of
CC-Link IE Maximu connectable
Commu Commu Cable model equipment
Field Network Cable Max. Model m Option
Model name nication nication Connection diagram Model
Master/Local model distance name segment device
type type number
module length*3
HOW TO MONITOR
GOT)
(Q mode) cable (STP) or
Double- 128 GOTs*6
unshielded twisted
REDUNTANT
shielded CC-Link NZ2GF (recommend
Motion QJ71GF11-T2 100m Ethernet pair cable (UTP): 100m
twisted pair IE -ETB
SYSTEM
ed to 16 units
Controller Category 3, 4, and 5
cable*4 or less)
CPU (Q • 100BASE-TX GT15-
Series) Shielded twisted pair J71E71-100
cable (STP):
Category 5 and 5e
5
BUS CONNECTION
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module.
*2 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
For how to check the function version, refer to the following. 6
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
CONNECTION TO
*3 A length between a hub and a node.
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used.
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)
DIRECT
When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
cascades.
*4
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
Use cables with the following specifications.
7
Connector Range
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
*5 For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Field Network module side, refer to the following manual.
*6
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual
The number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units (at most).
8
*7 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 13
8.2 System Configuration
8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller
CPU)
Communication driver
Q172DCPU-S1
PLC Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU GOT Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
CPU
Q173DSCPU
Connection cable
Q170MCPU
MR-MQ100
PLC GOT
Maximum Number of
Communi *1 segment connectable
Connection cable
Model name*3 cation length*4 Option device Model equipment
type
HINT
Direct connection between PERIPHERAL I/F and GOT
The PERIPHERAL I/F and GOT can be directly connected by using a cross cable for the Ethernet connection
cable.
8 - 14 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.2 System Configuration
1
8.3 GOT Side Settings
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
8.3.1 Setting communication
8.3.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
GT16, GT14 2
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
3. 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4.
4
Item Description Range
HOW TO MONITOR
Set the network No. of the GOT.
GOT NET No. 1 to 239
(Default: 1)
REDUNTANT
Set the station No. of the GOT.
SYSTEM
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
Click! (Default: 1)
BUS CONNECTION
router) 0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask*2
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
If the sub network is not used, the
default value is set.
255.255.255.255
CONNECTION TO
No.*2 (Default: 5014)
5013 and 49153)
• Driver:
Set the GOT port No. for the
Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 connection with the Ethernet module.
DIRECT
1024 to 5010,
Ethernet(FX), Gateway GOT • For Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC,
5014 to 65534
CPU
7
• For Ethernet(FX), Gateway
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 5019)
Make the settings according to the usage Set the number of retries to be
performed when a communication
environment.
COMPUTER LINK
timeout occurs.
CONNECTION
Retry 0 to 5times
8.3.2 Communication detail settings When receiving no response after
retries, the communication times out.
(Default: 3times)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
Specify the time period from the GOT
startup until GOT starts the
Startup Time 3 to 255sec
POINT communication with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec) 8
Set the time period for a
The settings of connecting equipment can be Timeout Time
communication to time out. 1 to 90sec
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. *1
(Default: 3sec)
CONNECTION
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 15
8.3 GOT Side Settings
*1 To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in
the one-on-one relationship using a cross cable, set
[Timeout Time] to 6sec. or longer.
GT15
*2 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT
IP Address Setting] screen.
1024 to 5010,
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
5014 to 65534
Download download.
(Except for 5011, 5012,
Port No. (Default: 5014)
5013 and 49153)
8 - 16 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.3 GOT Side Settings
8.3.3 Ethernet setting 1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Example of [Detail setting].
For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the
following.
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(2) Communication interface setting by Utility 2
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
FOR MONITORING
Utility, the latest setting is effective.
ACCESS RANGE
N/W No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239
(Default: blank)
QnUD(V/EH),
QnD(H)CCPU,
4
LCPU,
HOW TO MONITOR
Set the type of the connected Q17nNC,
Type*1 Ethernet module. QJ71E71/LJ71E71,
REDUNTANT
(Default: QJ71E71/LJ71E71) AJ71QE71,
SYSTEM
AJ71E71
FX
NZ2GF-ETB
BUS CONNECTION
(Default: blank)
CONNECTION TO
Q173DCPU: QnUDE(H)
• C Controller module: QnD(H)CCPU
• Connection to Built-in Ethernet port LCPU: LCPU
• Ethernet module (NZ2GF-ETB): NZ2GF-ETB
DIRECT
• Q17nNCCPU: Q17nNC
CPU
8.2System Configuration
CONNECTION
*3
5556 (When using FX3U-ENET-ADP)
When selecting the FX in [Controller Type], the
8
communication type is the TCP (fixed).
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 17
8.3 GOT Side Settings
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting
POINT
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
(1) Example of [Ethernet setting] However, the same transfer network number cannot be set
For examples of [Ethernet setting], refer to the twice or more (multiple times).
following.
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the
8.4 PLC Side Setting request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT No.]s.
Navigator
(a) The color of the cells for the items which are
reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT POINT
Navigator changes to green. Set items, which
are displayed in green cells, from the Routing parameter setting
MELSOFT Navigator. When communicating within the host network, routing
(b) When the settings of N/W No., PLC No., type parameter setting is unnecessary.
or IP address are reflected to the parameter
from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings For details of routing parameters, refer to the following
are added. Items set in advance are not manual.
deleted. However, if the combination of the N/ Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
W No. and the PLC No. or the IP address User's Manual (Application)
overlaps, the item set in advance is
overwritten.
(3) Changing the host on the GOT main unit
The host can be changed by the utility function of
the GOT main unit. For the detailed connection
method, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual of GOT used.
(When using GT16)
Item Range
*1 1 to 239
Relay Network No.
8 - 18 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.3 GOT Side Settings
1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Routing parameter setting of relay station
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for
the relay station.
For the setting, refer to the following.
8.4 PLC Side Setting 2
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT
DEVICE RANGE
(a) The color of the cells for the items which are
reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT
Navigator changes to green. Set items, which
are displayed in green cells, from the
MELSOFT Navigator.
(b) When the settings of Transfer network No.,
3
Relay network No. or Relay station No. are
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT
Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
in advance are not deleted.However, if the
target network No. overlaps, the item set in
advance is overwritten.
(c) The routing information is used manually by
the user when the data is created. Therefore,
4
after changing the network configuration by
HOW TO MONITOR
MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing
information again. For details of the creation
REDUNTANT
of the routing information, refer to the
SYSTEM
MELSOFT Navigator help.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 19
8.3 GOT Side Settings
8.4 PLC Side Setting
L02CPU
POINT
L26CPU
Built-in Ethernet 8.4.1 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
L26CPU-BT
port LCPU 8.4.2
L02CPU-P For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the
L26CPU-PBT following manual.
Ethernet module QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via
(Q Series) QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71 Built-in Ethernet Port)
8.4.3
Ethernet module MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-
LJ71E71-100
(L Series) In Ethernet Function)
AJ71QE71N3-T,
AJ71QE71N-B5,
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, System configuration
AJ71QE71N-B5T, For connecting one Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to one
AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, GOT, the PLC side settings are not required. Set
Ethernet module
A1SJ71QE71N3-T, 8.4.5
(QnA Series) [Ethernet] for [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and
A1SJ71QE71N-B5,
A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, then connect Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to the GOT.
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
A1SJ71QE71-B5, Designer3
A1SJ71QE71-B2
<GOT>
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, (The settings other than the
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, following are set to the default)
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3, Network No. :1
A1SJ71E71N3-T, PLC No. :1
Ethernet module A1SJ71E71N-B5, IP address : 192.168.3.1
8.4.6 Port No. : 5001
(A Series) A1SJ71E71N-B2,
A1SJ71E71N-T, Communication : UDP (fixed)
format
A1SJ71E71N-B5T,
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
<Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU> *1
Ethernet module (The following settings are set to the default)
FX3U-ENET, FX3U-ENET-ADP 8.4.7 Network No. : 1 (virtual) *2
(FX Series)
PLC No. : 2 (virtual) *2
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU 8.4.8 IP address : 192.168.3.39
Port No. : 5006 (fixed)
Communication : UDP (fixed)
format
8 - 20 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
1
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Checking communication state of Connecting
PROCEDURES FOR
Designer3 to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows.
POINT Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Windows.
(1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
(a) When normal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
2
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Reply from 192.168.3.2: bytes=32 time
Designer3, refer to the following.
DEVICE RANGE
8.3.1 Setting communication interface
(b) When abnormal communication
(Communication settings)
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
(2) Ethernet setting
Request timed out.
When connecting Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or
LCPU to a GOT, the settings items for the network (2) When abnormal communication
No. and station No. do not exist at the PLC side. At abnormal communication, check the followings and 3
However, these virtual values must be set on the execute the Ping command again.
FOR MONITORING
GOT side. Therefore, set the network No. and • Cable connecting condition
ACCESS RANGE
station No. • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting
Therefore, set the network No. and station No. • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
Set the network No. that is not existed on the • The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified
network system and any station No.. in the ping command
POINT 4
(3) Controller setting
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Set value (Use default value)
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a
REDUNTANT
GOT NET No. 1
Ping test from the PLC.
SYSTEM
GOT PLC No. 1 For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer,
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.1 refer to the following manual.
BUS CONNECTION
GOT Port No.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
(Ethernet Download)
5014 (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection)
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Retry 3times
CONNECTION TO
Delay Time 0ms DIRECT
Host *
7
N/W No. 1*1
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
IP address 192.168.3.39
Port No.
Communication
5006 (fixed)
UDP (fixed)
8
*1 Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No.
*2 Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 21
8.4 PLC Side Setting
8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet
[Q parameter setting] or [L parameter setting]
port CPU (multiple connection) for GX Developer
(1) Built-in Ethernet port
This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in
Example: [Q parameter setting] screen
Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system
configuration.
POINT
Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the
following manual.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via
Built-in Ethernet Port)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-
In Ethernet Function)
System configuration
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
<GOT>
(The settings other than the Setting
following are set to the default) necessity at
Item Set value
Network No. :1 GOT
PLC No. :1 connection
IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5001 IP address 192.168.0.1
Communication : UDP(fixed)
Subnet mask pattern -
format
Default router IP address -
8 - 22 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
1
(2) Open settings [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
PROCEDURES FOR
The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.
Designer3
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
(3) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3 2
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3, refer to the following.
FOR MONITORING
these virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
ACCESS RANGE
Therefore, set the network No. and station No.
Set the network No. that is not existed on the
network system and any station No..
Item Set value
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Set value (Use default value)
Host station port No. (Use default value)
GOT NET No. 1
REDUNTANT
GOT PLC No. 1
SYSTEM
GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18
BUS CONNECTION
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Retry 3times
CONNECTION TO
(2) Ethernet setting DIRECT
Set value
CPU
Item
Host * - 7
N/W No. 1*1 1*1
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
*2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 23
8.4 PLC Side Setting
8.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet
Checking communication state of Connecting
to Built-in Ethernet port CPU module (Q/L Series)
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. This section describes the settings of the GOT and
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Ethernet module (Q Series) in the following case of the
Windows. system configuration.
(a) When normal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 POINT
Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time
<10ms TTL=32 Ethernet module (Q/L Series)
(b) When abnormal communication For details of the Ethernet module (Q/L Series), refer
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 to the following manual.
Request timed out.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
(2) When abnormal communication User's Manual (Basic)
At abnormal communication, check the followings and MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's
execute the Ping command again. Manual (Basic)
• Cable connecting condition
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting
• Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
• The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified
System configuration (for Q series)
in the ping command ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
POINT
When connecting to Q170MCPU
When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of
the Ethernet module is set to "70".
8 - 24 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
1
[Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Operation setting
PROCEDURES FOR
(1) Network parameter
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
HOW TO MONITOR
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT Initial timing *1
REDUNTANT
connection
Send frame setting
SYSTEM
Network type Ethernet (fixed)
(Use default value)
Enable Write at RUN time*1
Starting I/O No.*1 0000H
TCP Existence confirmation
Network No.*2 1 setting 5
Group No. 0 (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
BUS CONNECTION
*3 2 *1 Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the
Station No.
following setting without relations to the setting given here.
Mode Online (fixed) • Communication : [Binary code]
date code
Operation setting Refer to (2)
• Initial timing : "Always wait for OPEN"
Initial settings (Communication is applicable while
CONNECTION TO
PLC CPU.)
Station No.<->IP information
(Use default value)
FTP Parameters
POINT
DIRECT
CPU
E-mail settings
When changing the network parameter
Interrupt settings
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, 7
Redundant settings*4 operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
or resetting.
COMPUTER LINK
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 25
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(3) Routing parameter setting [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
However, the same transfer network number cannot be
Designer3
set twice or more (multiple times). (1) Controller setting
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from
the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Item Set value (Use default value)
Network No.]s.
GOT NET No. 1
Retry 3times
Host *
N/W No. 1
POINT
POINT
Routing parameter setting of request source
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
request source GOT. For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
For the setting, refer to the following. Designer3, refer to the following.
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting 8.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
8 - 26 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
8.4.4 Connecting to C Controller 1
Confirming the communication state of
module
PROCEDURES FOR
Ethernet module
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. This section describes the settings of the GOT and C
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Controller module in the following case of the system
Windows. configuration.
(a) When normal communication
2
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 POINT
Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms
DEVICE RANGE
(b) When abnormal communication For details of C Controller module, refer to the
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 following manual.
Request timed out. C Controller Module User's Manual (Hardware
(2) When abnormal communication Design, Function Explanation)
At abnormal communication, check the followings and 3
execute the Ping command again.
System configuration
FOR MONITORING
• Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit
ACCESS RANGE
• Cable connecting condition ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Designer3
POINT
Network No.
PLC No.
:1
:1 4
IP address : 192.168.3.18
HOW TO MONITOR
Port No. : 5001
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer
Communication : UDP(fixed)
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a
REDUNTANT
format
Ping test from the PLC.
SYSTEM
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer,
<C controller module>
refer to the following manual. 1
(The settings other than the
User's manual of the Ethernet module following are set to the default)
Network No. : 1 (virtual) *1 5
PLC No. : 2 (virtual) *1
BUS CONNECTION
IP address : 192.168.3.1
Port No. : 5006(fixed)
Communication : UDP(fixed)
format
CONNECTION TO
IP address : 192.168.3.2
Port No. : 5006(fixed)
Communication : UDP(fixed)
format
DIRECT
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 27
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(c) Detail settings
Utility setting for C Controller module
(1) Q12DCCPU-V
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C
Controller setting utility.
(a) Connection settings
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Setting
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
Write authority Mark the checkbox connection
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
8 - 28 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(d) System settings (2) Q24DHCCPU-V
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Use SW4PVC-CCPU-E for the C Controller setting
utility.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(a) Connection settings
FOR MONITORING
Points occupied by empty
ACCESS RANGE
slot
Remote reset
Output mode at STOP to
RUN
Intelligent function module
settings
Setting
necessity at
4
Initial settings of intelligent (Use default value) Item Set value
GOT
HOW TO MONITOR
function module connection
WDT (Watchdog timer)
REDUNTANT
192.168.3.39
setting IP Address*1
(Default)
SYSTEM
Error check
255.255.255.0
Operation mode at the Subnet Mask
(Default)
time of error
Module synchronization
Default Gateway - 5
BUS CONNECTION
Built-in Ethernet port open : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Mark the checkbox *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been
settings
changed, input the changed IP address.
Event history registration
(Use default value)
settings
CONNECTION TO
(1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
DIRECT
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 29
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(1) Controller setting 8.4.5 Connecting to Ethernet
Item Set value (Use default value)
module (QnA Series)
GOT NET No. 1
This section describes the settings of the GOT and
GOT PLC No. 1 Ethernet module (QnA Series) in the following case of the
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18 system configuration.
GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001
8 - 30 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
1
Switch settings of Ethernet module (2) Exchange condition setting switch
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange Setting
PREPARATORY
Exchange
condition setting switch.
MONITORING
Setting Set necessity at
condition Description
switch value GOT
AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, setting switch
connection
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T,
AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5, Selection of line
AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2
AJ71QE71N3-T *1 A1SJ71QE71N3-T
RUN BUF1
*1
SW1
processing at
TCP timeout
OFF 2
RUN BUF1
BUF2
RDY
BSY
SW.ERR.
BUF2
BUF3 error
Data code
CPU R/W
DEVICE RANGE
BUF7 TEST ERR.
OFF
BUF8 BUF7
CPU R/W BUF8
OFF ON SW2
setting*2 (fixed)
TEST
TEST ERR.
MODE
0:ONLINE BCD
SW1
6789A
MODE 1:OFFLINE
EF 12
(1)
‚O
Self start mode
C
AB DE
(1) 2:TEST1
SW2
345
789
0:ONLINE
F01
1:OFFLINE
2 3456
3:TEST2
SW3 ON
2:TEST1 4:TEST3
3:TEST2 ON 5:TEST4
setting*3
4:TEST3 SW1
5:TEST4 SW1
SW2 SW2 SW3
SW3 SW3
SW4
SW5 (2) SW4
SW4
SW6
SW7 SW5
(2)
SW6
SW4
SW8
3
SW7
SW8 SW5
SW6 (Must not to be OFF
ON
SW5
SW7 used) (fixed)
FOR MONITORING
SW8 SW6
ACCESS RANGE
10BASE-T
HOW TO MONITOR
following setting without relations to the setting given here.
*1 The figure of AJ71QE71N3-T and • Data code setting : [Binary code]
A1SJ71QE71N3-T.
REDUNTANT
• Enable Write at : [Enable Write at RUN time] (Writing
(1) Operation mode setting switch RUN time Data is applicable while running the
SYSTEM
PLC CPU.)
Setting *3 When SW3 is ON, the initial processing is executed
regardless of the initial request signal (Y19).
5
Operation mode setting Set necessity at
Description In addition, communication is applicable while stopping the
switch value GOT
PLC CPU.
connection For the initial processing by using the initial request signal
BUS CONNECTION
(Y19), refer to the following manual.
For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
0
Online
(fixed)
POINT
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the switch setting has been changed 6
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
PLC CPU.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 31
8.4 PLC Side Setting
[Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Routing parameter setting
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
(1) Network parameter However, the same transfer network number cannot be
set twice or more (multiple times).
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from
the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer
Network No.]s.
Item Range
Network No.*1 1
POINT
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Routing parameter setting of request source
Station No.*2 2
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
IP address 192.168.0.19 request source GOT.
Station No.<->IP For the setting, refer to the following.
information 8.3.4 Routing parameter setting
(Use default value)
FTP Parameters
POINT
When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
or resetting.
8 - 32 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(3) Communication confirmation 8.4.6 Connecting to Ethernet 1
module (A Series)
PROCEDURES FOR
The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when
the module is ready to communicate.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
For confirming the communication state, refer to the
following. This section describes the settings of the GOT and
Ethernet module (A Series) in the following case of the
8.3.4 ■Confirming the communication state of system configuration.
Ethernet module
AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, 2
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, POINT
AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T,A1SJ71QE71-B5,
DEVICE RANGE
RUN BUF1
BUF2
RUN BUF1 For details of the Ethernet module (A Series), refer to
RDY BUF2
RDY
BSY
BUF3
BUF4
BSY BUF3 the following manual.
SW.ERR. BUF4
SW.ERR.
COM.ERR.
BUF5
BUF6
COM.ERR.
TEST
BUF5
BUF6
For A Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST ERR. BUF7
BUF8
3
CPU R/W BUF8
FOR MONITORING
TEST ERR.
ACCESS RANGE
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
HOW TO MONITOR
GOT NET No. 1
*1
GOT PLC No. 1 <Ethernet module> (The settings other than the
REDUNTANT
following are set to the default)
GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18
: 1 (virtual)*2
SYSTEM
Network No.
GOT Port No. PLC No. : 2 (virtual)*2
5001 IP address : 192.168.0.19
(Communication)
Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP(fixed)
GOT Port No.
(Ethernet Download)
5014 ■ Switch settings of Ethernet module
■ Sequence program
5
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
BUS CONNECTION
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 *1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
The Start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0".
Retry 3times
*2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However,
Startup Time 3sec the virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
Timeout Time 3sec ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
CONNECTION TO
Item Set value
Host *
DIRECT
N/W No. 1
CPU
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
setting No.1
Type AJ71QE71
7
IP address 192.168.0.19
Port No. 5001 (fixed)
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
POINT
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 8
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3, refer to the following.
CONNECTION
(Communication settings)
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 33
8.4 PLC Side Setting
Switch settings of Ethernet module (1) Operation mode setting switch
Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange
Setting
condition setting switch. Operation mode necessity at
Description Set value
setting switch GOT
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5,
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, connection
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
A J71E71N3-T *2 A1SJ71E71N3-T *2
RUN BUF1
RUN
RDY
BUF1
BUF2 0
Online
BUF2
RDY BUF3 BSY BUF3
BSY BUF4 SW.ERR. BUF4
(fixed)
SW.ERR. BUF5
COM.ERR. BUF6 COM.ERR. BUF5
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST BUF6
BUF8
TEST ERR. BUF7
CPU R/W BUF8
TEST
TEST ERR.
MODE
BCD
MODE
C
0:ONLINE
1:OFFLINE 6789A
EF012
(1)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
0:ONLINE
8
2:TEST1
(1)
0
1:OFFLINE 4 345
2:TEST1 3:TEST2
3:TEST2 ON 4:TEST3
4:TEST3
SW1 SW1
SW2
SW3 SW2
ON
Setting
Exchange
Setting Set necessity at
10BASE-T condition Description
switch value GOT
setting switch
connection
Setting
Exchange
Setting Set necessity at
condition Description
switch value GOT
setting switch
connection
Selection of line
SW1 processing at TCP OFF
timeout error
POINT
When the switch setting has been changed
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
PLC CPU.
8 - 34 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(c) Buffer memory settings used in the present 1
Sequence program example
PROCEDURES FOR
The sequence program for initial processing and
PREPARATORY
communication line opening processing are required. Buffer memory
MONITORING
address Item Set value
(1) Programming condition Dec (Hex)
This program performs the initial processing of the
Ethernet module and the opening processing of C0A80013H
0 to 1 (0 to 1H) IP address of Ethernet module
connection No. 1 when the stopping PLC CPU starts (192.168.0.19)
2
running. 16 (10H) Application setting*1 100H
DEVICE RANGE
For A Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
25 to 26
IP address of GOT FFFFFFFFH
(19 to 1AH)
(b) Device used by user
27 (1BH) Port No. of GOT FFFFH (fixed)
Device Application 80 (50H) Initial fault code ―
M102 COM.ERR turned off command *1 The details of the application setting are shown below.
3
Settings 1), 2) and 3) can be changed by the user.
D100 IP address of Ethernet module
FOR MONITORING
4), 5) and 6) are fixed.
ACCESS RANGE
D110 Application setting
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D111 Port No. of Ethernet module 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D112 to D113 IP address of GOT 5) 4) 3) 2) 1)
6)
D114 Port No. of GOT
HOW TO MONITOR
2) Existence check
0: No
REDUNTANT
1: Yes
3) Pairing open
SYSTEM
0: No
1: Yes
4) Communication format (Set to "1" (UDP/IP).)
0: TCP/IP
1: UDP/IP
5
5) Fixed buffer exchange (Set to "0" (With procedure).)
BUS CONNECTION
0: With procedure
1: Without procedure
6) Open method (Set to "00" (Active, UDP/IP).
00: Active, UDP/IP
10: Unpassive
11: Fullpassive
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 35
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(2) Example of sequence program
* Initial processing
IP address of Ethernet
module(192.168.0.19)
Turned on WDT
at first scan ERR
only while detection
running
Initial request
Communication
format(UDP/IP)
No. 1 Normal
open completed
completed initial
IP address of GOT
(When GOT is used, FFFFFFFFH)
Request to open
POINT
When changing the sequence program
After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.
8 - 36 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
1
(3) Communication confirmation [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
PROCEDURES FOR
The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when
the module is ready to communicate.
Designer3
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
For confirming the communication state, refer to the (1) Controller setting
following.
8.4.3 ■Confirming the communication state of Item Set value (Use default value)
Ethernet module GOT NET No. 1
The BUF1 LED turns on when the opening processing
GOT PLC No. 1
2
of the connection No. 1 is completed in normal at
executing of the sequence program example described
DEVICE RANGE
at (2). GOT Port No.
5001
(Communication)
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5,
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, GOT Port No.
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, 5014
(Ethernet Download)
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
RUN BUF1
BUF2
RUN
RDY
BUF1
BUF2
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
3
RDY BUF3 BSY BUF3
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
FOR MONITORING
BSY BUF4 SW.ERR. BUF4
SW.ERR. BUF5 Retry 3times
ACCESS RANGE
COM.ERR. BUF5
COM.ERR. BUF6 TEST BUF6
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST ERR.
BUF8 BUF7 Startup Time 3sec
CPU R/W BUF8
Timeout Time 3sec
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Set value
REDUNTANT
Host *
SYSTEM
N/W No. 1
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
setting No.1
Type AJ71E71
5
IP address 192.168.0.19
BUS CONNECTION
Port No. 5001
POINT
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 6
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
CONNECTION TO
Designer3, refer to the following.
8.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 37
8.4 PLC Side Setting
8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet
Ethernet parameter settings of FX
module (FX Series) Configurator-EN
(1) Ethernet settings
This section describes the settings of the GOT and
Set the Ethernet parameter with FX Configurator-EN.
Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the
For using FX Configurator-EN, install GX Developer Ver.
system configuration.
8.25B or later on the personal computer.
For details on FX Configurator-EN, refer to the following
POINT manual.
FX Configurator-EN Operation manual
Ethernet module (FX Series)
For details of the Ethernet module (FX Series), refer to
the following manual.
FX3U-ENET User's manual
FX3U-ENET-ADP User's manual
System configuration
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
<GOT>
(The settings other than the
following are set to the default)
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5019
Communication : TCP (fixed)
format
*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, Initial settings (Use default value.)
the virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
Open settings Refer to (3)
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3 Router relay parameter
(Use default value.)
E-mail settings
8 - 38 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(2) Operational settings (3) Open settings
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
Protocol TCP
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Fixed buffer communication
procedure
Setting
Item Setting Pairing open
(with GOT connected)
Existence confirmation
Communication (Use default value.)
(Use default value.)
date code*1 Host station Port No.
(DEC.)
4
IP address 192.168.0.19
HOW TO MONITOR
Transmission target device
Initial timing*1 IP address
REDUNTANT
Transmission target device
Send frame setting
(Use default value.) Port No. (DEC.)
SYSTEM
TCP Existence :Required :Set if necessary :Not required
confirmation setting
BUS CONNECTION
• Communication date code : [Binary code] When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral
• Initial timing : [Always wait for OPEN] devices
(Communications are enabled while the programmable The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs
controller CPU stops.)
*2 The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.254. Set the IP
and devices must be set.
address corresponding to the system configuration.
POINT
6
CONNECTION TO
When changing Ethernet parameter
After writing the Ethernet parameter to the
programmable controller CPU, turn off and then on, or
DIRECT
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 39
8.4 PLC Side Setting
Ethernet parameter settings of FX3U-ENET- (2) Open settings
ADP
(1) Ethernet settings
Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX
Works2.
To set FX3U-ENET-ADP, GX Works2 Ver.1.90U or later
is required.
For details on the setting of FX3U-ENET-ADP, refer to
the following manual.
FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual
Setting
Item Setting
(with GOT connected)
Protocol TCP
POINT
When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral
devices
The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs
and devices must be set.
\
Setting
Item Setting
(with GOT connected)
IP Address 192.168.1.250*2
Communication Data
Code
Disable direct
connection to
(Use default value.)
MELSOFT
Do not respond to
search for CPU on
network
POINT
When changing Ethernet parameter
After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU, turn
the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again.
8 - 40 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
1
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Confirming the communication state of
PROCEDURES FOR
Designer3 Ethernet module
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Controller setting (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows.
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Item Setting (Use default value.)
Windows.
GOT NET No. 1
DEVICE RANGE
GOT Port No.
(Communication)
5019 (b) When abnormal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
GOT Port No. Request timed out.
5014
(Ethernet Download)
(2) When abnormal communication
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
At abnormal communication, check the followings and 3
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 execute the Ping command again.
FOR MONITORING
Retry 3times • Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit
ACCESS RANGE
• Cable connecting condition
Startup Time 3sec
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting
Timeout Time 3sec • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
Delay Time 0ms • IP address of GOT specified by Ping command
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Setting Ethernet diagnostics of FX Configurator-EN
Ethernet diagnostics of FX Configurator-EN is
REDUNTANT
Host *
available to a Ping test from the PLC.
SYSTEM
N/W No. 1
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of FX Configurator-
PLC No. 2 EN, refer to the following manual.
Ethernet
setting No.1
Type FX (fixed) FX Configurator-EN Operation manual
5
IP address 192.168.0.19*1
BUS CONNECTION
Port No. 5551*2
POINT CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 41
8.4 PLC Side Setting
8.4.8 Connecting to Display I/F (2) CNC monitor
(CNC C70)
POINT
Display I/F (CNC C70)
For details of the Display I/F (CNC C70), refer to the
following manual.
C70 Series SET UP MANUAL
System configuration
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Setting necessity at
Designer3
Item Set value
GOT connection
<GOT> (The settings other than the
IP address 192.168.0.19
following are set to the default)
Network No. :1 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.0.18 Gateway address 0.0.0.0
Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP (fixed)
Port number 64758 (fixed)
8 - 42 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
(2) Ethernet setting
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Item Set value
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Host *
N/W No. 1
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
setting No.1
Type Q17nNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.19
DEVICE RANGE
Communication UDP (fixed)
POINT
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
3
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Designer3, refer to the following.
8.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
HOW TO MONITOR
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows.
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
REDUNTANT
Windows.
SYSTEM
(a) When normal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms
TTL=64
5
BUS CONNECTION
(b) When abnormal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
Request timed out.
(2) When abnormal communication
At abnormal communication, check the followings and
execute the Ping command again.
• Mounting condition of CNC C70 6
• Cable connecting condition
• Switch settings and network parameter settings
CONNECTION TO
• Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
• IP address of the CNC C70 specified for the Ping
DIRECT
command
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 43
8.4 PLC Side Setting
8.4.9 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field
GX Works2 network parameter
Network Ethernet Adapter Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET
Module For details of the setting contents of PLC side, refer to the
following manual.
This section describes the settings of the GOT, Ethernet MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/
adapter module and the PLC in the following system Local Module User's Manual
configuration.
(1) Network Type, Network No., Total Stations setting
System configuration Example: Master station setting
<GOT>
(Use default value for settings other than the following.)
Network No. :3 *1
PC No. :1
IP address :192.168.3.18
Port No. :5001
Communication :UDP (fixed)
format
Ethernet
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 1 to 64
8 - 44 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
1
Ethernet Adapter Module setting [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the parameter with the Ethernet adapter module Designer3
PREPARATORY
setting tool.
MONITORING
For details of the setting method, refer to the following
manual.
POINT
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
Module User's Manual For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT 2
(1) CC-Link IE Field Network setting Designer3, refer to the following.
DEVICE RANGE
(Communication settings)
3*1
3
FOR MONITORING
GOT PC No. 1
ACCESS RANGE
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18
GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001
GOT Port No.
5014
Item Set value (Ethernet Download)
HOW TO MONITOR
Retry 3 times
*1 Set the same value as the network No. set on the PLC side.
Startup Time 3 sec
REDUNTANT
*2 Set a value other than the network No. set on the PLC side.
Timeout Time 3 sec
SYSTEM
(2) Ethernet setting Delay Time 0ms
BUS CONNECTION
Item Set value
Host *
PC No. 30*2
Ethernet Setting
No.1
Type NZ2GF-ETB
6
IP address 192.168.3.30*3
CONNECTION TO
Item Set value Port No. 5001(fixed)
Communication UDP(fixed)
IP address 192.168.3.30*1
*1 Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet
DIRECT
*1 Set the IP address within the following range. adapter module IP address.
CPU
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 45
8.4 PLC Side Setting
8.4.10 Connecting to PERIPHERAL
System configuration
I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Leave the Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU
Motion Controller CPU) settings as default in the following system
configuration.
This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU in the following case
of system configuration. <GOT>
(The settings other than the
following are set to the default)
POINT Network No. :1
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.3.1
(1) GOT type setting Port No. : 5001
For details, refer to the following. Communication : UDP (fixed)
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel format
setting)
(2) Setting [Controller Type]
<Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU> *1
(2) CPU No. specification of Q170MCPU (The following settings are set to the default)
Set whether to monitor the PLC CPU area or the Network No. : 1 (virtual) *2
Motion CPU area of Q170MCPU, in the CPU No. PLC No. : 2 (virtual) *2
specification. For details, refer to the following. IP address : 192.168.3.39
Open system : MELSOFT connection (fixed)
8.5 Precautions
(3) PLC type of GX Works2/GX Developer
*1 For the settings when using system devices including a hub
When creating a program, set the following PLC and a transceiver, refer to the following.
type: 8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
• For Q173D(S)CPU/Q172D(S)CPU (multiple connection)
QnUD(E)(H)CPU *2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However,
• For Q170MCPU the virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
Q03UDCPU ■[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
(4) Built-in Ethernet port CPU
For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to Basic setting of MT Works2
the following manual. Use the default values of the basic setting for the
User's Manual of Q173D(S)CPU/ system configuration above.
Q172D(S)CPU and Q170MCPU
(1) Built-in Ethernet port
Setting necessity
Item Set value at GOT
connection
192.168.3.39
IP address
(Default)
Subnet mask pattern -
8 - 46 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
Item Set value
Setting necessity
at GOT (3) Controller setting
1
PROCEDURES FOR
connection
Item Setting (Use default value.)
PREPARATORY
Communication data code
MONITORING
GOT NET No. 1
Enable online change (Use default value)
GOT PC No. 1
(MC protocol)
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.1
Open settings Refer to (2)
GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
GOT Port No.
5014 2
(2) Open settings (Ethernet Download)
The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.
DEVICE RANGE
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3 sec
Timeout time 3 sec
Delay Time 0ms 3
FOR MONITORING
(4) Ethernet setting
ACCESS RANGE
Item Set value
Host *
Ethernet
PC No.
Type
2*2
QnUDE(H)
4
setting No.1
HOW TO MONITOR
IP address 192.168.3.39*3
Port No. 5006 (fixed)
REDUNTANT
Communication UDP (fixed)
SYSTEM
*1 Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No.
Item Set value *2 Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No.
*3 Set it to the IP address value of the Built-in Ethernet port
Protocol UDP (fixed)
Motion Controller CPU side. 5
Open system MELSOFT connection (fixed)
Checking communication state of Connecting
BUS CONNECTION
Host station port No. -
to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows
Designer3 Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Windows.
POINT (a) When normal communication 6
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
(1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Reply from 192.168.3.2: bytes=32 time
CONNECTION TO
Designer3 <10ms TTL=32
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (b) When abnormal communication
Designer3, refer to the following. C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
DIRECT
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 47
8.4 PLC Side Setting
POINT
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer is
available to a Ping test from the PLC.
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX
Developer, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual
(Common)
GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual
8 - 48 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.4 PLC Side Setting
1
8.5 Precautions
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Connection to QnA (S) CPU type
MONITORING
Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module
Connection to LCPU
(QnA Series) and PLC CPU (QnA/QnASCPU type). LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering
process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the
Connection to QSCPU power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until
the SD memory card becomes available. When the 2
The GOT can only read device data and sequence GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a
DEVICE RANGE
The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU. the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Connection to Q170MCPU Manual
Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
When connecting to multiple GOTs
device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). 3
When the CPU No. is set to "1", the device on the PLC (1) Setting PLC No.
When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
FOR MONITORING
CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
ACCESS RANGE
network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT.
When the CPU No. is set to "0", the monitoring target 8.3.1 Setting communication interface
differs depending on the GOT connection destination. (Communication settings)
Refer to the following.
(2) Setting IP address
GOT connection destination Monitoring target
Do not use the IP address "192.168.0.18" when using
QJ71E71 module PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) multiple GOTs. 4
PERIPHERAL I/F Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) A communication error may occur on the GOT with the
HOW TO MONITOR
IP address.
When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
REDUNTANT
to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring (3) Setting for starting up multiple GOTs simultaneously
(When connected to Built-in Ethernet port CPU)
SYSTEM
cannot be executed.
When connecting multiple GOTs to one Built-in
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. Ethernet port CPU, adjust the timing of GOT
GT Designer3 Version
Manual
Screen Design communication start. When the communication
concentrates on the PLC, the communication between
5
GOT and PLC becomes difficult, and the monitoring by
BUS CONNECTION
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
GOT may not start. As a method for adjusting the
timing, communicating one GOT alone first, and then
communicating the other GOTs is effective.
Set the following items on each GOT.
• [Startup Time] of [Controller Setting], or [Title Display
Time] of [GOT Setup].
• [Timeout Time] of [Controller Setting] 6
The following shows a setting example.
CONNECTION TO
HUB
DIRECT
7
Startup Time 3sec (default) 4sec 4sec
Timeout Time 3sec (default) 4sec 4sec
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 49
8.5 Precautions
When setting IP address
Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
(Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the
system)
The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
Consult with the administrator of the network before
setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
8 - 50 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.5 Precautions
9
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
9.
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
9.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
9.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7
NETWORK
9.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9
9.4 PLC Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 11 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
9.5 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
9-1
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION
(PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
POINT
(1) Connectable network
When using MELSECNET/H in NET/10 mode, refer to MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION.
Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station.
• MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system
• MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system
(2) MELSECNET/H network module
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the
MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended Mode as a network type.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q03UDECPU
MELSECNET/H
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
MELSEC-Q Q26UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/H 9.2
10
(Q mode) Q50UDEHCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q100UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/10
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*1
MELSECNET/H 9.2
11
module Q24DHCCPU-V
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU MELSECNET/H 9.2
L02CPU
CONNECTION
L26CPU
NETWORK
L26CPU-BT
MELSEC-L - -
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU 12
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
CC-Link IE FIELD
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
CONNECTION
Q2ACPU
NETWORK
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
STATION)
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
14
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
CONNECTION
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1 (Via G4)
CC-Link
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
(AnCPU)
A3ACPUR21 - - 15
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
CONNECTION
A1NCPUR21
INVERTER
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1 16
A2NCPUR21-S1
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
CONNECTION
A3NCPUR21
(Continued to next page)
*1 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042.
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
controller Q172DCPU MELSECNET/H 9.2
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100 - -
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A273UCPU
MELSECNET/H
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
10
A171SCPU
Motion
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
controller A171SCPU-S3
MELSECNET/10
- -
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
NETWORK
WS0-CPU1
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
Remote I/O
station
QJ72LP25G - -
12
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE FIELD
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - -
CONNECTION
head module
NETWORK
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module 13
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET/H
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
9.2
CC-Link CONNECTION
Robot
CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) MELSECNET/H 9.2
controller
FX0
STATION)
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1 14
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
FX1NC
15
FX2NC -
FX3G
CONNECTION
FX3GC
INVERTER
-
FX3U
FX3UC
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Model name
CPU series
Optical loop Coaxial bus
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1
MELSEC-QS QJ71LP21
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71LP21-25 QJ71BR11*1
CNC C70 QJ71LP21S-25
Robot controller (CRnQ-700)
QJ71LP21-25
C Controller module QJ71BR11*1
QJ71LP21S-25
*1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
9.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system
QCPU
MELSECNET/H
GOT
10
network module Communication driver
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Connection cable
MELSECNET/10
MELSECNET/H
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Communication Max.
Model name network module Cable model Option device Model
type distance equipment
*1
CONNECTION
QJ71LP21
MELSEC-Q
NETWORK
QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/H Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25
MELSEC-QS
QJ71LP21S-25
63 GOTs
C Controller
module
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71LP21S-25
MELSECNET/H Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25 12
*1 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
CONNECTION
*2 For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manual.
NETWORK
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
*3 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total
number of stations.
For details, refer to the following manual. 13
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
9.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system
STATION)
QCPU
MELSECNET/H
network module
GOT Communication driver
14
Connection cable
MELSECNET/H
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
MELSECNET/H
Number of 15
Communication Max. connectable
Model name Network module Cable model Option device Model equipment
*2
type distance
CONNECTION
MELSEC-Q
INVERTER
*1
Coaxial cable
C Controller QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H *4 GT15-J71BR13 31 GOTs
*3
module
MELSEC-QS
*1 Use a PLC CPU of function version B or a later version.
16
*2 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
9.3.1 Setting communication
9.3.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
10
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.
3. 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Description Range
12
• MNET/H mode
• MNET/10 mode
Set the network type.
CC-Link IE FIELD
Click! • MNET/H
Network Type
CONNECTION
(Default: MNET/H mode)
Extended
NETWORK
mode*1
menu.
Station No.
Set the station No. of the GOT.
1 to 64
13
(Default: 1)
2.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
• Online
channel to be used from the list menu.
(auto.
STATION)
• Offline
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Test between
Set the operation mode of the
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller GOT. slave station*2
Type to be connected. Mode Setting
(Default: • Self-loopback
14
• I/F: Interface to be used Online (auto. reconnection)) test*2
• Driver: MELSECNET/H • Internal self-
loopback
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, test*2 CONNECTION
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. • H/W test*2 (Via G4)
CC-Link
Make the settings according to the usage Set the number of retries to be
environment. performed when a communication
(Default: 3times)
INVERTER
POINT POINT
(1) Routing parameter setting of relay station
(1) Communication interface setting by Utility
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for
The communication interface setting can be
the relay station.
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
For the setting, refer to the following.
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data. 9.4 PLC Side Settings
For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator
GOT utility, refer to the following manual:
(a) The color of the cells for the items which are
GT User's Manual reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT
(2) Precedence in communication settings Navigator changes to green. Set items, which
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the are displayed in green cells, from the
Utility, the latest setting is effective. MELSOFT Navigator.
(b) When the settings of Transfer network No.,
Relay network No. or Relay station No. are
reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT
9.3.3 Routing parameter setting Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
in advance are not deleted.However, if the
target network No. overlaps, the item set in
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
advance is overwritten.
However, the same transfer network number cannot be set (c) The routing information is used manually by
twice or more (multiple times). the user when the data is created. Therefore,
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the after changing the network configuration by
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing
No.]s. information again. For details of the creation
of the routing information, refer to the
MELSOFT Navigator help.
POINT
Routing parameter setting
When communicating within the host network, routing
parameter setting is unnecessary.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
This section describes the settings of the GOT and
MELSECNET/H network module in the case of system 9.4.2 Switch setting of
configuration shown as 9.4.1. MELSECNET/H network
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to
module
the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the
MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended
10
Set the station number setting switch and mode setting
Mode as a network type.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
switch.
MELSECNET/10
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
POINT
QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
RUN MNG RUN MNG
T.PASS D.LINK EXT.PW T.PASS D.LINK
MELSECNET/H network module SD RD SD
ERR.
RD
L ERR.
ERR. L ERR.
90 1
456
456
90 1
X10 78 X10 78
(1) (1)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network 23 23
90 1
456
456
90 1
X1 78 X1 78
CONNECTION
NETWORK
IN IN
12
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
(2) (2)
01
01
MODE
89 A
89 A
BCD MODE BCD
+24V
+24V
9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
<GOT>
24G
24G
(Use the default value for settings other
CC-Link IE FIELD
OUT OUT
than the following.)
CONNECTION
(FG)
24G
Network type : MNET/H Mode
NETWORK
Network No. :1 QJ71LP21
Station No. :2 -25 QJ71LP21 S-25
Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection)
Network range assignment *2: LB0100H to LB01FFH
LW0100H to LW01FFH
MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)
Transmission speed : 10Mbps
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RUN MNG
Station No. :1 T.PASS D.LINK
SD RD
Mode : Online (10Mbps) L ERR.
ERR.
Network type : MNET/H mode (Control station)
Network No. :1 STATION NO.
23
Total stations :2
901
456
X10
STATION)
Network range assignment *2: LB0000H to LB00FFH 78
23
(1)
LW0000H to LW00FFH
90 1
456
X1
9.4.2 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module 78
(2)
01
MODE
89 A
14
BCD
CONNECTION
assignment of send points for each station.
When the number of assignment is 2000 bytes or less:
MELSECNET/H mode (Via G4)
CC-Link
POINT QJ71BR11
15
When connecting to Q170MCPU
CONNECTION
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
X10 78
setting 1
23
(Station No.1)*1
4
90 1
56
X1 78
Setting
Set necessity at
Mode setting switch Description
value GOT
connection
Mode setting
34 5
(Online:
EF 2
67
0
01
MODE
89 A
BCD
10Mbps)*2
Network No.*2 1
Total stations 2
*3 Online
Mode
Refresh parameters
Interrupt settings
Interlink transmission
parameters
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
However, the same transfer network number
MELSECNET/H
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
Therefore, the one that can access to other station
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of
[Transfer Network No.]s.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting 11
necessity at
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Item Set value
GOT
connection
CONNECTION
Monitoring time 200
NETWORK
Station Start 0000H
Send
range No.1 End 00FFH
for
station Start 0100H
12
Station
(LB) No.2 End 01FFH
CC-Link IE FIELD
LB/LW
CONNECTION
Station Start 0000H
setting*1 Send
NETWORK
range No.1 End 00FFH
for
station Station Start 0100H Item Range
(LW) No.2 End 01FFH Target network No. 1 to 239
13
Relay network No. 1 to 239
Pairing setting*2 Disable
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Relay station No. 1 to 64
LX/LY setting*1 No setting
STATION)
Specify reserved station No setting
POINT
Supplementary setting Routing parameter setting of request source
Station inherent parameters
(Use default value)
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the 14
request source GOT.
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary For the setting, refer to the following.
*1 Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission.
CONNECTION
*2 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in 9.3.3 Routing parameter setting
the redundant QnPRHCPU system.
(Via G4)
CC-Link
POINT
When changing the network parameter
15
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
CONNECTION
or resetting.
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
MNET/H mode
(1) Connection settings Network type
(Control station)
Operation settings
Network No.*1 1
Group No. 0
Mode*2 Online
Total stations 2
each station LB
Send range for
Item Set value necessity at No.1 End 00FFH
GOT connection
Start 0100H
LB/LW settings*3
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) Sta.
Network range assignment No.2 End 01FFH
Write authority Mark the checkbox
Sta. Start 0000H
each station LW
Send range for
User name*2 target
No.1 End 00FFH
Password*2 password
Sta. Start 0100H
Detailed settings -
No.2 End 01FFH
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been (LX/LY) settings*3 No setting
changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
*2 If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, Monitoring time (Use default value)
input the changed user name and password.
*3 No setting
Specify I/O master Sta.
(2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings] Specify reserved Sta. No setting
(a) Parameter settings
Supplementary settings (Use default value)
POINT
When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller
module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and
then ON or reset it.
Setting
Item Set value necessity at
GOT connection
Number of modules 1
Target module 1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
However, the same transfer network number
MELSECNET/H
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
Therefore, the one that can access to other station
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Item Set value
[Transfer Network No.]s. Network Type MNET/H mode
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection)
MELSECNET/10
Retry count 3times (Use default value)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
POINT
CONNECTION
NETWORK
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the
following. 12
9.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Range 13
Transfer target network No. 1 to 239
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Relay network No. 1 to 239
STATION)
POINT
Routing parameter setting of request source
14
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
request source GOT.
For the setting, refer to the following. CONNECTION
9.3.3 Routing parameter setting (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
10.
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
10.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
NETWORK
10.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
10.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
10.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 26
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
10 - 1
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC
TO PLC NETWORK)
POINT
(1) Connectable network
The MELSECNET/10 connection includes the MELSECNET/H network system used in the MELSECNET/10
mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network.
Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station.
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q04UDHCPU
MELSECNET/H
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU 10
Q04UDEHCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q06UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/10
MELSEC-Q Q10UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
(Q mode) Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU 11
Q03UDVCPU
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
CONNECTION
Q13UDVCPU
NETWORK
Q26UDVCPU
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*1
MELSECNET/10 10.2
module Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 12
L02CPU
L26CPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
L26CPU-BT
MELSEC-L - -
NETWORK
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
(A mode)
Q02HCPU-A MELSECNET/10 10.2 13
Q06HCPU-A
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
(QnACPU)
STATION)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
MELSECNET/10 10.2
14
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
(Continued to next page)
*1 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042.
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
MELSECNET/10 10.2
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
(AnCPU) A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21 - -
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
- -
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q172CPU*1*2
MELSECNET/H
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
Q172HCPU 10
Q173HCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Motion
controller Q172DCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
MELSECNET/10
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100 - -
CONNECTION
NETWORK
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU 12
A373UCPU-S3
CC-Link IE FIELD
A171SCPU
CONNECTION
Motion
NETWORK
controller A171SCPU-S3
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series) - -
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN 13
A172SHCPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
A173UHCPU-S1
STATION)
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/H
QJ72LP25-25
14
remote I/O QJ72LP25G - -
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
15
Ethernet
adapter module
CONNECTION
Robot CRnQ-700
MELSECNET/10 10.2
controller (Q172DRCPU)
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3U
FX3UC
Model name
CPU series
Optical loop Coaxial bus
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1
MELSEC-QS
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71BR11*1
QJ71LP21S-25
CNC C70
Robot controller (CRnQ-700)
MELSEC-Q (A mode)
AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11
MELSEC-A
A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11
Motion controller CPU (A Series)
*1 Use function version B or later of the CPU and MELSECNET/H network module.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system
10
MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(When MELSECNET/H (When MELSECNET/10
MELSECNET/10
communication unit is used) communication unit is used)
MELSECNET/H,
PLC MELSECNET/10 GOT
network module
Connection cable
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
PLC Connection cable GOT
NETWORK
MELSECNET/H, Number of
MELSECNET/10 Communication Max. connectable
Model name Cable model Option device Model equipment
network module
*1
type distance
12
GT15-J71LP23-25
QJ71LP21
CC-Link IE FIELD
Optical fiber cable *4
MELSEC-Q QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/10 *3
CONNECTION
*2 GT15-75J71LP23-Z
QJ71LP21S-25
NETWORK
*5
QJ71LP21
Optical fiber cable GT15-75J71LP23-25
13
MELSEC-QS QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/10 *3
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
*2 *4
QJ71LP21S-25 63 GOTs
AJ71QLP21 GT15-J71LP23-25
AJ71QLP21S Optical fiber cable *4
MELSEC-QnA MELSECNET/10 *3
STATION)
A1SJ71QLP21 *2 GT15-75J71LP23-Z
A1SJ71QLP21S *5
CONNECTION
*1 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (Via G4)
CC-Link
*3 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total
INVERTER
number of stations.
For details, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual
Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual 16
*4 Specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as the Communication Settings.For the setting, refer to the following.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10
(When MELSECNET/H (When MELSECNET/10
communication unit is used) communication unit is used)
MELSECNET/H,
PLC MELSECNET/10 GOT
network module
Connection cable
MELSECNET/H, Number of
MELSECNET/10 Communication Max. connectable
Model name Cable model Option device Model equipment
network module type distance
*2
MELSEC-Q GT15-J71BR13*5
Coaxial cable
*1 QJ71BR11*1 MELSECNET/10 *4
*3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6
C Controller
Coaxial cable
module QJ71BR11*1 MELSECNET/10 *3
*4 GT15-J71BR13*5
MELSEC-QS
31 GOTs
GT15-J71BR13*5
AJ71QBR11 Coaxial cable
MELSEC-QnA MELSECNET/10 *4
A1SJ71QBR11 *3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6
GT15-J71BR13*5
AJ71BR11 Coaxial cable
MELSEC-A MELSECNET/10 *4
A1SJ71BR11 *3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6
*1 Use a PLC CPU and MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or later.
*2 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10.3.1 Setting communication
10.3.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
Set the channel of the connected equipment. (1) MELSECNET/H 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
2.
MELSECNET/10
3.
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Description Range
• MNET/H mode 12
Set the network type. • MNET/10 mode
Click! Network Type
(Default: MNET/H mode) • MNET/H Extended
CC-Link IE FIELD
mode*1
CONNECTION
Set the network No.
NETWORK
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
Network No.
(Default: 1)
1 to 239
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
• Offline
3. Set the following items.
Set the operation mode of the
• Test between
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi GOT. slave station*2
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Mode Setting
(Default: • Self-loopback test*2
STATION)
Type to be connected. Online (auto. reconnection)) • Internal self-
• I/F: Interface to be used loopback
• Driver: test*2
When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit • H/W test*2 14
MELSECNET/H Set the number of retries to be
When using the MELSECNET/10 communication performed when a communication
CONNECTION
unit timeout occurs.
Retry When no response is received 0 to 5times
MELSECNET/10 (Via G4)
after retries, a communication
CC-Link
POINT
16
The settings of connecting equipment can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
SERVO AMPLIFIER
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Station number setting
communication unit is used)
MELSECNET/H
Description Set value
switch
4
5 6 Set the station No. of the
7 8
2 3
X10 MELSECNET/10 1 to 64: GT15-
POINT
9
0 1
communication unit. 75J71LP23-Z
10
STATION
No.
4
5 6 Set to not duplicate other 1 to 32: GT15-
stations in the network. 75J71BR13-Z
7 8
2 3
Switch setting of the communication unit X1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(Default: 01)
9
0 1
When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit,
MELSECNET/10
the switch setting is not needed.
(4) Mode setting switch
For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the
following manual. Mode setting switch Description Set value
GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit
User's Manual 67
89
On-line
11
AB
45
0
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CDE
MODE
(Default: 0)
23
F0 1
CONNECTION
GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z
NETWORK
POINT
RUN POWER
PC
CC-Link IE FIELD
F.LOOP R.LOOP
CONNECTION
(2) When the switch setting is changed
NETWORK
4 5 6
GROUP No.
9 0 1
(4) 67
89
4 5 6
the MELSECNET/10 communication unit to the
AB E
45
7 8
2 3
CD
MODE X100
23
F0 1 9 0 1
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X1 X1
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(1) Network number setting switch communication unit.
For details, refer to the following manual.
Network number setting
Description Set value GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit
STATION)
switch
User's Manual
5 6
4
7 8
2 3
9 0 1
X100
14
Set the network No. of
4 5 6
the MELSECNET/10
7 8
2 3
CONNECTION
(Default: 001)
4 5 6
(Via G4)
CC-Link
7 8
2 3
X1
9 0 1
15
(2) Group number setting switch
GROUP No.
9 0 1 communication unit.
setting (fixed)*1
(Default: 0)
16
*1 The GOT does not use the group number.
Specify "0".
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
QJ71LP21, POINT
QJ71LP21-25,
MELSECNET/H network module 10.4.1
QJ71LP21S-25, When connecting to Q170MCPU
QJ71BR11
When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of
AJ71QLP21, the MELSECNET/H network module is set to "70".
AJ71QLP21S,
MELSECNET/10 network
AJ71QBR11,
module 10.4.2
A1SJ71QLP21,
(QnA Series)
A1SJ71QLP21S,
A1SJ71QBR11
Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network
module
AJ71LP21,
MELSECNET/10 network Set the station number setting switch and mode setting
AJ71BR11,
module 10.4.3
A1SJ71LP21, switch.
(A Series)
A1SJ71BR1
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
10.4.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H RUN
T.PASS
SD
MNG
D.LINK
RD
EXT.PW
RUN
T.PASS
SD
MNG
D.LINK
RD
90 1
456
456
90 1
This section describes the settings of the GOT and
X10 78 X10 78
23
(1) 23
(1)
MELSECNET/H network module in the following case of
90 1
456
456
90 1
X1 78 X1 78
system configuration.
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to
IN IN
the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the
MELSECNET/10 Mode as a network type.
34 5 3 45
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
(2) (2)
01
01
MODE
89 A
89 A
POINT +24V
+24V
24G
24G
MELSECNET/H network module OUT OUT
QJ71BR11
RUN MNG
System configuration
T.PASS D.LINK
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
X10
78
23
(1)
90 1
456
X1
<GOT> (Use the default value for settings other 78
(2)
01
MODE
89 A
BCD
Station No. :2
Mode : Online
Network No. :1
Network range assignment: LB0100H to LB01FFH
LW0100H to LW01FFH
MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network)
Station No. :1
Mode : Online (10Mbps)
Network type : MNET/10 mode (Control station)
Network No. :1
Total stations :2 QJ71BR11
Network range assignment: LB0000H to LB00FFH
LW0000H to LW00FFH
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting
MELSEC-Q or QS series)
MELSECNET/H
Station number necessity
setting switch
Description Set value
at GOT
(1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer
connection (a) Network parameter
Station number
setting 1
10
(Station No.1)*1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*1 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.
Setting
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
necessity
Mode setting switch Description Set value
at GOT
connection
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Mode setting
0 (fixed)
(Online: 10Mbps)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Setting
When the switch setting has been changed
NETWORK
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
connection
PLC CPU.
MNET/10 mode
Network type
(Control station) (fixed) 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Starting I/O No.*1 0000H
Network No.*2 1
Total stations 2
STATION)
Group No. 0 (fixed)
CONNECTION
Interrupt settings
(Via G4)
Control station return setting
CC-Link
Interlink transmission
parameters
15
Routing parameters Refer to (c)
CONNECTION
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
POINT
When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
or resetting.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
necessity at
Controller module) Item Set value
GOT
MELSECNET/H
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the connection
MELSECNET/H utility. MNET/10 mode
Network type
(Control station)
Operation settings
(1) Connection settings
Network No.*1 1
Group No. 0 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Mode Online
MELSECNET/10
Return (Use default value)
Total stations 2
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
each station LB
Send range for
Setting No.1 End 00FFH
Item Set value necessity at
Start 0100H
CONNECTION
GOT connection
LB/LW settings*2
Sta.
NETWORK
Network range assignment
No.2 End 01FFH
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)
each station LW
Send range for
User name*2 target
No.1 End 00FFH 12
Start 0100H
Password*2 password Sta.
CC-Link IE FIELD
No.2 End 01FFH
CONNECTION
Detailed settings -
NETWORK
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (LX/LY) settings*2 No setting
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been Monitoring time (Use default value)
changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
*2 If the account of the C Controller module has been changed,
Specify I/O master Sta.*2 No setting
input the changed user name and password.
Specify reserved Sta. No setting
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings]
Supplementary settings (Use default value)
(a) Parameter settings
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
STATION)
*1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.
*2 Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission.
POINT 14
When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller
module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and CONNECTION
then ON or reset it. (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
Setting
Item Set value necessity at
INVERTER
GOT connection
Number of modules 1
Target module 1
CONNECTION
POINT
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
Designer3, refer to the following.
10.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
POINT
Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit
Item Range
For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10
Transfer target network No. 1 to 239
communication unit, refer to the following.
Relay network No. 1 to 239 10.3.1 Setting communication interface
Relay station No. 1 to 120 (Communication settings)
POINT
Routing parameter setting of request source
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
request source GOT.
For the setting, refer to the following.
10.3.3 Routing parameter setting
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
module
Series)
MELSECNET/H
Set for each setting switch.
This section describes the settings of the GOT and AJ71QLP21 AJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11
MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA series) in the A J71QLP21 A J71QLP21S AJ71QBR11
following case of system configuration.
10
RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER
PC - - MNG PC - - MNG PC - - MNG
REMOTE - - S.MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG
10 DUAL - - D.LINK 1 10 DUAL - - D.LINK 1 10 - D.LINK 1
SW.E - - T.PASS SW.E - - T.PASS SW.E - - T.PASS
100 M/S.E - - 100 M/S.E - - EX.POWER 100 M/S.E - -
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
R DATA - - DATA R R DATA - - DATA R R DATA -
MELSECNET/10
provide explanations.
F.LOOP R.LOOP F.LOOP R.LOOP
GROUP NO.
(2) GROUP NO. (2) GROUP NO. (2)
STATION NO. STATION NO. STATION NO.
11
X1
(3) X1
(3) X1
(3)
For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5) MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5) MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5)
(QnA Series), refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
2: OFFLINE 2: OFFLINE 2: OFFLINE
CONNECTION
NETWORK
24V
24G
FG
System configuration
12
FRONT SIDE FRONT SIDE
IN IN
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S
CC-Link IE FIELD
than the following.)
CONNECTION
A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S
NETWORK
Station No. :2 MNG
S.MNG
PC
REM.
OVER
AB. IF
‚d
‚q
EXT.P W
MNG
S.MNG
PC
REM.
OVER
AB. IF
‚d
‚q
‚q ‚q
Mode : Online DUAL
D.LINK
SWE.
M/S.E.
TIME
DATA
‚n
‚q
DUAL
D.LINK
SWE.
M/S.E.
TIME
DATA
‚n
‚q
(4)
13
456
456
901
(4)
901
X100 L R X100 L R
23 23
(F.L) (R.L.) (F.L) (R.L.)
<MELSECNET/10 network module> *1 (1) 78
(1) 78
456
456
901
901
X10 X10
23 23
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 78 78
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
456
456
901
901
CC-Link CONNECTION
X1 SW OFF ON X1 SW OFF ON
23 23
1 PC REM. 1 PC REM.
(2) (2)
456
456
901
901
GR.NO. 3 PRM D.PRM GR.NO. 3 PRM D.PRM
Mode : Online 23 4
5
ST,SIZE
8,16,32,64
23 4
5
ST,SIZE
8,16,32,64
456
901
901
X10 7 2,4,6,8k X10 7 2,4,6,8k
(3)
23 23
8 EXT.PW 8
Network No. :1 78 78
456
456
901
901
Total stations :2 X1
23 OFF ON
{24V
X1
23 OFF ON
STATION)
SW SW
EF
EF
(5)
89
89
01
01
MODE 23 2 MODE 23 2
W0000H to W00FFH
45 45
3 3
24G
MODE
0 : ONLINE(A.R)
4
5 (6) MODE
0 : ONLINE(A.R)
4
5 (6)
■ Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module
2 : OFFLINE 2 : FOFFLINE
6 6
FRONT SIDE 7 FRONT SIDE 7
■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
FG
8 8
(5)
IN
14
the base unit.
OUT OUT
The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/10 network module is A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S
set at "0".
A1SJ71QBR11 CONNECTION
A1SJ71QBR11
(Via G4)
CC-Link
RUN PW CRC
‚d
MNG PC OVER
‚q
S.MNG REM. AB. IF ‚q
SWE. TIME ‚n
D.LINK M/S.E. DATA ‚q
T.PASS PRM E. UNDER
SD
CPU R/W RD
NETWORK
NO. 78 DISPLAY
(4)
15
456
901
X100 L R
23
(F.L) (R.L.)
(1) 78
456
901
X10
23
78
456
901
X1 SW OFF ON
23
CONNECTION
1 PC REM.
78 2 N.ST MNG
(2)
456
901
5 8,16,32,64
ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE
456
901
X10 7 2,4,6,8k
23
(3) 78
8
456
901
X1
23 OFF ON
SW
BCD 1
(5)
67 A
EF
89
01
MODE 23 2
45
3
MODE
(6)
16
4
0 : ONLINE (A.R)
5
2 : OFFLINE
6
7
8
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
A1SJ71QBR11
Setting
Network number Set necessity at
Description
setting switch value GOT
connection
NETWORK NO. 78
90 1
4 5 6
X100
23
78 Network
9 0 1
4 5 6
78
9 0 1
4 5 6
X1
23
Setting
Set necessity at
Group number setting switch Description
value GOT
connection
78
Group
No. setting 0
90 1
4 5 6
GROUP.NO.
23 (No group (fixed)
setting)
Setting
Set necessity at
Station number setting switch Description
value GOT
connection
STATION.NO. 78
9 0 1
4 5 6
X10
23 Station number
78 setting 1
9 0 1
4 5 6
X1 (Station No.1)*2
23
Setting
Set necessity at
LED indication select switch Description
value GOT
connection
DISPLAY
LED indication
L R L (F.L.)
select
(F.L) (R.L.)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting (1) Network parameter
MELSECNET/H
Set necessity at
Mode setting switch Description
value GOT
connection
EF
(Online) (fixed)
01
0 : ONLINE(A.R)
67
23
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
45
2 : OFFLINE
MELSECNET/10
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Setting
Condition setting
switches
Setting
switch
Description
Set
value
necessity at
GOT
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
connection
Network type
CONNECTION
(PLC to PLC OFF
SW1
NETWORK
net-work (fixed)
(PC))
Station type
OFF ON
SW
SW2
(Control
station
ON
(fixed)
12
Setting
1 (MNG))
necessity at
CC-Link IE FIELD
2 Item Set value
Parameter GOT
CONNECTION
3 for using*1 connection
NETWORK
OFF
4 SW3 (common
(fixed) MNET/10
5 parameter Network type
(Control station) (fixed)
(PRM))
6
7 SW4 No. of OFF
Start I/O No. 0000H
13
8 stations*1 (fixed) Network No.*1 1
SW5
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
SW6 B/W Total stations 2
OFF
Total BW Network range assignment Refer to (2)
SW7 (fixed)
points*1
STATION)
Refresh parameters
OFF
SW8 Not used Interlink transmission (Use default value)
(fixed)
POINT
When the switch setting (other than the LED indication
15
select switch) is changed
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
CONNECTION
PLC CPU.
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value (Use default)
Retry 3times This section describes the settings of the GOT and
MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) in the
Timeout Time 3sec
following case of system configuration.
In this section, the network parameter (common
parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to 10
POINT
provide explanations.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
MELSECNET/10
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT POINT
Designer3, refer to the following.
10.3.1 Setting communication interface MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series)
(Communication settings) For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module (A
Series), refer to the following manual. 11
Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Setting of the MELSECNET/10 PLC network) Reference Manual
communication unit
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Set value System configuration
Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1 ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
■ Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit
Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed) <GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other
12
Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2 than the following.)
CC-Link IE FIELD
Station No. :2
Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed) Mode : Online
CONNECTION
Network No. :1
NETWORK
Network range assignment: LB0100H to LB01FFH
MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) LW0100H to LW01FFH
POINT
<MELSECNET/10 network module> *1
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)
Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit
For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10
Station No.
Mode
:1
: Online 13
Network type : MNET/10 (Control station)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
communication unit, refer to the following. Network No. :1
Total stations :2
10.3.1 Setting communication interface Network range assignment: LB0000H to LB00FFH
LW0000H to LW00FFH
(Communication settings) ■ Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module
STATION)
■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
90 1
4 5 6
10REMOTE - - S.MNG 1 REMOTE - - S.MNG
10 1
DUAL -
SW.E -
100M/S.E -
- D.LINK
- T.PASS
- EX.POWER 100
SW.E -
M/S.E -
- D.LINK
- T.PASS
-
X100
PRM.E - - CPUR/W PRM.E - - CPUR/W
CRC - - CRC CRC - 23
E OVER - - OVER E E OVER -
AB.IF - - AB.IF R AB.IF -
R TIME - - TIME R TIME -
R DATA -
O UNDER -
LOOP -
- DATA
- UNDER O
- LOOP
R R
O
DATA -
UNDER - Network
R R SD - - SD R R
SD - 78
RD - - RD RD -
No. setting
9 0 1
4 5 6
F.LOOP R.LOOP
X10 1
NETWORK NO. NETWORK NO. 23 (Network
X100 X100
*1*2
78 No.1)
(1) (1)
9 0 1
4 5 6
X10 X10
X1
X1 X1 23
Setting
Group number Set necessity at
Description
setting switch value GOT
connection
FRONT SIDE
IN
OUT
78
Group No.
setting 0
90 1
4 5 6
GROUP.NO.
23 (No group (fixed)
setting)
A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11
A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11
RUN PW CRC RUN PW CRC
E E
MNG PC OVER MNG PC OVER
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
R R
S.MNG REM. AB. IF R S.MNG REM. AB. IF R
DUAL SWE. TIME O SWE. TIME O
D.LINK M/S.E. DATA R D.LINK M/S.E. DATA R
T.PAS. PRM E. UNDER T.PAS. PRM E. UNDER
F.E. R.E. SD SD
CPU R/W RD CPU R/W RD
(3) Station number setting switch
NETWORK NETWORK
NO. 78 DISPLAY NO. DISPLAY
78
Setting
456
901
X100
(4) (4)
5
L R X100 L R
23 23
(F.L) (R.L.)
(1)
78
(1)
78
Set necessity at
456
901
X10
0
X10
23 23
78 78 value GOT
456
901
X1 SW OFF ON X1 SW OFF ON
connection
23 23
1 PC REM. 1 PC REM.
78 2 N.ST MNG 78 2 N.ST MNG
(2) (2)
456
901
GR.NO.
0
GR.NO.
23 4 ST,SIZE 23 4 ST,SIZE
5 8,16,32,64 5 8,16,32,64
ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE
456
901
X10
5
(3)
23
78
8
(3)
23
78
8
STATION.NO. 78
9 0 1
4 5 6
456
901
X1 X1
X10
5
23
OFF ON
23 OFF ON
SW SW
(5)
CD
AB E 1
(5)
BCD 1 23 Station number
89
789
F01
F01
MODE 2 MODE 2
67
23 345
45
setting
3 3
MODE
0 : ONLINE(A,R)
4
5
(6) MODE
0 : ONLINE(A,R)
4
5 (6) 78 1
9 0 1
2 : OFFLINE
4 5 6
(Station No.1)*3
2 : OFFLINE
FRONT SIDE
6
7
6
7 X1
8 8
23
IN
OUT
Setting
Set necessity at
LED indication select switch Description
value GOT
connection
DISPLAY
LED indication
L R L (F.L.)
select
(F.L) (R.L.)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting (1) Network parameter
MELSECNET/H
Set necessity at
Mode setting switch Description
value GOT
connection
Mode setting 0
10
MODE BCD
67 A
(Online) (fixed)
EF
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
89
0:ONLINE(A.R)
01
23
MELSECNET/10
45
2:OFFLINE
Setting 11
Condition setting Setting Set necessity at
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Description
switches switch value GOT
connection
CONNECTION
Network type
NETWORK
(PLC to PLC OFF
SW1 Setting
net-work (fixed)
(PC)) necessity at
Item Set value
Station type
GOT
connection 12
OFF ON (Control ON
SW SW2 MNET/10
station (fixed) Network type
CC-Link IE FIELD
1 (MNG)) (Control station) (fixed)
CONNECTION
2
Start I/O No. 0000H
NETWORK
Parameter
3
*1
for using Network No.*1 1
4 OFF
SW3 (common
5 (fixed)
parameter Total stations 2
6
7
(PRM))
Network range assignment Refer to (2) 13
SW4
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
8 No. of OFF Refresh parameters
SW5 stations*1 (fixed)
Interlink transmission (Use default value)
SW6 Total B/W OFF parameters
STATION)
SW7 points*1 (fixed)
Routing parameters Refer to (3)
OFF : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
SW8 Not used
(fixed)
POINT
15
When the switch setting (other than the LED indication
select switch) is changed
CONNECTION
PLC CPU.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Supplementary setting
(Use default value)
Station inherent parameters POINT
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Routing parameter setting of request source
*1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
request source GOT.
POINT For the setting, refer to the following.
10.3.3 Routing parameter setting
When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
or resetting.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value (Use default)
Retry 3times
10
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
MELSECNET/10
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
Designer3, refer to the following.
10.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Setting of the MELSECNET/10
communication unit
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Set value
CC-Link IE FIELD
Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit
For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
communication unit, refer to the following.
10.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
(1) The following networks including the GOT cannot be The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ-
configured. 700 are applicable to the MELSECNET/H connection
• MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network) (PLC to PLC network) only.
• MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network)
For connecting the GOT to the MELSECNET/10
(2) When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H (PLC network system (PLC to PLC network), set the
to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network)
following. to the MELSECNET/10 mode.
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO
PLC NETWORK) Connection to QSCPU
The GOT can only read device data and sequence
Monitoring range programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU.
Only PLC CPU of the same networks No. can be
The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.
monitored in GOT.
For details, refer to the following manual. Connection to Q170MCPU
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
Manual device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
Starting GOT with MELSECNET/10 When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
connection
With the MESLSECNET/10 connection, the data link When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
starts approximately 10 seconds after the GOT starts. to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
cannot be executed.
When a network error occurs in the system For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
alarm GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
When a system alarm regarding a network error occurs Manual
with the MELSECNET/10 connection, the system alarm
is kept displaying on the GOT even though the error Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
factor is removed.
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
MELSECNET/10
11.
NETWORK CONNECTION 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 7
NETWORK
11.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 8
11.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 10 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
11.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 16
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
11 - 1
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK
CONNECTION
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1 CC-Link IE *1 *1
11.2
*1
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
Q25PRHCPU (Main base)
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
- -
Q25PRHCPU
MELSEC-Q (Extension base)
(Q mode)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
CC-Link IE 11.2
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q50UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/H
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
MELSEC-Q
Q04UDVCPU CC-Link IE 11.2
(Q mode)
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*1
CC-Link IE 11.2
MELSECNET/10
module Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU CC-Link IE 11.2
L02CPU
L26CPU
MELSEC-L
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P
- - 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
CONNECTION
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
NETWORK
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1 12
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q4ACPU
CONNECTION
Q4ARCPU
NETWORK
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
13
A2UCPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
STATION)
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1 14
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU CONNECTION
A3ACPUP21 (Via G4)
CC-Link
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 - -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21 15
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
CONNECTION
A2NCPUP21
INVERTER
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
CONNECTION
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
Q172CPUN
- -
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
Q172DCPU
controller
CPU Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*1
MR-MQ100 - -
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A273UCPU
MELSECNET/H
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
Motion
A171SCPU 10
A171SCPU-S3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
controller
- -
CPU
MELSECNET/10
A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
CONNECTION
WS0-CPU1
NETWORK
MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25-25
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G - -
station
QJ72BR15
12
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - -
CC-Link IE FIELD
head module
CONNECTION
CC-Link IE
NETWORK
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CC-Link IE 11.2
controller (Q172DRCPU)
FX0
FX0S
STATION)
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
14
FX2C
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N
-
- CONNECTION
FX2N (Via G4)
CC-Link
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3G
15
FX3GC
-
FX3U
CONNECTION
FX3UC
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
11.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
CC-Link IE controller
QCPU GOT
network module Communication driver
Connection cable
CC-Link IE Controller Network
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
CC-Link IE controller connectable
Model name*5 network
communication unit*1
Communication
type
Cable model
Max.
distance
Option device Model equipment 12
MELSEC-Q
CC-Link IE FIELD
C Controller QJ71GP21-SX Optical fiber cable
CONNECTION
CC-Link IE *3 GT15-J71GP23-SX*6 119 GOTs*4
module QJ71GP21S-SX *2
NETWORK
MELSEC-QS
*1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or
later.
For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Controller Network module side, refer to the following manual.
13
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
*2 For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manual.
STATION)
For details, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
*4 When Universal model QCPUs is a control station, up to 119 GOTs can be connected.
When a QCPU other than Universal model QCPU is the control station, the number of connectable GOTs is 63 units (at most).
14
Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU cannot be used as the control station.
*5 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, only MELSEC-Q series Universal model QCPU can be used.
*6 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a module with the serial No. 02910908******* or later.
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
2.
3.
4.
Item Description Range
• CC IE Control
Network Set the network Type
• CC IE Control
Type*4 (Default: CC IE Control)
extended mode
Set the network No.
Network No. 1 to 239
Click! (Default: 1)
Set the station No. of the GOT.
Station No. 1 to 120
(Default: 1)
• Online
(auto.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the reconnection)
menu. • Offline
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Link IE controller network.
Monitor *2 *3
This setting is not valid in all High /Normal/Low
MELSECNET/H
Speed
systems.
Routing parameter setting
(Default: High) When communicating within the host network, routing
parameter setting is unnecessary.
*1 For details, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual For details of routing parameters, refer to the following
*2 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of
data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the
manual. 10
monitor screen. CC-Link IE Controller Network
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
However, the range may affect the sequence scan time Reference Manual
when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/
MELSECNET/10
Q00/Q01CPU.
If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time,
do not set [High].
(This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.)
*3 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the
sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when
connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/
Q01CPU. 11
However, the monitor speed may be reduced.
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
*4 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended
mode, set to [CC IE Control extended mode]. The extended
mode can be used in GT Designer3 version 1.22Y or later.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
(1) Switch setting example
For the switch setting example, refer to the 12
following. Item Range
CC-Link IE FIELD
11.4 PLC Side Setting Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
CONNECTION
(2) Communication interface setting by Utility Relay Network No. 1 to 239
NETWORK
The communication interface setting can be
Universal model QCPU 1 to 120
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] Relay Station
QCPU other than Universal model
after writing [Communication Settings] of project No. 1 to 64
data. QCPU*1
For details on the Utility, refer to the following *1 Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU are not included.
13
manual.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT User’s Manual
POINT
(3) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
STATION)
(1) Routing parameter setting of relay station
Utility, the latest setting is effective. Routing parameter setting is also necessary for
(4) Network type the relay station.
Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU
side and the GOT side. If the net work types of the
For the setting, refer to the following. 14
11.4 PLC Side Setting
CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error
is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side. (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator
CONNECTION
(a) The color of the cells for the items which are
reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT
(Via G4)
Navigator changes to green. Set items, which
CC-Link
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the target network No. overlaps, the item set in
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network advance is overwritten.
No.]s. (c) The routing information is used manually by
the user when the data is created. Therefore,
after changing the network configuration by 16
MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing
SERVO AMPLIFIER
POINT
(Use the default value for settings other
than the following.)
Network type : CC IE Control extended mode
Network No. :1
CC-Link IE Controller Network module Station No. :2
Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection)
For details of the CC-Link IE Controller Network Network range assignment : LB0100H to LB01FFH
module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network
Monitor Speed : High
LW00100H to LW001FFH
Station No. :1
Mode : Online
Network type : CC IE Control extended mode
System configuration1 (Control station)
Network No. :1
(Network Type: CC IE Control) Total stations :2 LB0000H to LB00FFH
Network range assignment : LW00000H to LW000FFH
■ GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System
configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) *1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on
slot 0 of the base unit.
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network
than the following.) module is set at [0].
Network type : CC IE Control
Network No. :1
Station No. :2
Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection)
Network range assignment : LB0100H to LB01FFH
LW00100H to LW001FFH
CC-Link IE Controller Network
Monitor Speed : High
Station No. :1
Mode : Online
Network type : CC IE Control (Control station)
Network No. :1
Total stations :2
Network range assignment : LB0000H to LB00FFH
LW00000H to LW000FFH
■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
POINT
When connecting to Q170MCPU
When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of
the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set to
"70".
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q, QS series) of System configuration1
MELSECNET/H
(Network Type: CC IE Control)
(1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer
(a) Network parameter
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
connection
CONNECTION
Station Start 0000H
NETWORK
No.1 End 00FFH
LB
Station Start 0100H
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
No.1 End 000FFH
NETWORK
LW
Station Start 00100H
Setting
No.2 End 001FFH
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
LX/LY setting*1 No setting
13
station*1 No setting
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Specify I/O master
CC-Link CONNECTION
CC IE Control
Network type
(Control station) (fixed) Specify reserved station No setting
Starting I/O No.*1 0000H Supplementary setting (Use default value)
STATION)
Network No.*2 1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
Total stations 2
Interlink transmission
(Use default value)
15
parameters
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(a) Parameter settings
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Total stations 2
CONNECTION
Item Set value No.1 End 00FFH
GOT
NETWORK
LB
connection
Station Start 0100H
CC-Link IE FIELD
LW
Target module 1
CONNECTION
Station Start 00100H
NETWORK
Start I/O No. 0000H No.2 End 001FFH
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Mode*1 Online
Specify reserved station No setting
Network No.*2 1
Supplementary settings (Use default value)
Group No. 0
STATION)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Station No. 1 *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
Refresh parameters (Use default value)
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
POINT
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
Designer3, refer to the following.
11.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
Item Range
POINT
Routing parameter setting of request source
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
request source GOT.
For the setting, refer to the following.
11.3.3 Routing parameter setting
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
model QCPU) of System configuration2
MELSECNET/H
(Network Type: Extended mode) (1) Network type of the GOT side
When the network is in the extended mode, be
(1) [Network parameter] of GX Works2 sure to set the network type of the GOT side to
(a) Network parameter [CC IE Control extended mode].
For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to
the following. 10
11.3.1 Setting communication interface
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(Communication settings)
MELSECNET/10
(2) Network type of the PLC side
Only GX Works2 can set [CC IE Control extended
mode (control station)] or [CC IE Control extended
mode (ordinary station)]. The CPU which is
compatible with the extended mode is Universal
model QCPU only. 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Setting necessity
Item Set value at GOT
connection
CONNECTION
NETWORK
CC IE Control Ext. Mode
Network Type
(Control station) (fixed)
Network No.*2 1
12
Total Stations 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Group No. 0 (Fixed)
NETWORK
Station No. 1
Mode*3 Online
Network Range
Same as the following setting 13
[Network parameter]
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Assignment
CC-Link CONNECTION
of GX Developer
Refresh Parameters
Interrupt Setting
STATION)
(Use default value)
Interlink transmission
parameters
Connection in the multiple CPU system Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
the following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10
seconds or more
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system
alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the
GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Manual
Connection to QSCPU
The GOT can only read device data and sequence
programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU.
The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE FIELD
MELSECNET/10
12.
NETWORK CONNECTION 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
12.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
12.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 7
NETWORK
12.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 8
12.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 10 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
12.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 13
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
12 - 1
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK
CONNECTION
Communication
Series Model name Clock Refer to
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1 - -
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU(Main base)
Q25PRHCPU(Main base)
Q12PRHCPU(Extension base)
- -
Q25PRHCPU(Extension base)
MELSEC-Q
Q00UJCPU
(Q mode)
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU CC-Link IE
FIELD 12.2
Q20UDHCPU NETWORK
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q50UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/H
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
MELSEC-Q Q04UDVCPU
(Q mode) 12.2
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU 10
Q26UDVCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*1
MELSECNET/10
FIELD 12.2
module Q24DHCCPU-V
NETWORK
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU*3 12.2
L02CPU*2
L26CPU
MELSEC-L
L26CPU-BT*2 11
12.2
L02CPU-P*2
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
L26CPU-PBT*2
L02SCPU
CONNECTION
Q02CPU-A
NETWORK
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
12
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q4ACPU
CONNECTION
Q4ARCPU
NETWORK
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1 13
A2UCPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
STATION)
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1 14
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
CONNECTION
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21 (Via G4)
CC-Link
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 - -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
15
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
CONNECTION
A2NCPUR21
INVERTER
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU 16
A3NCPUP21
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A3NCPUR21
*1 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042.
*2 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 13012.
*3 Use a module with the upper five digits later than "13042". Use GX Developer of Version 8.98C or later.
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
Q172CPUN
- -
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU
Motion Q173HCPU
controller Q172DCPU
CPU
(Q Series) Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU-S1
CC-Link IE -
Q173DCPU-S1 FIELD
Q172DSCPU NETWORK
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*1 *2 *2
12.2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
type
A273UCPU
MELSECNET/H
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3 10
A171SCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Motion
MELSECNET/10
controller A171SCPU-S3
- -
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU 11
A172SHCPUN
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
NETWORK
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/H
QJ72LP25-25
12
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G - -
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
CC-Link IE CC-Link IE
NETWORK
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 FIELD 12.2
head module NETWORK
CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE
Field Network
Ethernet
NZ2GF-ETB FIELD 12.2 13
NETWORK
adapter module
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CC-Link IE
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU FIELD 12.2
NETWORK
STATION)
CC-Link IE
Robot CRnQ-
FIELD 12.2
controller 700(Q172DRCPU)
14
NETWORK
FX0
FX0S
-
CONNECTION
FX0N
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S 15
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
CONNECTION
FX1NC
INVERTER
FX2NC -
FX3G
FX3GC
- 16
FX3U
SERVO AMPLIFIER
FX3UC
CONNECTION
MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2
MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
12.2.1 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
Communication driver 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
CC-Link IE Field Network
CC-Link IE
PLC CPU GOT
Field Network unit
Connection cable
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
PLC Connection cable GOT
Model name
Network
communication
Communicatio
n type
Cable model*2
Max
distance*1
option device Model
connectable
equipment
12
unit
CC-Link IE FIELD
MELSEC-Q
CONNECTION
(Universal model) QJ71GF11-T2
NETWORK
Q170MCPU QD77GF16*3
C Controller module
Ethernet cable that meets the
MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2 1000BASE-T standard:
CC-Link IE
MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2 Field Network
Category 5e or higher,
(double-shielded, STP)
12100m GT15-J71GF13-T2 120 GOTs
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CC-Link IE Field straight cable.
-
Network head module
Ethernet adapter
-
module
STATION)
*1 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the connection method (line, star or ring),
the system configuration, etc.
For details, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
14
*2 Use hubs that satisfy the following conditions.
• Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T)
CONNECTION
• Supporting the auto MDI/MDI-X function
• Supporting the auto-negotiation function
• Switching hub (A repeater hub is not available.) (Via G4)
CC-Link
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
2.
3.
4.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
User's Manual
*2 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of
MELSECNET/H
data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the
monitor screen.
However, the range may affect the sequence scan time
when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU.
If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time,
do not set [High].
(This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.) 10
*3 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when
connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU.
MELSECNET/10
However, the monitor speed may be reduced.
POINT
Item Range
(1) Switch setting example
For the switch setting example, refer to the
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
following. Relay Network No. 1 to 239
CONNECTION
NETWORK
The communication interface setting can be *1 Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU are not included.
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
POINT
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
12
(1) Routing parameter setting of relay station
manual.
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for
CC-Link IE FIELD
GT User’s Manual
CONNECTION
the relay station.
(3) Precedence in communication settings For the setting, refer to the following.
NETWORK
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
12.4 PLC Side Setting
Utility, the latest setting is effective.
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator
(4) Network type
Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU
(a) The color of the cells for the items which are
reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT
13
side and the GOT side. If the network types of the
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Navigator changes to green. Set items, which
CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error
are displayed in green cells, from the
is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side.
MELSOFT Navigator.
(b) When the settings of Transfer network No.,
STATION)
Relay network No. or Relay station No. are
12.3.3 Routing parameter setting reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT
Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. in advance are not deleted. However, if the 14
However, the same transfer network number cannot be set target network No. overlaps, the item set in
twice or more (multiple times). advance is overwritten.
CONNECTION
(c) The routing information is used manually by
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the
the user when the data is created. Therefore,
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network (Via G4)
CC-Link
System configuration
(Network Type: CC IE Field)
■ GT Designer3 [Communication setting] of System
configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Field)
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other
than the following.)
Network type : CC IE Field
Network No. :1
Station No. :1
Mode Setting : Online
Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00 to FFH
CC-Link IE Field Network
RWW/RWr00 to FFH
Monitor Speed : High
Refresh parameters
Interrupt settings
(Use default value)
Interlink transmission
parameters
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
However, the same transfer network number
MELSECNET/H
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
Therefore, the one that can access to other station
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of
[Transfer Network No.]s.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Item Set value
Setting
necessity at 11
GOT
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
connection
CONNECTION
setting No.1
NETWORK
Rx/RY, End 00FFH
RWw/RWr
setting(1)*1 RWw/RWr Station Start 00000H
setting No.1 End 000FFH
12
Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
CONNECTION
*1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
NETWORK
POINT
(1) When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the PLC
Item Range 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and Transfer target network No. 1 to 239
then ON or resetting. Relay network No. 1 to 239
(2) GOT station type
Relay station No. 0 to 120
Set the GOT as an intelligent device station.
STATION)
POINT
14
Routing parameter setting of request source
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
request source GOT.
For the setting, refer to the following. CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
POINT
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
Designer3, refer to the following.
12.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT startup in CC-Link IE Field Network
connection Data link failure in other stations at GOT
For the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, the data startup
link is started approximately 15 seconds after the GOT At GOT startup, the data link failure may occur in other
startup. stations.
10
However, after the failure occurrence, the GOT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
When a network error occurs in the system reconnects automatically and monitors the devices
MELSECNET/10
alarm properly.
In the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, when a To avoid such data link failure, start up the GOT 10
network error occurs in the system alarm, the system seconds earlier than the master station.
alarm display cannot be canceled even though the However, if the master station does not complete
causes are removed. startup when GOT starts monitoring (10 seconds after 11
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. the GOT startup), the communication timeout occurs in
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
the GOT side.
CC-Link IE Field Network module version For details, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
For version restrictions of the CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module
NETWORK
module, refer to the following manual. User's Manual
CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module
User's Manual
Data link failure in all stations at GOT startup 12
Connection to Q170MCPU or cable connection/disconnection
CC-Link IE FIELD
The Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) cannot be At GOT startup, the communication is broken
CONNECTION
monitored. temporarily between PORT1 and PORT2 in the CC-
NETWORK
Set the CPU No. to "0" or "1". Link IE Field module which is installed on the GOT.
The device of the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is Thus, as the GOT or a station between the GOT and
monitored. the master station is reconnected, the data link failure
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. may occur on all stations. 13
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Manual
POINT
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device GOT startup
STATION)
GOT startup indicates the startups after the following
operations:
• Turning ON the GOT
• Resetting the GOT main unit
14
• Operating the utility
• Downloading the project including the
CONNECTION
communication settings
• Downloading the OS (Via G4)
CC-Link
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
13.
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
13.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
13.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 6
NETWORK
13.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9
13.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 12 13
13.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 39
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
13 - 1
13. CC-Link CONNECTION
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - -
MELSECNET/H
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-B
MELSEC-L CC-Link(ID) 13.2.2
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
MELSECNET/10
Q02HCPU-A CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU 11
Q4ARCPU
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
CONNECTION
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
NETWORK
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU 12
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
A2ACPUP21
CONNECTION
NETWORK
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
STATION)
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21 14
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1 CONNECTION
(Via G4)
A3NCPU
CC-Link
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU 15
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A1SCPU
INVERTER
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
16
A2SHCPU-S1
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A1SJCPU
CONNECTION
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
Q172HCPU
Motion Q173HCPU
controller Q172DCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100 - -
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion
controller A171SCPU-S3
CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
WS0-CPU0
MELSECNET/H
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25-25
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G - -
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE 10
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - -
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
head module
MELSECNET/10
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
controller
FX0
FX0S
CONNECTION
-
NETWORK
FX0N
FX1
FX2
FX2C
-
12
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
CC-Link IE FIELD
-
CONNECTION
FX2N
NETWORK
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3G
FX3GC 13
-
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
FX3U
FX3UC
STATION)
13.1.2 CC-Link module
14
CPU series CC-Link module
QJ61BT11
Motion controller CPU (Q Series)
QJ61BT11N
CNC C70
Robot controller (CRnQ-700)
15
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11
AJ61QBT11
MELSEC-QnA
CONNECTION
A1SJ61QBT11
INVERTER
MELSEC-Q (A mode)
AJ61BT11
MELSEC-A
A1SJ61BT11
Motion controller CPU (A Series)
16
*1 Transient communication can be performed to only CC-Link modules of function version B or later and software version J or later.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
PLC CC-Link
GOT
module
Connection cable
GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link dedicated *5
QJ61BT11
MELSEC-Q CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
QJ61BT11N
*2 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
CC-Link dedicated
C Controller QJ61BT11 GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link(Ver.1) cable *3
module QJ61BT11N *5
*2
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 CC-Link(Ver.1) cable *3
*5
*2
GT15-J61BT13
AJ61QBT11 CC-Link dedicated *5
MELSEC-QnA CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
A1SJ61QBT11*4
*2 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
GT15-J61BT13
AJ61BT11 CC-Link dedicated *5
MELSEC-A CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
A1SJ61BT11*4
*2 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manuals.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
CC-Link Communication driver
PLC
module
GOT
10
Connection cable
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link Ver2(ID)
MELSECNET/10
(When MODEL GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link communication unit is used)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CC-Link module Communication Max. connectable
Model name Cable model Option device Model equipment
*1 type distance
CONNECTION
MELSEC-Q
NETWORK
C Controller QJ61BT11N
module CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link (Ver.2) cable *3 26 GOTs
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 *4
MELSEC-L
*2
12
-
(L26CPU-BT)
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N
NETWORK
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
*2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
For details, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
*4 Specify Ver.2 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it.
STATION)
For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual.
13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
QCPU CC-Link
GOT
module
Connection cable
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link (Ver.2) cable *3
*4
*2
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
MELSEC-Q QJ61BT11N cable *3
*5
*2
CC-Link (Ver.1)
CC-Link dedicated
cable *3 GT15-75J61BT13-Z 26 GOTs
*2
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link (Ver.2) cable *3
*4
C Controller *2
QJ61BT11N
module CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
*5
*2
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
13.3.1 Setting communication
interface (Communication
POINT
settings)
The settings of connecting equipment can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
10
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
For details, refer to the following.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
2.
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
(1) CC-Link Ver.2 (ID)
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
Click!
CONNECTION
NETWORK
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
menu. Item Description Range 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Set the station No. of the GOT.
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Station No.
(Default: 1)
1 to 64
STATION)
*1
Set the following items. Rate
(Default: 0)
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi
Set the mode of CC-Link. Ver.1/Ver.2/
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Mode
Type to be connected.
(Default: Ver.1) Additional/Offline
14
Expanded Set the cyclic point expansion. Single/Double/
• I/F: Interface to be used Cyclic (Default: Single) Quadruple/Octuple
• Driver:
Set the number of stations
CONNECTION
When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link Occupied
occupied by the GOT. 1 Station/4 Stations
communication unit is used Station
(Default: 1 Station) (Via G4)
CC-Link
0 Online: 156kbps
1 Online: 625kbps
2 Online: 2.5Mbps
3 Online: 5Mbps
4 Online: 10Mbps
POINT
(1) Communication interface setting by Utility
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
GT User's Manual
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Transmission
CC-Link communication unit is
MELSECNET/H
baudrate Description Set value
used) setting switch
0: 156kbps
1: 625kbps
Specify the transmission speed.
POINT
(Default: 0)
2: 2.5Mbps
3: 5Mbps 10
4: 10Mbps
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Switch setting of the communication unit
MELSECNET/10
When using the MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
(4) Condition setting switches
communication unit, the switch setting is not needed.
Condition
For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the setting
Setting
Description Set value
following manual. switches
switch
11
GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Specify input data status of
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Manual OFF: Cleared
SW1 the data link error station.
ON: Held
(Default: OFF)
CONNECTION
GT15-75J61BT13-Z Specify the number of stations
NETWORK
OFF: 1 station
Left side Front side SW2 occupied.
ON: 4 stations
(Default: OFF)
RUN
L RUN 12
345
SD
RD POINT
(1)
EF 2
67 A
01
MODE L ERR.
89
BCD
23
CC-Link IE FIELD
901
456
(2)
CONNECTION
STATION NO.
23
78
1
NETWORK
23
(3) following.
901
456
78
BAUDRATE
ON
1 3 5 7
SW ON OFF DA DG NC NC
1 HOLD CLEAR 2 4 6 8
2 4 1
DB SLD (FG1) NC
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
the MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link
Mode setting
Description Set value
communication unit on the GOT, reset the GOT.
switch
STATION)
Select the online mode.
0 (fixed)
(Default: 0)
14
(2) Station number setting switch
Station CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
number
Description Set value
setting
switch
15
Specify the station No. of the CC-
Link communication unit. 1 to 64
CONNECTION
(Default: 01)
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
CC-Link Ver.1
Number of stations occupied
Link device
Exclusive station Exclusive station 4
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set the station number setting switch, transmission
compatible
MELSECNET/H
speed / mode setting switch.
QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-
Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible in the QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
following system configuration. MST
SD
ERR.
S MST
RD
L ERR.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
POINT
STATION
NO.
MELSECNET/10
5
0
X10
0
X1
0
MODE
Manual QJ61BT11N 4
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
System configuration
NC
1
CONNECTION
NC
2
NETWORK
DA
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 3
SLD
■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit 4
DB
<GOT> (FG)
5
(Use the default value for settings other
than the following.) DG
6
7
12
Station type : Intelligent device
station
Station No. : Station No.1
CC-Link IE FIELD
Number of
: Exclusive station 1
stations occupied
CONNECTION
Transmission speed : 156kbps
(1) Station number setting switch
NETWORK
<CC-Link module> *1
(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)
Type : Master station
Station No. : Station No.0 Station number Setting necessity at
Description Set value
Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) setting switch GOT connection
All connect count
Transmission speed
:
:
1
156kbps 13
■ Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
Station number
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. setting 0 (fixed)
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"
(master station)
STATION)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
14
(2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch
Transmission
CONNECTION
Setting necessity at
rate/mode setting Description Set value
GOT connection
switch (Via G4)
CC-Link
Transmission
rate/
MODE mode setting
(Online:
0
15
*1
156kbps)
POINT
When the switch setting is changed 16
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PLC CPU.
CONNECTION
Setting
necessity
Item*1 Set value
at GOT
connection
Intelligent device
Station type
station (fixed)
Reserve/invalid station
No setting
select
Setting
Remote net
Mode
(Ver.1 mode)
Retry count
Automatic reconnection
station count
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Controller module) (a) Parameter settings
MELSECNET/H
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC-
Link utility.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Setting
Item Set value necessity at Setting
necessity at
CONNECTION
GOT connection
Item*1 Set value
NETWORK
GOT
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) connection
Write authority Mark the checkbox Number of modules 1
CC-Link IE FIELD
Detailed settings - Channel No. (Use default value)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Type Master station (fixed)
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been
Remote net
changed, input the changed IP address or host name. Mode
*2 If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, (Ver.1 mode)
Operation settings
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Occupied number Exclusive station 1
CC-Link CONNECTION
Error event: input data
Clear
status
STATION)
CPU stop: data link status Refresh
Sta.
CONNECTION
Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1
No.1
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Reserve/invalid Sta.
No setting
station select No.1
POINT 16
When changing the network parameter
SERVO AMPLIFIER
(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)
(Communication settings) *1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"
POINT
Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication
unit, refer to the following.
13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL
GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication
unit is used)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set the station number setting switch, transmission MELSEC-Q or QS series)
MELSECNET/H
speed / mode setting switch. (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer
QJ61BT11N (a) Network parameter
QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST
SD
ERR.
S MST
RD
L ERR.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
STATION
NO.
MELSECNET/10
5
X10
(1)
5
X1
C
(2)
11
8
MODE
4
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
NC
1
CONNECTION
NC
NETWORK
DA 2
SLD
3
DB 4
5
12
(FG)
DG
6
7
Setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
necessity at
Item Set value
(1) Station number setting switch
NETWORK
GOT
connection
Station number Setting necessity No. of boards in module 1
Description Set value
setting switch at GOT connection
Start I/O No.*1
Operation setting
0000H
(Use default value)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Station number Type Master station
setting 0 (fixed) Remote net
Mode
(master station) (Ver.2 mode)
STATION)
All connect count 1
Remote input (RX) X400
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Remote output (RY) Y400
Transmission
Automatic reconnection
rate/mode
station count
setting 0
(Online: Stand by master station No.
PLC down select
(Use default value)
15
156kbps)*1
Scan mode setting
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Delay information setting
CONNECTION
Setting
necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Ver.2 intelligent device
Station type
station (fixed)
Detailed settings -
POINT : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been
When changing the network parameter changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
*2 If the account of the C Controller module has been changed,
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, input the changed user name and password.
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
or resetting.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(a) Parameter settings
MELSECNET/H
When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller
module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and
then ON or reset it.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
[Communication settings] of GT Designer3
MELSECNET/10
Item Set value
Station No. 1: Station No.1
Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps
Mode
Expanded Cyclic
Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Single
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Number of stations occupied 1 Station
Setting Input for Error Station Clear
necessity at
CONNECTION
Item*1 Set value Retry 3times (Use default value)
GOT
NETWORK
connection Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)
Number of modules 1
Target module 1 12
Start I/O No. 0000H
POINT
CC-Link IE FIELD
Channel No. (Use default value) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
CONNECTION
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
NETWORK
Type Master station
Designer3, refer to the following.
Remote net
Mode 13.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Ver.2 mode)
(Communication settings)
13
Operation settings
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Occupied number Exclusive station 1
STATION)
CPU stop: data link status Refresh
CONNECTION
Station information settings
Sta.
Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1
No.1
Reserve/invalid Sta.
No setting
CONNECTION
POINT
STATION
NO.
0
X10
0
X1
the following manual.
C
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's (2)
0
MODE
Manual QJ61BT11N 4
System configuration
NC
1
NC
DA 2
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 3
SLD
■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
DB 4
<GOT (Ver.1 compatible)> (FG)
5
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) 6
DG
Station type : Intelligent device 7
station
Station No. : Station No. 1
Number of stations
: Exclusive station 1
occupied
Transmission speed : 156kbps
Transmission
When connecting to Q170MCPU rate/
When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of mode setting 0
the CC-Link module is set to "70". (Online:
156kbps)*1
POINT
When the switch setting has been changed
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
PLC CPU.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSEC-Q or QS series)
MELSECNET/H
(1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer
(a) Network parameter
10
• Station information setting of station No.1 (GOT)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Ver.1 intelligent
Station type
device station (fixed) 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
*2 Exclusive station 1
Exclusive station count
Reserve/invalid station
No setting
select
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Intelligent buffer select
(Use default value)
(word)
CC-Link IE FIELD
*1
necessity at
Setting Set value
CONNECTION
Item
GOT
necessity at
NETWORK
Item Set value connection
GOT
connection Ver.2 intelligent device
Station type
station (fixed)
No. of boards in module 1
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
*2
CC-Link CONNECTION
Operation setting (Use default value) Exclusive station count Exclusive station 1
Type Master station (fixed) Reserve/invalid station
No setting
Remote net select
Mode
(Ver.2 mode)
STATION)
Intelligent buffer select
(Use default value)
All connect count 2 (word)
Remote input (RX) X400 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Remote output (RY) Y400 *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote
net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.
14
Remote register (RWr) D300
[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station.
Remote register (RWw) D200 The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.
*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.
CONNECTION
Special relay (SB) SB0
Special register (SW) SW0
POINT
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Retry count
Automatic reconnection
When changing the network parameter
station count
Stand by master station No. (Use default value)
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, 15
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
PLC down select
or resetting.
Scan mode setting
CONNECTION
configuration.
Setting
Item Set value necessity at Setting
GOT connection *1
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) connection
Write authority Mark the checkbox Number of modules 1
*2 target
User name Target module 1
*2 password
Password Start I/O No. 0000H
Sta.
Single
Expanded cyclic No.1
setting*2 Sta.
Single
No.2
Sta.
Exclusive station 1
No.1
Occupied number*2
Sta.
Exclusive station 1
No.2
Sta.
32 points
No.1
Remote station points
Sta.
32 points
No.2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
GOT
Item Set value (Use default value)
connection
MELSECNET/H
Station No. 2: Station No.2
Station information settings
Sta.
No setting Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps
Reserve/invalid No.1
station select Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Sta.
No setting
No.2 Expanded Cyclic Single
Number of stations occupied 1 Station 10
Intelligent buffer select
(Use default value) Input for Error Station 0: Clear
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(word)
Retry 3times (Use default value)
MELSECNET/10
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
*1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)
net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.
[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station.
The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT. Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT. (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z 11
CC-Link communication unit is used)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
POINT Item Set value
Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed)
CONNECTION
When changing the network parameter
NETWORK
Station number setting switch 1: Station No.1
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller
module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps
then ON or reset it SW1 (Input data status of the
Condition data link error station)
OFF: Cleared
12
setting
SW2 (Number of occupied
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 switches
stations)
OFF: 1 station
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
(1) Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT)
NETWORK
(a) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link POINT
communication unit is used
Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
Station No.
Item Set value
1: Station No.1
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication 13
unit, refer to the following.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps
13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL
Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication
Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) unit is used)
STATION)
Number of stations occupied 1 Station
Input for Error Station 0: Clear
Retry 3times (Use default value) 14
Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
POINT
(1) CC-Link module (L Series)
For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer
to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
Module User's Manual
(2) CC-Link function built-in CPU
For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
Module User's Manual
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
compatible
MELSECNET/H
This section describes the settings of the GOT and
MELSEC-L in the following case of the system
configuration.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting POINT
MELSECNET/10
*1
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT (1) CC-Link module (L Series)
connection
For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer
Station type
Intelligent to the following manual.
device station (fixed)
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1 Module User's Manual 11
(2) CC-Link function built-in CPU
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Reserve/invalid station
No setting
select For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
Intelligent buffer select
refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
(Use default value)
(word) MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
NETWORK
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Module User's Manual
*1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote
net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set.
12
*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.
System configuration
(Example when using CC-Link module (L Series))
POINT
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
NETWORK
When changing the network parameter <GOT>
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, (Use the default value for settings other
than the following.)
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON Station type : Intelligent device
or resetting. Station No.
station
: Station No.1 13
Expanded cyclic setting : Single
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Number of
: Exclusive station
stations occupied
(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)
: 156kbps
STATION)
Item Set value Station No. : Station No.0
Mode : Remote net (Ver.3 mode)
All connect count : 1
Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission speed : 156kbps
POINT
INVERTER
(Communication settings)
CONNECTION
Setting
necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Ver.2 intelligent device
Station type
station (fixed)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Series)
MELSECNET/H
Set for each setting switch.
This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-
AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11
Link module (QnA Series) in the following case of system
configuration. AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11
RUN SW E
B ERR. M/S R
10
RUN 156K
ERR. 625K R MST PRM R
MST
S MST
2. 5M
5M
A
T
S MST TIME O
LOCAL LINE R
POINT
LOCAL 10M E
CPU R / W
CPU R / W
E SW L RUN SD
R M/S TEST T
L ERR. RD
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
R PRM S0 E
O TIME S1 S
R LINE S2 T
MELSECNET/10
L RUN SD
STATION NO. MODE
L ERR. RD
78 67
89 A
456
(2)
901
x
BCD
345
For details of the CC-Link module (QnA Series), refer 10 23 EF0 2
1
(1)
to the following manual. 78 SW OFF ON
ON
456
901
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
x
78 1 23 2
9 01
4 56
x10 3
(1) (4)
23
78 4 CLR HLD
78
456
901
5 1/2 3/4
9 01
(3)
4 56
x1 6 1/4 2/3
11
23 23
7
User's Manual
BCD
MODE
(2)
8 9A
EF 2
01
0 : ONLINE (A. R. ) B RATE 8
67
3 45
1 : ONLINE (RIM )
2 : OFFLINE
0 156K
78
B RATE
9 01
1 625K
(3)
4 56
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
0 156K 23
1 625K 2 2. 5M
2 2. 5M 3 5M
3 5M
4 10M NC
4 10M
System configuration
DA 1
ON
OFF ON SW
NC 2
CONNECTION
M/L S MST 1
2
3
3
(4) DB
NETWORK
CLEAR HOLD 4
12
SLD 7
NC
NC 6
Transmission speed : 156kbps
CC-Link IE FIELD
SLD 7
CONNECTION
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)
9
(FG)
10
NETWORK
Station type : Master station
Station No. : Station No.0
Mode setting : Remote net mode
All connect count :1
Transmission speed : 156kbps
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. Station Setting
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" number necessity at
Description Set value
setting GOT
switch connection
STATION)
78
x
456
901
14
10 23
Station number setting
0 (fixed)
78
(master station)
x
456
901
1 23
Mode setting
Setting
necessity at
15
Description Set value
switch GOT
connection
CONNECTION
MODE
INVERTER
Mode setting
789
(Online: Remote net 0 (fixed)
AB E
456
CD
23
F0 1
mode)
Setting
Condition setting Setting Set necessity at
Description
switches switch value GOT
connection
Station type
(Master OFF
SW1
station/Local (fixed)
station)
1 M / L S. M
2
Input data connection
3
status of the
4 CLR HLD
SW4 OFF No. of boards in module 1
5 1/2 3/4 data link error
6 1/4 2/3
7
station (clear) Start I/O No. 0000H
8
SW5 Number of Type Master station (fixed)
OFF
stations
SW6 (fixed) All connect count 1
occupied*2
Retry count
When the switch setting has been changed
Automatic reconnection
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
station count
PLC CPU.
Wait master station No.
(Use default value)
PLC down select
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
The parameter is written to the buffer memory, and the
data link is automatically started when PLC CPU status
MELSECNET/H
changes from STOP to RUN.
(a) I/O signal of CC-Link module
Control & Communication Link System Master/
Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11
User's Manual 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(b) Device used by user
MELSECNET/10
Device Application
Setting
necessity at M100, M101 Flag for parameter setting
Item Set value
GOT M102, M103 Flag for data link startup
connection
D0 Number of connected modules
Station type
Intelligent device station
D1 Number of retry 11
(fixed)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
D2 Automatic reconnection station count
Exclusive station count*1 Exclusive station 1
D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure
Reserve/invalid station
CONNECTION
No setting Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to
select D4
NETWORK
Station No. 16)
Intelligent buffer select Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to
(Use default value) D5
(word) Station No. 16)
CC-Link IE FIELD
(c) Buffer memory settings used in the present
CONNECTION
POINT example
NETWORK
When changing the network parameter Buffer memory
address Item Set value
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON Decimal (Hex) 13
or resetting.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
1(11 (1H) Number of connected modules 1 (1 module)
CC-Link CONNECTION
2(22 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3times)
Automatic reconnection station
3(33 (3H) 1 (1 station)
count
STATION)
Operation specification in the
6(66 (6H) 0 (stop)
case of CPU failure
16(1016 (10H)
Reserved station specification
(Station No. 1 to Station No. 16)
0 (No
specification)
14
Error invalid station specification 0 (No
20(1420 (14H)
(Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) specification)
b15 to
For 3), the setting is fixed.
b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b0
15
3) 2) 1)
1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT)
CONNECTION
Number of connected
modules (1 module)
Number of retry
(3 times)
Number of
automatic return
stations (1 station)
Operation specification
in the case of CPU
failure (Stop)
Reserved station
specification (No
specification)
Refresh insruction
Refresh insruction
Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN
Data link
startup
normal
completion
(buffer memory)
POINT
When changing the sequence program
After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
MELSECNET/H
communication unit is used This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-
Link module (A Series) in the following case of system
Item Set value
configuration.
Station No. 1: Station No.1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) CC-Link module (A Series)
MELSECNET/10
Number of stations occupied 1 Station For details of the CC-Link module (A Series), refer to
Input for Error Station 0: Clear the following manual.
Retry 3times (Use default value) Control & Communication Link System Master/
Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11
Timeout Time
Delay Time
3sec (Use default value)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
(2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link System configuration
CONNECTION
communication unit is used
NETWORK
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
Item Set value (Use default value) ■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
<GOT>
Retry 3times
12
(Use the default value for settings other
than the following.)
Timeout Time 3sec
Station type : Intelligent device
station
Station No. : Station No.1
Number of station occupied : Exclusive station 1
CC-Link IE FIELD
POINT
Transmission : 156kbps
CONNECTION
speed
<CC-Link module> *1
NETWORK
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Station type : Master station
Station No. : Station No.0
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Mode setting : Remote net mode
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
(Communication settings)
CC-Link CONNECTION
■ Sequence program
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"
STATION)
(Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z
CC-Link communication unit is used)
14
Item Set value
CONNECTION
Station number setting switch 1: Station No.1
SW1
Condition (Input data status of the data OFF: Cleared
setting link error station) 15
switches SW2 (Number of occupied
OFF: 1 station
stations)
CONNECTION
INVERTER
POINT
Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication 16
unit, refer to the following.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
unit is used)
456
901
E SW L RUN SD
R M/S TEST T
R PRM S0 E
L ERR. RD 23
O TIME S1 S
R LINE S2 T
C
5
4
10 0
1 625K
(1) ON SW OFF ON 2 2. 5M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
x
5
1 2 3 5M
STATION NO. 78
3
4 10M
5
x10
(1) (4)
23
4 CLR HLD
78 5 1/2 3/4
(3)
5
0
5
x1 6 1/4 2/3
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
23
C 7
MODE
(2) B RATE 8 ISM SFM
*1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.
8
0 : ONLINE (A. R. )
1 : ONLINE (RIM ) 4
2 : OFFLINE 0 156K
78
B RATE 1 625K
(3)
5
0 156K
2 2. 5M
DA 1
Setting
ON
OFF ON SW
NC 2
M/L S MST 1
2
3
Condition setting Setting necessity at
DB
CLEAR HOLD
3
4
(4)
Description Set value
1/2 3/4 5
1/4 2/3 6 NC 4
ISFM SFM
7
8
DG 5
switches switch GOT
NC 6 connection
SLD 7
DA
NC
1
NC 8
Station type
NC 2
9 (Master OFF
SW1
DB 3
station/Local (fixed)
NC 4 (FG)
10
DG 5
SLD
NC 6
7
station)
NC 8
A1SJ61BT11
(FG)
10
9
SW2 OFF
Not used
SW3 (fixed)
Input data
status of the
(1) Station number setting switch
SW OFF ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
2
SW4 data link OFF
3 error station
Setting
Station
4 CLR HLD
(clear)
necessity at 5 1/2 3/4
number Description Set value 6 1/4 2/3
GOT SW5 Number of
setting switch 7
OFF
connection 8 ISM SFM stations
SW6 *2
(fixed)
occupied
STATION NO.
78 OFF
x SW7 Not used
901
456
10 (fixed)
23 Station number setting
0 (fixed)
(master station) Module
78
x mode OFF
901
456
1 SW8
(Intelligent (fixed)
23
mode)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*2 Will be valid when the CC-Link module is a local station.
(2) Mode setting switch In the case of the master station, turn off it.
Setting
Mode setting
Description Set value
necessity at POINT
switch GOT
connection When the switch setting has been changed
MODE
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
Mode setting PLC CPU.
789
(Online: Remote net 0 (fixed)
AB E
456
CD
23
F0 1
mode)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
The parameter setting and the sequence program of
MELSECNET/H
the data link startup request is required.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
the data link with CC-Link dedicated instructions.
MELSECNET/10
(a) I/O signal of CC-Link module
Control & Communication Link System Master/
Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11
User's Manual
(b) Device used by user 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Device Application
CONNECTION
M1 RLPA instruction error completion flag
NETWORK
M100 Network parameter setting flag
CC-Link IE FIELD
D2 Station data
CONNECTION
D3 Send buffer size
NETWORK
D4 Receive buffer size
D400
Error code in the case of error completion of 13
RLPA instruction
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
D100 to D103 Automatic refresh setting (RX)
STATION)
D108 to D111 Automatic refresh setting (RW)
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Number of connected
modules (1 module)
Dedicated
instruction (RLPA)
Parameter storage
head device (D0)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Head No. of RX (RX0)
MELSECNET/H
RX refresh destination (X)
RX refresh destination
device head No. (400)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
RY head number (RY0)
MELSECNET/10
RY refresh destination (Y)
RY refresh destination
device head No. (400)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
RW head No. (RW0)
CONNECTION
RW refresh destination (D)
NETWORK
RW refresh destination
device head No. (200)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
SB refresh destination (B)
SB refresh destination
device head number (0)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
SW head number (SW0)
STATION)
SW refresh destination (W)
SW refresh destination
device head No. (0)
14
No. of refresh points (512)
Dedicated instruction
CONNECTION
(RRPA)
POINT
When changing the sequence program 16
After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Device Application
D1 Number of retry
Buffer memory
address Item Set value
Decimal (Hex)
1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT.)
01H to 40H: Station No. 1 to Station No. 64
2) Number of stations occupied (Set the same setting of the
number of station occupied as that of the GOT.)
1H: Exclusive station 1
2H: Exclusive station 2
3H: Exclusive station 3
4H: Exclusive station 4
3) Station type (2H: Set it to intelligent device station.)
0H: Remote I/O station
1H: Remote device station
2H: Intelligent device station (Incl. local station)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
* Parameter setting
MELSECNET/H
Module error Module
ready
Number of connected
modules (1 module)
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Number of retry (3 times)
MELSECNET/10
Number of automatic
return stations (1 station)
Operation specification in
the case of CPU failure
(Stop)
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Reserved station
CONNECTION
specification
NETWORK
(No specification)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Station data (Intelligent
NETWORK
device station, exclusive
station 1, station No. 1)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
* Refresh instruction
Refresh instruction
Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN
STATION)
* Data link with buffer memory parameters
14
ready
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Data link
startup
normal
completion
15
(buffer memory)
(buffer
INVERTER
memory)
POINT
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.
Retry 3times
POINT
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
Designer3, refer to the following.
13.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
POINT
Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication
unit, refer to the following.
13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL
GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication
unit is used)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Using cyclic transmission
(1) I/O signal for master station GOT startup in the CC-Link connection
Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output (intelligent device station)
signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master For CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), the
station. data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the
10
When the reserved output signal is turned on, the PLC GOT startup.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
system may be malfunctioned.
MELSECNET/10
For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to
the following manual.
When a network error occurs in the system
alarm
MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit User’s Manual In the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station),
when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the
GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's
Manual
system alarm display cannot be canceled even though 11
the causes are removed.
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
(2) Access range that can be monitored
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.
The monitoring range of remote I/O (RX and RY) and
that of the remote registers (RWr and RWw) vary
CONNECTION
Connection in the multiple CPU system
NETWORK
according to the mode in the master station of the CC-
Link system. When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
the following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
Applicable of monitoring
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 12
Mode of master station Data for each station Data for each station seconds or more
compatible with compatible with
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
CC-Link IE FIELD
CC-Link ver.1 CC-Link ver.2
CONNECTION
Remote net mode -
When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system
NETWORK
alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the
Remote net ver.1
- GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
mode
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Remote net ver.2
mode
*1 Manual 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Remote net additional *1 Connection to LCPU
mode
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute
: Applicable : N/A(All "0") -: N/A of system configuration recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when
STATION)
*1 Monitoring is applicable only when MODEL GT15-J61BT13 turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it
CC-Link communication unit is used.
takes time until the SD memory card becomes
(3) When GOT malfunctions, the cyclic output status available. When the GOT starts before the SD card
remains the same as before becoming faulty. becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the
14
opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no
For transient transmission system alarm occurs.
(1) CC-Link module of target station GT Designer3 Version Screen Design CONNECTION
Mount the CC-Link module of function version B or later Manual (Via G4)
CC-Link
only
• AJ61BT11
INVERTER
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
MELSECNET/10
14.
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
14.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 2
12
14.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 6
14.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
14.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 9
14.5 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 - 11
14.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 17 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
14 - 1
14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU CC-Link *2 *3 *3
Q12PRHCPU (Main base) (G4)
Q25PRHCPU (Main base)
Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)
Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU
(Q mode) 14.2.1
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
CC-Link *2 *2 *2
Q04UDEHCPU
(G4)
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
type
MELSECNET/H
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*2
CC-Link(G4) *1 *1 *1
module 14.2.1
Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - -
L02CPU
L26CPU 10
L26CPU-BT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSEC-L CC-Link(G4) *1 *1 *1
14.2.2
L02CPU-P
MELSECNET/10
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
CONNECTION
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
NETWORK
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
Q2ASCPU-S1
12
MELSEC-QnA
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q2ASHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A2UCPU
NETWORK
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU 13
A2ACPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
STATION)
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU 14
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 - -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU CONNECTION
A1NCPUP21
(Via G4)
CC-Link
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
15
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A2NCPUP21-S1
INVERTER
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
16
A3NCPUR21
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
CC-Link (G4) *4 *4 *4
controller Q172DCPU 14.2.1
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100 - -
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A273UCPU
MELSECNET/H
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
Motion
A171SCPU 10
controller A171SCPU-S3
TO PLC NETWORK)
- -
CONNECTION (PLC
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
MELSECNET/10
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
11
A173UHCPU-S1
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25-25
NETWORK
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G - -
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - -
12
head module
CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE FIELD
Field Network
CONNECTION
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
NETWORK
adapter module
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
STATION)
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
14
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
CONNECTION
FX1NC
FX2NC -
(Via G4)
CC-Link
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3U
15
FX3UC
*1 Only master station can be monitored in GT11.
CONNECTION
Model name
CPU series
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
CC-Link module Peripheral module
16
C Controller module
SERVO AMPLIFIER
QJ61BT11
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) AJ65BT-G4-S3
QJ61BT11N
CONNECTION
Communication driver
CC-Link (G4)
Peripheral
QCPU CC-Link module connection GOT
module
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
Peripheral
PLC Connection cable 1) connection Connection cable 2) GOT
module Number of
connectable
CC-Link Max. Commu Cable model Max. equipment
Model Cable Model Option
module dista nication Connection diagram dista Model
name model name device
*1 nce type number nce
GT09-C30R2-9P
or
15m - (Built into GOT)
AJ65BT RS232 connection
RS-232 diagram 1)
-R2N
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)
MELSEC
GT16-C02R4-9S
-Q CC-Link 1 GOT for
QJ61BT11 dedicated GT15-RS2T4-9P*5 1 peripheral
*3
C QJ61BT11N cable GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) connection
Controlle *2 GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S module
30m
r module GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
AJ65BT
RS-422 - (Built into GOT)
-G4-S3
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) 30m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*4
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Peripheral
CC-Link
LCPU connection GOT
module
module
Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Communication driver
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link (G4)
MELSECNET/10
Peripheral
Connection
PLC connection Connection cable 2) GOT
cable 1) Number of
module
connectable
CC-Link Max. Commu Max.
Cable Model Cable model Option equipment
Model name module dista nication dista Model
model name Connection diagram number device
*1 nce type
GT09-C30R2-9P
nce
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
or
15m - (Built into GOT)
AJ65BT RS232 connection
RS-232
-R2N diagram 1)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)
L02CPU GT16-C02R4-9S
L26CPU
-BT LJ61BT11
CC-Link
dedicated
*3 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*5
1 GOT for
1 peripheral 12
cable GT15-RS4-9S connection
L02CPU-P GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
*2 30m module
L26CPU-PBT GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
CC-Link IE FIELD
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
CONNECTION
AJ65BT - (Built into GOT)
RS-422
-G4-S3
NETWORK
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
*4
30m - (Built into GOT)
13
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT09-C30R2-9P
or
15m - (Built into GOT)
AJ65BT RS232 connection
RS-232
STATION)
-R2N diagram 1)
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S
1 GOT for
14
CC-Link
L26CPU
dedicated GT15-RS2T4-9P*5 1 peripheral
-BT - *3 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
cable GT15-RS4-9S connection
L26CPU-PBT GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
CONNECTION
*2 30m module
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
AJ65BT GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) (Via G4)
- (Built into GOT)
CC-Link
RS-422
-G4-S3
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) 15
30m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)*4
CONNECTION
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual.
INVERTER
- 9 9 -
Precautions when preparing a cable
RS232 connection diagram 2) (1) Cable length
GOT side PLC side The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less.
(terminal block)
(2) GOT side connector
SD 2 RD(RXD) For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
RD 3 SD(TXD) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
ER 6 DR(DSR)
Connecting terminating resistors
DR 4 ER(DTR)
(1) GOT side
SG 5 SG
When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating
RS 1 CD resistor must be connected to the GOT.
CS 7 RS(RTS) (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
NC 8 CS(CTS)
GOT main unit to "Disable".
NC 9 NC (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
Precautions when preparing a cable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
(1) Cable length to the following.
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
14.4.1 Setting communication
14.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
10
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.
3. 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Description Range
Set this item when change the 9600bps,
Transmission
transmission speed used for 19200bps, 12
communication with the connected 38400bps
Speed
equipment. 57600bps
(Default: 9600bps) 115200bps
CC-Link IE FIELD
Click!
CONNECTION
Set the number of retries to be
NETWORK
performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
timeout occurs.
(Default: 0time)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
menu.
Timeout Time
Set the time period for a communication
to time out.(Default: 3sec)
3 to 30sec 13
Set this item to adjust the transmission
2.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the timing of the communication request
Delay time 0 to 300ms
channel to be used from the list menu. from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
3.
STATION)
Set the following items.
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller POINT
Type to be connected. 14
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
• I/F: Interface to be used
The communication interface setting can be
• Driver: CC-Link (G4)
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project CONNECTION
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
data. (Via G4)
CC-Link
POINT
The settings of connecting equipment can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
16
For details, refer to the following:
SERVO AMPLIFIER
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Model Reference
Switch setting of peripheral connection
AJ65BT-G4-S3 14.5.1
Peripheral connection module
module AJ65BT-R2N 14.5.2
Set the station number setting switch, data link
transmission speed setting switch, and operation
10
setting DIP switch.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
14.5.1 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3
MELSECNET/10
(2) (1)
11
ON OFF QnA
L ERR. OFF ON Q
ON ON non-used
RS-422 (3)
POINT
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
(1) Peripheral connection module
CONNECTION
For details of the peripheral connection module,
NETWORK
refer to the following manual.
Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BT- (1) Station number setting switch
G4-S3 User's Manual (detail volume)
(2) CC-Link module Setting 12
Station number setting necessity at
For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the Description Set value
switch GOT
following manual.
CC-Link IE FIELD
connection
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's
CONNECTION
Manual QJ61BT11N
NETWORK
STATION NO.
×10 ×1 AJ65BT-G4-S3
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local 01 90 1 station number 1 to 64
Module User's Manual 2 8 2
setting
13
(3) CC-Link function built-in CPU 3 7 3
654 654
For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
refer to the following manual.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
Module User's Manual (2) Data link transmission speed setting switch
STATION)
Setting
Data link transmission necessity at
System configuration speed setting switch
Description Set value
GOT
14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series)
14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer
connection 14
B RATE 0: 156kbps
<CC-Link module> *1 Setting example
Station type : Master station Data link 1: 625kbps
CONNECTION
Station No. : Station No. 0
01 transmission 2: 2.5Mbps
Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) 2
All connect count :1 3 speed setting 3: 5Mbps (Via G4)
CC-Link
SW1 = OFF
SW1, Operation SW6 = ON POINT
SW6 mode (fixed)
(Q mode) (1) Peripheral connection module
SW2 Peripheral For details of the peripheral connection module,
SW transmissi OFF (fixed) refer to the following manual.
12345678 SW3
ON
on speed*1 Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BT-
SW4 R2N User's Manual
(2) CC-Link module
SW5 Not used OFF (fixed)
For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the
SW7 following manual.
OFF (fixed) CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's
SW8 Test mode
(Online mode) Manual QJ61BT11N
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (3) CC-Link built-in CPU
*1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
rate set in the GOT. refer to the following manual.
14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
Module User's Manual
POINT
Operation mode of peripheral connection module System configuration
Be sure to set the "Q mode" as an operation mode of 14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series)
14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer
the peripheral connection module.
<CC-Link module> *1 Setting example
Station type : Master station
Station No. : Station No. 0
Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
All connect count :1
Transmission speed : 156kbps
14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
module Setting
MELSECNET/H
Set the station number setting switch, data link RS-232 transmission Setting Set necessity at
Description
transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting switch switch value GOT
connection
setting DIP switch.
SW1
10
(3) (2)
2 (1)
SW2 Peripheral
OFF
transmission
SW3 *1
(fixed)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
speed
SW4
MELSECNET/10
Data OFF
SW5
bit length (fixed)
4
(4) SW6
Parity bit OFF
SW7
length (fixed)
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Stop bit OFF
SW8
length (fixed)
(1) Station number setting switch
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
CONNECTION
*1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud
NETWORK
Setting rate set in the GOT.
Station number setting necessity at
Description Set value 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
switch GOT
connection
12
POINT
AJ65BT-R2N
Precautions when setting peripheral connection
CC-Link IE FIELD
station number 1 to 64
CONNECTION
setting module
NETWORK
(1) mode setting switch
Be sure to set the Operation mode setting switch
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary to "5" (MELSOFT/connection mode).
(2) Data link transmission speed setting switch (2) RS-232 transmission setting switch 13
Turn OFF SW1 through SW8 of the RS-232
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
transmission setting switch.
CC-Link CONNECTION
Setting
Data link transmission necessity at If any switch of SW1 through SW8 is ON, setting
Description Set value
speed setting switch GOT error will occur (RUN LED turns off).
connection
STATION)
0: 156kbps
Data link 1: 625kbps
transmission 2: 2.5Mbps 14
speed setting 3: 5Mbps
4: 10Mbps
Setting
5 (fixed)
INVERTER
(MELSOFT/
Mode setting
connection
mode)
Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / (1) Network parameter
mode setting switch.
QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
5
X10
(1)
5
X1
C
(2)
8
MODE
4
NC
1
NC
DA 2
SLD
3
DB 4
(FG)
5
DG
6
7
Setting necessity
Item Set value at GOT
connection
No. of boards in module 1
(1) Station number setting switch
Start I/O No. 0000H
Setting Operation setting (Use default value)
Station number necessity
Description Set value Type Master station (fixed)
setting switch at GOT
connection Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
All connect count 1
STATION
NO.
Remote input (RX) X400
5
X10
Station number setting Remote output (RY) Y400
0 (fixed)
(master station) Remote register (RWr) D300
5
X1
Remote register (RWw) D200
Special relay (SB) SB0
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Special register (SW) SW0
MODE
4 setting
3: 5Mbps Remote device station
4: 10Mbps initial setting (Use default value)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Interrupt setting
POINT
When the switch setting has been changed
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
PLC CPU.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
module)
MELSECNET/H
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C
Controller module setting utility.
(1) Connection settings 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting necessity
Item*1 Set value
at GOT connection
Intelligent device
Station type*2
station (fixed)
Number of stations
occupied
Exclusive station 1 (fixed) 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Reserve/invalid station
No setting
select
CONNECTION
Intelligent buffer select Setting
(Use default value)
NETWORK
(word) necessity
Item Set value
at GOT
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
connection
*1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote
net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. Target module*1 192.168.3.3 12
[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station.
Write authority Mark the checkbox
The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.
*2 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote *2 target
User name
CC-Link IE FIELD
net - (Ver. 2 mode)] or [Remote net - Additional mode], set to
CONNECTION
[Ver. 1 Intelligent device station]. Password*2 password
NETWORK
Detailed settings -
POINT : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been
When changing the network parameter
*2
changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
If the account of the C Controller module has been changed,
13
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, input the changed user name and password.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
or resetting.
STATION)
(3) Completion confirmation
After initial communications of CC-Link are completed,
the L RUN LED of AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on.
The GOT starts to monitor after the L-RUN LED of
14
AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on.
It does not monitor while the L RUN LED turns off.
CONNECTION
PW (Via G4)
CC-Link
RUN
L RUN
SD
RD
L ERR.
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
9600bps
19200bps
Transmission Speed 38400bps
57600bps
115200bps
POINT
Setting [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
necessity
Item Set value For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the
at GOT
following.
connection
Number of modules 1
14.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
Target module 1
Start I/O No. 0000H
Channel No. (Use default value)
type Master station(fixed)
Remote net
Mode*1
(Ver.1 mode)
Expanded cyclic
Single(fixed)
station
Operation Exclusive station 1
Occupied number
setting (fixed)
Error event : input data
Clear
status
CPU stop: data link
Refresh
status
Other settings (Use default value)
All connect count 1
Ver.1 Intelligent device
Station type
station(fixed)
Expanded cyclic
Single
Station station
information Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1
settings
Remote station points 32 points
Reserve/invalid station
No setting
select
Intelligent buffer select
(Use default value)
(word)
POINT
When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller
module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and
then ON or reset it.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Connection in the multiple CPU system Connection to Q170MCPU
When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
seconds or more PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
MELSECNET/10
When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the cannot be executed.
GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Manual Manual
11
Connection to LCPU
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute
recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when
CONNECTION
turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it
NETWORK
takes time until the SD memory card becomes
available. When the GOT starts before the SD card
becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the 12
opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no
system alarm occurs.
CC-Link IE FIELD
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
CONNECTION
Manual
NETWORK
Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU,
CNC C70, CRnQ-700
The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ-
13
700 are applicable to the CC-Link network system Ver.2
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
only.
For connecting to the CC-Link (Via G4) network
system, set the CC-Link (G4) network system to the
STATION)
CC-Link Ver.2 mode.
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
INVERTER CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
15.
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
15.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2
15.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 3 12
15.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 21
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
15.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 29
NETWORK
15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 31
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 44 13
15.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 47
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
15 - 1
15. INVERTER CONNECTION
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
15.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Computer link
Inverter GOT
option Communication driver
Connection cable
FREQROL 500/700
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Inverter Connection cable GOT
CONNECTION
Number of connectable
NETWORK
Communi
Computer link Connection diagram Max. equipment
Model name cation Option device Model
option number distance
type
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
12
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
CC-Link IE FIELD
FREQROL- RS422
500m
CONNECTION
A500/A500L connection diagram 1) GT15-RS4-9S
NETWORK
F500/F500L
- RS-422
V500/V500L - (Built into GOT)
*2
RS422 13
connection diagram 500m - (Built into GOT)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
10)
1 GOT for 1 inverter
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
STATION)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
500m
FREQROL- connection diagram 2) GT15-RS4-9S
A500/A500L
F500/F500L
FR-A5NR RS-422 14
- (Built into GOT)
V500/V500L
CONNECTION
RS422
connection diagram 500m - (Built into GOT) (Via G4)
CC-Link
11)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter.
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Communication driver
Inverter Inverter
FREQROL 500/700
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8 GT15-RS4-9S
connection
(Recomm diagram 1)
FREQROL- RS422 RS422 ended)
A500/A500L 31 inverters
connection connection
F500/F500L RS-422 500m for one
diagram 9) diagram 3) - (Built into GOT)
V500/V500L GOT*4
*2
RS422
BMJ-8 connection
(Recomm diagram 10) - (Built into GOT)
ended)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter.
*3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,
LTD.
*4 For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
GT11 User’s Manual
GT10 User’s Manual
Number of connectable
Model name Hardware version
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10
D
D
D
GT1040-QBBD
GT1045-QSBD
E or later
B or later
A or later
A or earlier
D or earlier
Hardware version
10
31
31
31
10
Inverter
Number of connectable
CONNECTION CONNECTION (Via G4) STATION) CONNECTION CONNECTION TO PLC NETWORK) TO PLC NETWORK)
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the computer link option)
Communication driver
FREQROL 500/700
Computer Computer
Inverter link Inverter link
option option
GOT
Connection cable
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
FREQROL- RS422 connection
GT15-RS4-9S
A500/A500L diagram 4) 31 inverters for
FR-A5NR RS-422 500m
F500/F500L one GOT*2
- (Built into GOT)
V500/V500L
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 12)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
GT11 User’s Manual
GT10 User’s Manual
Number of connectable
Model name Hardware version
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D B or later 31
GT1030-H D A or earlier 10
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
When connecting to one inverter
MELSECNET/H
Inverter GOT Communication driver
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Connection cable
MELSECNET/10
FREQROL 500/700
11
Inverter Connection cable GOT
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Communi Number of connectable equipment
Connection diagram Max.
Model name cation Option device Model
number distance
CONNECTION
type
NETWORK
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
FREQROL-
RS422 connection
500m GT15-RS4-9S
12
E500/S500/S500E diagram 1)
RS-422 1 GOT for 1 inverter
F500J/D700/F700PJ
- (Built into GOT)
CC-Link IE FIELD
*2
CONNECTION
NETWORK
RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 10)
*1
*2
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155
Connect to the PU port of the inverter.
.
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Communication driver
Inverter Inverter
FREQROL 500/700
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8 GT15-RS4-9S
connection
(Recomm diagram 1)
FREQROL- RS422 RS422 ended)
E500/S500 31 inverters
connection connection
S500E/F500J RS-422 500m for one
diagram 9) diagram 3) - (Built into GOT)
D700 GOT*4
*2
RS422
BMJ-8 connection
(Recomm diagram 10) - (Built into GOT)
ended)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter.
*3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,
LTD.
*4 For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
GT11 User’s Manual
GT10 User’s Manual
Number of connectable
Model name Hardware version
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10
D
D
D
GT1040-QBBD
GT1045-QSBD
E or later
B or later
A or later
A or earlier
D or earlier
Hardware version
10
31
31
31
10
Inverter
Number of connectable
CONNECTION CONNECTION (Via G4) STATION) CONNECTION CONNECTION TO PLC NETWORK) TO PLC NETWORK)
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700
Control
Inverter terminal GOT
Communication driver
option
Connection cable
FREQROL 500/700
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
500m
connection diagram 1) GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL-
E700 - RS-422
*2 - (Built into GOT)
RS422
connection diagram 500m - (Built into GOT)
10)
1 GOT for 1 inverter
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
500m
connection diagram 7) GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL-
*3 RS-422
FR-E7TR
E700*3 - (Built into GOT)
RS422
connection diagram 500m - (Built into GOT)
15)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter.
*3 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Communication driver
Inverter Inverter
FREQROL 500/700
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Connection cable Distributor Connection cable
Inverter GOT
Terminating
1) *3 2)
Max.
Number of
connectable
12
Commun cable distance
Connection Model Connection equipment
Model name ication Option device Model
diagram number name diagram number
type
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S
NETWORK
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8
(Recomm
connection
GT15-RS4-9S
13
diagram 1)
RS422 RS422 ended)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
FREQROL- 31inverters
connection connection
E700 RS-422 500m for one
diagram 9) diagram 3) - (Built into GOT)
*2 GOT*4
STATION)
RS422
BMJ-8
(Recomm
connection
diagram 10) - (Built into GOT) 14
ended)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. CONNECTION
*3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,
(Via G4)
CC-Link
LTD.
*4 For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
GT11 User’s Manual
15
GT10 User’s Manual
Number of connectable
CONNECTION
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
16
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
SERVO AMPLIFIER
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
CONNECTION
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D B or later 31
GT1030-H D A or earlier 10
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Communication driver
FREQROL 500/700
Control Control
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Inverter terminal Inverter terminal
option option
MELSECNET/10
GOT
Connection cable
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Inverter Connection cable GOT
Number of
Communi Max.
Control terminal Connection diagram connectable
Model name cation Option device Model distance
equipment
option
type
number
12
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
CC-Link IE FIELD
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
CONNECTION
RS422 connection
NETWORK
GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL- diagram 8) 31 inverters for
FR-E7TR*2 RS-422 500m
E700*2 one GOT*3
- (Built into GOT)
13
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
diagram 16)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time.
STATION)
*3 For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
GT11 User’s Manual
GT10 User’s Manual 14
Number of connectable
Model name Hardware version
Inverter
C or later 31 CONNECTION
GT1155-QTBD (Via G4)
CC-Link
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10 15
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10
CONNECTION
GT1045-QSBD
INVERTER
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D B or later 31
GT1030-H D A or earlier 10
16
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
SERVO AMPLIFIER
D or earlier 10
CONNECTION
Inverter GOT
Communication driver
Connection cable
FREQROL 500/700
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422 connection
500m GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL- diagram 1)
A700/F700/F700P RS-422
(PU port) - (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 10)
1 GOT for 1 inverter
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
FREQROL- RS422 connection
500m GT15-RS4-9S
A700/F700/F700P diagram 5)
RS-422
(Built-in RS485
- (Built into GOT)
terminal block)
RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 13)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Communication driver
FREQROL 500/700
10
Inverter Inverter
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Distributor Distributor GOT
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
Connection cable Distributor Connection cable
CONNECTION
Inverter GOT
1) *2 2) Number of
NETWORK
Max.
Commun Terminal cable connectable
Connection Model Connection distance
Model name ication Option device Model equipment
diagram number name diagram number
type
GT16-C02R4-9S
13
(0.2m)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8 GT15-RS4-9S
connection
STATION)
(Recomm diagram 1)
RS422 RS422 ended)
FREQROL- 31 inverters
connection connection
for one
14
A700/F700 RS-422 diagram 9) diagram 3) 500m
- (Built into GOT)
(PU port) GOT*3
CONNECTION
RS422
BMJ-8 connection
(Recomm - (Built into GOT) (Via G4)
CC-Link
diagram 10)
ended)
*1
*2
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,
15
LTD.
*3 For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
CONNECTION
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
INVERTER
Number of connectable
Model name Hardware version
Inverter 16
C or later 31
SERVO AMPLIFIER
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
CONNECTION
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D B or later 31
GT1030-H D A or earlier 10
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter Inverter
Communication driver 10
GOT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
FREQROL 500/700
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable
11
Inverter Connection cable GOT
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Communi Max. Number of connectable
Connection diagram distance equipment
Model name cation Option device Model
number
CONNECTION
type
NETWORK
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
FREQROL- RS422 connection
GT15-RS4-9S
12
A700/F700 diagram 6)
RS-422 500m 31 inverters for one GOT*2
(Built-in RS485
CC-Link IE FIELD
- (Built into GOT)
terminal block)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 14)
*1
*2
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
13
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT11 User’s Manual
GT10 User’s Manual
STATION)
Number of connectable
Model name Hardware version
Inverter
GT1155-QTBD
C or later
B or earlier
31
10
14
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
CONNECTION
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
GT1040-QBBD
A or later 31 15
GT1030-L D B or later 31
GT1030-H D A or earlier 10
CONNECTION
INVERTER
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Connection cable
FREQROL 500/700
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422 connection
20m GT15-RS4-9S
MD-CX522- K diagram 1)
RS-422 1 GOT for 1 inverter
(-A0)*2
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
20m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 10)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Communication driver
Inverter Inverter
FREQROL 500/700
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Connection cable Distributor Connection cable
Inverter GOT Number of
Terminating
1) *3 2)
Max. connectable 12
Commu cable distance Model name
Connection Model Connection
Model name nication Option device Model equipment
diagram number name diagram number
type
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S
NETWORK
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8
(Recomm
connection
GT15-RS4-9S
13
diagram 1)
RS422 RS422 ended)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
MD-CX522 31 inverters
connection connection
- K(-A0) RS-422 20m for one
diagram 9) diagram 3) - (Built into GOT)
*2 GOT*4
STATION)
RS422
BMJ-8
(Recomm
connection
diagram 10) - (Built into GOT) 14
ended)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. CONNECTION
*3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC
(Via G4)
CC-Link
CO.,LTD.
*4 For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
GT11 User’s Manual
15
GT10 User’s Manual
CONNECTION
Number of connectable
Model name Hardware version
INVERTER
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31 16
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
SERVO AMPLIFIER
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
CONNECTION
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D B or later 31
GT1030-H D A or earlier 10
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the inverter. RS422 connection diagram 3)
Distributor side Inverter side or distributor side
15.3.1 RS-422 cable (Modular connector) (Modular connector)
SDA 5 5 SDA 10
Connection diagram
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SDB 4 4 SDB
MELSECNET/10
RDA 3 3 RDA
RS422 connection diagram 1)
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) RDB 6 6 RDB
Inverter or Distributor side P5S 2 2 P5S
GOT side*1 (Modular connector)
P5S 8 8 P5S
RDA 2 5 SDA
SG 1 1 SG 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
RDB 7 4 SDB
SDA 1 3 RDA
CONNECTION
SDB 6 6 RDB
NETWORK
RSA 3 2 P5S
RSB 8 8 P5S
CSA 4 - - 12
CSB 9 - -
CC-Link IE FIELD
SG 5 1 SG
CONNECTION
NETWORK
FG -
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RS422 connection diagram 2)
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
FR-A5NR side
STATION)
GOT side*2 (terminal block)
RDA 2 SDA
RDB 7 SDB
14
SDA 1 RDA
CONNECTION
SDB 6 RDB
*1
RSA 3 RDR (Via G4)
CC-Link
RSB 8
CSA
CSB
4
9
15
SG 5 SG
CONNECTION
FG -
INVERTER
CSA 4
CSB 9
FG -
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from
the GOT.
The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR.
*2 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable".
For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
RDA 2 SDA1(TXD1+)
RDB 7 SDB1(TXD1-)
SDA 1 RDA1(RXD1+)
SDB 6 RDB1(RXD1-)
RSA 3
RSB 8
CSA 4
CSB 9
SG 5 SG(GND)
FG -
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485
MELSECNET/H
terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
GOT side *2
Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
RDB 7 SDB1 RDB2 RDB1
MELSECNET/10
RDA 2 SDA1 GND GND
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
- GND GND GND
CONNECTION
NETWORK
*1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100 ).
*2 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable".
For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".
CC-Link IE FIELD
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
CONNECTION
NETWORK
FR-E7TR side
GOT side*1 (terminal block)*2
RDA 2 SDA
RDB 7 SDB 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
SDA RDA
CC-Link CONNECTION
1
SDB 6 RDB
RSA 3
STATION)
RSB 8
CSA 4
CSB 9
14
SG 5 SG
CONNECTION
FG -
(Via G4)
CC-Link
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
SG 5 SG SG SG
FG - SG SG SG
*1 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT.
*2 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable".
For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
RDB 4 SDB
SG 1 SG
RSA 2 P5S
RSB 7 SG
CSA 8 P5S
CSB
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(For GT1030, GT1020)
MELSECNET/H
FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side
GOT side*2 (terminal block) (terminal block) (terminal block)
(terminal block) Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
RDA RDA RDA
SDA
RDB RDB RDB
SDB
SDA SDA SDA
10
RDA
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SDB SDB SDB
RDB
MELSECNET/10
SG SG SG
SG
RDR RDR RDR
RSA
*1
RSB
CSA
11
CSB
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from
CONNECTION
the GOT.
NETWORK
The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR.
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".
CC-Link IE FIELD
Inverter side
GOT side*1
CONNECTION
RS485 terminal block
NETWORK
(terminal block) (built into the inverter)
SDA RDA1(RXD1+)
SDB RDB1(RXD1-)
RDA SDA1(TXD1+)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RDB SDB1(TXD1-)
SG SG(GND)
RSA
STATION)
RSB
CSA
14
CSB
CONNECTION
*1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ".
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
*1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100 ).
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".
SDA RDA
SDB RDB
RDA SDA
RDB SDB
SG SG
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(For GT1030, GT1020)
FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side
MELSECNET/H
GOT side*2 terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
(terminal block) Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
RDB SDB SDB SDB
MELSECNET/10
SG SG SG SG
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
SG SG SG
CONNECTION
NETWORK
*1 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT.
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
When seen from the front of the inverter Connected to the GOT
(receptacle side)
I
the previous
V
1 GND (SG) inverter
SOURCE
O
N
3 RXD+ (RDA)
SINK
4 TXD- (SDB) SDA SDB
SDA RDA RDB
SDB RDA RUN FU
RDB RUN FU SE
SE
5 TXD+ (SDA)
6 RXD- (RDB)
Tyco International, For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
Connector 5-554720-3 RJ45 connector
Ltd to the following.
Modular HACHIKO 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
ceiling ELECTRIC
BMJ-8 -
rosette CO.,LTD.
(Distributor) TEL(03)-3806-9171
Cable
conforming to MITSUBISHI
SGLPEV
Cable EIA568 CABLE
0.5mm 4P
(such as cable INDUSTRIES, LTD.
10BASE-T)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
15.4.1 Setting communication
15.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
10
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.
3. 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
4.
CONNECTION
Item Description Range
NETWORK
Set this item when change the 9600bps,
transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission
communication with the 38400bps,
Speed
connected equipment. 57600bps, 12
(Default: 19200bps) 115200bps
CC-Link IE FIELD
data length used for
CONNECTION
Data Bit communication with the 7bits/8bits
NETWORK
connected equipment.
(Default: 7bits)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
None
CC-Link CONNECTION
a parity check, and how it is
Parity Even
channel to be used from the list menu. performed during communication.
Odd
(Default: Odd)
3. Set the following items.
STATION)
Set the number of retries to be
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Retry
performed when a communication
0 to 5times
timeout occurs.
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller
(Default: 0time)
Type to be connected.
Set the time period for a
14
• I/F: Interface to be used Timeout Time communication to time out. 1 to 30sec
• Driver: FREQROL 500/700 (Default: 3sec)
4. CONNECTION
Set this item to adjust the
The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, transmission timing of the
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms
(Via G4)
CC-Link
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
MELSECNET/10
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
destination
11
RS-485 port Pr.79, n1 to n7, n10 to n12
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
(2) Communication settings of inverter
Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.30 (Extended function selection) to 1 [With
CONNECTION
NETWORK
display] before making the parameter settings.
Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed,
communication with the GOT is disabled.
CC-Link IE FIELD
setting
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Communication speed*2 n2 (332) 192*3 19200bps
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Number of communication retries n5 (335)
(65535) alarm stop.
Communication check
Communication check time interval n6 (336) ---
suspension
STATION)
Wait time setting n7 (337) 0 0ms
Link start mode selection n10 (340) 1 Computer link operation (Via G4)
CC-Link
E2PROM write selection n12 (342) 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1
*2
Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-S500, S500E, and F500J series.
Settings on the GOT can be changed.
15
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
*4 When being monitored from the GOT, the parameter n1 through n7 correspond with Pr.331 through Pr.337, and the parameter
CONNECTION
Numbers in brackets show the parameter number when the parameter unit is in use.
*5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Communication settings
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
destination
Communication check
Communication check time interval Pr.122 9999
suspension
Protocol selection*4 ― ― ―
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-E500 series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
*4 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side.
*5 The setting is required for Frequency setting command selection.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Communication settings
MELSECNET/H
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124
MELSECNET/10
FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Parameter No.
Setting item*1 Set value Contents of setting
CONNECTION
PU connector FR-A5NR
NETWORK
Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 15.5.12 Station number
setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
NETWORK
The inverter will not come to an
Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999
alarm stop.
Communication check
Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999
suspension 13
Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF
Protocol selection*5 ― ― ― ―
STATION)
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
Operation mode selection Pr.79
FR-A5NR 0*3
External operation mode at 14
power on
E2PROM write selection*6 ― Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F500 and F500L series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3
*4
Inverter default values (No need to change)
Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.
15
*5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side.
*6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used.
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Communication settings
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter
Communication check
Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999
suspension
CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF
Protocol selection*5 ― ― ― ―
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
Operation mode selection Pr.79
External operation mode at
FR-A5NR 0*3
power on
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-A500 and A500L series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
*4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.
*5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side.
*6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Communication settings
MELSECNET/H
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342
MELSECNET/10
FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Parameter No.
Setting item*1 Set value Contents of setting
CONNECTION
PU connector FR-A5NR
NETWORK
Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 15.5.12 Station number
setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
NETWORK
The inverter will not come to an
Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999
alarm stop.
Communication check
Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999
suspension 13
Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF
Protocol selection*5 ― ― ― ―
STATION)
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
Operation mode selection Pr.79
FR-A5NR 0*3
External operation mode at 14
power on
E2PROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-V500 and V500L series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3
*4
Inverter default values (No need to change)
Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.
15
*5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side.
*6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used.
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Communication settings
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
destination
PU connector
Communication check
PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999
suspension
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-E700 series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Communication settings
MELSECNET/H
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
10
destination
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549
MELSECNET/10
(2) Communication settings of inverter
Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 [The
simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed] before making the parameter settings.
Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed,
communication with the GOT is disabled.
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting
CONNECTION
PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 15.5.12 Station number
NETWORK
setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
The inverter will not come to an
CONNECTION
Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999
alarm stop.
NETWORK
Communication check
PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999
suspension
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol
STATION)
Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode.
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-D700 series. 14
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Communication settings
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
destination
PU communication speed/RS-485
Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps
communication speed*2
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
Operation mode selection Pr.79
External operation mode at
RS-485 0*3
power on
PU
0*3 Refer to Pr.79 settings.
Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 connector
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F700 series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
*4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
HINT
MELSECNET/H
Automatic setting with Pr.999 (FREQROL-F700P series only)
If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and
[Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication
settings of the GOT side.
10
Parameter No. Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO]→[GOT]→[1]Write
MELSECNET/10
Pr.999*1 GOTInitial settings
11 -
(RS-485 terminal)
*1 When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored.
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Communication settings
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
destination
Communication check
PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999
suspension
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F700 series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
HINT
Automatic setting with Pr.999
If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and
[Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication
settings of the GOT side.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Communication settings
MELSECNET/H
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
10
destination
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342
MELSECNET/10
RS-485 terminal Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.549
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Parameter No.
Setting item*1 Set value Contents of setting
PU connector RS-485
CONNECTION
NETWORK
PU communication station number/RS-485 15.5.12 Station number
Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31
communication station number setting
PU communication speed/RS-485
communication speed*2
Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps 12
PU communication stop bit length/ Data length: 7bit
Pr.119 Pr.333 10
CC-Link IE FIELD
RS-485 communication stop bit length*2 Stop bit length: 1bit
CONNECTION
PU communication parity check/
NETWORK
Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
RS-485 communication parity check*2
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PU communication waiting time setting/
Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms
RS-485 communication waiting time setting
STATION)
PU communication CR/LF selection/
Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF
RS-485 communication CR/LF selection
CONNECTION
External operation mode at
RS-485 0*3
power on
(Via G4)
CC-Link
PU
0*3 Refer to Pr.79 settings.
Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 connector
RS-485
*3
1 Network operation mode.
15
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-A700 series.
CONNECTION
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
*4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Communication settings
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
destination
Number of communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of MELIPM series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set each station number so that no station number
MELSECNET/H
overlaps.
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
connection order. There is no problem even if station
numbers are not consecutive.
Station
No.3
Station
No.0
Station
No.1
Station
No.21
Station
No.6
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
GOT
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
the inverter of which data is to be changed.
CONNECTION
Specification range
NETWORK
0 to 31
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
GD25).
NETWORK
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 155 on GT
Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
the station No. specification will be the station No. of
the inverter.
13
Specification Compatible
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Setting range
CC-Link CONNECTION
station NO. device
100 GD10
101 GD11
STATION)
102 GD12
103 GD13
14
104 GD14
105 GD15
CONNECTION
106 GD16
0 to 31
107 GD17 For the setting other than the above,
(Via G4)
CC-Link
110
GD19
GD20
15
111 GD21
CONNECTION
112 GD22
INVERTER
113 GD23
114 GD24
115 GD25
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Bit device
When a non-existent device or a device number outside (RS)*3
Decimal
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings Run command
may not be monitored. WS0: 0 to RS15: 31
(WS)
WS0: 100 to RS15: 115
*4*5
Setting item Alarm definition
A0: 0 to A7: 31
(A)
A0: 100 to A7: 115
*2*3
Word device
*1*2 Pr0: 100 to Pr999: 115
Programmed Decimal
PG0: 0 to PG89: 31
operation
PG0: 100 to PG89: 115
(PG)*1*2
Special
SP108: 0 to SP127: 31
parameter
SP108: 100 to SP127: 115
(SP)*2*4
Station No.
Device number
Device name
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
An example with FREQROL-A700 series is shown
MELSECNET/H
WS0: Current input selection(AU)
FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual of the used inverter
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
WS0 Current input selection (AU)
MELSECNET/10
Device SP122 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
b15 b7 b0 WS1 Forward rotation command (STF)
Write [1] to each bit corresponding to Forward rotation WS2 Reverse rotation command (STR)
command (WS1) and Low speed operation command
(WS3) of device SP122. The value will be 000AH in this WS3 Low speed operation command (RL)
example. When writing the value to device SP122 actually, WS4 Middle speed operation command (RM)
convert 000AH to decimal number and write the value
[10]. WS5 High speed operation command (RH)
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
When using a WS device, [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot
be used. WS6 Second function selection (RT)
Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch.
WS7 Output stop (MRS)
CONNECTION
WS8 Jog operation (JOG)
NETWORK
The following shows correspondences between virtual
inverter devices used in the GOT and data of the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous
WS9
power failure (CS)
inverter.
CC-Link IE FIELD
FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
WS13 -
NETWORK
User's Manual of the used inverter WS14 -
(communication function (setting item and set
WS15 -
data))
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RS0 Inverter running (RUN) Inverter User's Manual (Application) Communication
operation and setting
RS1 Forward rotation (STF)
STATION)
RS3 Up to frequency (SU)
Device name*1 Description
RS4 Overload (OL)
A1
Second alarm in past
Latest alarm
14
RS6 Frequency detection (FU) A2 Fourth alarm in past
RS7 Fault (ABC1)
CONNECTION
A3 Third alarm in past
RS8 ABC2 A4 Sixth alarm in past (Via G4)
CC-Link
(4) Parameter
RS14 -
INVERTER
Set value of inverter side Value specified by GOT SP108 Second parameter changing 6CH ECH
*1 Set frequency (RAM) 6DH EDH
8888 65520 SP109
9999 65535 SP110*1 Set frequency (RAM, E2PROM) 6EH EEH
(3) Precautions for setting calibration parameter SP111 *1*2 Output frequency 6FH -
(Pr900 to Pr905) SP112 *2 Output current 70H -
When setting a calibration parameter (Pr900 to
SP113*2 Output voltage 71H -
Pr905), it is necessary to set the value below for
extension second parameter (SP108), depending on SP114*2 Special monitor 72H -
the device number to be used and the inverter model. SP115 Special monitor selection No. 73H F3H
Value to be set to extension Alarm definition all clear - F4H
Description SP116
second parameter (SP108) Latest alarm, second alarm in past 74H -
H00 Offset/gain SP117 Third alarm in past, fourth alarm in past 75H -
H01 Analog SP118 Fifth alarm in past, sixth alarm in past 76H -
H02 Analog value at terminal Seventh alarm in past, eights alarm in
SP119 77H -
past
Inverter status monitor (extended)
SP121 79H F9H
(5) Programmed operation Run command (extend)
The devices below correspond to the parameters Inverter status monitor 7AH -
SP122
(Pr.201 to Pr.230) of FREQROL-A500 series. Run command - FAH
SP123 Communication mode 7BH FBH
Device name Description
PG0 to PG9 Program set 1 (running frequency) SP124*3 All parameter clear - FCH
*3 Inverter reset - FDH
PG10 to PG19*1 Program set 1 (time) SP125
PG20 to PG29 Program set 1 (rotation direction) SP127 Link parameter extended setting 7FH FFH
PG30 to PG39 Program set 2 (running frequency) *1 GOT cannot monitor SP109 to SP111 if the conditions below
are satisfied at the same time.
PG40 to PG49*1 Program set 2 (time) (Only FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F700PJ/E700
series)
PG50 to PG59 Program set 2 (rotation direction)
• Pr37 0
PG60 to PG69 Program set 3 (running frequency) • SP127 = 1
*2 Only reading is possible for SP111 to SP114.
PG70 to PG79*1 Program set 3 (time)
These devices cannot be used for a write object (numerical
PG80 to PG89 Program set 3 (rotation direction) input etc.).
*3 Only writing is possible for SP124 and SP125.
*1 To set the start time (PG10 to PG19, PG40 to PG49, PG70 These devices cannot be used for read object.
to PG79), set hour or minute in the upper 8bits, and minute
or second in the lower 8bits.
Example) To set 13 hour 35 minute
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Station No. of inverter system
Make sure to establish inverter system with No.0
station.
Number of inverter 10
Up to 31 inverters can be connected.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
For GT11 and GT10, refer to the following manual for
MELSECNET/10
the procedure to check the connectable inverter
depending on the version.
GT11 User's Manual, GT10 User's Manual
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
CONNECTION
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
NETWORK
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10 12
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
GT1030-L D B or later 31
NETWORK
GT1030-H D A or earlier 10
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Parameter setting
(1) Communication parameter change
STATION)
Do not make any change for each communication
parameter of the inverter side from GOT.
If changed, the communication to the inverter cannot
be made.
14
(2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter
(Pr)
"8888" and "9999" designate special function. When CONNECTION
specifying from the GOT, it will be as follows.
(Via G4)
CC-Link
8888 65520 15
9999 65535
CONNECTION
information devices
Make sure to use GD for screen switching devices and
system information devices when the GOT is
connected to only the inverter.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SERVO AMPLIFIER
MELSECNET/10
16.
CONNECTION 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
16.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
16.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 3
NETWORK
16.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 8
16.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 12 13
16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 14
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 17
STATION)
16.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 45
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
16 - 1
16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
MR-J2S- A
RS-232
MELSERVO-J2-Super MR-J2S- CP 16.2.1
RS-422
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A RS-232
MELSERVO-J2M 16.2.2
MR-J2M- DU RS-422
MR-J3- A RS-232
MELSERVO-J3
MR-J3- T RS-422
16.2.3
RS-232
MELSERVO-J4*1 MR-J4- A
RS-422
*1 For the RS-422 communication, use MELSERVO-J4 of software version A3 or a later version.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
16.2.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
GOT
amplifier
MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M
MELSECNET/10
MITSUBISHI Connection cable
CHARGE
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Commun connectable
Cable model Max.
Series name ication Option device Model equipment
Connection diagram number distance
type
CONNECTION
GT15-RS2-9P
NETWORK
MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m)
or 15m
-
RS232 connection diagram 1) (Built into GOT)
MELSERVO-
RS-232
1 GOT for
1 servo
12
J2-Super*1 MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) amplifier
or RS232 -
+ 15m
connection diagram 2) (Built into GOT)
CC-Link IE FIELD
RS232 connection diagram 1)
CONNECTION
-
NETWORK
RS232 connection diagram 3) 15m
(Built into GOT)
*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Communication driver
Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M
STATION)
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI
GOT
CHARGE CHARGE
14
Connection cable
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
INVERTER
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT
MELSERVO-J2-Super RS422 connection GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 30m (multi-drop
*1 diagram 2) communication)
- (Built into GOT)
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
diagram 7)
*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
GT15-RS2-9P
MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m)
or 15m
-
RS232 connection diagram 1)
(Built into GOT)
MELSERVO 1 GOT for
-J2M RS-232 1 servo
*1 MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) amplifier
or RS232 -
+ 15m
connection diagram 2) (Built into GOT)
RS232 connection diagram 1)
-
RS232 connection diagram 3) 15m
(Built into GOT)
*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.
CHARGE
GOT
Connection cable
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
MELSERVO-J2M RS422 connection 0 to 31 stations
RS-422 30m GT15-RS4-9S
*1 diagram 2) for 1 GOT
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 7)
*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
When connecting to one servo amplifier
MELSECNET/H
Communication driver
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Servo amplifier Connection cable GOT
Number of
Series name
RS-422/232 interface
converter
Commun
ication
Cable model
Connection diagram
Max.
Option device Model
connectable 11
RS-422/232 conversion distance equipment
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
type number
cable
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION
NETWORK
- 15m
DSV-CABV(1.5m)*2
- (Built into GOT)
or RS-232
FA-T-RS40VS *3
12
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
MELSERVO- GT16-C02R4-9S 1 GOT for
NETWORK
J4*1, J3*1 (0.2m) 1 servo amplifier
GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
RS422 connection
- RS-422
diagram 3)
30m
GT15-RS4-9S
13
- (Built into GOT)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)
STATION)
*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.
*2 DSV-CABV is a product manufactured by Diatrend Corporation. For details, contact Diatrend Corporation.
*3 FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
14
The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together.
Use the provided cables to connect devices.
CONNECTION
*4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
connection GT15-RS4-9S
diagram 3)
RS422 RS422 RS422
connection connection BMJ-8 connection BMJ-8 Up to 32
MELSERVO-
RS-422 diagram 6) diagram 5) (Recomm diagram 4) (Recomm 30m axes for
J4*1, J3*1 - (Built into GOT)
ended) ended) 1 GOT
RS422
connection
diagram 8) - (Built into GOT)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Communication driver
MELSECNET/H
MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M
10
Servo Servo
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
amplifier amplifier
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
RS-422/232
CONNECTION
Distributor Distributor GOT
converter
NETWORK
Terminal cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
Connection Connection Connection
RS-422/232
CONNECTION
Servo Terminating Distributor Distributor
cable cable cable GOT
amplifier cable converter*2
NETWORK
*3 *3 interface
1) 2) 3) Max. Number of
Connecti Connecti Connecti dista connectable
Commun Connection nce equipment
Series on on Model on Model Model
name diagram
number
diagram
number
name diagram
number
name name
ication
type
diagram
number
Option device Model
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT15-RS2-9P
STATION)
-
RS422 RS422 RS422
MELSER
connection connection BMJ-8 connection BMJ-8
FA-T-
-
(Built into GOT)
Up to 32 14
VO-J4*1, diagram 6) diagram 5) (Recom diagram 4) (Recom RS-232 30m axes for
RS40VS
J3*1 mended) mended) 1 GOT
CONNECTION
RS232 (Via G4)
CC-Link
connection -
diagram 2) (Built into GOT)
15
*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.
*2 FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For detail of this
product, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
CONNECTION
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
CD/NC*1 1 Plate FG
SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD
- 9 1 LG
RD(RXD) 2 12 TXD
SG 5 11 LG
RS(RTS) 7
CS(CTS) 8
DR(DSR) 6
ER(DTR) 4
SD(TXD) 1 3 TXD
RD(RXD) 2 2 RXD
ER(DTR) 3 1 -
DR(DSR) 4 4 DTR
SG 5 5 GND
RS(RTS) 6 6 DSR
CS(CTS) 7 7 RTS
NC 8 8 CTS
NC 9 9 -
SD(TXD) 1 2 RXD
RD(RXD) 2 1 LG
ER(DTR) 3 12 TXD
DR(DSR) 4 11 LG
SG 5 Plate FG
RS(RTS) 6
CS(CTS) 7
NC 8
NC 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Connection diagram
MELSECNET/H
RS422 connection diagram 1)
Connector for Connector for Connector for
interface unit's interface unit's interface unit's
or or or
GOT side
1st axis servo
amplifier's CN3
2nd axis servo
amplifier's CN3
32nd axis (last axis)*1
servo amplifier's CN3
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SDP SDP
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 9 9 9 SDP
MELSECNET/10
SDN SDN
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 19 19 19 SDN
RDP RDP
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 5 5 5 RDP
RDN RDN
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 15 15 15 RDN
SG 13
LG
11
LG
11 11 LG 11
LG LG
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
RSA(RTS+) 9 1 1 1 LG
TRE TRE
RSB(RTS-) 10 10 10 10 TRE
SD SD
CONNECTION
CSA(CTS+) 11 Plate Plate Plate SD
NETWORK
CSB(CTS-) 12
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 12
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
CC-Link IE FIELD
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
CONNECTION
NC
NETWORK
14
Shell
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Connector for Connector for Connector for
interface unit's interface unit's interface unit's
or or or
STATION)
1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis)
GOT side amplifier's CN3 amplifier's CN3 servo amplifier's CN3 *1
SDP SDP
RXD+(RDA) 2
SDN
9
SDN
9 9 SDP
14
RXD-(RDB) 7 19 19 19 SDN
RDP RDP
TXD+(SDA) 1 5 5 5 RDP
CONNECTION
RDN RDN
TXD-(SDB) 6 15 15 15 RDN
LG LG (Via G4)
SG(GND)
CC-Link
5 11 11 11 LG
LG LG
RTS+(RSA) 3 1 1 1 LG
15
TRE TRE
RTS-(RSB) 8 10 10 10 TRE
SD SD
CTS+(CSA) 4 Plate Plate Plate SD
CTS-(CSB) 9
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
SDA 1 3 RDP LG 1
CSA 4 7 LG SDN 4 *1
SG 5 1 LG SDP 5
RDB 7 4 SDN LG 7
RSB 8 8 NC NC 8
CSB 9
*1 Perform terminal processing on the part between RDP (3-
FG - pin) and RDN (6-pin) with a 150 resistor.
LG 1 1 LG
P5D 2 2 P5D
RDP 3 3 RDP
SDN 4 4 SDN
SDP 5 5 SDP
RDN 6 6 RDN
LG 7 7 LG
NC 8 8 NC
P5D 2 2 P5D
RDP 3 3 RDP
SDN 4 4 SDN
SDP 5 5 SDP
RDN 6 6 RDN
LG 7 7 LG
NC 8 8 NC
*1Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as
possible.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
*1
GOT side Distributor Distributor Distributor
MELSECNET/H
SDP SDP SDP
RXD+(RDA) 3 9 9 9
SDN SDN SDN
RXD-(RDB) 4 19 19 19
RDP RDP RDP
TXD+(SDA) 1 5 5 5
10
RDN RDN RDN
TXD-(SDB) 2 15 15 15
LG LG LG
SG(GND) 5 11 11 11
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
LG LG LG
MELSECNET/10
RTS+(RSA) 6 1 1 1
TRE TRE TRE
RTS-(RSB) 7 10 10 10
CTS-(CSB) 9
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
*1 At the last axis, connect TRE to RDN.
CONNECTION
Distributor side
NETWORK
GOT side (Modular connector)
TXD+(SDA) 1 3 RDP
TXD-(SDB) 2 6 RDN 12
RXD+(RDA) 3 5 SDP
RXD-(RDB) 4 4 SDN
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
SG 5 1 LG
NETWORK
RTS+(RSA) 6 7 LG
RTS-(RSB) 7 2 P5D
CTS+(CSA) 8 8 NC 13
CTS-(CSB) 9
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Precautions when preparing cable
STATION)
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-422 cable must be 30m or less.
(2) GOT side connector 14
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(3) Servo amplifier connector CONNECTION
Use the connector compatible with the servo amplifier. (Via G4)
CC-Link
2.
3.
Item Description Range
Set this item when change the 9600bps,
4. Transmission
transmission speed used for 19200bps,
communication with the connected 38400bps,
Speed
equipment. 57600bps
(Default: 9600bps) 115200bps
Set this item when change the data length
used for communication with the
Data Bit 8bit (fixed)
connected equipment.
(Default: 8bit)
Specify the stop bit length for
Click! Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
(Default: 1bit)
Specify whether or not to perform a parity
check, and how it is performed during
Parity Even (fixed)
communication.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
(Default: Even)
Set the number of retries to be performed
menu. Retry when a communication timeout occurs. 0 to 5times
(Default: 3times)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Set the time period for a communication to
channel to be used from the list menu. Timeout Time time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
HINT
MELSECNET/H
Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the
controller
By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the
portion of multiple connection of the controller. For
example, faulty station that has communication 10
timeout can be cut from the system.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
For details of the setting contents of GOT internal
MELSECNET/10
device, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals)
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
MELSERVO-J2-Super Series
Pushbutton switch
provided on the operation
section of the servo amplifier
POINT
MODE UP DOWN SET
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
(1) Parameter setting
Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch
POINT
provided on the operation section of the servo
MELSERVO-J2M Series amplifier or setup software.
For details of the MELSERVO-J2M Series, refer to the 10
following manual.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Pushbutton switch
See the technical manual for the MELSERVO-
MELSECNET/10
provided on the operation
J2M Series servo amplifiers. section of the servo amplifier
MODE UP DOWN SET
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Item Set value
Serial communication function selection
(Default: 0000)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Basic IFU parameter No. 0
(3) (2) 0 (1)
CC-Link IE FIELD
(2) Serial communication I/F selection
CONNECTION
0: RS-232
NETWORK
1: RS-422
(3) Communication response delay time
selection
0: Invalid
1: Valid (Response after 800 s or longer
13
delay)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Interface unit serial communication station No.
Basic IFU parameter
selection:
No. 10
0 to 31 (Default: 0) *2
STATION)
Basic IFU parameter Slot 1 serial communication station No. selection:
No. 11 0 to 31 (Default: 1) *2
CONNECTION
No. 13 0 to 31 (Default: 3) *2
Basic IFU parameter Slot 4 serial communication station No. selection: (Via G4)
CC-Link
No. 14 0 to 31 (Default: 4) *2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows. (a) Device Definition dialog box
When setting a device on the Device dialog box and
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. click the [Device Definition...] button, the
correspondence between the GOT virtual device for a
The device specifications of controllers may differ
depending on the models, even though belonging to the
servo amplifier and the definition of the servo amplifier
is displayed.
10
same series.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Please make the setting according to the specifications of 1. 2. 3. 3.
MELSECNET/10
the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings
may not be monitored.
(1) Servo amplifier
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
4. 5. 6. 12
The device can be searched with the servo definition or
other items on this dialog box to set a device.
CC-Link IE FIELD
1. Select a key item for searching.
CONNECTION
Function Name Search: Select this item when
NETWORK
Item Description
Set the device name, device number, and bit number. searching a device with the function name.
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device. Text Search: Select this item when searching a device
Clicking the button displays the dialog box indicating with the character string.
Device
the correspondence between the GOT virtual device
for a servo amplifier and the definition of servo
2. Select and input a key item for searching. 13
amplifier. 3. Click the [Search] button.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
If selecting an item on the displayed dialog box,
remember that the servo amplifier definition is
4. The items that matches to the specified condition are
displayed in the text box below.
displayed.
The display contents are as follows.
STATION)
Informat Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in
ion [Device]. Device : The GOT virtual device for a servo
amplifier is displayed.
Set the monitor target of the set device.
Definition : The definition of the servo amplifier is
Select this item when writing data to all servo
amplifiers connected.
displayed. 14
Symbol : The abbreviated name for the servo
During a monitoring, the servo amplifier of Station amplifier is displayed.
No. 0 is monitored.
All 5. Select a device to be set.
CONNECTION
When inputting data by Numerical Input, the data is
written to all servo amplifiers connected during
inputting; the servo amplifier of Station No. 0 is
6. Clicking the [OK] button reflects the device selected (Via G4)
CC-Link
100 GD10
101 GD11 0 to 31
CONNECTION
Bit device
(SP)
Before operation, check the parameter settings.
Improper settings may cause some machines to Operation mode selection
OM0 to OM4
perform unexpected operation. (OM)
The parameter settings must not be changed
Basic parameter
excessively. Operation will be insatiable. Expansion parameter
PRM0 to PRM29
(1) Parameters with * in front of it's abbreviated name (PRM) *1
PRM1000 to PRM1029
For the parameter with * in front of it's abbreviated
Status display (ST) ST0 to ST2
name, powering off the servo amplifier after setting Decimal
AL0
then on makes the parameter valid.
AL11 to AL13
Word device
(2) Data length for setting virtual devices for servo Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
amplifier AL210 to AL215
Set the following data length for setting devices. AL230 to AL235
• PRM, ST, AL, PA, PB, PC, PD, POS, SPD, ACT, External input (DI)*3 DI0 to DI2
DCT, DWL, AUX
External output (DO) DO0 to DO1
: 16bits or 32bits (depends on the data of servo
Forced output of signal pin
amplifier)
(for test operation) TMO0
• DI, DO, TMI, TMO, TMD: 32bits (TMO)
*1 Use PRM0 to PRM29 when writing parameters to the servo
If the above data length was not set, data would amplifier RAM.
not be set to the servo amplifier correctly or the PRM1000 to PRM1029 are used when writing parameters to
GOT can not monitor normally. E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
*2 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
(a) Monitoring devices.
• When the 16-bit data is handled as 32-bit *3 Only reading is possible.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device name Item Symbol Device
Item Symbol
MELSECNET/H
SP1 Current alarm clear ― name
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(not test operation mode) Alarm number from alarm history
AL200 ―
MELSECNET/10
Output signal (DO) forced most recent alarm
OM4 ―
output Alarm number from alarm history
AL201 ―
first alarm in past
(c) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Alarm number from alarm history
AL202 ―
second alarm in past
Device name Item
Serial communication
Symbol *2
AL203
Alarm number from alarm history
third alarm in past
― 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
PRM0, PRM1000 function selection, *BPS Alarm number from alarm history
AL204 ―
alarm history clear fourth alarm in past
Regenerative brake option Alarm number from alarm history
CONNECTION
PRM1, PRM1001 *REG AL205 ―
selection fifth alarm in past
NETWORK
PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL210 ―
PRM3, PRM1003 Analog monitor 1 output MD1 most recent alarm
PRM4, PRM1004
PRM5, PRM1005
Analog monitor 2 output
Analog monitor 3 output
MD2
MD3
AL211
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
first alarm in past
― 12
PRM6, PRM1006 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL212 ―
second alarm in past
CC-Link IE FIELD
PRM7, PRM1007 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
CONNECTION
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
PRM8, PRM1008 Analog monitor 3 offset MO3 AL213 ―
third alarm in past
NETWORK
PRM9, PRM1009 Function selection 2 *OP2
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
Interface unit serial AL214 ―
fourth alarm in past
PRM10, PRM1010 communication station No. *ISN
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
selection
Slot 1 serial communication
AL215
fifth alarm in past
―
13
PRM11, PRM1011 *DSN1 Detailed alarm from alarm history
station No. selection
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
AL230 ―
CC-Link CONNECTION
most recent alarm
Slot 2 serial communication
PRM12, PRM1012 *DSM2 Detailed alarm from alarm history
station No. selection AL231 ―
first alarm in past
Slot 3 serial communication
STATION)
PRM13, PRM1013 *DSM3 Detailed alarm from alarm history
station No. selection AL232 ―
second alarm in past
Slot 4 serial communication
PRM14, PRM1014 *DSN4 Detailed alarm from alarm history
station No. selection
Slot 5 serial communication
AL233
third alarm in past
―
14
PRM15, PRM1015 *DSN5 Detailed alarm from alarm history
station No. selection AL234 ―
fourth alarm in past
Slot 6 serial communication
PRM16, PRM1016 *DSN6 Detailed alarm from alarm history
CONNECTION
station No. selection AL235 ―
fifth alarm in past
Slot 7 serial communication
PRM17, PRM1017 *DSN7
(Via G4)
CC-Link
PRM21 to PRM29
For manufacturer setting ― DI2 External input pin statuses CN4A/CN4B ―
INVERTER
PRM1021 to PRM1029
DO0 External output pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ―
*2 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
DO1 External output pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ―
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
back on after setting the parameter data.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PRM24, PRM1024 Zero speed ZSP Device name Item Symbol
ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
MELSECNET/H
PRM25 to PRM26,
For manufacturer setting ―
PRM1025 to PRM1026 ST1 Servo motor speed ―
PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR ST2 Droop pulses ―
PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 ST3 Cumulative command pulses ―
PRM29 to PRM32,
For manufacturer setting ― ST4 Command pulse frequency ―
PRM1029 to PRM1032
Electromagnetic brake
ST5 Effective load ratio ― 10
PRM33, PRM1033 MBR ST6 Peak load ratio ―
sequence output
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Ratio of load inertia moment ST7 Instantaneous torque ―
MELSECNET/10
PRM34, PRM1034 to servo motor inertia GD2 ST8 Within one-revolution position ―
moment ST9 ABS counter ―
PRM35, PRM1035 Position loop gain 2 PG2 ST10 Load inertia moment ratio ―
PRM36, PRM1036 Speed loop gain 1 VG1
PRM37, PRM1037 Speed loop gain 2 VG2
(f) Alarm
PRM38, PRM1038
Speed integral
VIC
11
compensation Device
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Item Symbol
Speed differential name
PRM39, PRM1039 VDC
compensation AL0 Current alarm number ―
PRM40 to PRM41,
CONNECTION
For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
PRM1040 to PRM1041 AL11 ―
NETWORK
feedback pulses
PRM42, PRM1042 Input signal selection 1 *DI1
Servo status when alarm occurs
PRM43 to PRM50, AL12 ―
For manufacturer setting ― servo motor speed
PRM1043 to PRM1050
PRM51, PRM1051 Function selection 6 *OP6 AL13
Servo status when alarm occurs droop
―
12
pulses
PRM52 to PRM53,
For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
PRM1052 to PRM1053 AL14 ―
CC-Link IE FIELD
command pulses
PRM54, PRM1054 Function selection 9 *OP9
CONNECTION
Servo status when alarm occurs command
PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection A *OPA AL15 ―
NETWORK
pulse frequency
PRM56 to PRM57,
For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs effective
PRM1056 to PRM1057 AL16 ―
load ratio
Machine resonance
PRM58, PRM1058
suppression filter 1
NH1
AL17
Servo status when alarm occurs peak load
ratio
― 13
Machine resonance
PRM59, PRM1059 NH2
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
suppression filter 2 Servo status when alarm occurs
CC-Link CONNECTION
AL18 ―
Low-pass filter, instantaneous torque
PRM60, PRM1060 adaptive vibration LPF Servo status when alarm occurs within one-
AL19 ―
suppression control revolution position
STATION)
Ratio of load inertia moment Servo status when alarm occurs ABS
AL20 ―
PRM61, PRM1061 to servo motor inertia GD2B counter
moment 2
PRM62, PRM1062
Position control gain 2
PG2B
AL21
Servo status when alarm occurs
load inertia moment ratio
― 14
changing ratio
Alarm number from alarm history
Speed control gain 2 AL200 ―
PRM63, PRM1063 VG2B most recent alarm
changing ratio
CONNECTION
Alarm number from alarm history
Speed integral compensation AL201 ―
PRM64, PRM1064 VICB first alarm in past
changing ratio (Via G4)
CC-Link
factor numerator 3
Command pulse multiplying Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
PRM71, PRM1071 CMX4 AL210 ―
factor numerator 4 most recent alarm
PRM72 to PRM75, Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
PRM1072 to PRM1075
For manufacturer setting ― AL211
first alarm in past
―
16
PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL212 ―
SERVO AMPLIFIER
AL213 ―
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting third alarm in past
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
back on after setting the parameter data. AL214 ―
fourth alarm in past
Bit device
AL232 ― Operation mode selection
second alarm in past OM0 to OM4
(OM)
Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL233 ― Instruction demand
third alarm in past TMB0 to TMB1
(for test operation) (TMB)
Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL234 ― Basic parameter
fourth alarm in past PRM0 to PRM84
/expansion parameter
Detailed alarm from alarm history PRM1000 to PRM1084
AL235 ― *1
(PRM)
fifth alarm in past
Status display (ST) ST0 to ST14
(g) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) AL0 to AL1
AL11 to AL25
Decimal
Device Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
Item Symbol
name AL210 to AL215
Word device
TMI0 Input signal for test operation ― AL230 to AL235
External input (DI)*3 DI0
(h) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) External output (DO) DO0
Input signal for test
Device operation TMI0
Item Symbol
name (for test operation) (TMI)
TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ― Forced output of signal pin
TMO0
(for test operation) (TMO)
(i) Set data (for test operation) Set data
TMD0 to TMD2
(for test operation) (TMD)
Device
Item Symbol *1 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing parameters to the servo
name amplifier RAM.
TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writing parameters to
Writes the acceleration/deceleration time E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
TMD1 ― *2 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
constant (test mode) devices.
Writes the moving distance in pulses (test *3 Only reading is possible.
TMD2 ―
mode)
POINT
Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
devices
(1) For bit devices
Only writing is possible.
[Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used.
Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit
switch.
(2) For word devices
Only writing is possible.
Numerical input cannot be used.
When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PRM23, PRM1023 Feed forward gain FFC
amplifier used with the GOT.
PRM24, PRM1024 Zero speed ZSP
MELSECNET/H
(a) Servo amplifier request Analog speed command
PRM25, PRM1025 maximum speed VCM
Device /limit maximum speed
Item Symbol
name Analog torque command
PRM26, PRM1026 TLC
SP0 Status display data clear ― maximum output
SP1 Current alarm clear ― PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR 10
SP2 Alarm history clear ― PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SP3 External input signal prohibited ― Analog speed command offset
PRM29, PRM1029 VCO
MELSECNET/10
SP4 External output signal prohibited ― /limit offset
SP5 External input signal resumed ― Analog torque command offset
PRM30, PRM1030 TLO
/limit offset
SP6 External output signal resumed ―
PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
PRM32, PRM1032 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
(b) Operation mode selection
Device
PRM33, PRM1033
Electromagnetic brake
sequence output
MBR 11
Item Symbol Ratio of load inertia moment to
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
name PRM34, PRM1034 GD2
servo motor inertia moment
OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
PRM35, PRM1035 Position loop gain 2 PG2
OM1 JOG operation ―
CONNECTION
PRM36, PRM1036 Speed loop gain 1 VG1
OM2 Positioning operation ―
NETWORK
PRM37, PRM1037 Speed loop gain 2 VG2
OM3 Motorless operation ―
PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC
OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC
CC-Link IE FIELD
Clears acceleration/
TMB0 ―
CONNECTION
deceleration time constant PRM43, PRM1043 Input signal selection 2 (CN1B-5) *DI2
NETWORK
TMB1 Temporary stop command ― PRM44, PRM1044 Input signal selection 3 (CN1B-14) *DI3
PRM45, PRM1045 Input signal selection 4 (CN1A-8) *DI4
(d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter PRM46, PRM1046 Input signal selection 5 (CN1B-7) *DI5
13
PRM47, PRM1047 Input signal selection 6 (CN1B-8) *DI6
Device name Item Symbol*1 PRM48, PRM1048 Input signal selection 7 (CN1B-9) *DI7
Control mode, regenerative PRM49, PRM1049 Output signal selection 1 *DO1
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PRM0, PRM1000 *STY
brake option selection PRM50, PRM1050 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM1, PRM1001 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM51, PRM1051 Function selection 6 *OP6
PRM2, PRM1002 Auto tuning ATU PRM52, PRM1052 For manufacturer setting ―
STATION)
Electronic gear numerator PRM53, PRM1053 Function selection 8 *OP8
PRM3, PRM1003 (Command pulse multiplying CMX PRM54, PRM1054 Function selection 9 *OP9
factor numerator)
PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection A *OPA
PRM4, PRM1004
Electronic gear denominator
(Command pulse multiplying CDV PRM56, PRM1056
Serial communication
SIC
14
time-out selection
factor denominator)
PRM57, PRM1057 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM5, PRM1005 In-position range INP
Machine resonance
CONNECTION
PRM6, PRM1006 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM58, PRM1058 NH1
suppression filter 1
Position command
Machine resonance (Via G4)
PRM7, PRM1007 acceleration/deceleration time PST PRM59, PRM1059 NH2
CC-Link
suppression filter 2
constant
Low-pass filter, adaptive
PRM8, PRM1008 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1 PRM60, PRM1060 LPF
vibration suppression control
PRM9, PRM1009
PRM10, PRM1010
Internal speed command2/limit2
Internal speed command3/limit3
SC2
SC3 PRM61, PRM1061
Ratio of load inertia moment
GD2B
15
to servo motor inertia moment 2
PRM11, PRM1011 Acceleration time constant STA Position control gain 2
PRM62, PRM1062 PG2B
PRM12, PRM1012 Deceleration time constant STB changing ratio
CONNECTION
PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD PRM68, PRM1068 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK Command pulse multiplying
CONNECTION
(f) Alarm
(g) External I/O signal
Device
Item Symbol Device
name
Item Symbol
AL0 Current alarm number ― name
AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― DI0 External input pin statuses ―
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative DO0 External output pin statuses ―
AL11 ―
feedback pulses
AL12
Servo status when alarm occurs
― (h) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
servo motor speed
AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ― Device
Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative name
AL14 ―
command pulses TMI0 Input signal status for test operation ―
Servo status when alarm occurs command
AL15 ―
pulse frequency
(i) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
Servo status when alarm occurs analog
AL16 ―
speed command voltage/limit voltage Device
Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs analog name
AL17 ―
torque command voltage/limit voltage TMO0 Forced output status of signal pin ―
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative
AL18 ―
load ratio
(j) Set data (for test operation)
Servo status when alarm occurs effective load
AL19 ―
ratio
Device
AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― Item Symbol
name
Servo status when alarm occurs TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
AL21 ―
instantaneous torque
Writes the acceleration/deceleration time
Servo status when alarm occurs within one- TMD1 ―
AL22 ― constant (test mode)
revolution position
Writes the moving distance in pulses (test
AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― TMD2 ―
mode)
Servo status when alarm occurs
AL24 ―
load inertia moment ratio
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device
MELSECNET/H
No.
Device name*3 Setting range Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
represent
devices
ation
Servo amplifier request (1) For bit devices
SP0 to SP6 Only writing is possible.
(SP)
[Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. 10
Bit device
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
switch.
Instruction demand
MELSECNET/10
TMB0 to TMB1 (2) For word devices
(for test operation) (TMB)
Only writing is possible.
Basic parameter
PRM0 to PRM90 Numerical input cannot be used.
/expansion parameter
PRM1000 to PRM1090 When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
(PRM)*1
Status display (ST) ST0
AL0
to
to
ST16
AL1
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
AL11 to AL27 The following shows correspondences between virtual
Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
AL210 to AL215
amplifier used with the GOT.
CONNECTION
AL230 to AL235
NETWORK
External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 (a) Servo amplifier request
External output (DO) DO0 to DO1
Device
Point table
(position) (POS)*2
POS1 to
POS1001 to
POS31
POS1031
name
Item Symbol
12
SP0 Status display data clear ―
Point table Decimal
SPD1 to SPD31 SP1 Current alarm clear ―
Point table (speed)
CC-Link IE FIELD
SPD1001 to SPD1031 SP2 Alarm history clear ―
(SPD)*2
Word device
CONNECTION
SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
NETWORK
Point table
ACT1 to ACT31 SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
(acceleration time
ACT1001 to ACT1031
constant) (ACT)*2 SP5 External input signal resumed ―
SP6 External output signal resumed ―
Point table
(deceleration time
DCT1 to DCT31 13
DCT1001 to DCT1031
constant) (DCT)*2 (b) Operation mode selection
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Point table DWL1 to DWL31
Device
(dwell) (DWL)*2 DWL1001 to DWL1031 Item Symbol
name
Point table AUX1 to AUX31
STATION)
OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
(auxiliary function) (AUX)*2 AUX1001 to AUX1031
OM1 JOG operation ―
Input signal for test
OM2 Positioning operation ―
operation
(for test operation) (TMI)
TMI0
OM3 Motorless operation ― 14
OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
Forced output of signal pin
TMO0
(for test operation) (TMO)
CONNECTION
Set data
(c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
TMD0 to TMD2
(for test operation) (TMD) Device name Item Symbol
(Via G4)
CC-Link
*1 Use PRM0 to PRM90 when writing parameters to the servo Clears the acceleration/
amplifier RAM. TMB0 ―
deceleration time constant
PRM1000 to PRM1090 are used when writing parameters to
E2PROM of the servo amplifier. TMB1 Temporary stop command ― 15
*2 When writing to a point table, use the area of 1001 to 1031
(E2PROM area) of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, or AUX.
If writing to the area of 1 to 31 (RAM area) of POS, SPD,
CONNECTION
devices.
*4 Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device Device
Item Symbol Item Symbol
name
MELSECNET/H
name
AL0 Current alarm number ― DI0 Input device statuses ―
AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ―
DI1 External input pin statuses ―
AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs current position ―
Statuses of input devices switched on
Servo status when alarm occurs command DI2 ―
AL12 ― through communication
AL13
position
Servo status when alarm occurs command
―
DO0 Output device statuses ― 10
remaining distance DO1 External output pin statuses ―
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Servo status when alarm occurs
AL14 ―
MELSECNET/10
point table No. (h) Point table (position)
Servo status when alarm occurs
AL15 ―
cumulative feedback pulses Device name Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs POS1 to POS31, Point table (position)
AL16 ― ―
servo motor speed
POS1001 to POS1031 No. 1 to No. 31
AL17
AL18
Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses
Servo status when alarm occurs override
―
―
SPD1 to SPD31,
SPD1001 to SPD1031
Point table (speed)
No. 1 to No. 31
― 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Servo status when alarm occurs torque limit
AL19 ― Point table
voltage ACT1 to ACT31,
(acceleration time constant) ―
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative ACT1001 to ACT1031
AL20 ― No. 1 to No. 31
CONNECTION
load ratio
Point table
NETWORK
Servo status when alarm occurs effective load DCT1 to DCT31,
AL21 ― (deceleration time constant) ―
ratio DCT1001 to DCT1031
No. 1 to No. 31
AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ―
AL23
Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous
torque
― DWL1 to DWL31,
DWL1001 to DWL1031
Point table
(dwell) ― 12
Servo status when alarm occurs within one- No. 1 to No. 31
AL24 ―
revolution position Point table
AUX1 to AUX31,
CC-Link IE FIELD
AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― (auxiliary function) ―
CONNECTION
AUX1001 to AUX1031
Servo status when alarm occurs No. 1 to No. 31
NETWORK
AL26 ―
Load inertia moment ratio
AL27 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ― (i) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
Alarm number from alarm history
AL200 ―
most recent alarm
Alarm number from alarm history
Device
name
Item Symbol 13
AL201 ―
first alarm in past
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
TMI0 Input signal for test operation ―
CC-Link CONNECTION
Alarm number from alarm history
AL202 ―
second alarm in past
Alarm number from alarm history
(j) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
AL203 ―
STATION)
third alarm in past
Device
Alarm number from alarm history Item Symbol
AL204 ― name
fourth alarm in past
14
Alarm number from alarm history TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ―
AL205 ―
fifth alarm in past
AL210
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
―
(k) Set data (for test operation)
most recent alarm
CONNECTION
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Device
AL211 ― Item Symbol
first alarm in past name
(Via G4)
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
CC-Link
AL230 ―
most recent alarm
Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL231 ―
first alarm in past
AL232
Detailed alarm from alarm history
second alarm in past
― 16
Detailed alarm from alarm history
SERVO AMPLIFIER
AL233 ―
third alarm in past
Detailed alarm from alarm history
CONNECTION
AL234 ―
fourth alarm in past
Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL235 ―
fifth alarm in past
POINT
Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
devices
(1) For bit devices
Only writing is possible.
[Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used.
Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit
switch.
(2) For word devices
Only writing is possible.
Numerical input cannot be used.
When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PRM49, PRM1049
Device name Item Symbol*1
PRM50, PRM1050 Position range output
MELSECNET/H
Command system/ *LPP
PRM0, PRM1000 regenerative brake option *STY PRM51, PRM1051 address+
selection PRM52, PRM1052
Position range output address- *LNP
PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY PRM53, PRM1053
PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM3, PRM1003
PRM4, PRM1004
Auto tuning
Electronic gear numerator
ATU
*CMX
PRM55, PRM1055
PRM56, PRM1056
Function selection 6
For manufacturer setting
*OP6
―
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 *OP8
CONNECTION (PLC
PRM6, PRM1006 In-position range INP PRM58, PRM1058 Function selection 9 *OP9
MELSECNET/10
PRM7, PRM1007 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM59, PRM1059 Function selection A *OPA
PRM8, PRM1008 Home position return type *ZTY PRM60, PRM1060 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM9, PRM1009 Home position return speed ZRF Machine resonance
PRM61, PRM1061 NH1
PRM10, PRM1010 Creep speed CRF suppression filter 1
PRM11, PRM1011 Home position shift distance ZST Machine resonance
PRM12, PRM1012 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM62, PRM1062
suppression filter 2
NH2
11
Low-pass filter,
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
PRM13, PRM1013 Jog speed JOG
PRM63, PRM1063 adaptive vibration suppression LPF
S-pattern acceleration/ control
PRM14, PRM1014 *STC
deceleration time constant
Ratio of load inertia moment
CONNECTION
PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO PRM64, PRM1064 GD2B
to Servo motor inertia moment 2
NETWORK
Serial communication function Position control gain 2
PRM16, PRM1016 selection, *BPS PRM65, PRM1065 PG2B
changing ratio
alarm history clear
Speed control gain 2 changing
PRM17, PRM1017
PRM18, PRM1018
Analog monitor output
Status display selection
MOD
*DMD
PRM66, PRM1066
ratio
Speed integral compensation
VG2B
12
PRM67, PRM1067 VICB
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK changing ratio
PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2 PRM68, PRM1068 Gain changing selection *CDP
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
PRM21, PRM1021 For manufacturer setting ― PRM69, PRM1069 Gain changing condition CDS
NETWORK
PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4 PRM70, PRM1070 Gain changing time constant CDT
Serial communication time-out PRM71 to PRM73,
PRM23, PRM1023 SIC For manufacturer setting ―
selection PRM1071 to PRM1073
PRM24, PRM1024 Feed forward gain FFC PRM74, PRM1074 OUT1 output time selection OUT1
PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset VCO PRM75, PRM1075 OUT2 output time selection OUT2 13
PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset TLO PRM76, PRM1076 OUT3 output time selection OUT3
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR Selected to program input
PRM77, PRM1077 SYC1
PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 polarity selection 1
PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 PRM78 to PRM90,
For manufacturer setting ―
PRM1078 to PRM1090
STATION)
PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC
PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
PRM32, PRM1032 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
back on after setting the parameter data.
PRM33, PRM1033
Electromagnetic brake
MBR 14
sequence output (e) Status display
Ration of load inertia moment
PRM34, PRM1034 GD2
to servo motor inertia moment Device name Item Symbol
CONNECTION
PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2 ST0 Current position ―
PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 2 VG1 ST1 Command position ― (Via G4)
CC-Link
PRM37, PRM1037 Speed control gain 2 VG2 ST2 Command remaining distance ―
PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC ST3 Program Number ―
Speed differential ST4 Step Number ―
PRM39, PRM1039
compensation
VDC
ST5 Cumulative feedback pulses ― 15
JOG operation acceleration/ ST6 Servo motor speed ―
PRM40, PRM1040 JTC
deceleration time constant ST7 Droop pulses ―
Home position return
CONNECTION
ST8 Override ―
PRM41, PRM1041 operation acceleration/ ZTS
ST9 Torque limit voltage ―
INVERTER
AL11
Servo status when alarm occurs Current
―
(g) External I/O signal
position
Servo status when alarm occurs Command Device
AL12 ― Item Symbol
position name
Servo status when alarm occurs Command DI0 Input device statuses ―
AL13 ―
remaining distance DI1 External input pin statuses ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Program Statuses of input devices switched on
AL14 ― DI2 ―
Number through communication
AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs Step Number ― DO0 Output device statuses ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative DO1 External output pin statuses ―
AL16 ―
feedback pulses
Servo status when alarm occurs
AL17
Servo motor speed
― (h) Current position latch data
AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses ―
Device
AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs Override ― Item Symbol
name
Servo status when alarm occurs Torque limit LD1 Current position latch data ―
AL20 ―
voltage
Servo status when alarm occurs
AL21 ― (i) The value of the general-purpose register (Rx)
Regenerative load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs Effective
AL22 ― Device name Item Symbol
load ratio
The value of the general-
Servo status when alarm occurs Peak load RR1, RR1001 ―
AL23 ― purpose register (R1)
ratio
The value of the general-
Servo status when alarm occurs RR2, RR1002 ―
AL24 ― purpose register (R2)
Instantaneous torque
Servo status when alarm occurs Within one- The value of the general-
AL25 ― RR3, RR1003 ―
revolution position purpose register (R3)
AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― The value of the general-
RR4, RR1004 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs purpose register (R4)
AL27 ―
Load inertia moment ratio
AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― (j) The value of the general-purpose register (Dx)
Alarm number from Alarm History
AL200 ― Device name Item Symbol
most recent alarm
Alarm number from Alarm History The value of the general-
AL201 ― RD1 ―
first alarm in past purpose register (D1)
Alarm number from Alarm History The value of the general-
AL202 ― RD2 ―
second alarm in past purpose register (D2)
Alarm number from Alarm History The value of the general-
AL203 ― RD3 ―
third alarm in past purpose register (D3)
Alarm number from Alarm History The value of the general-
AL204 ― RD4 ―
fourth alarm in past purpose register (D4)
Alarm number from Alarm History
AL205 ―
fifth alarm in past
(k) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL210 ―
most recent alarm
Device name Item Symbol
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL211 ― TMI0 Input signal for test operation ―
first alarm in past
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL212 ― (l) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
second alarm in past
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL213 ― Device name Item Symbol
third alarm in past
TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL214 ―
fourth alarm in past
AL215
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
―
(m) Set data (for test operation)
fifth alarm in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History Device
AL230 ― Item Symbol
most recent alarm name
Detailed alarm from Alarm History TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
AL231 ―
first alarm in past Writes the acceleration/deceleration time
TMD1 ―
Detailed alarm from Alarm History constant(test mode)
AL232 ―
second alarm in past Writes the moving distance in pulses(test
TMD2 ―
Detailed alarm from Alarm History mode)
AL233 ―
third alarm in past
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device amplifier used with the GOT.
MELSECNET/H
*2
No.
Device name Setting range
represen (a) Servo amplifier request
tation
Device
Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Item Symbol
name
Bit device
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
TMB1 to TMB6
(for test operation) (TMB) SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
MELSECNET/10
Basic setting parameter PA1 to PA19 SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
(PA)*1 PA1001 to PA1019 SP5 External input signal resumed ―
Gain filter parameter PB1 to PB45 SP6 External output signal resumed ―
(PB)*1 PB1001 to PB1045
Extension setting parameter PC1 to PC50 (b) Operation mode selection
(PC)*1 PC1001 to PC1050 11
Device
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
PD1 to PD30 Item Symbol
I/O setting parameter (PD)*1 name
PD1001 to PD1030
OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
Status display (ST)*3 ST0 to ST14 Decimal
OM1 JOG operation ―
CONNECTION
Word device
NETWORK
AL11 to AL25 OM3 Motorless operation ―
Alarm (AL)*3 AL200 to AL205 OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
AL210 to AL215
AL230 to AL235
(c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
12
*4 DI0 to DI2
External input (DI)
Device
External output (DO)*3 DO0 to DO1 Item Symbol
CC-Link IE FIELD
name
CONNECTION
Input signal for test operation
TMI0 TMB1 Temporary stop command ―
NETWORK
(for test operation) (TMI)
Test operation (positioning operation) start
Forced output of signal pin TMB2 ―
TMO0 command
(for test operation) (TMO) TMB3 Forward rotation direction ―
Set data
(for test operation) (TMD)
TMD0
TMD3
to TMD1 TMB4
TMB5
Reverse rotation direction
Restart for remaining distance
―
―
13
*1 1 to 50 of PA, PB, PC, and PD are used when writing data to TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
the servo amplifier RAM.
1001 to 1050 of PA, PB, PC, and PD are used when writing
data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter
*2 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
STATION)
devices. Device name Item Symbol*1
*3 Only reading is possible.
*4 Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1. PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY
PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG
Absolute position detection 14
POINT PA3, PA1003
system
*ABS
When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. PA11, PA1011 Forward torque limit TLP
PA12, PA1012 Reverses torque limit TLN
PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS
PA14, PA1014
PA15, PA1015
Rotation direction selection
Encoder output pulses
*POL
*ENR
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PA16 to PA18,
For manufacturer setting ―
PA1016 to PA1018
CONNECTION
PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC PC8, PC1008 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4
PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting ― PC9, PC1009 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5
Ratio of load inertia moment to PC10, PC1010 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6
PB6, PB1006 GD2
servo motor inertia moment PC11, PC1011 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7
PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1 Analog speed command
PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2 PC12, PC1012 maximum speed VCM
/limit maximum speed
PB9, PB1009 Speed loop gain VG2
Analog torque command
PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC PC13, PC1013 TLC
maximum output
PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC
PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1
PB12, PB1012 For manufacturer setting ―
PC15, PC1015 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2
Machine resonance suppression
PB13, PB1013 NH1 Electromagnetic brake
filter 1 PC16, PC1016 MBR
sequence output
PB14, PB1014 Notch form selection 1 NHQ1
PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP
Machine resonance suppression
PB15, PB1015 NH2 PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS
filter 2
PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS
PB16, PB1016 Notch form selection 2 NHQ2
PC20, PC1020 Station number setting *SNO
PB17, PB1017 For manufacturer setting ―
PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection *SOP
PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF
PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1
Vibration suppression control
PB19, PB1019 VRF1 PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2
vibration frequency setting
Vibration suppression control PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3
PB20, PB1020 VRF2
resonance frequency setting PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ―
PB21 to PB22, PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5
For manufacturer setting ―
PB1021 to PB1022 PC27 to PC29,
For manufacturer setting ―
PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF PC1027 to PC1029
Slight vibration suppression PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2
PB24, PB1024 *MVS
control selection PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2
PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1 Command pulse multiplying
PC32, PC1032 CMX2
PB26, PB1026 Gain changing selection *CDP factor numerator 2
PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition CDL Command pulse multiplying
PC33, PC1033 CMX3
PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant CDT factor numerator 3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device name Item Symbol*1 Device name Item Symbol
MELSECNET/H
Input signal automatic ON AL0 Current alarm number ―
PD1, PD1001 *DIA1
selection 1
AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ―
PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ―
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
Input signal device selection 1 AL11 ―
PD3, PD1003 *DI1 feedback pulses
(CN1-15)
Servo status when alarm occurs
AL12 ―
PD4, PD1004
Input signal device selection 2
(CN1-16)
*DI2
AL13
servo monitor speed
Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ―
10
Input signal device selection 3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PD5, PD1005 *DI3 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
(CN1-17) AL14 ―
command pulses
MELSECNET/10
Input signal device selection 4
PD6, PD1006 *DI4 Servo status when alarm occurs command
(CN1-18) AL15 ―
pulse frequency
Input signal device selection 5
PD7, PD1007 *DI5 Servo status when alarm occurs analog
(CN1-19)
AL16 speed command voltage ―
Input signal device selection 6 /limit voltage
PD8, PD1008 *DI6
PD9, PD1009
(CN1-41)
For manufacturer setting ― AL17
Servo status when alarm occurs
analog torque command voltage ―
11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Input signal device selection 8 /limit voltage
PD10, D1010 *DI8
(CN1-43) Servo status when alarm occurs
AL18 ―
Input signal device selection 9 regenerative load ratio
PD11, PD1011 *DI9
CONNECTION
(CN1-44) Servo status when alarm occurs effective
AL19 ―
NETWORK
Input signal device selection 10 load ratio
PD12, PD1012 *DI10
(CN1-45) Servo status when alarm occurs peak load
AL20 ―
Output signal device selection 1 ratio
PD13, PD1013 *DO1
(CN1-22)
Output signal device selection 2
AL21
Servo status when alarm occurs
instantaneous torque
― 12
PD14, PD1014 *DO2
(CN1-23) Servo status when alarm occurs within one-
AL22 ―
Output signal device selection 3 revolution position
PD15, PD1015 *DO3
CC-Link IE FIELD
(CN1-24) AL23 Load inertia moment ratio ABS counter ―
CONNECTION
Output signal device selection 4 Servo status when alarm occurs
NETWORK
PD16, PD1016 *DO4 AL24 ―
(CN1-25) load inertia moment ratio
PD17, PD1017 For manufacturer setting ― AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ―
Output signal device selection 6 Alarm number from alarm history
PD18, PD1018 *DO6 AL200 ―
PD19, PD1019
(CN1-49)
Response level setting *DIF
most recent alarm
Alarm number from alarm history
13
AL201 ―
PD20, 1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1 first alarm in past
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PD21, PD1021 For manufacturer setting ― Alarm number from alarm history
AL202 ―
PD22, PD1022 Function selection D-3 *DOP3 second alarm in past
PD23, PD1023 For manufacturer setting ― Alarm number from alarm history
AL203 ―
third alarm in past
STATION)
PD24, PD1024 Function selection D-5 *DOP5
Alarm number from alarm history
PD25 to PD30, AL204 ―
For manufacturer setting ― fourth alarm in past
PD1025 to PD1030
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting AL205
Alarm number from alarm history
fifth alarm in past
― 14
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
back on after setting the parameter data. Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL210 ―
most recent alarm
CONNECTION
(h) Status display AL211
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
―
first alarm in past
Device Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
(Via G4)
CC-Link
AL233 ―
ST12 ABS counter ― third alarm in past
Detailed alarm from alarm history
CONNECTION
Device
Item Symbol
name
DI0 Input device statuses ―
DI1 External input pin statuses ―
Statuses of input devices switched on
DI2 ―
through communication
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device
MELSECNET/H
No.
Device name*5 Setting range Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
represen
devices
tation
Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 (1) For bit devices
Only writing is possible.
Bit device
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
TMB1 to TMB6 switch.
(for test operation) (TMB)
MELSECNET/10
Basic setting parameter PA1 to PA19
(2) For word devices
(PA)*1 PA1001 to PA1019 Only writing is possible.
Numerical input cannot be used.
Gain
filter parameter
PB1 to PB45 When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
*1
PB1001 to PB1045
(PB)
Extension setting PC1 to PC50 11
parameter (PC)*1 PC1001 to PC1050
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
The following shows correspondences between virtual
I/O setting parameter PD1 to PD30 devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
(PD)*1 PD1001 to PD1030
amplifier used with the GOT.
CONNECTION
Option unit parameter PO1 to PO35
NETWORK
(PO)*1 PO1001 to PO1035 (a) Servo amplifier request
Status display (ST)*4 ST0 to ST17
Device
AL0
AL11
to
to
AL1
AL28
name
Item Symbol
12
SP0 Status display data clear ―
Alarm (AL)*4 AL200 to AL205
SP1 Current alarm clear ―
AL210 to AL215
CC-Link IE FIELD
AL230 to AL235 SP2 Alarm history clear ―
CONNECTION
SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
NETWORK
External input (DI)*6 DI0 to DI7
SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
External output (DO)*4 DO0 to DO4
Word device
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
(speed) (SPD)*2
CC-Link CONNECTION
SPD1001 to SPD1255
Point table Device
ACT1 to ACT255 Item Symbol
(acceleration time constant) name
*2
ACT1001 to ACT1255
(ACT)
STATION)
OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
Point table OM1 JOG operation ―
DCT1 to DCT255
(deceleration time constant) OM2 Positioning operation ―
DCT1001 to DCT1255
(DCT)*2
OM3 Motorless operation ― 14
Point table DWL1 to DWL255 OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
(dwell) (DWL)*2 DWL1001 to DWL1255
OM5 One step sending ―
Point table
CONNECTION
AUX1 to AUX255
(auxiliary function) (AUX)*2 AUX1001 to AUX1255
(c) Instruction demand (for test operation) (Via G4)
CC-Link
*1 Use 1 to 50 of PA, PB, PC, PD, and PO when the GOT TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ―
writes data to RAM of the servo amplifier. TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―
Use 1001 to 1050 of PA, PB, PC, PD, and PO when the GOT
write data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
*2 When the GOT writes data to point tables, use 1001 to 1255 16
of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, AUX, and MCD (E2PROM
SERVO AMPLIFIER
area).
*3 MCD cannot be used as a real number.
CONNECTION
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Position range output address - (CN10-35, 36)
PC40, PC1040 *LNPH
High
MELSECNET/H
MR-J3-D01
PC41 to PC50, PO8, PO1008 Output signal device selection 1 *ODO1
For manufacturer setting ―
PC1041 to PC1050 (CN10-46, 47)
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting MR-J3-D01
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and PO9, PO1009 Output signal device selection 2 *ODO2
back on after setting the parameter data. (CN10-48, 49)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device name Item Symbol*1 PO12, PO1012 Function selection 0-3 *OOP3
MELSECNET/10
Input signal automatic ON MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1
PD1, PD1001 *DIA1 PO13, PO1013 MOD1
selection 1 output
PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ― MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2
PO14, PO1014 MOD2
output
Input signal automatic ON
PD3, PD1003 *DIA3 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1
selection 3 PO15, PO1015 M01
PD4, PD1004
Input signal automatic ON
selection 4
*DIA4
offset
MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2
11
PO16, PO1016 M02
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
offset
PD5, PD1005 For manufacturer setting ―
PO17 to 20,
Input signal device selection 2 For manufacturer setting ―
PD6, PD1006 *DI2 PO1017 to PO1020
(CN6-2)
CONNECTION
MR-J3-D01
Input signal device selection 3 PO21, PO1021 VCO
NETWORK
PD7, PD1007 *DI3 Override offset
(CN6-3)
MR-J3-D01
Input signal device selection 4 PO22, PO1022 TLO
PD8, PD1008 *DI4 Analog torque limitation offset
(CN6-4)
PD9, PD1009
Output signal device selection 1
(CN6-14)
*DO1
PO23 to 35,
PO1023 to PO1035
For manufacturer setting ― 12
Output signal device selection 2
PD10, D1010 *DO2 (i) Status display
(CN6-15)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Output signal device selection 3
PD11, PD1011 *DD3 Device
(CN6-16)
NETWORK
Item Symbol
name
PD12 to PD15,
For manufacturer setting ― ST0 Current position ―
PD1012 to PD1015
PD16, PD1016 Input polarity selection *DIAB ST1 Command position ―
PD17 to PD18,
PD1017 to PD1018
For manufacturer setting ―
ST2
ST3
Command remaining distance
Point table No.
―
―
13
ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
PD19, PD1019 Response level setting *DIF
CC-Link CONNECTION
PD20, 1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1 ST5 Servo monitor speed ―
PD21, PD1021 For manufacturer setting ― ST6 Droop pulses ―
PD22, PD1022 Function selection D-3 *DOP3 ST7 Override voltage ―
STATION)
PD23, PD1023 For manufacturer setting ― ST8 Override ―
PD24, PD1024 Function selection D-5 *DOP5 ST9 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ―
PD25 to PD30,
PD1025 to PD1030
For manufacturer setting ―
ST10
ST11
Regenerative load ratio
Effective load ratio
―
―
14
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting ST12 Peak load ratio ―
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and ST13 Instantaneous torque ―
back on after setting the parameter data.
CONNECTION
ST14 Within one-revolution position ―
(h) Option unit parameter ST15 ABS counter ― (Via G4)
CC-Link
(CN10-27, 28)
MR-J3-D01
PO4, PO1004 Input signal device selection 3 *ODI3
(CN10-29, 30)
PO5, PO1005
MR-J3-D01
Input signal device selection 4 *ODI4
16
(CN10-31, 32)
SERVO AMPLIFIER
MR-J3-D01
PO6, PO1006 Input signal device selection 5 *ODI5
CONNECTION
(CN10-33, 34)
AL24
Servo status when alarm occurs
― (m) Point table (position)
Instantaneous torque
Servo status when alarm occurs Within one- Device name Item Symbol
AL25 ―
revolution position POS1 to POS255, Point table
―
AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― POS1001 to POS1255 (position) No.1 to 255
Servo status when alarm occurs SPD1 to SPD255, Point table
AL27 ― ―
Load inertia moment ratio SPD1001 to SPD1255 (speed) No.1 to 255
AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― Point table
ACT1 to ACT255,
Alarm number from alarm history, (acceleration time constant) ―
AL200 ― ACT1001 to ACT1255
Most recent alarm No.1 to 255
Alarm number from alarm history Point table
AL201 ― DCT1 to DCT255,
First alarm in past (deceleration time constant) ―
DCT1001 to DCT1255
Alarm number from alarm history No.1 to 255
AL202 ―
Second alarm in past DWL1 to DWL255, Point table
―
Alarm number from alarm history DWL1001 to DWL1255 (dwell) (DWL) No.1 to 255
AL203 ―
Third alarm in past AUX1 to AUX255, Point table
―
Alarm number from alarm history AUX1001 to AUX1255 (auxiliary function) No.1 to 255
AL204 ―
Fourth alarm in past MCD1 to MCD255, Point table
―
Alarm number from alarm history MCD1001 to MCD1255 (M code) No.1 to 255
AL205 ―
Fifth alarm in past
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history (n) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
AL210 ―
Most recent alarm
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Device
AL211 ― Item Symbol
First alarm in past name
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history TMI0 Input signal for test operation 1 ―
AL212 ―
Second alarm in past
TMI1 Input signal for test operation 2 ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL213 ― TMI2 Input signal for test operation 3 ―
Third alarm in past
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL214 ―
Fourth alarm in past (o) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL215 ― Device
Fifth alarm in past Item Symbol
name
Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL230 ― TMO0 Forced output from signal pin (CN6) ―
Most recent alarm
Detailed alarm from alarm history TMO1 Forced output from signal pin (CN10) ―
AL231 ―
First alarm in past
Detailed alarm from alarm history (p) Set data (for test operation)
AL232 ―
Second alarm in past
Detailed alarm from alarm history Device
AL233 ― Item Symbol
Third alarm in past name
Detailed alarm from alarm history TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
AL234 ―
Fourth alarm in past
Writes the acceleration/deceleration time
Detailed alarm from alarm history TMD1 ―
AL235 ― constant (test mode)
Fifth alarm in past
TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) ―
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device
MELSECNET/H
No.
Device name*2 Setting range Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
represen
devices
tation
Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 (1) For bit devices
Only writing is possible.
Bit device
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
TMB1 to TMB6 switch.
(for test operation) (TMB)
MELSECNET/10
Basic setting parameter PA1 to PA32
(2) For word devices
(PA)*1 PA1001 to PA1032 Only writing is possible.
Numerical input cannot be used.
Gain
filter parameter
PB1 to PB64 When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
*1
PB1001 to PB1064
(PB)
Extension setting PC1 to PC80
The following shows correspondences between virtual
11
parameter (PC)*1 PC1001 to PC1080
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
I/O setting parameter PD1 to PD48 amplifier used with the GOT.
(PD)*1 PD1001 to PD1048
CONNECTION
Extension setting 2 PE1 to PE64 (a) Servo amplifier request
NETWORK
parameter (PE)*1 PE1001 to PE1064
Device
Extension setting 3 PF1 to PF48 Item Symbol
name
parameter (PF)*1
Status display (ST)*3
PF1001
ST0
to
to
PF1048
ST41
Decimal SP0 Status display data clear ― 12
SP1 Current alarm clear ―
Word device
CC-Link IE FIELD
SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
CONNECTION
Alarm (AL)*3 AL200 to AL205
SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
NETWORK
AL210 to AL215
AL230 to AL235 SP5 External input signal resumed ―
ALM0 to ALM1 SP6 External output signal resumed ―
ALM11 to ALM52
Alarm (ALM)*3 ALM200 to ALM215 (b) Operation mode selection 13
ALM220 to ALM235
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
ALM240 to ALM255 Device
Item Symbol
External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 name
OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
External output (DO)*3 DO0 to DO1
STATION)
OM1 JOG operation ―
Input signal for test operation
TMI0 OM2 Positioning operation ―
(for test operation) (TM0)
Forced output of signal pin OM3 Motorless operation ―
(for test operation) (TMO)
TMO0
OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― 14
Set data TMD0 to TMD1
(for test operation) (TMD) TMD3 (c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
CONNECTION
*1 Use 1 to 80 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, and PF when the GOT
writes data to RAM of the servo amplifier. Device
Item Symbol
Use 1001 to 1080 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, and PF when the name (Via G4)
CC-Link
GOT write data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. TMB1 Temporary stop command ―
*2 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
devices. Test operation (positioning operation) start
TMB2 ―
*3
*4
Only reading is possible.
Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1.
command 15
TMB3 Forward rotation direction ―
TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ―
TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ―
CONNECTION
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
switching Analog torque limit offset
PB61 to 64, PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
MELSECNET/H
For manufacturer setting ―
PB1061 to 1064
PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting PC41 to 42,
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and For manufacturer setting ―
PC1041 to 1042
back on after setting the parameter data.
Error excessive alarm detection
PC43, PC1043 ERZ
(f) Extension setting parameter level
PC44 to 50,
For manufacturer setting ―
10
Device name Item Symbol*1 PC1044 to 1050
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA Forced stop deceleration time
PC51, PC1051 RSBR
MELSECNET/10
constant
PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB
PC52, PC1052 For manufacturer setting ―
S-pattern acceleration/
PC3, PC1003 STC PC53, PC1053 For manufacturer setting ―
deceleration time constant
PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC Vertical axis freefall prevention
PC54, PC1054 RSUP1
compensation amount
Internal speed command 1
PC5, PC1005 SC1
Internal speed limit 1
Internal speed command 2
PC55 to PC59,
PC1055 to PC1059
For manufacturer setting ― 11
PC6, PC1006 SC2 PC60, PC1060 Function selection C-D *COPD
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Internal speed limit 2
PC61 to PC80,
Internal speed command 3 For manufacturer setting ―
PC7, PC1007 SC3 PC1061 to PC1080
Internal speed limit 3
CONNECTION
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
Internal speed command 4
NETWORK
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
PC8, PC1008 SC4 back on after setting the parameter data.
Internal speed limit 4
Internal speed command 5 (g) I/O setting parameter
PC9, PC1009 SC5
Internal speed limit 5
Internal speed command 6 Device name Item Symbol*1 12
PC10, PC1010 SC6 Input signal automatic on
Internal speed limit 6 PD1, PD1001 *DIA1
selection 1
Internal speed command 7
CC-Link IE FIELD
PC11, PC1011 SC7 PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ―
CONNECTION
Internal speed limit 7
PD3, PD1003 Input device selection 1L *DI1L
NETWORK
Analog speed command -
Maximum speed PD4, PD1004 Input device selection 1H *DI1H
PC12, PC1012 VCM
Analog speed limit - Maximum PD5, PD1005 Input device selection 2L *DI2L
speed PD6, PD1006 Input device selection 2H *DI2H
PC13, PC1013
Analog torque command
maximum output
TLC
PD7, PD1007 Input device selection 3L *DI3L 13
PD8, PD1008 Input device selection 3H *DI3H
PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PD9, PD1009 Input device selection 4L *DI4L
PC15, PC1015 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2 PD10, PD1010 Input device selection 4H *DI4H
Electromagnetic brake sequence PD11, PD1011 Input device selection 5L *DI5L
PC16, PC1016 MBR
output
PD12, PD1012 Input device selection 5H *DI5H
STATION)
PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP
PD13, PD1013 Input device selection 6L *DI6L
PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS
PD14, PD1014 Input device selection 6H *DI6H
PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS
PC20, PC1020 Station number setting *SNO
PD15 to 16,
PD1015 to 1016
For manufacturer setting ― 14
PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection *SOP PD17, PD1017 Input device selection 8L *DI8L
PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1 PD18, PD1018 Input device selection 8H *DI8H
CONNECTION
PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2 PD19, PD1019 Input device selection 9L *DI9L
PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3 PD20, PD1020 Input device selection 9H *DI9H (Via G4)
CC-Link
PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ― PD21, PD1021 Input device selection 10L *DI10L
PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5 PD22, PD1022 Input device selection 10H *DI10H
PC27, PC1027 Function selection C-6 *COP6 PD23, PD1023 Output device selection 1 *DO1
PC28, PC1028 For manufacturer setting ― PD24, PD1024 Output device selection 2 *DO2 15
PC29, PC1029 For manufacturer setting ― PD25, PD1025 Output device selection 3 *DO3
PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2 PD26, PD1026 Output device selection 4 *DO4
PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2
CONNECTION
PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD PD34, PD1034 Function selection D-5 *DOP5
PD35 to 48,
CONNECTION
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AL231 ― ALM204 ―
in past in past
MELSECNET/H
Detailed alarm from Alarm History second Alarm number from Alarm History 5th alarm
AL232 ― ALM205 ―
alarm in past in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm Alarm number from Alarm History 6th alarm
AL233 ― ALM206 ―
in past in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth Alarm number from Alarm History 7th alarm
AL234 ― ALM207 ―
alarm in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm
in past
Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm
10
AL235 ― ALM208 ―
in past in past
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Alarm number from Alarm History 9th alarm
MELSECNET/10
ALM209 ―
(l) Alarm (extended for MELSERVO-J4-*A) in past
Alarm number from Alarm History 10th alarm
ALM210 ―
Device in past
Item Symbol
name Alarm number from Alarm History 11th alarm
ALM211 ―
ALM0 Current alarm number ― in past
ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms
Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative
―
ALM212
Alarm number from Alarm History 12th alarm
in past
― 11
ALM11 ―
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
feedback pulses Alarm number from Alarm History 13th alarm
ALM213 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor in past
ALM12 ―
speed Alarm number from Alarm History 14th alarm
ALM214 ―
CONNECTION
Servo status when alarm occurs Droop in past
ALM13 ―
NETWORK
pulses Alarm number from Alarm History 15th alarm
ALM215 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative in past
ALM14 ―
command pulses Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most
ALM220 ―
ALM15
Servo status when alarm occurs command
pulse frequency
―
ALM221
recent alarm
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st
―
12
Servo status when alarm occurs analog alarm in past
ALM16 ―
speed command voltage/limit voltage Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd
ALM222 ―
CC-Link IE FIELD
Servo status when alarm occurs analog alarm in past
CONNECTION
ALM17 ―
torque command voltage/limit voltage Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 3rd
NETWORK
ALM223 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative alarm in past
ALM18 ―
load ratio Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 4th
ALM224 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs effective alarm in past
ALM19 ―
load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs peak load
ALM225
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 5th
alarm in past
― 13
ALM20 ―
ratio Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 6th
ALM226 ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Servo status when alarm occurs alarm in past
ALM21 ―
Instantaneous torque Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 7th
ALM227 ―
Servo states when alarm occurs Within alarm in past
ALM22 ―
onerevolution position(1 pulse unit) Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 8th
STATION)
ALM228 ―
ALM23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― alarm in past
Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th
ALM24 ― ALM229 ―
alarm in past
ALM25
moment ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― ALM230
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 10th
―
14
alarm in past
ALM
For manufacturer setting ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th
26 to 42 ALM231 ―
alarm in past
CONNECTION
Servo states when alarm occurs Internal
ALM43 ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 12th
temperature of encoder ALM232 ―
alarm in past
ALM44 Servo states when alarm occurs Setting time ―
(Via G4)
CC-Link
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
16.7 Precautions
MELSECNET/H
Station number setting in the servo system
Make sure to establish servo system with the station
number set with the host address. 10
For details of host address setting, refer to the
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
following.
MELSECNET/10
16.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
Servo amplifier/test operation using the GOT
CONNECTION
During the servo amplifier/test operation, when the
NETWORK
communication between the GOT and the servo
amplifier is interrupted for 0.5[ms] or more, the servo
amplifier decelerates, stops, and then gets into the 12
servo lock status. During the servo amplifier/test
operation, continue the communication constantly by
CC-Link IE FIELD
monitoring the status display of the servo amplifier on
CONNECTION
the GOT screen, etc.
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
ROBOT CONTROLLER
17.
CONNECTION 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
17.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2
17.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2
GT11, GT10
17.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 3
17.4 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 6 21
17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 8
MULTI-CHANNEL
17.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 8
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
17 - 1
17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION
Robot
CRnD-700 Ethernet 17.2.1
controller
For details on the connection with CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU), refer to Mitsubishi Products (Chapter 5 to 13).
Robot
GOT
controller Communication driver
Connection cable
Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
17.3.1 Setting communication
17.3.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
ROBOT
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
GT16
18
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
CNC CONNECTION
2.
3. 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
4.
CONNECTION
Item Description
Set the network No. of the GOT.
Range
20
GOT NET No. 1 to 239
CONNECTION FUNCTION
(Default: 1)
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Set the station No. of the GOT.
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
GOT Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
GT11, GT10
IP Address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
Click!
Set the subnet mask for the sub
network.(Only for connection via
*1
router) 0.0.0.0 to 21
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
Subnet Mask
If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
default value is set.
menu.
MULTI-CHANNEL
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Set the router address of the default
FUNCTION
gateway where the GOT is
channel to be used from the list menu. Default
connected.(Only for connection via
0.0.0.0 to
Gateway*1 255.255.255.255
router)
3. Set the following items. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Ethernet
Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
1024 to 5010 to 22
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Download Port 5014 to 65534
download.
FA TRANSPARENT
Type to be connected. No.
(Default: 5014)
(Except for 5011, 5012,
• I/F: Interface to be used *1 5013 and 49153)
1024 to 5010 to
• Driver: GOT Set the GOT port No. for the FUNCTION
5014 to 65534
Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 Communication connection with the Ethernet module.
(Except for 5011, 5012,
Port No. (Default: 5001)
5013 and 49153)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Set the number of retries to be
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. performed when a communication
Make the settings according to the usage timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
environment. When receiving no response after
retries, the communication times out.
17.3.2 Communication detail settings (Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from the GOT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
startup until GOT starts the
Startup Time 3 to 255sec
communication with the PLC CPU.
POINT (Default: 3sec)
Set the time period for a
The settings of connecting equipment can be Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
(Default: 3sec)
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
Set the delay time for reducing the
For details, refer to the following: 0 to 10000
Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Example of [Detail setting].
For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the following.
ROBOT
17.4 PLC Side Settings
18
CNC CONNECTION
Item Description Range
The host is displayed. (The host is
Host ―
indicated with an asterisk (*))
Set the network No. of the connected
19
N/W No. Ethernet module. 1 to 239
GOT MULTI-DROP
(Default: blank)
CONNECTION
Set the station No. of the connected
PLC No. Ethernet module. 1 to 64
(Default: blank)
Set the type of the connected
Type*1 Ethernet module. CRnD-70(fixed)
CRnD-70(fixed) 20
Set the IP address of the connected
CONNECTION FUNCTION
0.0.0.0 to
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
IP address Ethernet module.
255.255.255.255
(Default: blank)
Set the port No. of the connected
GT11, GT10
Port No. Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534
(Default: 5001)
Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed)
*1 Select [CRnD-700] for [Controller Type]. 21
POINT
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
(1) Example of [Ethernet]
For examples of [Ethernet], refer to the following.
17.4 PLC Side Settings
(2) Communication interface setting by Utility
The communication interface setting can be 22
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
FA TRANSPARENT
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following FUNCTION
manual.
GT User's Manual
(3) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.
POINT
Robot controller (CRnD-700)
For details of the robot controller (CRnD-700), refer to
the following manual. (For R56TB)
CRnD-700 SET UP MANUAL
Setting
necessity at
System configuration Item Set value
GOT
connection
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3 NETIP 192.168.0.19
<GOT> (The settings other than the GOTPORT 5001
following are set to the default)
Network No. :1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
PLC No. :1
Retry 3times
Host *
N/W No. 1
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
ROBOT
Designer3, refer to the following.
17.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings) 18
CNC CONNECTION
Confirming communication state of CRnD-
700
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows®.
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Windows®. 19
(a) When normal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
GOT MULTI-DROP
Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms
CONNECTION
TTL=64
(b) When abnormal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
Request timed out.
(2) When abnormal communication
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
At abnormal communication, check the followings and
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
execute the Ping command again.
• Cable connecting condition
• Parameter settings
GT11, GT10
• Operation state of the CRnD-700. (faulty or not)
• The IP address of the CRnD-700 specified for the
Ping command.
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
17.6 Precautions
When setting IP address
Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
(Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the
system)
The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
Consult with the administrator of the network before
setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
18. CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
18.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 2
18.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 3 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
18.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 7
18.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 8
GT11, GT10
18.5 CNC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 16
18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23 21
18.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
18 - 1
18. CNC CONNECTION
Ethernet 18.2.4
For the connection to CNC C70, refer to Mitsubishi Products (Chapter 5 to Chapter 13).
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU
ROBOT
18
MELDAS
CNC CONNECTION
F311 cable GOT Communication driver
C6/C64
Connection cable
AJ71C24, MELDAS C6*
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CNC Connection cable GOT
Number of
CONNECTION
Communi connectable
Max.
Model name F311 cable cation Cable model Option device Model equipment
distance
type
MELDAS C6/C64
- RS-232
RS232 connection
15m
- (Built into GOT) 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
*1 diagram
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT15-RS2-9P
GT11, GT10
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
MELDAS C6/C64 *3 GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
*2
RS-422
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
30.5m GT15-RS4-9S
21
- (Built into GOT)
MULTI-CHANNEL
*1 Connect the connector of the CNC side to TERMINAL.
FUNCTION
*2 Connect the connector of the CNC side to SIO.
*3 To be prepared by the user, referring the following.
MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (BNP-B2255) F311 Cable Production Drawing
*4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
POINT
(1) Connectable network
MELSECNET/10 connection includes the case that MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode.The GOT
cannot be connected to the remote I/O network.
Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station.
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system
MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10
(When MELSECNET/H (When MELSECNET/10
communication unit is used) communication unit is used)
MELDAS Expansion
GOT
C6/C64 unit
Connection cable
GT15-J71BR13*2
MELSECNET/10 Coaxial cable
FCU6-EX878 *1 31 GOTs
(Coaxial bus system) *3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z
MELDAS C6/C64
GT15-J71LP23-25*2
MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable
FCU6-EX879 *1 63 GOTs
(Optical loop system) *3
GT15-75J71LP23-Z
*1 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total
number of stations.
For details, refer to the following manuals.
C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373
*2 Specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as the Communication Settings.For the setting, refer to the following.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Communication driver Communication driver
ROBOT
CC-Link Ver2(ID) CC-Link(ID)
(When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 (When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z
CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link communication unit is used)
18
CNC CONNECTION
MELDAS Expansion
GOT
C6/C64 unit
Connection cable
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CNC Connection cable GOT Number of
CONNECTION
Communication Max. connectable
Model name Expansion unit Cable model Option device Model equipment
type distance
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
number of stations.
For details, refer to the following manuals.
C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255
GT11, GT10
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373
*2 Specify Ver.1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it.
For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual.
18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 21
*3 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following.
MULTI-CHANNEL
CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
MELDAS Expansion
GOT Communication driver
C6/C64 unit
Connection cable
Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the CNC.
ROBOT
18.3.1 RS-232 cable 18
CNC CONNECTION
Connection diagram
RS232 connection diagram
CD 1 1 GND 19
RD(RXD) 2 6 SD
GOT MULTI-DROP
SD(TXD) RD
CONNECTION
3 16
ER(DTR) 4 - -
SG 5 11 GND
DR(DSR) 6 - -
RS(RTS) 7 - - 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
CS(CTS) 8 18 ER(DTR)
- 9 - -
GT11, GT10
*1 For details of the MELDAS C6/C64 side connection, refer to
the following manuals.
MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 21
MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNP-B2373
MULTI-CHANNEL
Precautions when preparing a cable
FUNCTION
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 22
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Click!
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Set this item when change the data
length used for communication with the
• I/F: Interface to be used Data Bit 8bit (fixed)
connected equipment.
• Driver:
(Default: 8bit)
For direct connection to CPU
Specify the stop bit length for
AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
For ELSECNET/10 connection (Default: 1bit)
MELSECNET/H Specify whether or not to perform a parity
MELSECNET/10 check, and how it is performed during
Parity Odd (fixed)
For CC-Link (ID) connection communication.
CC-Link Ver2 (ID) (Default: Odd)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
Item Description Range
Item Description Range
• MNET/H mode
Set the number of retries to be 19
Set the network type. performed when a communication
Network Type • MNET/10 mode
(Default: MNET/H mode) timeout occurs.
GOT MULTI-DROP
• MNET/H EXT mode Retry 0 to 5times
When receiving no response after
CONNECTION
Set the network No.
Network No. 1 to 239 retries, the communication times out.
(Default: 1)
(Default: 3times)
Set the station No. of the GOT.
Station No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1) Set the time period for a communication
• Online Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 90sec
(auto. reconnection)
• Offline
(Default: 3sec)
20
Set the operation mode of the
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• Test between
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GOT. slave station*1
Mode Setting
(Default: POINT
• Self-loopback test*1
Online (auto. reconnection))
• Internal self-
When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used
GT11, GT10
loopback test*1
• H/W test *1 When connecting to the MELSECNET/10 network
Set the number of retries to be
using the MELSECNET/H communication unit,
specify [MELSECNET/10 mode] as [Network Type].
performed when a communication
timeout occurs.
21
Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times
retries, the communication times
MULTI-CHANNEL
out.
(Default: 3times)
FUNCTION
Set the time period for a
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
(Default: 3sec)
Delay Time
Set the delay time for reducing the
load of the network/destination
0 to 300ms
22
PLC.
FA TRANSPARENT
(Default: 0ms)
Set the number of refreshes to
secure the send/receive data in
station units during FUNCTION
communication.
Refresh (Default: 1time)
1 to 1000times
Interval Valid when [Secured data send/
Secured data receive] is marked
by the control station side network
parameters of the MELSECNET/H
network system.
Set the communication
transmission speed.
Transmission (Default: 25Mbps)
10Mbps/25Mbps
Speed When specifying [MNET/10 mode]
as the network type, only 10Mbps
can be set applicable.
*1 For details, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System
Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
Item Description Range
GOT MULTI-DROP
Set the network No. of the GOT.
CONNECTION
GOT NET No. 1 to 239
(Default: 1)
Set the station No. of the GOT.
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
GOT Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
IP Address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18)
Set the subnet mask for the sub
255.255.255.255
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
network.(Only for connection via
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Subnet router) 0.0.0.0 to
Mask*1 If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
default value is set.
GT11, GT10
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Set the router address of the
Default default gateway where the GOT is
Gateway connected.(Only for connection via
0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255 21
*1 router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
MULTI-CHANNEL
1024 to 5010,
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet 5014 to 65534
FUNCTION
Download Port download. (Except for 5011,
No.*1 (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
1024 to 5010 to
GOT
Set the GOT port No. for the
connection with the Ethernet
5014 to 65534 22
Communication (Except for 5011,
module.
FA TRANSPARENT
Port No. 5012, 5013 and
(Default: 5001)
49153)
Set the number of retries to be
FUNCTION
performed when a communication
timeout occurs.
Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times
retries, the communication times
out.
(Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from the
GOT startup until GOT starts the
Startup Time 3 to 255sec
communication with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec)
Set the time period for a
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
(Default: 3sec)
Set the delay time for reducing the
load of the network/destination 0 to 10000
Delay Time
PLC. ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
75JBR13-Z)
ROBOT
POINT
18
Switch setting of the communication unit
CNC CONNECTION
When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit,
the switch setting is not needed.
GOT MULTI-DROP
N/W No. connected Ethernet module.
CNC*1
CONNECTION
(Default: blank) GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z
Set the station No. of the
PLC No. connected Ethernet module. Station No. of CNC RUN POWER
(Default: blank)
PC
DUAL D.LINK
SW.E T.PASS
20
M/S.E
E PRM.E GOT R/W E
CONNECTION FUNCTION
SD SD
(Default: QJ71E71)
RD RD
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
F.LOOP R.LOOP
7 8 (2)
2 3
GROUP No.
GT11, GT10
(Default: blank)
9 0 1
89
67 4 5 6
(4)
AB E
45
7 8
2 3
CD
MODE X100
23
F0 1 9 0 1
(1)
7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
21
7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X1 X1
(Default: 5001)
9 0 1 9 0 1
MULTI-CHANNEL
*1 For operating CNC monitor function, set N/W No. to "239".
Network number setting
Description Set value
FUNCTION
switch
5 6
4
7 8
2 3
X100
22
9
0 1
FA TRANSPARENT
9 0 1 No. communication unit.
(Default: 001)
4 5 6
FUNCTION
7 8
2 3
X1
9
0 1
GROUP No.
9 0 1 communication unit.
(fixed)*1
(Default: 0)
9
X10 MELSECNET/10 GT15-
0 1
STATION communication unit. 75J71LP23-Z
No.
4
5 6 Set to not duplicate other 1 to 32: Switch setting of the communication unit
stations in the network. GT15-
7 8
2 3
X1
When using the MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
(Default: 01) 75J71BR13-Z
9
0 1
communication unit, the switch setting is not needed.
0
CDE
MODE
(Default: 0)
23
F0 1
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
Left side Front side
POINT
RUN
L RUN
RD
345
(1)
EF 2
67 A
MODE L ERR.
89
BCD
23
following.
901
456
78
10
(2) 23
STATION NO.
901
456
23
(3)
901
456
1 3 5 7
SW ON OFF DA DG NC NC
1 HOLD CLEAR 2 4 6 8
0 (fixed)
89
Station number
Description Set value
setting switch
23
901
456
78
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
baudrate setting Description Set value
switch
ROBOT
0: 156kbps
23 1: 625kbps
Specify the transmission speed.
18
901
456
2: 2.5Mbps
(Default: 0)
3: 5Mbps
78
4: 10Mbps
CNC CONNECTION
(4) Condition setting switches
Condition
Setting
setting Description Set value
switch
switches
GOT MULTI-DROP
ON: Held
(Default: OFF)
ON
CONNECTION
1 2
20
POINT
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
(1) Switch setting example
For the switch setting example, refer to the
GT11, GT10
following.
18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection
(2) When the switch setting is changed
When changing the switch setting after mounting 21
the GT15-75J61BT13-Z type CC-Link
communication unit to the GOT, reset the GOT.
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Parameter setting
Set parameters related to MELSECNET/10 with
MELSEC's peripheral devices in the same way as
parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on
CNC by Personal computer. However, in the case of
using the default parameters or not requiring separate
settings due to normal stations, it is not necessary to
set the network
EXT1 0200
EXT2 0280
EXT1
EXT2
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
No. Switch name Settings
ROBOT
Condition setting Set the operation condition.
switch
SW Description OFF ON
CNC CONNECTION
8 2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG)
7
6 3 Used parameter*2 Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.PRM)
5
1)
4 4 OFF ON OFF ON
3 Number of stations*2 8 16 32 64
2 5 (Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF Station OFF Station ON Station ON Station
1
ON 6 B/W total points*2
(Valid when SW3 is ON)
OFF 2K
points
ON 4K
points
OFF 6K
points
ON 8K
points
19
7 OFF OFF ON ON
GOT MULTI-DROP
8 Not used Always OFF
CONNECTION
Station number
setting switch
Station number setting*2*3
(Setting range)
2)
01 to 64: Station number
Other than 01 to 64: Setting error
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Setting switch of
group number
GT11, GT10
Group number setting
3)
Not used, fixed to 0
21
Setting switch of
network number
MULTI-CHANNEL
Network number setting*2
FUNCTION
(Setting range)
4)
001 to 255: Network number
Other than 001 to 255: Setting error
22
*2
Mode setting switch Mode setting
FA TRANSPARENT
0: Online
5) 1: Cannot be used
FUNCTION
2: Offline
3 to F: Test mode
*1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network.
*2 Set as necessary.
*3 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units.
*4 Set the station type to the control station.
For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373
2) Station number
setting switch
Station number setting*2*3
3)
(Setting range)
2)
01 to 64: Station number
Other than 01 to 64: Setting error
4)
Setting switch of
group number
Group number setting
3)
Not used, fixed to 0
Setting switch of
5) network number
Network number setting*2
(Setting range)
4)
001 to 255: Network number
Other than 001 to 255: Setting error
Mode setting*2
Mode setting switch
0: Online
5) 1: Cannot be used
2: Offline
3 to F: Test mode
*1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network.
*2 Set as necessary.
*3 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units.
*4 Set the station type to the control station.
For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
in the expansion unit (FCU6-HR865).
Set parameters related to CC-Link connection with GX
(1) Expansion unit
ROBOT
Developer and write them to CNC by PLC. However, in
the case of using the local stations, it is not necessary
to set the network parameters. 1)
18
(1) Master station parameter
CNC CONNECTION
It is necessary to set and write the network parameters
to CNC with GX Developer. The following shows an
example of parameter settings.Set the first I/O No. as 2)
follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit
is inserted. 3)
(a) Start I/O No.
4) 19
Slot Start I/O No.
GOT MULTI-DROP
EXT1 0200
CONNECTION
EXT2 0280
EXT1
EXT2 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
(b) Example of GX Developer setting
1) 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
2)
22
FA TRANSPARENT
For details of the parameter setting, refer to the
following.
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION FUNCTION
MANUAL BNP-B2373
Master station/local
SW1 Station type*1 Standby master station (Valid) (Valid)
station
2)
2 Offline*1 Data link offline state Yes Yes
Parameter confirmation
5 Checks the parameter details Yes No
test*1
7 to F Not usable
0 156Kbps*1
1 625Kbps*1
3)
2 2.5Mbps*1
3 5Mbps*1
4 10Mbps*1
5 to F Not usable
Setting switch of
station No.
This switch sets the unit station No.*1*2
(Setting range)
4) Master station: 00
Local station: 01 to 64
Standby master station: 01 to 64
*1 Set as necessary.
*2 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units.
For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
peripheral devices in the same way as parameter
The following shows the example of the system setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by
ROBOT
configuration when using the CNC monitor function. Personal computer.
<CNC-2> <GOT>
(1) Network parameter setting
N/W No. :239
PLC No. :3
N/W No. :1
PLC No. :1
Set the network parameters by peripheral device and 18
IP address :192.168.1.3 IP address :192.168.1.1 write them on CNC. An example of parameter setting
CNC CONNECTION
by GPPW is as follows. Set the first I/O No. as follows
according to the expansion slot to which the unit is
Ethernet (192.168.1.xx) inserted.
<CNC-1> (a) Unit No.
[Communication with GOT]
N/W No. :239 Start
PLC No. :2
IP address :192.168.1.2
Slot
position
I/O
No.
Mounting position of extension unit 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
EXT1 0200 When mounted When mounted
in EXT1 and EXT2 in EXT1 and EXT3
CONNECTION
EXT2 0280
EXT3 0300
EXT2
EXT3
EXT1 EXT1
20
Unit2
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Unit2
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Unit1 Unit1
GT11, GT10
in EXT2 and EXT3 in EXT1 only
21
EXT2
EXT3
EXT1
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
Unit1
Unit2 Unit1
22
EXT3
FA TRANSPARENT
EXT2
FUNCTION
Unit1 Unit1
POINT
IP address setting
IP address setting on GX Developer is invalid.
Set the IP address by the 7-segment LED and rotary
switch of the CNC side, referring to the next page.
Rotary switch
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
For details of the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following.
2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 *
ROBOT
18.7 Precautions 18
CNC CONNECTION
18.7.1 Direct connection to CPU 18.7.3 CC-Link (ID) connection
Version of CNC Using cyclic transmission
For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version
D0 or later.
(1) I/O signal for master station
Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output 19
signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master
18.7.2 MELSECNET/10 connection station.
GOT MULTI-DROP
When the reserved output signal is turned on, the CNC
CONNECTION
Network configuration system may be malfunctioned.
For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to
Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H
the following manual.
(PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC
network) to configure a network including the GOT. MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit User's Manual 20
(1) The following networks including the GOT cannot be GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
configured. Manual
• MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network)
• MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network) (2) CC-Link Mode
GT11, GT10
CNC is not compatible with CC-Link Ver.2.
(2) When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H
(PLC to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the (3) When GOT malfunctions
following. The cyclic output status remains the same as before
becoming faulty. 21
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO
PLC NETWORK) For transient transmission
MULTI-CHANNEL
Monitoring range (1) Access range that can be monitored
FUNCTION
Only CNC of the same networks No. can be monitored The GOT can access to the CNC mounting the master
in GOT. and local station of the CC-Link System.
It cannot access another network via the CC-Link
For details, refer to the following manual.
3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on
module. 22
Network Systems GOT startup in CNC connection (CC-Link
FA TRANSPARENT
connection (intelligent device station))
Starting GOT with CNC connection In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent
(MELSECNET/10 connection) FUNCTION
device station)), the data link is started approximately
With the CNC connection (MESLSECNET/10 10 seconds after the GOT startup.
connection), the data link starts approximately 10
seconds after the GOT starts. When a network error occurs in the system
alarm
When a network error occurs in the system In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent
alarm
device station)), when a network error occurs in the
When a system alarm regarding a network error occurs system alarm, the system alarm message cannot be
with the CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 canceled even though the causes are removed.
connection), the system alarm is kept displaying on the
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.
GOT even though the error factor is removed.
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. Version of CNC
For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version
Version of CNC D0 or later.
For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version
E0 or later.
LED1
1 turn
Ferrite
core
GOT
Ferrite core
Ethernet
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19. GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
19.1 CPU that can be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 2
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
19.2 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 3
GT11, GT10
19.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 14
19.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 15
21
19.5 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 23
MULTI-CHANNEL
19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 24
FUNCTION
19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 29
19.8 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 30
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
19 - 1
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master
module") directly
ROBOT
The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication type
Series Model name Clock Between CPU
and master
Between
master module
18
module and GOT
CNC CONNECTION
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
Q02HCPU*1 RS-422
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
19
*1
Q25HCPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
Q02PHCPU
CONNECTION
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU RS-232
Q25PHCPU RS-422
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
Q25PRHCPU (Main base)
Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)
- 20
Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Q00UJCPU
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU
GT11, GT10
(Q mode)*5 Q03UDCPU
RS-232
Q04UDHCPU
RS-422
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU 21
Q13UDHCPU
RS-485
Q20UDHCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
FUNCTION
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU 22
Q26UDEHCPU
RS-232 *2 *2 *2
FA TRANSPARENT
Q50UDEHCPU *2 *2 *2 *2
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU FUNCTION
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*4
RS-232 *2 *2 *2
module Q24DHCCPU-V *2 *2 *2 *2
MELSEC-QS*5 QS001CPU -
L02CPU*3
L26CPU*3
L26CPU-BT*3 RS-232
MELSEC-L*5
L02CPU-P*3 RS-422
L26CPU-PBT*3
L02SCPU
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
ROBOT
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
MELSEC-A A1SHCPU
RS-422
18
(AnSCPU)*5 A2SCPU*1
CNC CONNECTION
A2SHCPU
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU*1
A0J2HCPUP21*1
RS-422
19
A0J2HCPUR21*1
GOT MULTI-DROP
A0J2HCPU-DC24*1
CONNECTION
A2CCPU*1
MELSEC-A*5
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-422
A2CCPUC24-PRF 20
A2CJCPU-S3
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
A1FXCPU
RS-485
Q172CPU*2*3
Q173CPU*2*3 RS-232
GT11, GT10
Q172CPUN*2 RS-422
Q173CPUN*2
Q172HCPU 21
Motion controller Q173HCPU
CPU (Q Series) Q172DCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
Q173DCPU
RS-232 *4
FUNCTION
Q172DCPU-S1 *4 *4 *4 *4
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU RS-232 22
A273UCPU RS-422
FA TRANSPARENT
A273UHCPU
RS-422
A273UHCPU-S3
Motion controller A373UCPU FUNCTION
CPU (A Series)*5 A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU RS-422
A171SCPU-S3
A171SCPU-S3N
(Continued to next page)
*1 When monitoring A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.
• A0J2HCPU (with/without link): Version E or later
• A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later
• A2CCPU: Version H or later
*2 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed.
• SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later
• SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later
• SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later
*3 Use main modules with the following product numbers.
• Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later
• Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later
*4 Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.
*5 SB, SW, Ww, Wr, ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored.
FX1S
FX1N RS-232
MELSEC-FX
FX2N RS-422
FX1NC
RS-232
FX2NC
*1 RS-422
FX3G
FX3GC RS-232
FX3U RS-422
FX3UC
(Continued to next page)
*1 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function.
*2 SB, SW, Ww, Wr, ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L
ROBOT
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-S500/S500E 18
FREQROL-F500J
CNC CONNECTION
FREQROL
FREQROL-D700 RS-422
FREQROL-F700PJ
FREQROL-E700
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
RS-485
MELIPM
FREQROL-F700P
MD-CX522- K(-A0)
19
MR-J2S- A
GOT MULTI-DROP
MR-J2S- CP
CONNECTION
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A RS-232
MELSERVO
MR-J2M- DU RS-422
MR-J3-
MR-J3-
A
T
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MR-J4- A
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU RS-232
Q25PHCPU RS-422
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
Q25PRHCPU (Main base)
Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)
-
Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU
(Q mode)*3 Q03UDCPU
RS-232
Q04UDHCPU
RS-422
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU RS-485
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU RS-232
Q50UDEHCPU RS-422
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*4
RS-232
module Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU -
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT RS-232
MELSEC-L*3
L02CPU-P RS-422
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
(Continued to next page)
*1 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later.
*2 Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042.
*3 Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
Q02HCPU-A
ROBOT
(A mode)*1 RS-422
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
MELSEC-QnA
Q2ACPU-S1
RS-232
18
Q3ACPU
(QnACPU)*1 RS-422
CNC CONNECTION
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 RS-232
(QnASCPU)*1 Q2ASHCPU RS-422
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
19
A2UCPU-S1
GOT MULTI-DROP
A3UCPU
CONNECTION
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1 20
A2ACPUP21-S1 RS-485
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
GT11, GT10
A3ACPUR21
MELSEC-A RS-232
(AnCPU) A1NCPU RS-422
A1NCPUP21
21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
A2NCPUP21
FUNCTION
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1 22
A3NCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
FUNCTION
MELSEC-A RS-232
A2USCPU
(AnSCPU) RS-422
(Continued to next page)
*1 Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored.
Q173CPUN*1*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion controller
Q172DCPU
CPU (Q Series)
Q173DCPU RS-232
*3
Q172DCPU-S1 RS-422 *3 *3 *3 *3
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
RS-232
Q170MCPU
RS-422
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
Motion controller A373UCPU RS-232
CPU (A Series) A373UCPU-S3 RS-422
A171SCPU
A171SCPU-S3
A171SCPU-S3N
(Continued to next page)
*1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed.
• SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later
• SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later
• SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later
*2 Use main modules with the following product numbers.
• Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later
• Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later
*3 Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
ROBOT
Motion controller A172SHCPU RS-232
CPU (A Series) A172SHCPUN RS-422
A173UHCPU 18
A173UHCPU-S1
CNC CONNECTION
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H RS-232
QJ72LP25G
remote I/O station RS-422
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - 19
head module
GOT MULTI-DROP
CC-Link IE
CONNECTION
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB -
Ethernet adapter
module
RS-232
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-485
RS-422
Robot controller
CRnQ-700
(Q172DRCPU)
- 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
FX0 -
FX0S
-
FX0N
GT11, GT10
FX1 -
FX2
-
FX2C *1
FX1S 21
FX1N
MELSEC-FX -
MULTI-CHANNEL
FX2N
FX1NC
FUNCTION
FX2NC -
*1
FX3G
22
FX3GC
-
FX3U
FX3UC
FA TRANSPARENT
(Continued to next page)
*1 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function.
FUNCTION
MR-J3- A
MR-J3- T
MR-J4- A
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
multi-drop connection is available.
PLC Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
ROBOT
GOT type
Connection type Type Serial Multi-Drop Connection driver
DIRECT MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
CONNECTION TO
CPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
QnA/L/Q CPU
18
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION
COMPUTER LINK
CNC CONNECTION
CONNECTION MELSEC-L
DIRECT MELSEC-A MELSEC-A
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX
CPU
DIRECT MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
CONNECTION TO
CPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION
QnA/L/Q CPU 19
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION MELSEC-L
GOT MULTI-DROP
DIRECT MELSEC-A MELSEC-A
CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX
CPU
DIRECT MELSEC-QnU/DC
CONNECTION TO MELSEC-QnA/Q
CPU
COMPUTER LINK
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)
QnA/L/Q CPU
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
CONNECTION MELSEC-L
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
(RS-422) DIRECT MELSEC-A MELSEC-A
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX
CPU
GT11, GT10
POINT
21
GOT models support the GOT Multi-Drop Connection
The following GOT models support the GOT Multi-Drop Connection.
MULTI-CHANNEL
For the confirming method of hardware version, refer to the following.
FUNCTION
GT User's Manual
GOT Hardware version Standard monitor OS
GT16, GT15*1, GT14 version A or later
GT1155-QTBD version C or later - 22
GT1155-QSBD, GT1150-QLBD version F or later
FA TRANSPARENT
GT1055-QSBD, GT1050-QBBD version C or later
GT1045-QSBD, GT1040-QBBD version A or later
FUNCTION
Standard monitor OS[01.12.**]or later
GT1030-L D , GT1030-H D version B or later
GT1020-L D version E or later
*1 When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the
GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.14Q or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to
the serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
For details of the OS installation, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
Serial multi
PLC drop connection GOT GOT
unit
Serial Multi-Drop
Connection cable GOT
Connection Unit Number of
Max.
PLC Commun connectable
distance
Model ication Cable model Option device Model equipment
type
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)
RS485
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
connection diagram 2) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)
RS485
GT15-RS4-9S
connection diagram 1)
RS485
For details of the system GT15-RS4-TE
connection diagram 3)
configuration between
16 GOTs for
the Serial Multi-Drop
GT01-RS4-M RS-485 500m*2 Serial Multi-Drop
Connection Unit and GT10-9PT5S*1
Connection Unit*3
PLC, refer to the
corresponding section. RS485
connection diagram 4)
- (Built into GOT)
*5
RS485
GT14-RS2T4-9P*4
connection diagram 5)
*1 Connect it to the RS-422/485 interface (built into GOT).
*2 The maximum distance from the PLC to the terminal GOT.
*3 When the number of connected GOTs is increased, the response performance decreases.
*4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).
*5 Cannot be connected to products with input voltage 5V.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following diagram shows the cable connection between the serial multi-drop connection unit and the GOT.
ROBOT
19.4.1 RS-485 cable
18
Connection diagram
CNC CONNECTION
RS485 connection diagram 1)
3 3 3
GOT side* (9 pin) GOT side* (9 pin) GOT side* (9 pin)
SHELL
SHELL
SHELL
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
SG
SG
19
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
Terminal Terminal Terminal
SG
SG
SG
FG
FG
FG
block *6 block *6 block *6
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
RDA*1
RDB*1
SDA*1
GT11, GT10
SDB*1
SG
*5
21
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB.
MULTI-CHANNEL
*2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
*3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".
FUNCTION
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
*4 Connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal.
*5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding.
*6 For the cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to terminal block, refer to the following. 22
Precautions when preparing a cable(2)
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
connection unit *2 CON side*3(20pin) CON side*3(20pin) CON side*3(20pin)
ROBOT
SDA1(TXD1+) SDA2(TXD2+) SDA1(TXD1+)
RDA*1 6 5 6
SDB1(TXD1-) SDB2(TXD2-) SDB1(TXD1-)
R
RDB*1 8 7 8
18
*4
RDA1(RXD1+) RDA2(RXD2+) RDA1(RXD1+)
SDA*1 10 9 10
RDB1(RXD1-) RDB2(RXD2-) RDB1(RXD1-)
R
SDB *1
CNC CONNECTION
12 11 12
*4
SG SG SG
SG 2 2 2
NC NC *5 *5 NC
1 1 1
*5 *5
NC NC NC
3 3 3
NC NC NC
4 4 4
SDA2(TXD2+)
5
SDA1(TXD1+)
6
SDA2(TXD2+)
5
19
SDB2(TXD2-) SDB1(TXD1-) SDB2(TXD2-)
7 8 7
GOT MULTI-DROP
RDA2(RXD2+) RDA1(RXD1+) RDA2(RXD2+)
CONNECTION
9 10 9
RDB2(RXD2-) RDB1(RXD1-) RDB2(RXD2-)
11 12 11
NC NC NC
13 13 13
*5 *5
RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+)
20
14 14 14
NC NC NC
15 15 15
CONNECTION FUNCTION
RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-)
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
16 16 16
NC NC NC
17 17 17
CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+)
GT11, GT10
18 18 18
NC NC NC
19 19 19
CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-)
20 20 20
21
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB.
MULTI-CHANNEL
*2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
*3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".
FUNCTION
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
*4 Connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal.
*5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding.
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Serial multi drop
connection unit *2 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*2 *3
ROBOT
SDA *4 SDA *4 SDA *4
SDA 1 1 1
SDB SDB SDB
SDB 6 6 6
RDA
RDA
2
RDA
2
RDA
2 18
RDB RDB RDB
CNC CONNECTION
RDB 7 7 7
*3 *3 *3
SG SG SG
SG 5 5 5
GOT MULTI-DROP
*1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN".
CONNECTION
*2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ".
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
RS485 connection diagram 4)
(For 2 pair wiring)
GT11, GT10
Serial multi drop
connection unit *2 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*2 *3
*4 *4 *4
RDA
SDA
1
SDA
1
SDA
1 21
SDB SDB SDB
RDB 6 6 6
MULTI-CHANNEL
RDA RDA RDA
SDA 2 2 2
RDB RDB RDB
SDB
FUNCTION
7 7 7
SG SG SG
SG 5 5 5
FA TRANSPARENT
CSB CSB CSB
9 9 9
FUNCTION
*1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN".
*2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
SG SG SG SG
*3 *3 *3
SG SG SG SG
*3 *3 *3
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Mixed wiring with various GOTs
The GOT multi-drop connection can be used with various GOTs mixed.
ROBOT
GT16, GT15
(GT15-RS4-9S)
18
SHELL
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
CNC CONNECTION
Example of mixed wiring with various GOTs
RDA2
RDB2
RDB1
RDA1
RDB2
RDA2
RDA1
RDB1
RDA2
RDB2
SDA1
SDB1
SDA2
SDB2
SDB1
SDA1
SDB2
SDA2
SDA1
SDB1
SDA2
SDB2
19
RDB
RDA
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SDB
SDA
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
SG
SG
SG
FG
FG
GOT MULTI-DROP
Serial multi drop
connection unit
CONNECTION
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Pair
Shield
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
19.5.1 Setting communication
19.5.2 Communication detail settings
interface (communication
ROBOT
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
18
Set the channel of connecting equipment.
CNC CONNECTION
2.
3. 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
4.
CONNECTION
Item Description Range
CONNECTION FUNCTION
19200bps,
Transmission Speed communication with the connected
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Click!
38400bps,
equipment.
57600bps,
(Default: 115200bps)
115200bps
GT11, GT10
Set the number of retries to be
MULTI-CHANNEL
(Default: 0time)
Set the time period for a
3.
FUNCTION
Set the following items. Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
• Manufacturer: Set it according to the connected (Default: 3sec)
FA TRANSPARENT
Set this item to adjust the
• Driver: Multi-Drop (slave) transmission timing of the
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, GOT. FUNCTION
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 0ms)
Make the settings according to the usage
environment.
POINT
19.5.2 Communication detail settings
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (1) Communication interface setting by Utility
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
POINT after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
The settings of connecting equipment can be For details on the Utility, refer to the following
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. manual.
For details, refer to the following.
GT User's Manual
1.1.2 I/F communication setting (2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Click!
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
When checking the connection status of each GOT
which is connected to GT01-RS4-M on the PLC side,
ROBOT
set the multi-drop system information function.
The GOT connection status is stored in the PLC side
word device. 18
(1) Setting on the PLC side word device
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
1. Set the following to the driver for the connected
GT11, GT10
equipment.
• Connection type dependent
MULTI-CHANNEL
• Multi-drop(Host)
2.
FUNCTION
Perform the detailed settings for the driver.
1. Select [Use the system information of Multidrop] and
■ Communication detail settings click the [Set] button. The following dialog window is
displayed.
3. Set [Use the system information of Multidrop] as
22
necessary.
■ Setting the multi-drop system information
FA TRANSPARENT
function
FUNCTION
4. Click the [Write] button when settings are completed.
• 1: Connected
• 0: Unconnected (Including communication error
status)
*2 When the communication between GT01-RS4-M and the
PLC becomes faulty, the station information notification
signal is not updated.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) Export (3) For the connection with GOT
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
1. After determining the storage location as necessary,
name the file and save it.
The file format is [*.ini] (fixed).
Item Description Range
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
4800bps,
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Set this item when change the
(2) Import 9600bps,
transmission speed used for
19200bps,
Transmission Speed communication with the connected
38400bps,
GT11, GT10
equipment.
57600bps,
(Default: 115200bps)
115200bps
Set the number of retries to be
performed when a communication 21
timeout occurs.
Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times
MULTI-CHANNEL
retries, the communication times
out.
FUNCTION
(Default: 0time)
Set the time period for a
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
Set this item to adjust the 22
transmission timing of the
FA TRANSPARENT
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms
GOT.
1. Enter the name of the file previously saved and open (Default: 0ms)
FUNCTION
the file.
The file format is [*.ini] (fixed).
POINT
Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
For details on the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit,
refer to the following manual.
Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit User’s
Manual
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
19.7.1 Setting switches
ROBOT
Set the switches according to the connection type.
18
POINT
CNC CONNECTION
Connection conversion adapter
For details on the connection conversion adapter, refer
to the following manual.
Connection Conversion Adapter User’s manual
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
1pair / 2pair signal
MULTI-CHANNEL
selection switch
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
FA transparent function
The example of a Station No. setting FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the
GOT multi-drop connection system.
Extended/Option function of GOT
(1) Standard monitor OS installation, Writing
The extended/option functions of GOT shown below
Communication driver
are not available.
When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop
System monitor, Device monitor, Ladder monitor, A list connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and
editor, FX list editor, Intelligent unit monitor, Network communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3
monitor, Q motion monitor, Servo amplifier monitor, (Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the
CNC monitor, Backup/restore, CNC data I/O, SFC standard monitor OS and communication driver to the
monitor, Ladder editor, Log viewer, MELSEC-L serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
troubleshoot, Motion SFC, motion program (SV43)
(2) Number of personal computers
editor, Motion program (SV43) I/O Only one personal computer can be connected to the
multi-drop connection system.
System alarm (GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11) Only one personal computer
The alarms of the serial multi-drop connection unit are
displayed on the system alarm.The alarms of the
connected PLC are not displayed.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11,
20.
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
20.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 2
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
20.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 2
GT11, GT10
20.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 5
20.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 7
21
20.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 - 11
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
20 - 1
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GOT GOT
PLC
(1st) (2nd)
Connection cable
Varies according to
the connection type.
- RS422 connection -
RS-422 30m
(Built into GOT) diagram 1) (Built into GOT)
For the system
- RS422 connection -
configuration RS-422 30m
(Built into GOT) diagram 1) (Built into GOT)
between a got and A
plc, refer to the - -
RS422 connection
following. RS-422 30m
(Built into GOT) diagram 1) (Built into GOT)
CONTROLLER
Connection type Option device Model nication Cable model Option device Model
CONNECTION
ation type distance equipment
type
ROBOT
For the system - RS422 connection -
RS-422 30m *5
configuration (Built into GOT) (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)
between a got and A
plc, refer to the
following.
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m 18
CNC CONNECTION
RS-232 2 GOTs
DIRECT GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m)
- -
CONNECTION TO RS-232 +
(Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT)
CPU
RS232 connection
COMPUTER diagram 5)
LINK
CONNECTION*4
19
*1 When GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connection function is not supported.
*2 The 2nd GOT must be a RS-232 built-in product.
GOT MULTI-DROP
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.( RS232 connection diagram 2))
CONNECTION
*4 When connected to the Computer link, the multiple connection function supports only QCPU (Q mode), LCPU.
*5 The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-422 built-in product.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
GOT GOT
PLC
(1st) (2nd)
Connection cable
Varies according to
the connection type.
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
- or -
RS-232 15m
(Built into GOT) RS232 connection (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
- or -
RS-232 15m
(Built into GOT) RS232 connection (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
For the system - or -
RS-232 15m
configuration (Built into GOT) RS232 connection (Built into GOT)
between a got and diagram 1)
A plc, refer to the
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
following.
- or -
RS-232 15m
RS-422 (Built into GOT) RS232 connection (Built into GOT) 2 GOTs
DIRECT
CONNECTION TO diagram 1)
CPU
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *3 3m
GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m)
COMPUTER LINK - - *2
RS-232 +
CONNECTION*4 (Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT)
RS232 connection
diagram 4)
- RS232 connection - *2
RS-232 15m
(Built into GOT) diagram 3) (Built into GOT)
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m)
- -
RS-232 +
(Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT)
RS232 connection
diagram 5)
*1 When GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connection function is not supported.
*2 The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-232 built-in product.
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.( RS232 connection diagram 2))
*4 When connected to the Computer link, the multiple connection function supports only QCPU (Q mode), LCPU.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the PLC. RS232 connection diagram 4)
ROBOT
Cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) Second GOT side
D-Sub 9-pin (terminal block)
20.3.1 RS-232 Cable
N.C. 1 6 RS
18
CNC CONNECTION
Connection diagram RD (RXD) 2 1 SD (TXD)
SD (TXD) 3 2 RD (RXD)
RS232 connection diagram 1) ER (DTR) 4 4 DR (DSR)
GOT side GOT side
SG 5 5 SG
N.C. 1 1 N.C. DR (DSR)
19
6 3 ER (DTR)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) RS (RTS) 7 7 CS (CTS)
GOT MULTI-DROP
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) CS (CTS) 8 8 N.C.
CONNECTION
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) - 9 9 N.C.
SG 5 5 SG
RS232 connection diagram 5)
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
Cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) Second GOT side
RS(RTS) 7 8 CS(CTS) D-Sub 9-pin side
20
CS(CTS) 8 7 RS(RTS) N.C. 1 1 N.C.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
- 9 - - RD (RXD) 2 3 SD (TXD)
SD (TXD) 3 2 RD (RXD)
RS232 connection diagram 2)
GT11, GT10
ER (DTR) 4 6 DR (DSR)
Second GOT side Untied wire color
(terminal block) of GT10-C30R2-6P SG 5 5 SG
SD Brown
DR (DSR) 6 4 ER (DTR)
21
RS (RTS) 7 8 CS (CTS)
RD Red
MULTI-CHANNEL
CS (CTS) 8 7 RS (RTS)
ER Blue
- 9 - -
FUNCTION
DR Yellow
SG Green
CS
(1) Cable length
FA TRANSPARENT
NC The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.
NC (2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. FUNCTION
RS232 connection diagram 3) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
Second GOT side
First GOT side (terminal block)
N.C. 1 6 RS
RD(RXD) 2 1 SD(TXD)
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
ER(DTR) 4 4 DR(DSR)
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 3 ER(DTR)
RS(RTS) 7 7 CS(CTS)
CS(CTS) 8 8 N.C.
- 9 9 N.C.
RSA 3 4 CSA
Connecting terminating resistors
CSA 4 3 RSA (1) GOT side
When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating
SG 5 5 SG
resistor must be connected to the GOT.
SDB 6 7 RDB Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main
RDB 7 6 SDB unit to "300 ".
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
RSB CSB
8 9
to the following.
CSB 9 8 RSB 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
RDA 2 1 SDA
RDB 7 2 SDB
SDA 1 3 RDA
SDB 6 4 RDB
SG 5 5 SG
CSA 4 6 RSA
CSB 9 7 RSB
RSA 3 8 CSA
RSB 8 9 CSB
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
20.4.1 Setting communication
interface (Communication 4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
ROBOT
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set.
settings) Make the settings according to the usage
environment. 18
This section explains with an example of the following 20.4.2 Communication detail settings
CNC CONNECTION
system configuration.
RS-232 1st GOT RS-422 2nd GOT
cable cable
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
GOT MULTI-DROP
the PLC
CONNECTION
2.
3. 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
4.
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
Click! Click!
FUNCTION
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the 1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from 22
menu. the menu.
FA TRANSPARENT
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the 2. The I/F Connection list window is displayed. Select
channel to be used from the list menu. the following.
FUNCTION
• I/F-1: RS422/232
3. Set the following items.
CH No.: 9
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi
Driver: Host (PC)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller
Type to be connected.
• I/F: Standard I/F (RS232) Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
• Driver: Set either of the following according to the
Controller Type to be connected.
For GT14, GT12, GT11
A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24
MELSEC-FX
For GT10
QnA/L/Q CPU
MELSEC-A
MELSEC-FX
3.
4.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
Item Description
GOT MULTI-DROP
Item Description Range
communication with the connected 9600bps,
CONNECTION
Set this item when change the equipment. 19200bps,
transmission speed used for Transmission (Default: 115200bps) 38400bps,
communication with the connected Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of
9600bps, 57600bps,
equipment. the connected equipment,
19200bps, 115200bps
Transmission (Default: 115200bps) communication is performed at the
20
38400bps, fastest transmission speed supported
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of
57600bps, by the connected equipment.
the connected equipment,
115200bps
CONNECTION FUNCTION
communication is performed at the Set the number of retries to be
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
fastest transmission speed supported performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
by the connected equipment. timeout occurs.
(Default: 0time)
GT11, GT10
Set the number of retries to be
performed when a communication Set the time period for a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
timeout occurs. Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 0time)
MULTI-CHANNEL
(Default: 3sec) from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
Set this item to adjust the transmission
FUNCTION
timing of the communication request
Delay Time 0 to 300ms (b) For GT10
from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
POINT
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the
GOT utility, refer to the following manual:
GT User's Manual
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT's communication timing
Using the FA transparent function
ROBOT
(1) GOT's communication timing
Adjust the communication timing so that, after applying When multiple GOTs are connected, the FA transparent
the power to the system, the communication with the function is not available even if the RS-232 interface or
connected device (MITSUBISHI PLC) is performed in USB interface is used for the connection. 18
order starting from the first GOT (from the 1st GOT to
(When connecting a personal computer to the first
CNC CONNECTION
the 2nd, and so on).
GOT, the FA transparent function can be used.)
When the communication is failed, retries are
performed. And if the predetermined time has elapsed, 1st GOT 2nd GOT
PC
a communication error occurs. RS-232
GOT MULTI-DROP
USB
• If the system power is turned on simultaneously and it
CONNECTION
takes time to start the communication of the second
GOT, a communication error may be developed. 1st GOT
PC
CONNECTION FUNCTION
multiple-GT11 connection
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
[Opening Screen Time] from GT Designer3, set the
opening screen time adding a delay to each setting In the system where multiple GOTs are connected,
for the GOTs. performing either of the following monitoring stop
GT11, GT10
During the opening process, communication with operations on the preceding stage (the first GOT) also
the connected device does not start. stops monitoring of the GOT on the next stage (the
second GOT).
Example: Set value of [Opening Screen Time]
(Inside (): set value) When the GOT on the preceding stage resumes
21
First module (5s) Second module (10s) monitoring, the GOT on the next stage also resumes it.
MULTI-CHANNEL
(b) When powering on devices individually • When project data or the OS is written/read by GT
FUNCTION
Turn on the connected device first, and then the Designer3*1
first GOT, the second GOT, and so on. • When the GOT is set up*1
*1 A timeout error occurs in GX Developer.
Power supply (24V DC)
Power feeding to GOT
The title screen
is displayed. 1st GOT 2nd GOT
GT Designer3 22
FA TRANSPARENT
Monitoring
Downloading
stopped
Communication of the
First GOT's 2nd GOT is enabled.
communication user screen
FUNCTION
USB
The project data is being download.
Second GOT's
communication
Retry user screen When PLC power disconnection occurs in
the multiple-GOT connection
In the system where multiple GOTs are connected,
when the communication between the PLC and the first
GOT is stopped due to PLC power disconnection and a
disconnection of the communication cable between the
PLC and the first GOT, the GOT waits for timeout
against the communication request from the peripheral
devices (GX Developer, etc.), and recovery of
monitoring between the PLC and the GOT is delayed.
1st GOT 2nd GOT
Monitoring Monitoring
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2
21.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 4 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
21.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 7
21.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 41
GT11, GT10
21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 42
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
21 - 1
21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
Installing multiple
communication drivers Channel No.1
Bus connection
Channel No.2
OMRON PLC
connection
Monitoring the devices
of FA controllers
Channel No.3
Temperature
controller
connection
Channel No.4
Servo amplifier
connection
POINT
(1) Before using the multi-channel function
This manual describes the procedure to use the multi-channel function, based on the following system
configuration example.
21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection
21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection
(2) System configuration when the multi-channel function is used
The system configuration between GOT and the controllers is the same as that of when not using the multi-
channel function.
For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following.
Each chapter indicating the system configuration
(3) Precautions for hardware
To use the multi-channel function, an option function board is required for some GOTs.
The following table shows the required option function boards.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
other controllers can be configured.
One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system
ROBOT
configuration, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established.
In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information
is possible. 18
CNC CONNECTION
PLC system
PLC
Temperatur
controller Temperature controller system
Servo amplifier
Can monitor
different kinds Servo amplifier system
19
of controllers on
the same screen.
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
(2) Controlling FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.)
It is possible to control FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.).
For example, it is possible to execute read/write of a device such as FXCPU when the condition is satisfied,
using the device of the PLC CPU on the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.) as the trigger for action.
Condition is satisfied 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
FXCPU
GT11, GT10
Writing to a device
(3) With one GOT, the Ethernet connection and the bus or network connection are available in combination. 21
(GT16 only)
One GOT can make the Ethernet connections and the bus or network connection. Therefore, the system
MULTI-CHANNEL
configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established.
FUNCTION
Also, the GOT can monitor multiple controllers on an Ethernet network.(Multi-channel Ethernet connection)
22
Hub
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system configuration,
in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established.
In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information is
possible.
Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver
Bus connection
QCPU Connection cable
(Channel No.1)
Direct CPU
OMRON connection
Connection cable
PLC (Channel No.2) GOT
OMRON Temperature
temperature Connection cable controller
controller connection
(Channel No.3)
MELSERVO-
J2-Super Servo amplifier connection
Connection cable
series (Channel No.4)
GOT Number of
Connection
PLC Connection cable Channel connectable
type Option device Model
No. equipment
Bus For the system configuration between
MELSEC-Q 1 GT15-QBUS 4 connected
connection GOT and the controllers, refer to the
following. equipment for 1
OMRON PLC 2 - (Built into GOT)
Direct CPU GOT
OMRON temperature controller Each chapter indicating the 3 GT15-RS2-9P
connection (4 channels)
MELSERVO-J2-Super system configuration 4 GT15-RS4-9S
For the system configuration between
OMRON PLC GOT and the controllers, refer to the 1 2 connected
Direct CPU following. equipment for 1
- (Built into GOT)
connection GOT
OMRON temperature controller Each chapter indicating the 2 (2 channels)
system configuration
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Controllers that use Channels No.5 to 8
The following shows the drivers that can be set to Channels No. 5 to 8.
ROBOT
For the system configuration and connection condition with the controller, refer to the chapter of each controller.
Channel No. Driver*1 Reference
Barcode Reader, 18
RFID Controller, GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS, Products, Peripherals)
5 to 7
CNC CONNECTION
PC Remote Operation(Serial), FINGERPRINT AUTHENTICATION DEVICE CONNECTION
Printer (Serial)
BAR CODE READER CONNECTION
Barcode Reader,
PC REMOTE CONNECTION
RFID Controller,
8 PC Remote Operation(Serial), PRINTER CONNECTION
Fingerprint Authentication, RFID CONNECTION
Printer (Serial)
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
One GOT can make several Ethernet connections and the bus or network connections. Therefore, the system
configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established.
Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver
Ethernet/IP(AB)/ Ethernet(MELSEC),
MELSECNET/H MELSEC-FX Gateway Q17nNC, CRnD-700
MELSECNET/H
QCPU Connection cable connection
(Channel No.2) GOT
ALLEN-
Ethernet connection
BRADLEY Connection cable
(Channel No.3)
PLC
GOT Number of
PLC Connection type Connection cable connectable
Channel No. Option device Model
equipment
Direct CPU
MELSEC-FX For the system configuration between 1 GT15-RS2T4-9P
connection
GOT and the controllers, refer to the 4 connected
QCPU MELSECNET/H 2 GT15-J71LP23-25 equipment for 1
following.
ALLEN-BRADLEY GOT
Each chapter indicating the 3
PLC Ethernet - (Built into GOT) (4 channels)
system configuration
Robot controller 4
ALLEN-BRADLEY For the system configuration between
1 2 connected
PLC GOT and the controllers, refer to the
following. equipment for 1
Ethernet - (Built into GOT)
GOT
OMRON PLC Each chapter indicating the 2
(2 channels)
system configuration
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
21.3.1 Basics of interface selection
ROBOT
This section explains basic knowledge of the multi-channel function.
A general flow of operation from system selection for the multi-channel function to drawing is explained in 21.3.2 to 18
21.3.6.
CNC CONNECTION
It is recommended to refer to 21.3.2 to 21.3.6 when making necessary settings using the multi-channel function for the
first time.
GOT MULTI-DROP
Extension interface 2
CONNECTION
Extension interface allows the installation of a
3rd stage communication unit up to the 3rd stage, respectively.
(For the GT1655, GT155 , only one extension
interface can be installed.)
2nd stage
A communication unit installed at the 4th or higher
stage cannot be used.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
1st stage
Standard interface
For GT16 21
The RS-232 interface, the USB interface,
MULTI-CHANNEL
the RS-422/485 interface, and the Ethernet interface
are built in as the standard interfaces.
FUNCTION
For GT15
The RS-232 interface and the USB interface
are built in as the standard interfaces.
(Example: In the case of the GT1575)
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Specifications
GT1695
GT1685 GT1595
Item GT1675 GT1585 Description
GT1655 GT155 GT14 GT12
GT1672 GT157
GT1665 GT156
GT1662
GT16
• In bus connection and network connection (*1), only 1 channel can
be set for one GOT.
• For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 4 channels can be set.
• When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection
other than communication with a controller (*3), the connection is
not included in the count of the number of channels.
• The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not
included in the count of the number of channels.
GT15
• For the bus connection, network connection (*1), and Ethernet
connection (*2), only 1 channel can be set for one GOT.
• When an Ethernet communication unit is used in other than
communications with a controller (*3), it is not included in the count
of the number of channels.
• The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not
Max. included in the count of the number of channels.
number of 4 channels 2 channels
channels GT14
• The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not
included in the count of the number of channels.
• For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 2 channels can be set.
(GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE only)
• When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection
other than communication with a controller (*3), the connection is
not included in the count of the number of channels.
(GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE only)
GT12
• For the Ethernet connection (*2), only 1 channel can be set for one
GOT.
• When an Ethernet communication unit is used in other than
communications with a controller (*3), it is not included in the count
of the number of channels.
• The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not
included in the count of the number of channels.
• A module that occupies 2 slots (*5, *6, *7) must be installed at the
first stage.
• For the video/RGB display, RGB output, and multimedia function,
Allowable Max. 3 Max. 3 Max. 3 Max. 3
install the unit indicated in *6 at the first stage and the other units at
number of stages stages stages stages -
the second or later stage.
stages (2 slots) (1 slot) (2 slot) (1 slot)
• When a unit indicated in *7 is used, other extension units cannot be
installed.
• The CF card unit must be installed on the last stage, if used.
*1 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link connection
(intelligent device station)
*2 Ethernet connection, MODBUS®/TCP connection
*3 Gateway function, MES interface function, Ethernet download
*4 Fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer (writing remote personal computer operation (serial), FA
transparent function, OS install, project data) or serial printer
*5 GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-J71GP23-SX, GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
For units usable with each GOT, refer to the following manuals.
User's Manual of GOT used.
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Capacity Capacity
GOT type GOT type
(A) (A)
Consumed Consumed
Module type current Module type current
(A) (A)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2,
0.275*1 GT15V-75V4 0.2*1
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,
0.12 GT16M-R2 0*1
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
*1 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function.
For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.
*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current.
(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A)
ROBOT
2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104
Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT.
18
(b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway
CNC CONNECTION
function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S
1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774
Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed.
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Interface selection
21.3.4
Determine the GOT side interface and communication units to Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
be used for the multichannel function.
21.3.5
Make settings for Communication Settings.
Setting for communication settings
21.3.6
Confirm items to know before starting drawing.
Items to be checked before starting drawing
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) GT16
ROBOT
For GT16, the combinations of the bus or network connection, the Ethernet connection, and the serial
connection are available as shown in the following table.
CNC CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
Bus/network connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)
CNC connection(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC
18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
19
network))
GOT MULTI-DROP
CNC connection(CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
CONNECTION
Ethernet connection 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
Robot controller connection 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4 Ethernet connection
Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection
Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
6.3 Ethernet Connection
Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC
7.3 Ethernet Connection
GT11, GT10
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
10.3 Ethernet Connection
• 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC
14.3 Ethernet Connection
21
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)
• 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET)
MULTI-CHANNEL
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
MODBUS®/TCP connection
• 5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION
FUNCTION
(Continued to next page)
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1
GT1695 FA transparent function
ROBOT
GT1685
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1675
GT1672
GT1665
RS-232 USB 18
GT1662
CNC CONNECTION
GT1655
• Bus/network connection: 1 channel *2
(a) Max. 4 channels
• Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels
• Bus/network connection: 1 channel *2
(b) Max. 4 channels
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels
(c)
• Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels
Max. 4 channels *2
19
• Bus/network connection: 1 channel
GOT MULTI-DROP
(d) • Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels Max. 4 channels *2
CONNECTION
(e) • Serial connection: 4 channels Max. 4 channels *2
*1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the
functions to be used. 20
Fingerprint authentication Barcode function RFID function
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Remote personal computer operation Video display function Multimedia function
Operation panel function External I/O function RGB display function
Report function Hard copy function(for printer output) Sound output function
GT11, GT10
Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit
The video display function, multimedia function and RGB display function cannot be used together.
The CF card unit and the CF card extension unit cannot be used at the same time.
For details, refer to the following.
21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) 21
*2 For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only.
When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available.
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
ROBOT
Inverter connection 15. INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
18
CNC CONNECTION
Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC
4.2 Serial Connection
• 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC
• 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC
• 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC
• 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC
• 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC
• 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
19
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC EW PLC
GOT MULTI-DROP
Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
CONNECTION
• 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC
Third party PLC connection (serial connection)
• 3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC
• 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC
6.2 Serial Connection
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC
7.2 Serial Connection
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
10.2 Serial Connection
• 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC
Serial connection • 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
GT11, GT10
• 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC
• 16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER
Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
Third party safety controller connection
• 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 21
Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
Third party servo amplifier connection
• 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER
MULTI-CHANNEL
Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
• 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
FUNCTION
Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC
CONTROLLER
Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
• 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
22
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
FA TRANSPARENT
CONTROLLER
• 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER FUNCTION
Third party temperature controller connection • 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER
Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
Microcomputer Connection (Serial)
• 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL)
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
MODBUS®/RTU connection
• 4. MODBUS(R)/RTU CONNECTION
Max. 4 Max. 2 *3
(b) • Serial connection: 4 channels
channels channels
*1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the
functions to be used.
Fingerprint authentication Barcode function RFID function
Remote personal computer operation Video display function Operation panel function
External I/O function RGB display function Report function
Hard copy function(for printer output) Sound output function
Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit
The video display function and RGB display function cannot be used together.
The CF card unit and the CF card extension unit cannot be used at the same time.
For details, refer to the following.
21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
*2 When any of the connection methods below is used, Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download, gateway
function, MES interface function and file transfer function (FTP client) can be used.
Bus connection MELSECTNET/H connection
MELSECNET/10 connection CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
CC-Link connection MODBUS®/TCP connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection
*3 For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only.
When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available.
(3) GT14
For GT14, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the
following table.
Connection type Reference
Ethernet connection 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4Ethernet connection
Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
• 3. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 3.3 Ethernet Connection
Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection
Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection
Ethernet connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet
Connection
• 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14.3 Ethernet Connection
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)
• 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET)
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
MODBUS®/TCP connection
• 5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION
Direct CPU connection 6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
Computer link connection 7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Serial connection Inverter connection 15.INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
• 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC
• 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC
ROBOT
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC EW PLC
Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 11.2 Serial Connection
18
• 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC
CNC CONNECTION
• 16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER
Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
Third party safety controller connection
• 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER
Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
• 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
Serial connection Third party robot controller connection
Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 19
Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
GOT MULTI-DROP
• 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
CONNECTION
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
• 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING
Third party temperature controller connection CONTROLLER
• 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER
Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
• 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Microcomputer connection (Serial)
• 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL)
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
MODBUS®/RTU connection
• 4. MODBUS(R)/RTU CONNECTION
GT11, GT10
The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table
below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted functions. 21
: Allowed : Restricted
MULTI-CHANNEL
GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1
FUNCTION
GT1450-QLBDE GT1450-QLBD RS-232 USB Ethernet
FA TRANSPARENT
*1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the
functions to be used.
FUNCTION
Barcode function RFID function
For details, refer to the following.
21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
*2 For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only.
When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available.
*3 When a GOT and PLC are connected by Ethernet connection, connecting a GOT and a personal computer by Ethernet is not
allowed.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
: Allowed : Restricted
ROBOT
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1275 FA transparent function
GT1265 RS-232 USB
18
• Ethernet connection: 1 channel *3
(a) Max. 2 channels
CNC CONNECTION
• Serial connection: 1 channel
*1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the
functions to be used.
Barcode function RFID function
For details, refer to the following.
21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
19
*2 When any of the connection methods below is used, Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download and
GOT MULTI-DROP
gateway function can be used.
CONNECTION
MODBUS®/TCP Connection
*3 For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only.
When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet.
Selection of connection type
Write Check Write down the name of connection type to be used.
Sheet
21.5
Multi-channel Function
Check Sheet
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) GT16
ROBOT
• Install communication units on the extension interfaces.
• Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface, the RS422/485
interface, and/or the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.
18
Extension interface 1
CNC CONNECTION
Extension interface 2
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
1st stage
Standard interface 1
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT) 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Allows a controller to be connected via the serial
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
communication.
For RS-232 communications, connect RS-232 cable.
For RS-422 communications, attach an RS-422
GT11, GT10
conversion unit and connect RS-422 cable to it.
(For the GT1655, the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.)
(Example: In the case of the GT1685)
Standard interface 2
(USB interface built in the GOT)
21
Not used for the multi-channel function.
MULTI-CHANNEL
Standard interface 4
FUNCTION
(Ethernet interface built in the GOT)
Allows controllers to be connected via Ethernet.
Up to four channels can be set.
Standard interface 3 22
(RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)
FA TRANSPARENT
Allows a controller to be connected via the serial
communication.
FUNCTION
Extension interface 1
Extension interface 2
1st stage
Standard interface 1
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)
Standard interface 2
(USB interface built in the GOT)
Not used for the multi-channel function.
Selected connection type Reference for required interface and communication unit
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
• Bus connection This section ■ GOT interface used for bus connection
ROBOT
• MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
CNC CONNECTION
• CC-Link IE Field Network connection
This section ■ GOT interface used for network connection
• CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
• CNC connection
(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network),
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station))
• Ethernet connection
19
• Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)
GOT MULTI-DROP
• MODBUS®/TCP connection
This section ■ GOT interface used for Ethernet connection
CONNECTION
• Robot controller connection
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
• CC-Link connection (via G4)
GT11, GT10
• Third party safety controller connection
MULTI-CHANNEL
• GOT Multi- Drop Connection
FUNCTION
• MODBUS®/RTU connection
• Inverter connection
FA TRANSPARENT
• Other functions This section ■ Interfaces and option units used for other functions
FUNCTION
POINT
Number of units that can be installed to a GOT
The number of units that can be installed to extension interfaces differs depending on the GOT type.
GOT Number of units that can be installed
GT12 -
POINT
(1) Bus connection units to be used
GT15-QBUS(2) and GT15-ABUS(2) can be used independent of the number of serial connection channels.
When using the multi-channel function for the first time, it is recommended to use GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-
ABUS(2).
(2) Restrictions by bus connection unit installation
For the following functions, use the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2), regardless of the number of channels
used for the serial connection.
With the GT15-75QBUS(2)L or GT15-75ABUS(2)L, the following functions are not available.
Function
*1 Since the GT16 has the Ethernet interface, the function is available regardless of the bus connection unit to be used.
POINT
When using GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, or GT15-75J61BT13-Z
(1) GT16
The GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, and GT15-75J61BT13-Z are not applicable.
(2) GT15
No unit can be mounted on the GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, or GT15-75J61BT13-Z. (For the
GT155 , the GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z, and GT15-75J61BT13-Z are not applicable)
Therefore, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is used for the serial connection.
Because of this, the functions using the RS-232 interface, including the barcode function, are not available.
The gateway function, the printer output, and others are also not available since no unit can be mounted on
the above models.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) GT16
ROBOT
Interface Name
CNC CONNECTION
(2) GT15
Interface Model
(3) GT14
19
Interface Name
GOT MULTI-DROP
Interface built in GOT Ethernet interface*1
CONNECTION
*1 Up to two channels can be used.
(4) GT12
Interface Name
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
POINT
GT11, GT10
When using Ethernet download, gateway function, or MES interface function
(1) GT16
The Ethernet download, the gateway function, and the MES interface function are available using the Ethernet 21
interface built in the GOT (one channel).
(2) GT15
MULTI-CHANNEL
For using Ethernet download, the gateway function and MES interface function, only one Ethernet
FUNCTION
communication unit is required.
(3) GT14
The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT
(one channel). 22
(4) GT12
FA TRANSPARENT
The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT
(one channel).
FUNCTION
Interface Name/model
Interface Name/model
(3) GT14
Interface Name/model
(4) GT12
Interface Name/model
Function Reference
Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), Hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer),
Operation panel function, External I/O function, (1) (a)
Sound output function
Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit (1) (c)
Refer to the explanation below to check if the number of channels for the multi-channel function to be used is
restricted or not. If it is restricted, review the system configuration.
(1) Number of stages taken up by the individual functions (number of slots)
(a) Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge
compatible printer), operation panel function, external I/O function and sound output function
The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit is required depending on the
function to be used.
Each unit uses one stage (one slot) of an extension interface.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
A video input unit, an RGB input unit, a video/RGB input unit, an RGB output unit or a
ROBOT
multimedia unit is required corresponding to the function to be used.
Each type of unit uses 1 stage (2 slots) of extension interface.
Only one piece of each type of unit can be installed on a GOT. 18
CNC CONNECTION
(c) Functions with CF card unit or CF card extension unit
19
The CF card unit or CF card extension unit is required.
The CF card unit or CF card extension unit uses one stage
GOT MULTI-DROP
(one slot) of an extension interface.
CONNECTION
(d) Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, gateway and MES interface functions 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
• GT16
Use the interface built in the GOT.
The Ethernet communication unit is not applicable.
GT11, GT10
• GT15
An Ethernet communication unit is required.
An Ethernet communication unit uses 1 stage (1 slot) of extension interface.
If the GOT is already connected in the Ethernet connection, the Ethernet
21
communication unit installed in the GOT is used.
MULTI-CHANNEL
(e) Fingerprint authentication, barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation (serial),
FUNCTION
report function (when using a serial printer) and hard copy function (when using a serial printer)
22
Use the interface built in the GOT or a serial communication unit.
FA TRANSPARENT
A serial communication unit uses 1 stage (1 slot) of extension interface.
FUNCTION
POINT
Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position)
For details on the precautions for installing units on another unit, refer to the following.
1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position)
For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you
are using.
For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used.
Example 1) To add the printer output (when using a PictBridge compatible printer) and the Ethernet download in
a system using the bus connection (1 channel), serial connection (3 channels), and the barcode
function
(a) For GT16
Mount the printer unit at the third stage, and use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT. This enables both
the printer output of the report function and the Ethernet download.
Printer unit
Serial communication
unit
Serial communication Serial communication
unit unit
Bus connection unit
Barcode reader
Printer unit
Ethernet communication
unit
Serial communication
unit
Serial communication Serial communication
unit unit
Barcode reader
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Serial communication Serial communication
unit unit
ROBOT
Bus connection unit
CNC CONNECTION
Barcode reader
Since there are no available areas left for installing a unit, serial connection can be used for up to 2
channels.
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Write Check
Sheet
1. Write down the name of communication unit to be used for each of the
ROBOT
21.5 connection type.
Multi-channel Function
Check Sheet
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. 21
When GT15-QBUS2/ABUS2 is used, although GT15-RS2-9P is installed physically at the
MULTI-CHANNEL
2nd stage of extend interface 2, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
Therefore, in the check sheet, the position should be entered as 1st stage.
FUNCTION
2. After writing down the names of communication units, write down CH
No. to be assigned to respective units based on the entry in ■ Check
Sheet No. 1 (selection of connection type and interface). 22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Extend interface 1
ROBOT
Extend interface 2
3rd stage 18
CNC CONNECTION
2nd stage
1st stage
19
RS-232 interface
GOT MULTI-DROP
built in a GOT
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer3 referring to the check sheet
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
where the necessary information has been written.
The positions that the settings should be made on the communication settings screen are
Check
GT11, GT10
specified on the check sheet by numbers (GT16: (1) to (9), GT15: (1) to (7)).
21.5
Multi-channel Function
Check Sheet
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
1
2
3
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P)
ROBOT
FXCPU direction CPU connection
MELSECNET/H communication unit
(GT15-J71LP23-25) 18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
beforehand when using the multi-channel function.
ROBOT
Device settings
It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual 18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
Click the device setting button. Click the controller to be set. Set the device.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
The accessible range for monitoring is not changed even when the multi-channel function is used.
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
FXCPU
22
Accessible range
is not changed.
FXCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
10:10
10:10
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi PLC
M
TS
IUBISHI
CH No. 2
C
H
ARGE
Servo amplifier
10:10
CH No. 3
Broadcast is OMRON PLC
executed for
CH No. 1 and CH No. 4
CH No. 3. Temperature controller
FA transparent function
Set the controller for which the FA transparent function should be executed by the CH No.
22.5.1 Setting communication interface
The set CH No. can be changed by the Utility.
To execute the FA transparent function for other CH No., change the CH No. using the Utility.
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi PLC
M
TS
IUBISHI
CH No. 2
C
H
ARGE
Servo amplifier
CH No. 3
OMRON PLC
CH No. 4
FA transparent function is Temperature controller
executed for CH No. 1.
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi PLC
MITSUBISH I
CH No. 2
CHA RGE Servo amplifier
CH No. 3
OMRON PLC
CH No. 4
Station No. switching is Temperature controller
executed for CH No. 1.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
21.4.1 Precautions for hardware
ROBOT
To use the multi-channel function, an option function board is required according to the GOT.
The following shows required option function boards according to the GOT.
18
GOT Option function board
CNC CONNECTION
GT16 Not necessary
GOT MULTI-DROP
21.4.2 Precautions for use
CONNECTION
Occurrence of the same system alarm at different channels
When the advanced system alarm is used, if the system alarms with the same error code occur in different channels
the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm.
Therefore, if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one, the time of later system alarm occurrence
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
is not reflected to the GOT.
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Confirmation of the channel No. at which a system alarm occurred
GT11, GT10
When a system alarm occurred, confirm the channel No. where the alarm occurred, using the procedure indicated
below.
(1) Check by [System alarm display] of the utility.
21
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
GT15 User's Manual
MULTI-CHANNEL
GT14 User's Manual
FUNCTION
(2) Monitor the internal devices of the GOT.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Sections 21.3.3 to 21.3.5 contain explanations of the items to be checked on the check sheet.
Checking items explained in these sections using the check sheet on the following page allows you to complete the
setting for the multi-channel function.
Enter the selections having been made in the steps above to the check sheet.
Shows items and
Selection of connection type contents to be written on
Write Check
Enter the name of connection type to be used. the check sheet.
Sheet
Also describes an
Section 2.8.10 example of the check
Multi-channel function sheet.
check sheet
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
controller (No.1 to No.4)
ROBOT
CH Selection of connection type Selection of interface (communication unit)
No.
( 21.3.3) ( 21.3.4)
Connection name
18
1
CNC CONNECTION
Connection name
2
Connection name
3
Connection name
4
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
(2) Channel No. of fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer, serial printer
CONNECTION
(No.5 to No.8)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
5
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Connection name
6
GT11, GT10
Connection name
7
8
Connection name
RS-232 interface built in a GOT 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
(1) GT16
Standard interface 3
(only one connection)
Connecting a controller
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
Standard interface 1 (only one connection)
Connecting a controller
(8)
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
(7)
(7)
8
Connecting a personal computer
(8)
(9) 9 Host (PC)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2
3rd stage
ROBOT
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 3rd stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
(1)
(4)
2nd stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 2nd stage
18
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
CNC CONNECTION
(2)
(5)
1st stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 1st stage
(3) Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
(6)
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
Standard interface 1 (only one connection)
Connecting a controller
20
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
(7)
(7)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, or
personal computer
GT11, GT10
(3)
Connecting a personal computer
(2)
(1) 9 Host (PC)
21
(6)
(5)
MULTI-CHANNEL
(4)
FUNCTION
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. 22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
22.
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
22.1 FA Transparent Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2
22.2 Compatible Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 - 11
22.4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 26
GT11, GT10
22.5 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 36
22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 39 21
22.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 67
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
22 - 1
22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
POINT
(1) The range accessible by software when FA transparent function is used
Use of the FA transparent function does not affect the range accessible by the software.
For details on accessible range, refer to the manual for the respective software.
(2) The software settings when using FA transparent function
For the software settings, refer to the following when using FA transparent function.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
ROBOT
*9
MELSOFT Navigator
GX Developer*1
GX Works2*10 18
QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module PX Developer*4
CNC CONNECTION
GX Configurator*5-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT
GX Configurator-QP*7
MX Component*11, MX Sheet*12
*1
GX Developer
Q/QnA/ACPU,
GX Works2*11
motion controller CPU (A Series)
MX Component*11, MX Sheet*12 19
MELSOFT Navigator*9
GOT MULTI-DROP
MT Developer*2
SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P,
CONNECTION
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP,
SW6RN-SNETP (for user API)
MR Configurator*3
MT Works2*8, MX Component*16, MX Sheet*17
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2*6 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B)*15 MR Configurator*3, MR Configurator2*13
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
*15 *14
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) MR Configurator2
GT11, GT10
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the
GOT.
*2 MT Developer (SW6RNC-GSVE) Version 00N or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*3
*4
MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 21
PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or
Q06PHCPU to the GOT.
MULTI-CHANNEL
*5 Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent
function.
FUNCTION
GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D or later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later
GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Z or later
GX Configurator-TI : Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC : Version 1.21X or later
GX Configurator-AS : Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL : Version 1.21X or later
*6
GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later
RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
22
*7 GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
FA TRANSPARENT
*8 MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*9 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
FUNCTION
*10 GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*11 MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*12 Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet.
*13 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later.
*14 MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*15 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection.
*16 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*17 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
MELSOFT Navigator*4
GX Developer*1
ROBOT
GX Works2*5
QCPU (Q mode)
PX Developer*2
GX Configurator-QP*3 18
MX Component*9, MX Sheet*10
CNC CONNECTION
MELSOFT Navigator*8
GX Developer*6
LCPU GX Works2*7
GX LogViewer
MX Component*9, MX Sheet*10, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*11
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MX Component*12, MX Sheet*13
*1 GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 19
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the
GOT.
GOT MULTI-DROP
*2 PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*3 GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
CONNECTION
*4 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*5 GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*6 GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*7 GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*8 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*9
*10
MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. 20
*11 LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
*12 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
*13 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
GT11, GT10
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
MELSOFT Navigator*3
GX Developer*2 21
QCPU (Q mode)*1, C Controller module *4
GX Works2
MX Component*10, MX Sheet*11
MULTI-CHANNEL
*9
MELSOFT Navigator
FUNCTION
GX Developer*6
LCPU GX Works2*7
GX LogViewer
MX Component*10, MX Sheet*11, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*12
FXCPU GX Works2*16
22
GX Developer*2
FA TRANSPARENT
QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU*1
MX Component*10, MX Sheet*11
*3
MELSOFT Navigator
SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P, FUNCTION
Motion controller CPU (Q Series)
SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API)
MT Works2*5*8
Robot controller (CRnQ-700, CRnD-700) RT ToolBox2*13
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) *15 MR Configurator2
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) *15 MR Configurator2*14
*1 Only QCPU can be connected.To connect to QnA/ACPU, connect via QCPU.
*2 GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*3 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*4 GX Works2 Version 1.10L or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*5 MT Works2 Version 1.08J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*6 GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*7 GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*8 MT Works2 Version 1.12N or later is required to connect with Q17nDCPU-S1.
*9 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*10 MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*11 Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet.
*12 LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*13 RT ToolBox2 Version 1.7 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*14 MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*15 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection.
*16 GX Works2 Version 1.98C or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
MELSOFT Navigator*9
GX Developer*1
GX Works2*10
PX Developer*4
QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module
GX Configurator*5-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT
GX Configurator-QP*7
MX Component*12, MX Sheet*13
Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module*19
MELSOFT Navigator*9
MT Developer*2
SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P,
Motion controller CPU (Q Series)
SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API)
MR Configurator*3
MT Works2*8, MX Component*17, MX Sheet*18
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B)*16 MR Configurator2*15
*1 GX Developer Version 8.22Y or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the
GOT.
*2 MT Developer (SW6RNC-GSVE) Version 00N or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*3 MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*4 PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or
Q06PHCPU to the GOT.
*5 Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent
function.
GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D pr later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later
GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Zor later
GX Configurator-TI : Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC : Version 1.21X or later
GX Configurator-AS : Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL : Version 1.21X or later
GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later
*6 RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*7 GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*8 MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*9 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*10 GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*11 NC Configurator Version A0 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*12 MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*13 Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet.
*14 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later.
*15 MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*16 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection.
*17 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*18 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
*19 Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
MELSOFT Navigator*11
GX Developer*1
ROBOT
GX Works2*12
QCPU (Q mode) PX Developer*5
GX Configurator*6-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT
GX Configurator-QP*9
18
*17 *18
MX Component , MX Sheet
CNC CONNECTION
MELSOFT Navigator*16
GX Developer*13
LCPU*15 GX Works2*14
GX Logviewer
MX Component*17, MX Sheet*18, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*21
QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU, GX Developer*1
motion controller CPU (A Series) MX Component*17, MX Sheet*18 19
MELSOFT Navigator*11
GOT MULTI-DROP
GX Developer*1
GX Works2*12
CONNECTION
FXCPU
FX Configurator-FP*7
FX Configurator-EN *20
MX Component*17, MX Sheet*18
MELSOFT Navigator*11
MT Developer*2
SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P,
20
Motion controller CPU (Q Series)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API)
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
MR Configurator*3
MT Works2*10, MX Component*24, MX Sheet*25
FREQROL A700/F700/E700/D700 Series *4
FR Configurator
GT11, GT10
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2*8
*23
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) MR Configurator*3, MR Configurator2*19
21
*23 *22
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) MR Configurator2
*1 GX Developer Version 8.22Y or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the
GOT.
MULTI-CHANNEL
*2 MT Developer (SW6RNC-GSVE) Version 00N or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*3 MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
FUNCTION
*4 FR Configurator(FR-SW2-SETUP-WJ) Ver.1.02 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the A700/
F700 series to the GOT.
FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.2.00 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the E700
series to the GOT.
FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.3.10 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the F700
series to the GOT. 22
*5 PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or
FA TRANSPARENT
Q06PHCPU to the GOT.
*6 Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent
function.
GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D pr later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later FUNCTION
GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Zor later
GX Configurator-TI : Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC : Version 1.21X or later
GX Configurator-AS : Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL : Version 1.21X or later
GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later
*7 FX Configurator-FP Version 1.30 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*8 RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*9 GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*10 MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*11 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*12 GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*13 GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*14 GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*15 The adapter (L6ADP-R2) is required.
*16 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*17 MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*18 Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet.
*19 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later.
*20 FX Configurator-EN Version 1.10A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*21 LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*22 MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*23 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection.
*24 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*25 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
ROBOT
GX Works2 *1, MX Component *2, MX Sheet*3, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller
QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module
module*8
Motion controller CPU (Q series) MT Works2*4 18
*5 *6
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) MR Configurator2
CNC CONNECTION
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) *5 MR Configurator2*7
GOT MULTI-DROP
(2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection
CONNECTION
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 *1, MX Component *3, MX Sheet*4
LCPU*2 GX Works2 *1, MX Component *3, MX Sheet*4
FXCPU GX Works2*5 20
Motion controller CPU (Q series) *6
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MT Works2
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B)*9 MR Configurator2*7
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B)*9 MR Configurator2*8
GT11, GT10
*1 GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*2 The adapter (L6ADP-R2) is required.
*3 MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*4 MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
*5
*6
GX Works2 Version 1.73B or later is required for GX Works2 to use the FA transparent function.
MT Works2 Version 1.25B or later is required for MT Works2 to use the FA transparent function.
21
*7 MR Configurator2 Version 1.07H or later is required for MR Configurator2 to use the FA transparent function.
*8 MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
MULTI-CHANNEL
*9 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection.
FUNCTION
(3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
22
QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 *1, MX Component *2, MX Sheet*3
*2 *1 *2
LCPU GX Works2 , MX Component , MX Sheet*3
FA TRANSPARENT
*1 GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*2 MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*3 MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
FUNCTION
Connecting the GOT and personal computer with Modem
(1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
GX Developer*1
QCPU (Q mode)
GX Works2 *2
(2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
GX Developer*1
QCPU (Q mode)
GX Works2 *2
FXCPU GX Developer*1
GX Developer*1
QCPU (Q mode)
GX Works2 *2
GX Developer*1
QCPU (Q mode)
GX Works2 *2
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following models support FA transparent function.
When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB
ROBOT
Connection type
Bus
connection
Direct CPU connection Computer link connection
Ethernet
connection
18
CNC CONNECTION
Series Model name Target software
*2
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU 19
Q01CPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
Q02CPU
CONNECTION
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Q12PHCPU
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
GT11, GT10
Q25PRHCPU (Main base)
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
21
Q00UJCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
Q00UCPU GX Developer
Q01UCPU GX Works2
FUNCTION
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU GX Configurator
(Q mode) PX Developer
Q03UDCPU
MX Component
Q04UDHCPU MX Sheet
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
22
Q13UDHCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
FUNCTION
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
*1 *1 *1
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
*3
GX Developer
Q12DCCPU-V
GX Works2 *2 *1 *1 *1 *2
MX Component
C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V
MX Sheet
module
Setting/Monitoring
Q24DHCCPU-V tool for C Controller *2
module*5
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU -
L02CPU GX Developer
L26CPU GX Works2
L26CPU-BT MX Component
MELSEC-L
L02CPU-P MX Sheet
L26CPU-PBT LCPU Logging
L02SCPU Configuration Tool
Q02CPU-A GX Developer
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A MX Component
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A MX Sheet
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1 GX Developer
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU MX Component
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU MX Sheet
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
GX Developer
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
MX Component
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
MX Sheet
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21 GX Developer
MELSEC-A *4
A3ACPUR21 MX Component
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU MX Sheet
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q12DCCPU-V1 and Q24DHCCPU-V have no direct coupled I/F.
*2 When using Q12DCCPU-V1 or Q24DHCCPU-V as the connected CPU, only MX Component can be used.
When accessing other CPUs relaying Q12DCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-V, GX Developer or GX Works2 can also be used.
*3 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
*4 Do not execute the write during RUN in the bus connection.
*5 When the GOT and the personal computer are connected in the serial connection, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module
is unavailable.
(Continued to next page)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Series Model name Target software
ROBOT
*3
18
A2USCPU
CNC CONNECTION
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
MELSEC-A
A1SHCPU
GX Developer 19
A2SCPU*1 MX Component
(AnSCPU)
MX Sheet
GOT MULTI-DROP
A2SCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
A0J2HCPU
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
A0J2HCPUP21 GX Developer
MX Component *4
A0J2HCPUR21 MX Sheet
GT11, GT10
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
21
GX Developer
A2CCPUC24 MX Component
MULTI-CHANNEL
MX Sheet
A2CCPUC24-PRF
FUNCTION
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
MT Developer
22
Q172CPUN
FA TRANSPARENT
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU MT Developer
FUNCTION
*1 *1 *1
Q173HCPU MR Configurator
Motion Q172DCPU
controller CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
MT Works2 *2 *2 *2
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
MT Works2
Q170MCPU GX Developer
GX Works2
Bus Ethernet
Direct CPU connection Computer link connection
connection connection
*1
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion A171SCPU-S3 GX Developer
controller CPU MX Component *2
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
GX Developer
FX Configurator-FP
FX3G MX Component
MX Sheet
GX Works2
GX Developer
FX Configurator-FP
FX3GC MX Component
MX Sheet
MELSEC-FX
GX Works2
GX Developer
FX Configurator-FP
FX Configurator-EN
FX3U MX Component
MX Sheet
GX Works2
GX Developer
FX Configurator-FP
FX Configurator-EN
FX3UC MX Component
MX Sheet
GX Works2
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Series Model name Target software
ROBOT
*4
18
QJ72LP25-25
CNC CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G -
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 -
head module
CC-Link IE 19
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB GX Works2
GOT MULTI-DROP
Ethernet adapter
module
CONNECTION
CNC C70 GX Developer *1 *1 *2
CNC (Q173NCCPU) NC Configurator
Robot
CRnQ-700
(Q172DRCPU) RT ToolBox2
*3 *3 20
controller
CONNECTION FUNCTION
CRnD-700
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L
GT11, GT10
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL
FREQROL-S500/S500E 21
FREQROL-F500J FR Configurator
MULTI-CHANNEL
FREQROL-D700
FREQROL-E700
FUNCTION
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
FA TRANSPARENT
MR-J2S- CP
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A - FUNCTION
MR-J2M- DU
MR-J3- A
MELSERVO
MR-J3- T
MR Configurator
MR-J3- B
MR Configurator2
MR-J4- A -
MR-J4- B
MR-J4W2- B MR Configurator2
MR-J4W3- B
*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q173NCCPU has no direct coupled I/F.
*2 Connect to the DISPLAY I/F of Q173NCCPU.
GX Developer accesses the PLC CPU which configures the multiple CPU system.
*3 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since CRnQ-700 has no direct coupled I/F.
*4 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
*2 *2
Series Model name Target software
*2
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
*3
*3 *3
Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
Q25PRHCPU (Main base)
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
GX Works2
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU MX Component
(Q mode)
Q03UDCPU MX Sheet
Q04UDHCPU *3
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU *3 *3
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
*1 *1*3
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Series Model name Target software
ROBOT
*1
18
Q12DCCPU-V
CNC CONNECTION
-
Q24DHCCPU-V
C controller
module Setting/Monitoring
Q24DHCCPU-V tool for C *2
Controller module
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU -
L02CPU 19
L26CPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
L26CPU-BT GX Works2
CONNECTION
MELSEC-L MX Component *2 *2
L02CPU-P MX Sheet
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
MELSEC-Q
Q02CPU-A
20
Q02HCPU-A -
CONNECTION FUNCTION
(A mode)
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
GT11, GT10
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
21
Q2ASCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
-
(QnASCPU)
FUNCTION
Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1 22
A3UCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21 FUNCTION
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-A
A2ACPUP21-S1 -
(AnCPU)
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
Bus Ethernet
Direct CPU connection Computer link connection
connection connection
*1
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
MELSEC-A A2NCPUP21-S1
-
(AnCPU) A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
-
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
Motion Q172CPUN
controller CPU -
(Q Series) Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Series Model name Target software
ROBOT
*1
18
Q172DCPU
CNC CONNECTION
Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU-S1
MT Works2 *2 *3 *2*3
Motion Q173DCPU-S1
controller CPU
Q172DSCPU
(Q Series)
Q173DSCPU
19
MT Works2
Q170MCPU GX Developer *2 *2
GOT MULTI-DROP
GX Works2
CONNECTION
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
20
A373UCPU-S3
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
A171SCPU
Motion A171SCPU-S3
controller CPU -
GT11, GT10
(A Series) A171SCPU-S3N
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU 21
A172SHCPUN
MULTI-CHANNEL
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
FUNCTION
FX0
FX0S
FX0N
22
FX1
FA TRANSPARENT
FX2
FX2C
FX1S FUNCTION
FX2N
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U
FX3UC
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1
Bus Ethernet
Direct CPU connection Computer link connection
connection connection
*1
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G -
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 -
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70
CNC (Q173NCCPU) -
MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ-700
Robot controller (Q172DRCPU) -
CRnD-700
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL
FREQROL-F500J -
FREQROL-D700
FREQROL-E700
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
MR-J2S- A
MR-J2S- CP
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A -
MR-J2M- DU
MR-J3- A
MELSERVO
MR-J3- T
MR-J4- A -
MR-J4- B*3*4
MR-J4W2- B*3*4 MR Configurator2 *2 *2
*3*4
MR-J4W3- B
*1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
*2 GT11 is not supported.
*3 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection.
*4 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Bus Ethernet
Direct CPU connection Computer link connection
connection connection
ROBOT
Series Model name Target software
*2 18
CNC CONNECTION
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
19
Q06HCPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
Q12HCPU
CONNECTION
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
20
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Q25PRHCPU (Main base)
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
GT11, GT10
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
21
Q01UCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU GX Developer
(Q mode) GX Works2
Q03UDCPU
FUNCTION
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
22
Q20UDHCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
FUNCTION
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
*1 *1 *1
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
*1
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V
-
module Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU -
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
MELSEC-L -
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
-
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Series Model name Target software
ROBOT
*1
18
CNC CONNECTION
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
19
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU*1
GOT MULTI-DROP
-
(AnSCPU)
CONNECTION
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
GT11, GT10
A0J2HCPUP21
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
21
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 -
MULTI-CHANNEL
A2CCPUR21
FUNCTION
A2CCPUC24
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
22
FA TRANSPARENT
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
Q172CPUN FUNCTION
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
controller CPU Q172DCPU -
(Q Series)
Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU
Bus Ethernet
Direct CPU connection Computer link connection
connection connection
*1
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion A171SCPU-S3
controller CPU -
(A Series) A171SCPU-S3N
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
FX0
FX0S
FX0N
FX1
FX2
FX2C
FX1S
FX2N
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U
FX3UC
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Series Model name Target software
ROBOT
*1
18
CNC CONNECTION
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G -
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 -
head module
19
CNC C70
(Q173NCCPU)
GOT MULTI-DROP
CNC -
CONNECTION
MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ-700
Robot (Q172DRCPU) -
controller
CRnD-700
FREQROL-A500/A500L 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
FREQROL-F500/F500L
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
GT11, GT10
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL
FREQROL-F500J -
FREQROL-D700 21
FREQROL-E700
MULTI-CHANNEL
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
FUNCTION
MELIPM MD-CX522- K(-A0)
MR-J2S- A
MR-J2S- CP 22
MR-J2S- CL
FA TRANSPARENT
MR-J2M-P8A
-
MR-J2M- DU FUNCTION
MELSERVO MR-J3- A
MR-J3- T
MR-J3- B
MR-J4- A -
MR-J4- B
MR-J4W2- B -
MR-J4W3- B
*1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB
PLC GOT PC
Connection type
dependant
Varies according to
the connection type.
Personal
PLC GOT Connection cable Number of
computer
connectable
RS-232/USB Max. equipment
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software
conversion adaptor distance
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION*5
*1 Applicable to the QCPU only
*2 GT10, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool are not applicable to the bus connection.
*3 GT11 and GT10 are not applicable to the Ethernet connection.
*4 The use of RS-232/USB conversion adaptor requires an installation of the dedicated communication driver onto personal
computer.
For details, refer to the following manual.
RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor User's Manual
*5 GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool and Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module
are not supported.
*6 Not applicable to Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
PLC GOT PC
ROBOT
Connection type
dependant
Connection cable
18
CNC CONNECTION
Varies according to
the connection type.
GOT MULTI-DROP
between - (Built into GOT) Twisted pair cable
the GOT and PLC, refer to
CONNECTION
• 10BASE-T
the following. Shielded twisted pair cable
GX Works2
(STP) or unshielded
Setting/ 1 personal
BUS twisted pair cable (UTP):
100m Monitoring tool computer
CONNECTION*4 Category 3, 4, and 5
for C Controller for 1 GOT
DIRECT
GT15-J71E71-100 • 100BASE-TX
Shielded twisted pair cable
module 20
*6
CONNECTION FUNCTION
CONNECTION TO CPU (STP):
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
COMPUTER LINK Category 5 and 5e
CONNECTION*6
GT11, GT10
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.
A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module. 21
*2 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
MULTI-CHANNEL
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
FUNCTION
GT16 User's Manual
*3 A length between a hub and a node.
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used.
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) 22
When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
FA TRANSPARENT
cascades.
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
*4 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection.
*5 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. FUNCTION
*6 Not applicable to Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module.
Connection type
dependant
Personal Number of
PLC GOT Connection cable
Adapter cable Modem Phone line computer*3 connectable
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment
BUS
1 personal
CONNECTION*2 GX Developer
*1 Public line computer
GX Works2
DIRECT for 1 GOT
CONNECTION TO CPU GT10-C02H-6PT9P
RS-232 *1
COMPUTER LINK (0.2m)
CONNECTION*1
ETHERNET
CONNECTION*4
*1 For connectable modems, system equipment and connection cables, refer to the following Technical News.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
PLC GOT PC
Connection type
dependant
Varies according to
19
the connection type.
GOT MULTI-DROP
Personal
CONNECTION
PLC GOT Connection cable Number of
computer
connectable
Max.
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment
distance
For the system configuration
between the GOT and PLC, refer
to the following. RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
BUS CONNECTION PX Developer 1 personal
GX Configurator computer for 1 GOT
DIRECT CONNECTION
GT11, GT10
TO CPU GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
USB 3m
GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB
QCPU +
Motion controller CPU GOT PC
(Q series)
Connection cable Communication driver
Connection type
dependant
Varies according to
the connection type.
Personal
PLC GOT Connection cable Number of
computer
connectable
RS-232/USB Max.
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment
conversion adaptor distance
BUS CONNECTION*1
- GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 1 personal
DIRECT CONNECTION MT Developer
RS-232 GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) 3m computer
TO CPU GT10-RS2TUSB-5S *3 MT Works2
GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) for 1 GOT
ETHERNET
CONNECTION*2
GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
USB -
GOT MULTI-DROP GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
CONNECTION*4
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
PLC GOT PC
ROBOT
Connection type
dependant
Connection cable
18
CNC CONNECTION
Varies according to
the connection type.
GOT MULTI-DROP
between - (Built into GOT) • 10BASE-T
Shielded twisted pair cable
CONNECTION
the GOT and PLC, refer to
the following. (STP) or unshielded
1 personal
twisted pair cable (UTP):
100m MT Works2 computer
Category 3, 4, and 5
BUS for 1 GOT
GT15-J71E71-100 • 100BASE-TX
CONNECTION*4
DIRECT
Shielded twisted pair cable
(STP): 20
CONNECTION TO CPU
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Category 5 and 5e
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
GT11, GT10
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.
A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module.
*2 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
21
GT16 User's Manual
MULTI-CHANNEL
*3 A length between a hub and a node.
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
FUNCTION
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used.
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m)
When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
cascades.
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. 22
*4 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection.
FA TRANSPARENT
*5 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
FUNCTION
Communication driver
Connection type
dependant
When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB
Servo Servo QCPU +
Motion controller GOT PC
amplifier amplifier
CPU (Q series)
Connection cable Communication driver
Connection type
dependant
Varies according to
the connection type.
SSCNET , SSCNET /H
Personal
PLC GOT Connection cable Number of
computer
connectable
Max. equipment
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software
distance
For the system configuration between
the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Servo Servo QCPU +
Motion controller GOT PC
amplifier amplifier
ROBOT
CPU (Q series)
Connection cable
18
CNC CONNECTION
Varies according to
the connection type.
, SSCNET /H
Software
connectable
equipment
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
For the system configuration *2 *5 Twisted pair cable
between - (Built into GOT) • 10BASE-T
CONNECTION
the GOT and PLC, refer to Shielded twisted pair cable
the following. (STP) or unshielded
1 personal
twisted pair cable (UTP): MR
100m computer
Category 3, 4, and 5 Configurator2
BUS for 1 GOT
CONNECTION*4
GT15-J71E71-100 • 100BASE-TX
Shielded twisted pair cable 20
DIRECT (STP):
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
CONNECTION TO CPU Category 5 and 5e
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
GT11, GT10
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.
A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module.
*2 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
21
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
MULTI-CHANNEL
GT16 User's Manual
*3 A length between a hub and a node.
FUNCTION
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used.
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m)
When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
cascades.
22
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
FA TRANSPARENT
*4 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection.
*5 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
FUNCTION
Communication driver
FREQROL 500/700
Connection cable
Varies according to
the connection type.
Personal
Inverter GOT Connection cable Number of
computer
connectable
Max.
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment
distance
PLC GOT PC
Communication driver
Connection cable
MELSEC-FX
*1 The use of RS-232/USB conversion adaptor requires an installation of the dedicated communication driver onto personal
computer.
RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor User's Manual
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CRnQ-700 GOT PC
CNC CONNECTION
Communication driver
Connection cable
Connection type
dependant
Personal
19
PLC GOT Connection cable Number of
computer
GOT MULTI-DROP
connectable
Max.
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment
CONNECTION
distance
For the system configuration
between the GOT and PLC, RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m
refer to the following.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
DIRECT GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
USB 3m
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
CONNECTION TO CPU*1 GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
ETHERNET
CONNECTION
GT11, GT10
*1 CRnD-700 is not applicable to the bus connection, the direct CPU connection.
22.4.8 NC Configurator 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
Q173NCCPU GOT PC 22
Communication driver
FA TRANSPARENT
Connection cable
Connection type
FUNCTION
dependant
Personal
PLC GOT Connection cable Number of
computer
connectable
Max.
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment
distance
For the system configuration
between the GOT and PLC, refer
to the following.
GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) 1 personal
USB 3m NC Configurator
BUS CONNECTION GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) computer for 1 GOT
ETHERNET
CONNECTION*1
*1 GT11 is not applicable to the Ethernet connection.
3.
4.
POINT
The settings of connecting equipment can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
For details, refer to the following.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
IP Label Set the IP Label of detail setting. -
Set the number of retries to be
Set the subnet mask for the sub performed when a communication
ROBOT
Retry 1time
network. (Only for connection via timeout occurs.
router) 0.0.0.0 to (Default: 1time)
Subnet Mask*1
If the sub network is not used, 255.255.255.255
Set the time period for a
the default value is set.
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Timeout Time communication to time out.
(Default: 5sec)
5sec
18
Set the router address of the
CNC CONNECTION
Set the AT command to initialize the
default gateway where the GOT Up to 255 one-byte
Default 0.0.0.0 to Initialization modem.
is connected. (Only for alphanumeric
Gateway*1 255.255.255.255 Command*1 (Default:
connection via router) characters
AT&FE0%C0&K0&D0W2S0=1)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
*1 The maximum number of characters of the AT command
1024 to 5010,
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for differs according to the specification of the modem. When
5014 to 65534
Download Port Ethernet download. the maximum number of characters of the AT command
(Except for 5011, 5012,
No.*1 (Default: 5014) which can be used in the modem is less than 255, set the
5013, 49153)
*1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT
initialization command according to the specification of the
modem. 19
IP Address Setting] screen.
3. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
POINT
POINT
Setting the FA transparent function of GX Works2
When connecting the GOT and the personal computer (1) Communication interface setting by Utility
in Ethernet connection, set the GOT IP address and
the Ethernet download port No. to the same as the
The communication interface setting can be 20
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
CONNECTION FUNCTION
contents of PLC side I/F detailed setting of GOT. after downloading [Communication Settings] of
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 project data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
GT11, GT10
manual.
(c) Host (modem) setting
GT User's Manual
When communicating the GOT via modem, set the
(2) Precedence in communication settings
interface of the GOT to be used in the
communication with the modem.
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the 21
Utility, the latest setting is effective.
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
2. 3. 4.
Click!
POINT
Transparent setting on the utility screen
Transparent setting can be performed by the GOT.
For details of the operating, refer to the following.
GT User's Manual
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX
Developer, PX Developer,
ROBOT
(For bus connection)
GX Configurator
The setting method for the FA transparent function of GX
Developer is used as an example. 18
GX Configurator is an add-on software of GX Developer.
CNC CONNECTION
(Except for GX Configurator-QP)
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
6. Double-click [PLC module] of the PLC side I/F to
20
display [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module].
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
7. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F
Detailed setting of PLC module].
GT11, GT10
Bus connection
[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]
1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. *1
2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.
Direct CPU connection 21
[via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode]
3. Set the [Transfer Setup]:
MULTI-CHANNEL
PC side I/F : Serial USB (COM) *1 This is operation required in the case of using GX Developer
PLC side I/F : PLC module of which version is 8.22Y and above.
FUNCTION
Other station : No specification
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(when connecting to QCPU (Q mode))
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
6. Double-click [PLC module] of the PLC side I/F to
GOT MULTI-DROP
display [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module].
CONNECTION
1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. 7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module],
mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode]
2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. checkbox and click [Set].
CONNECTION FUNCTION
PLC side I/F : PLC module
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Other station : No specification
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
4. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC 8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent
side I/F Serial setting]. setting] is displayed.
FUNCTION
Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet
5. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F
module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.
Serial setting].
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial 9. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [Type name].
Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the Q173NCCPU, set [QJ71E71].
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB
Mark the [USB] checkbox.
10. Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station
No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet
module.
When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [Type name], the setting
is not required.
POINT
How to operate GX Developer
For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the
following manual.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
When connecting the GOT and personal
ROBOT
computer with serial or USB
(1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or
direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU
18
(Q mode))
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display
[PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]
1. Click the Connection Destination view
Direct CPU connection
[Connection Destination] [(Connection target data
GT11, GT10
name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]
checkbox.
2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.
21
3. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]:
PC side I/F : Serial USB
MULTI-CHANNEL
PLC side I/F : GOT
FUNCTION
Other Station Setting : No Specification:
22
FA TRANSPARENT
8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display
CONNECTION
[PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
1. Click the Connection Destination view 7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark
[Connection Destination] [(Connection target data the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox
name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. and click [Setting...].
20
2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
3. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]:
PC side I/F : Serial USB
GT11, GT10
PLC side I/F : GOT
Other Station Setting : No Specification
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
5. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F 9. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [PLC Type].
Serial Setting].
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial
Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox.
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB
Mark the [USB] checkbox.
12.The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT
Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has
PLC Module/CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter OK
been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). Setup
Cancel
PLC Mode FXCPU
FX3U-ENET-ADP-0.0.0.0. Setting...
C24
Setup
Computer Type QJ71C24
Station No. 0
Parity Odd
Data Bit 8
Stop Bit 1
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
OK
PLC Type Cancel This section describes the settings of the GX Works2 in
FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U-ENET-ADP the following case of system configuration.
ROBOT
Ethernet Module
Module Side
POINT
IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Input Format DEC.
18
Version of GX Works2
CNC CONNECTION
GX Works2 Version 1.34L or later is required to
execute the FA transparent function with using
Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF-ETB).
<GOT>
19
(Use default value for settings other than the following.)
Network No. :3
PC No. :1
8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent
GOT MULTI-DROP
IP address :192.168.3.18
setting] is displayed. Port No. :5001
CONNECTION
Communication :UDP (fixed)
Here, set the [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet format
Module], which is connected via a GOT.
Ethernet
9. Set [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module] for [PLC
Type]. <Ethernet adapter module>
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Ethernet setting
10. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
IP address :192.168.3.30
CC-Link IE Field Network setting
IP address assigned to the [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or
Network No. :1
[Ethernet Module]. Station No. :1
GT11, GT10
CC-Link IE Field Network
21
HUB
MULTI-CHANNEL
<CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module>
FUNCTION
(Use default value for settings other than the following.)
Network Type : CC IE Field (Master station)
Network No. :1
11. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click PC No.
Total Stations
:0
:2
[Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been
connected to the FXCPU.
22
FA TRANSPARENT
<CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module>
(Use default value for settings other than the following.)
Network Type : CC IE Field (Local station) FUNCTION
Network No. :1
PC No. :2
2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. 7. Set the [CPU mode] to [LCPU].
4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display 8. On the[PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark
[PC side I/F Serial Setting]. the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox
and click [Setting...].
5. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F
Serial Setting].
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial
Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox.
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB
Mark the [USB] checkbox.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
9. [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed.
GOT MULTI-DROP
Here, set the Ethernet module, which is firstly
CONNECTION
connected via a GOT.
13. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.
10. Set [NZ2GF-ETB] for [PLC Type]. 14. Click [Other station (Single network)].
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
11. Set the same number to [IP address] as the number 15. Double-click [CC IE Field].
assigned to NZ2GF-ETB, and click [OK]. FUNCTION
In the system configuration example, the setting is as
follows.
[IP address]: 192 168 3 30
18.The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click 3. Set the [Transfer Setup]:
[Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been PC side I/F :Ethernet Board
connected to the QCPU (Q mode). PLC side I/F :GOT
Other Station Setting : No specification
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection
Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the
CONNECTION FUNCTION
[PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail 3. Set the [Transfer Setup]:
setting for PC and GOT connection]. PC side I/F : Ethernet Board
GT11, GT10
Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the PLC side I/F : GOT
Ethernet download setting. Other Station Setting : No specification
22.5.1 (b) Ethernet download setting 21
8. Check either of the followings in [Detail setting for
MULTI-CHANNEL
GOT and PLC connection].
FUNCTION
Bus connection
[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]
FA TRANSPARENT
checkbox.
FUNCTION
6. For [PC side I/F Serial Setting] and [PLC side I/F
Detailed Setting of GOT] of [Transfer Setup], refer to
the following.
22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following shows the procedure to set the FA
transparent function of GX Configurator-QP.
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
4. Set the [PLC side] in [Connection setup].
PLC type: Q series PLC type
Multi PLC specification: None/No.1 to 4 19
Direct CPU connection, mark the [via GOT
1.
GOT MULTI-DROP
Click [Connection setup] for [Online] on GX transparent mode] checkbox.
CONNECTION
Configurator-QP. Bus connection
2. The [Connection setup] is displayed. Interface: PLC
Type: Bus
3. Set the [PC side] in [Connection setup].
Direct CPU connection
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial
Interface: PLC
20
Interface: (RS-232C)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
COM setting: COM1 to COM10 Type: Direct coupled
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Transmission speed: 9.6kbps to 115.2kbps Computer link connection
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Interface: C24
GT11, GT10
Interface: USB
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
5. Set the [Module connecting I/O address] in
[Connection setup].
Specify the actual IP address of the module.
Bus connection
[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]
1. Click [Communication] [Communication Setting] in
MT Developer. Direct CPU connection
[via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
transparent function of MT Works2 with an example of
connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series).
ROBOT
When connecting the GOT and personal
computer with serial or USB
18
(1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or
CNC CONNECTION
direct CPU connection
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
6. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display 20
[CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
7. Check-mark either of the following in [CPU side I/F
Detailed Setting of GOT].
GT11, GT10
1. Click [Transfer setup] [Online]. Bus connection
Mark the [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] checkbox.
2. The [Transfer setup] is displayed. 21
Direct CPU connection
3. Set the [Transfer setup]: Mark the [via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode]
PC side I/F : Serial USB
MULTI-CHANNEL
checkbox.
CPU side I/F : GOT
Other Station Setting : No specification
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial 8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent
Setting] is displayed.
Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox.
Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.
Mark the [USB] checkbox. 9. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [Type name].
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GT15 and GT14 only)
No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet
(1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or
ROBOT
module.
direct CPU connection
When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [Type name], the setting
is not required. 18
11. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the
CNC CONNECTION
IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port
QCPU or Ethernet module.
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
12. The screen returns to [Transfer setup]. Click 1.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Click the Connection Destination view
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
[Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data
connected to the motion controller (Q mode). name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2.
GT11, GT10
2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.
MULTI-CHANNEL
Other Station Setting : No Specification:
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
This section explains the procedure to set the FA
ROBOT
transparent function of FX Configurator-FP with an
example of connecting to FXCPU.
18
CNC CONNECTION
2. Check-mark either of the following in [Communication
Port].
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial
Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. 19
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB
GOT MULTI-DROP
Mark the [USB] checkbox.
CONNECTION
3. Click the [GOT Transparent Communication].
1. Click [Connection setup] for [Online] on FX
4. Click the [OK]. Configurator-FP.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
2. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side].
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial
Mark the [RS-232 (FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-BD 22
Included)] checkbox.
5. Click [OFFLINE] to make it [ONLINE].
FA TRANSPARENT
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB
6. Click the [System Read], then check if GOT has been Mark the [USB(GOT Transparent)] checkbox.
connected to FREQROL A700/F700 series normally. FUNCTION
3. Click [Comm. Test].
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
transparent function of RT ToolBox2 with an example of
connecting to CRnQ-700.
ROBOT
Connecting the GOT and Controller in bus
connection or direct CPU connection (CRnQ-
700)
18
CNC CONNECTION
4. Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port]. 19
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial
GOT MULTI-DROP
Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox.
CONNECTION
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB
Mark the [USB] checkbox.
5. Click [Detail].
20
1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the
CONNECTION FUNCTION
project tree of RT ToolBox2.
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Click [Edit Project].
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
6. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F 22
setting of PLC module].
FA TRANSPARENT
Bus connection
[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]
FUNCTION
Direct CPU connection
[via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]
3. Click [Detail].
5. Click [Detail].
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
transparent function of NC Configurator. function of the MELSOFT Navigator.
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
1. Click [Online] [Batch Read] in MELSOFT
Navigator.
GOT MULTI-DROP
1. Click [File] [Open].
CONNECTION
2. The [Open] is displayed.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
21
3. Select the projects to be read from [Select Project],
and set the storage destination of the workspace in
MULTI-CHANNEL
[Save Workspace].
FUNCTION
4. Click [Execute] to read and display the specified
3. Select [NC] on the upper left of the screen, and set project.
the following:
NC series : C70 M or C70 L 22
Connect pattern : Set the pattern according to the
FA TRANSPARENT
connect pattern.
IP address : Set as necessary.
FUNCTION
4. By clicking [Open], data is read from CNC and
displayed.
The following shows the procedure to set the FA The following shows the procedure to set the FA
transparent function of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool . transparent function of Setting/Monitoring tool for C
Controller module with the C Controller module
(Q24DHCCPU-V) connected.
4. Set [PC side I/F Serial Setting] and [PLC side I/F
Detailed Setting of GOT] in [Transfer Setup]. For
details, refer to the following.
22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
5. Mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode]
ROBOT
checkbox on the [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of
GOT] screen.
18
CNC CONNECTION
6. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click
[Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool
for C Controller module has been connected to the
motion controller (Q mode).
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
6. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent
Setting] is displayed. 20
Here, set the C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
V), which is firstly connected via a GOT.
GT11, GT10
IP address assigned to the C Controller module
(Q24DHCCPU-V).
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
1. Click the Connection Destination view 8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click
[Connection Destination] [(Connection target [Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool
data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Setting/
Monitoring tool for C Controller module.
for C Controller module has been connected to the 22
C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V).
FA TRANSPARENT
2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.
FUNCTION
3. Set the [Transfer Setup]:
PLC side I/F : GOT
Other station : No specification
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
22.7.1 Precautions common to each
software When monitoring the PLC CPU from a
ROBOT
personal computer
GOT interface required to use the FA When monitoring the PLC CPU from a personal
transparent function computer, the GOT and personal computer refresh the
18
Connect the personal computer, to which GX display slower.
CNC CONNECTION
Developer or any other relevant software has been
installed, to the RS-232 interface or USB interface of Software available for the FA transparent
the GOT. function
When multiple kinds of software are activated on one
When performing the FA transparent function, use
personal computer, only one of them is available for
either RS-232 interface or USB interface of the GOT.
Using both of them to perform the FA transparent
communications using the FA transparent function. 19
Do not concurrently perform any communications using
function concurrently is not allowed.
GOT MULTI-DROP
the FA transparent function.
CONNECTION
(Offline operation with each software is available)
RS-232
Also, do not perform communications with the GOT
(e.g. downloading project data) from GT Designer3
during execution of communications using the FA
transparent function. 20
USB
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
Conditions for suspending the FA transparent
GT11, GT10
function Online operation
GX Developer and so on
The FA transparent function is also suspended when
any of the following operations, which stop the GOT
monitor, is performed.
GT Designer3
21
Communication with GOT
Note that the FA transparent function will not be
MULTI-CHANNEL
stopped while using the optional function such as the When the FA transparent function is used in
Utility display or ladder monitor function. a bus connection
FUNCTION
• When project data is written/read, or when the OS is
(1) When multiple GOTs are bus-connected
written by GT Designer3*1
When multiple GOTs are bus-connected, the FA
• When the GOT is set up*1 transparent function can be used on each GOT. 22
• When no communication request (online monitor, However, note that the monitoring performance of each
etc.) has been issued from GX Developer for 45 GOT slows down as the number of monitoring GOTs
FA TRANSPARENT
minutes and personal computers increases.
PC
1st GOT 2nd GOT
RS-232 (2) GOT station monitoring function
When the FA transparent function is used in an
Ethernet connection, GOT station monitoring function
PC cannot be operated.
Therefore, in the cases of [no connection target], [PLC
USB
power OFF], etc., the monitoring of the GOT delays for
the timeout time.
PC
1st GOT
Monitoring
Online operation
GX Developer and so on
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the
GOT multi-drop connection system. When connecting to QCPU (A mode)
ROBOT
(1) Standard monitor OS installation, Communication When connecting to QCPU (A mode), set the PLC type
driver writing to "A4UCPU" or "QCPU (A mode)" on GX Developer.
When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop
When connecting the GOT and PC with RS- 18
connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and
232
CNC CONNECTION
communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3
(Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the The [Transmission speed] setting in [PC side I/F Serial
standard monitor OS and communication driver to the setting] in GX Developer or GX Works2 must be within
serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
the range supported by the connected CPU.
(2) Number of personal computers
Only one personal computer can be connected to the CPU connected Transmission speed
multi-drop connection system.
QCPU, FXCPU
9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 19
Only one personal computer 57600bps, 115200bps
GOT MULTI-DROP
QnACPU 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
CONNECTION
ACPU 9600, 19200bps
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
The monitoring performance slows down according to
the number of monitoring GOTs. While using FA (1) Monitoring performance of the GOT is temporarily
transparent function, the monitoring performance of the suspended.
GT11, GT10
whole multi-drop system decreases. As a result, (2) The GOT cannot respond to the touch switch operation
timeout error may occur in GOTs in the system.
and numerical/ascii inputs.
When connecting the GOT and personal (3) Writing to PLC results in a system alarm occurrence 21
computer with modem connection and displays the message, "315 Device writing error.
When using the FA transparent function with a modem, Correct device.".
MULTI-CHANNEL
the communication settings of compatible software, (4) While setting the monitor conditions, do not perform
modem connection tool, modem and GOT must be set any operation which makes the GOT restart (e.g.
FUNCTION
correctly to communicate with the GOT. If not correctly downloading project data, changing utility data).
set, the communication cannot be performed. Doing so may display a system alarm, "402
Communication timeout. Confirm communication
When connecting the GOT and personal pathway or modules." when the GOT restarts. 22
computer with serial or USB When the monitor conditions setting for the PLC CPU
has not been cancelled, reconnect GX Developer, GX
FA TRANSPARENT
When the operations shown below are executed, the
Works2 to cancel the setting.(An error may be output
operation is executed in the PLC. However, the display
when the monitor conditions setting is cancelled.)
on the GOT may stop temporarily or the display of FUNCTION
timeout may appear on GX Works2. (5) When the time check of GX Developer, GX Works2 is
set to 30 seconds or more in the monitor condition
Operation*1 Remark settings, the message "402 Communication timeout.
Applied for the following operations Confirm communication pathway or modules." may
• Remote Reset specifying the currently selected appear.
station.
Set the time check time of GX Developer, GX Works2
• Remote RUN to 30 seconds or less.
• Remote STOP
•
•
Remote PAUSE
Remote STEP-RUN
Applied for the following operations When exiting GX Developer, GX Works2
specifying all the station.
• Remote Reset For 45 seconds after GX Developer, GX Works2 has
• Remote latch clear
been exited, the GOT continues monitoring at the same
• Write clock data
speed as when the FA transparent function is working.
• CC IE Control diagnostics
(Link startup/stop)
―
• CC IE Field diagnostics
(Link startup/stop)
With no file
Corrective
Corrective Error messages operation being With no restore
Error messages action on GX
action on GOT on GX Developer executed on being
on GOT Developer and
side and GX Works2 Restore GX Developer ― executed,
GX Works2
or GX Works2, execute the file
File access Execute the re-execute the operation.
With no file
failure. file access restore.
operation on
Please retry. operation
358 PLC file GX Developer
again with the • SFC monitor file reading
access failure. or GX Works2,
PLC file system recipe in-
Confirm PLC turn ON the Corrective
error. Unable to process signal Corrective Error messages
drive.*1 trigger device Error messages action on GX
communicate in GOT system action on GOT on GX Developer
for the recipe on GOT Developer and
with PLC. information side and GX Works2
function again. GX Works2
OFF.
With no file With no special
• Reading TC monitor set value in the system monitor operation being module
function executed on monitor CPU
― GX Developer ― malfunction log
Corrective
Corrective Error messages or GX Works2, being read,
Error messages action on GX
action on GOT on GX Developer re-execute the execute the file
on GOT Developer and
side and GX Works2 file reading. operation.
GX Works2
With no file
No message is operation being With no TC set
displayed. executed on File access value being
(The TC set GX Developer failure. read, re-
value space is or GX Works2, Please retry. execute the file
blank.) re-execute the operation.
TC monitor.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
on GOT Developer and
side and GX Works2 (1) Timeout time settings
GX Works2
When the FA transparent function is used with a
ROBOT
With no file modem, it takes time for the initial communication with
With no file
operation being PLC and GX Works2 or GX Developer and a timeout
reading being
executed on
Read GX Developer ―
executed on
ladder edit,
may occur. In that case, set a longer time for the initial
communication timeout time for the GOT modem
18
or GX Works2,
execute the file connection tool.
CNC CONNECTION
re-execute the
operation.
file reading.
(2) Communication settings
With no file When the FA transparent function is used via modem,
With no file
operation being
writing being
the communication setting differs depending on the
executed on
executed on connection target of the GOT.
Write GX Developer ― Set as follows.
ladder edit,
or GX Works2,
re-execute the
execute the file Setting target 19
operation. Target
file writing. Setting GX GX GOT modem Communication
of the GT
GOT MULTI-DROP
item Works2 Developer connection settings of the
GOT Designer3
CONNECTION
When PLC write is failed while using the FA Data length 8bits
*1
7bits
*1 tool
8bits
GOT
CONNECTION FUNCTION
When this occurs, re-execute the PLC write from the Stop bit 1bit
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
same personal computer, or reset the PLC CPU. *1 Communication settings of GX Works2/GX Developer are
set automatically, and setting is not required.
Restrictions on GX Developer during backup/
GT11, GT10
restore execution When connecting the ACPU and motion
controller CPU (A series) in bus connection
(1) When reading/writing data from/to a PLC, monitoring a
PLC, and others are executed with GX Developer or
Do not execute write during RUN with GX Developer.
An error may occur in the PLC due to the write during
21
GX Works2 with the FA transparent function during the RUN, what may stop the PLC.
backup/restore execution with the GOT, the backup/
MULTI-CHANNEL
restore is stopped.
22.7.3 When using MT Developer,
FUNCTION
Check that reading/writing data from/to the PLC,
monitoring the PLC, and others are not executed with MT Works2
GX Developer or GX Works2 with the FA transparent
function. Execute the backup/restore with the GOT
again. When exiting MT Developer, MT Works2 22
For 45 seconds after GX Developer, MT Works2 has
(2) When the backup/restore is executed with the GOT
FA TRANSPARENT
while reading/writing data from/to a PLC, monitoring a been exited, the GOT continues monitoring at the same
PLC, and others are executed with GX Developer or speed as when the FA transparent function is working.
GX Works2 with the FA transparent function, errors FUNCTION
occur on GX Developer or GX Works2. When PLC write is failed while using the FA
The backup/restore with the GOT is correctly executed. transparent function
The execution of PLC write using the FA transparent
function may be failed due to some reasons such as
cable disconnection.
When this occurs, re-execute the PLC write from the
same personal computer, or reset the motion controller
CPU.
POINT
Cancelling the suspended GOT monitoring
immediately
To cancel the suspended (45 seconds) GOT
monitoring immediately after FA transparent is
executed, input "1" to device GS457.Then GOT
resumes monitoring.
If FA transparent is resumed even if "1" is already input
to device GS457, an error will occur on FR
Configurator.
For the details of the device, refer to the following
manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Manual
INDEX
ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING ................. 3-1 CNC connection
AnCPU type CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
Bus connection .................................................. 5-9 ......................................................................... 18-5
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Direct connection to CPU................................. 18-3
......................................................................... 13-6 Ethernet connection ......................................... 18-6
Computer link connection ................................ 7-13 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-9 ......................................................................... 18-4
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 CNC side settings .............................................. 18-16
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) Coaxial cable ....................................................... 1-29
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 Communication module ....................................... 1-17
AnSCPU type Computer link connection ...................................... 7-1
Bus connection ................................................ 5-12 Connectable Model List
Bus connection................................................... 5-2
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
......................................................................... 13-6
......................................................................... 13-2
Computer link connection ................................ 7-14
CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-2
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-9
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-2
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-2
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
CNC connection ............................................... 18-2
................................................................. 10-7,10-8
Computer link connection................................... 7-2
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-2
[B] Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-2
Built-in Ethernet port QCPU ................................ 8-11 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION................. 19-2
Bus connection ...................................................... 5-1 INVERTER CONNECTION.............................. 15-2
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
[C] ......................................................................... 10-2
C Controller module MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
Bus connection .................................................. 5-5 ........................................................................... 9-2
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection
................................................................. 13-6,13-7 function............................................................. 20-2
CC-Link connection (via G4)............................ 14-6 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-2
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection ...... 11-7 Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-2
Computer link connection .................................. 7-7 Connection Diagram
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-8
Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-11 CNC connection ............................................... 18-7
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) Computer link connection................................. 7-15
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-22
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-15
........................................................................... 9-7 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-21
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).... 13-1 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection
CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................... 14-1 function............................................................. 20-5
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection .......... 11-1 Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-8
CC-Link IE Field Network connection.................. 12-1 Connector conversion adapter............................. 1-18
CNC C70 Controller Type ...................................................... 1-6
Bus connection .................................................. 5-5 Conversion cables ............................................... 1-18
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
................................................................. 13-6,13-7 [D]
CC-Link connection (via G4)............................ 14-6
DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET................... 2-1
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection ...... 11-7 Device Range that Can Be Set
Computer link connection .................................. 7-7 CNC connection ............................................. 18-23
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-44
Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-12 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-8
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) Servo amplifier connection............................. 16-17
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 Direct connection to CPU ...................................... 6-1
Index-1
[E] [M]
Ethernet connection............................................... 8-1 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
............................................................................. 10-1
[F] MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
............................................................................... 9-1
FA transparent function ............................... 22-1,22-2 Motion controller CPU (A series)
FXCPU Bus connection......................................... 5-19,5-24
Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-10 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-9 ......................................................................... 13-6
Computer link connection......................... 7-13,7-14
[G] Direct connection to CPU ................................... 6-9
GOT connector specifications ............................. 1-26 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION .................... 19-1 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
GOT Side Settings ................................................................. 10-7,10-8
Bus connection................................................. 5-30 Motion controller CPU (Q series)
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Bus connection................................................... 5-5
......................................................................... 13-9 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-9 ......................................................................... 13-7
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-8 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-6
CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-8 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7
CNC connection ............................................... 18-8 Computer link connection................................... 7-7
Computer link connection................................. 7-19 Direct connection to CPU ........................... 6-6,6-20
Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-25 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-15 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
FA transparent function.................................. 22-36 ................................................................. 10-7,10-8
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-23 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-29 ........................................................................... 9-7
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ............................ 21-1
......................................................................... 10-9 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet ................. 21-42
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection function
........................................................................... 9-9 ............................................................................. 20-1
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ........................ 21-7
Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection [O]
function ............................................................ 20-7 Option unit ........................................................... 1-18
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-3
Servo amplifier connection............................. 16-12 [P]
Personal Computer Side Setting ....................... 22-39
[H] PLC Side Setting
HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM ....... 4-1 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
....................................................................... 13-12
[I] CC-Link IE Controller Network connection..... 11-10
CC-Link IE Field Network connection............. 12-10
I/F .......................................................................... 1-8
I/F communication setting.................................... 1-12 Computer link connection................................. 7-22
Inverter Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-20
FREQROL A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
......................................................................... 15-3 ....................................................................... 10-12
FREQROL A700/F700/F700P........................ 15-14 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
FREQROL E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/ ......................................................................... 9-11
F700PJ............................................................. 15-7 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-6
FREQROL E700 ............................................ 15-10 PLC Side Settings
INVERTER CONNECTION ................................. 15-1 CC-Link connection (via G4) .......................... 14-11
Inverter Side Settings ........................................ 15-31 Precautions
Bus connection................................................. 5-34
[L] CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
....................................................................... 13-39
LCPU CC-Link connection (via G4) .......................... 14-17
CC-Link connection.......................................... 14-7
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection..... 11-16
Computer link connection................................... 7-8
CC-Link IE Field Network connection............. 12-13
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-7
CNC connection ............................................. 18-23
List of Models that Can Be Monitored ............... 22-11
Index-2
Computer link connection ................................ 7-29 QSCPU
Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-28 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7
Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-49 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
FA transparent function.................................. 22-67 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-30 ................................................................. 10-7,10-8
INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-47 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
INDEX
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7
....................................................................... 10-26
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) [R]
......................................................................... 9-16 Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ...................... 21-41 Computer link connection................................... 7-7
Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6
function .......................................................... 20-11 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION ......... 17-8 ROBOT CONTROLLER
Servo amplifier connection............................. 16-45 Bus connection................................................... 5-5
PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
MONITORING ....................................................... 1-1 ................................................................. 13-6,13-7
CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-6
[Q] CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7
QCPU(A mode) Computer link connection................................... 7-7
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6
......................................................................... 13-6 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
Computer link connection .................................. 7-9 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 ................................................................. 10-7,10-8
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION ............. 17-1
QCPU(Q mode)
Bus connection .................................................. 5-5 [S]
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ....................... 1-18
................................................................. 13-6,13-7 Servo amplifier
CC-Link connection (via G4)............................ 14-6 MELSERVO-J2M Series .................................. 16-4
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection ...... 11-7 MELSERVO-J2-Super Series .......................... 16-3
CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-7 MELSERVO-J3 Series ..................................... 16-5
Computer link connection .................................. 7-7 Servo amplifier connection .................................. 16-1
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Setting connected equipment ................................ 1-4
Ethernet connection ................................... 8-7,8-11 Setting of connection conversion adapter.......... 19-29
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ..... 19-24
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side ......................... 16-14
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) Station number setting
........................................................................... 9-7 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-43
QnACPU type MELSERVO connection................................. 16-16
Bus connection .................................................. 5-9 System Configuration
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Bus connection................................................... 5-5
......................................................................... 13-6 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
Computer link connection ................................ 7-10 ......................................................................... 13-6
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-8 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-6
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-7
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 CNC connection ............................................... 18-3
QnASCPU type Computer link connection................................... 7-7
Bus connection ................................................ 5-12 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
......................................................................... 13-6 FA transparent function.................................. 22-26
Computer link connection ................................ 7-11 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-14
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-8 INVERTER CONNECTION.............................. 15-3
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ......................................................................... 10-7
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
........................................................................... 9-7
Index-3
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ........................ 21-4
Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection
function ............................................................ 20-2
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-2
Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-3
[T]
Terminating resistors of GOT .............................. 1-30
[W]
What is Multi-channel Function? ......................... 21-2
Index-4
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-A First edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.01B
REVISIONS - 1
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result
of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
REVISIONS - 2
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center
may differ.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major
accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications,
incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also
be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative
outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at our discretion.
In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that
the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is
not required.
GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
SH(NA)-080898ENG-P
Series
Connection Manual
(Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE)
MODEL SW1-GTD3-U(CON1)-ELE
MODEL 1D7MC9
CODE
SH(NA)-080898ENG-P(1302)MEE
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// info@mitsubishi-automation.com /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com